•^■■v

:^^^.!//^MJ s~J/r/m'^i/r7M\^

4.

HARVARD UNIVERSITY.

LIBRARY

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY
GIFT OF

Yl i^o<^vtJu>^ ? 7 \°[^{p.

i^

M^i^:^^

^^

IP

M

;S

m

^

1/

^^3

^^\v

■.J

^fe

''•1^^

'--"^

[g^l.

^

B

^-ca^

v^

/^

n

U

x.4^^t^iy2;^;4^fci^

j^a

fi

^^

H

&s

3

K " '

*

^^^1^

|r^;-^

-S^^
ij^

yu

^pfe|

^

ci^^ji||' ^i-' ^':i^

^

%^

^^^

^&^

^^

MP

15

P^

Wsi

t^^

^,

MM

^pH
^^^

^&«

fiM

jg

M

^^^

it

hS^^

VxS'

M

2^ , .

K^i

^M

&

L-

^K

w^^

w

WJIl

5

fe -^^

ta

^:^

^^^'Jn

Sb

^

/^^[^^^

1

'^l^^

^21^

Hg

p

^^

\i^^i//?i ^^o\ wJnK

fe_

^^mjl'

fe

^S^

S^^

9

l^^jl^f^l^^jl^^x • 0

i^ii^^lj^

^

'--^^J^vyL

^S^^^M

S^^£.4^''^

^^]^£i^^

^^^M^§^^

&0S

^^^smsm&s^

^^Sm

fei

^JP

1

^^^K^^^

1

MS

W^

^^^^M

^H^^L

^P

^

W^^^^

few

M

SH^^^^^

^1

l^^p

M^

^

^^^S^^SH^Si

^te^^M^i

^s

.1

fei^

"~^^Ji-^::^i^^^

P^^

^^^^^^01

S

i_

o^^^3^|

l/jj^^M/Ji.

^^£lii:^Mty&ti^^

M^M^^^

^

^^

^^^^

0B

^^

^^S^^S

^^^^^^^

^^

^^

^^

^^&

1

P^P^r

~i- ^' -i"-;^;^

s

'^1/^^%

^

^^

PK

p^

^M^^E.^^.

Hk

^^^^M.-'j'-

^^E^

^H

^H|3

^^^^;//ti^

1

^^^^^^S

^^

^^fe

p^^^

g^

M

^^^

]^^^

^^^^^^P

^^P

E^'

'^3

^M

^^^S

»

^^M^^^E-^

^^

^^/^j^

S

^Sj

^m

^^S^^^Si

^Ml

Wjft^?^^^^^

0

31

^S

^
^L;

^M^^^Sf''^

NOV 1 1 1936

BOOK

BLACK BASS

COMPRISING ITS COMPLETE

SCIENTIFIC AND LIFE HISTORY

TOGETHER WITH A PRACTICAL TREATISE ON

ANGLING AND FLY FISHING

AND A FULL L.-SCRIPTION OF

TOOLS, TAOKLE AND IMPLEMEI^TS

JAMES A. HENSHALL, M.D

/ «;«, Sir, a brother of the Angle."— \z\hK Walton

1[uHi| |llu$lrai0tt

CINCINNATI
ROBERT CLARKE & CO

1889

Copyright, 1881,
J. A. HENSHALL.

TO THE

CUYIER CLUB

OF
CINCINNATI, OHIO,

FOR ITS PRAISEWORTHY EFFORTS IN BEHALF OF THE PRESERVATION OF
FISH AND OAME; AND FOR THE GREAT BENEFITS IT HAS BE-
STOWED I'PON THE ANGLER, THE SPORTSMAN,
AND THE NATURALIST,

THIS BOOK IS

RESPECTFULLY DEDICATED

BY

THE AUTHOR.

PREFACE.

This book owes its origin to a long-cherished desire on the
part of the author, to give to the Black Bass its proper place
among game fishes, and to create among anglers, and the public
generally, an inter/^st in a fish that has never been so fully ap-
preciated as its merits deserve, because of the want of suitable
tackle for its capture, on the one hand, and a lack of information
regarding its habits and economic value on the other.

The Book of the Black Bass is of an entii-ely practical
nature, both as regards its subject-matter and its illustrations.
It has been written more with a view to instruct, than to amuse
or entertain the reader; he will, therefore, look in vain, between
its covers, for those rhetorical flights, poetic descriptions or en-
tertaining accounts and pleasing illustrations of the pleasures and
vicissitudes of angling, which are usually found in works of this
cliaracter. Nor is it to be regarded, on the other hand, as a book
of a purely scientific nature — far from it — for the author has
written as an angler rather than as a naturalist. With these
apologies, I trust the reader will not be disappointed in its perusal.

Some of its chapters are based on articles heretofore con-
tributed by the author to Forest and Stream, the Chicago Field,
and other journals, which have since been re-written, enlarged
and elaborated.

Tiie full-page illustrations of the two species of Black
Bass were drawn from life by Dr. E. R. Copeland, and are faith-
ful representations in every particular. It was the original in-
tention of the author to have had these illustrations lithographed

(V)

VI PREFACE.

in colors; but the fact that the species vary so greatly in color-
ation in diffei'ent sections, rendered this inexpedient, and the
design was abandoned.

In the technical portion of the book the author has a\ ailed
himself of all published information on the subject of the Micro-
pteri, for which he has given due credit in the proper places. But
I desire particularly to express my profound obligation to Pi'of
Theo. Gill, for permission to use his valuable writings, and like-
wise to him, Profs. Spencer F. Baird and G. Brown Goode, for
information freely given, and for excerpts from rare books in the
library of the Smithsonian Institution. I also tender my sincere
thanks and grateful acknowledgments to Prof. David S. Jordan,
for his uniform kindness, encouragement and advice, for the loan
of books, and for the cordial, kindly and courteous interest he
has manifested in me and my book.

I am aware that the change made in the scientific names of
the Black Bass species, Avill be looked upon by many, at first, as
unwise and injudicious; but, under the circumstances, I could
not have done otherwise than to restore the names rightfully be-
longing to them, inasmuch as by so doing it clears up the former
confusion attending the nomenclature of the species, and renders
plain the causes of the same. Moreover, as the names Micropterus
for the genus, and dolomieu and salmoides for the species, are
the first ever bestowed, in each instance, their adoption will be
not only an act of justice, but of expediency, for as we can not
go back of them, it sets the matter at rest, forever.

JAMES A. HENSHALL.

Cincinnati, July, 1861.

TABLE OF C0NTE:NTS.

PART FIRST.

TERMINOLOGY, MORPHOLOGY, AND PHYSIOLOGY.

CHAPTER I. — Scientific History of the Black Bass — Views of La?
C(5pede, Rafinesque, LeSueur, Cuvier, DeKay, Agassiz, Gill, Cope,
Jordan, et al., ....... 11.

CHAPTER II. — Nomenclature and Morphology— Generic and specific
descriptions of all authors, ..... 65.

CHAPTER III. — General and Special Features of the Black Bass, 135.

CHAPTER IV.— Coloration of the Black Bass, . . . 145.

CHAPTER V. — Geographical Distribution, . . . 154.

CHAPTER VI. — Habits of the Black Bass — Spawning and Hatching,
Food and Growth, Hibernation, etc., .... 162.

CHAPTER VII. — Intelligence and Special Senses. Seeing, Hear-
ing, etc., ........ 175.

CHAPTER VIII.— On Stocking Inland Waters with Black Bass, 185.

PART SECOND.

TOOLS, TACKLE AND IMPLEMENTS.

CHAPTER IX.— Fishing Rods— Natural Rods— Wooden Rods— Origin
of Split Bamboo Rod — Bait Rods — Minnow Rods — Henshall Rod —
Cuvier Club Rod — Welles Rod — Home-made Rods — How to make
Split Bamboo Rods- Flj'-Rods, etc., .... 195.

CHAPTER X.— Fishing Reels— Click Reels— Multiplying Reels, 237.

CHAPTER XI.— Fishing Lines— How Lines are made— Reel Lines for
Bait Fishing — Reel Lines for Fly-Fishing — Hand Lines, etc., 252.

CHAPTER XII. — Silkworm Gut — How Silkworm Gut is made — Leaders
or Casting Lines — Snells or Snoods — Knots, . . . 270.

CHAPTER XIII. —Fish Hooks— How Hooks are made— Various kinds
of Hooks— Barbless Hooks, ..... 283.

CHAPTER XIV.— Artificial Flies —Various Kinds of Bass Flies-
Hackles— Winged Flies, etc., ..... 294.

(vii)

Vlll TABLE OF CONTENTS.

CHAPTER XV.— Aetificial Baits— Trolling Baits— Spoon Baits— Arti-
ficial Minnows— Artificial Insects— The Bob, etc., . . 307.

CHAPTER XVI.— Natural Baits— Minnows — Cra\v-fi.sh — Helgram-
mite— Gra.ssboppers— Crickets— Shrimps— Frogs, etc., . 318.

CHAPTER XVII.— Miscellaneous Implements — Fly-Books — Creels-
Landing Nets— Minnow Seines and Nets— Floats— Sinkers— Swiv-
els—Clearing Rings— Disgorgcrs— Minnow Buckets— Wading Pants
and Stockings — Rod and Reel Cases, etc., . . . 327.

PART THIRD.

ANGLING AND FLY-FISHING.

CHAPTER XVIII.— The Philosophy of Angling— As an Art, 349.

CHAPTER XIX. — Conditions Governing the Biting of Fish — Influ-
ences of Wind, Weather and Water— Rain and Sunshine— Thunder
and Lightning— Changes of the Moon— Signs of the Zodiac— Day
and Season, etc., ....... 356.

CHAPTER XX.— The Black Bass as a Game Fish— The Coming Game
Fish of America— The Extinction of the Brook Trout, . 377.

CHAPTER XXL— Fly Fishing — Tackle— Rigging the Cast — Casting-
How to Strike— Playing— Landing— How, when and where to Fish
with the Artificial Fly— General Instructions and Advice, . 387.

CHAPTER XXII.— Bait Fishing— Casting the Minnow— Tackle— Rig-
ging the Cast — How to Cast — Striking— Playing — Landing — Advi-
sory Hints and Remarks, etc., ..... 409,

CHAPTER XXIIL— Still Fishing— Tackle and Implements— Bait and
Baiting — On Lake and River — General Instructions — Management
of the Fish under various exigencies, etc., . . . 428.

CHAPTER XXIV.— Trolling— Trolling with the Rod— With Flies—
With the ]\Iinnow— With the Fly Spoon— With the Hand Line—
With the Spoon Bait— With the Artificial Minnow, etc. 433.

CHAPTER XXV. — Skittering and Bobbing — Tackle and Implements —
Where to "Skitter"— How to "Bob," etc., . . . 440.

CHAPTER XXVI.— Concluding Remarks — Parting Advice— Care of
Rods and Tackle, etc., ...... 444.

PART FIRST.

TERMINOLOGY, MORPHOLOGY

AND

PHYSIOLOGY.

BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

CHAPTER I.

SCIENTIFIC HISTORY OF THE BLACK BASS.

(MiCROPTERUS.)

" For my name and memory, I leave it to men's charitable speeches, to
foreign nations, and to the next ages."— Bacon.

The scientific history of the Bhick Bass is a most unsat-
isfactory one. This is owing to a train of accidental cir-
cumstances, and to the neglect of thorough investigation
of its earliest history, as recorded by Lacepede, the re-
nowned French naturalist, in his great work, "Histoiro
Naturelle des Poissons."*

It will be well, perhaps, before entering upon the minu-
tiae of the subject, to present a brief synopsis of the scien-

* "The great work on the natural history of fish, by the Count Lace-
pede, was the next publication after that of Bloch upon general Ichthy-
ology. . . . It is not, like others in different branches of Zoology, a
servile copy of the Linnsean divisions, but numerous others are defined
for the first time: and when we look back to what systematic ichthyology
was before, and what it became by the labors of Lacepede, no one can
in fairness deny but that a great and important advance in this science
had been efTected. No naturalist can hope to achieve more than this,
however great may be his abilities ; and we do not, therefore, understand
upon what ground so much censure has recently been cast upon the
works of this distinguished Frenchman by some of his own country-
men."— SwAiNSON, Not. Hist, and Qass. of Fishes, I., 58, 1838.

(11)

12 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

tific history of the Black Bass, as heretofore understood
and accepted in this country, from its first description by
Lucepede down to the present time.

This representative American fish was first brought to
the light of science in a foreign land, and under the most
unlavorable auspices. Its scientific birth was, like Mac-
duff's, untimely ; it was, unlia})pilY, born a monstrosity ;
its baptismal names were, consequently, incongruous, and
its sponsors were, most unfortunately, foreign naturalists.

It has been, heretofore, considered by American natural-
ists that the first scientific description of a Black Bass was
that published by. Lacepede, about the year 1800, in the
work just referred to. This description was founded upon
a drawing of a Black Bass, and accompanying manuscript
notes sent to him by M. Bosc, from the vicinity of Charles-
ton, South Carolina, with the local name of "trout," or
"trout-perch." This figure, and its accompanying de-
scription, were said to be so uncertain and inaccurate, that
it has been considered very doubtful which species of
Black Bass was intended to be represented. However,
Lacepede named it Labrus suhaoides {Labre salmo'ide) —
the "trout-like" Labrus {icrass(') — in accordance with its
general appearance and vernacular name.

It has been held by American ichthyologists that it was
after this, in 1801-2, that Lacepede received his fij-st ex-
ample of a Black Bass. This was a fine adult specimen
of the small-mouthed species, but, unfortunately, it was an
abnormal specimen, with a deformed dorsal fin, the last
rays having been bitten off and torn loose from the others
when the fish was young. In conformity with this acci-
dental peculiarity, Lacepede named it Micro pie riLS dolo-
mieu — Dolomieu's "small-fiu " — he supposing that the little

SCIENTIFIC HISTORY OF THE BLACK BASS. 13

fin was a permanent and distinctive feature, and of generic
value; he accordingly created the new o^enus Mi croptcrus,
and named the type in honor of his friend Doloniieu.

In 1817, Rafinesque,* another French naturalist, then
living in America, procured specimens of the small-mouthed
Bass in the region of Lake Champlain, which he named Bodl-
anns achigan, from the Canadian vulgar name of I'achic/an.
He either failed to recognize^ or repudiated, Lacepede's
former descriptions of Labrus sahnoides and Mlcropterus
dolomieu. During the next few years, from 1818 to 1820,
while fishing in the Ohio River and its tributaries, in
Kentucky, Rafinesque took and described specimens of
the small-mouthed Black Bass, at different stages of its
growth, as CaUiurus punctulafus, Lepomis trifasciata, Lepo-
mis Jlexuolaris, Lepomis salmonea, Lepomis notata, and
Etkeostoma calliara, and specimens of the large-mouthed
Bass he described as Lejjomis jjalUda.

In 1822, Le Sueur, also a French naturalist, while in this
country described and named specimens, of various ages,
of the suiall-mouthed Black Bass, as Cichla variabilis,
(this name was never published by Le Sueur, but specimens
sent by him and thus labeled, 'are still preserved in the
Museum* D'Historie Naturelle at Paris,) Cichla faxriafa.

* "If I have dwelt too long uijon this subject, I hope the benevolent
and candid reader will excuse me; it has originated in my desire to do
adequate, though tardy, justice to one whose whole life has been devoted to
science, and who has been singularly unfortunate in his worldly concerns;
who, notwithstanding his eccentricities, has a kind and benevolent heart;
and whose labors have never been appreciated as I think they deserve.
But for this, M. Rafinesque would not, in advancing life, have to contend
with pecuniary difficulties, from which a small pension from the Ameri-
ican Government, proverbially generous to her scientific sons, would set
him free." — SwAiNSoN, Nat. Hist, and Class, of Fishes, I., 62, 1838.

14 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

Cichla ohiensis and Cichla minima, and the large-monthed
Bass from Florida as Cichla floridana, thus dissenting from,
or entirely ignoring, Rafinesque.

In 1828, the great Cuvier and his coadjutor, Valenci-
ennes, received from Lake Huron a specimen of the large-
mouthed Black Bass, and which, as in the case of the first
small-mouthed Bass sent to France, was an abnormal or
monstrous specimen, having likewise a deformed dorsal fin.
In this instance, the last three or four rays of the spinous
dorsal fin were torn off, thus leaving, apparently, two sep-
arate and distinct dorsal fins, the first composed of six
spines, and the second of two spines and twelve or thirteen
soft rays. This specimen was sent to them under the local
name of "Black Bass," or "Black Perch;" and not sus-
])ecting the mutilation of the specimen, they named it
Huro nigricans — the " Black Huron."

In the following year, 1829, Cuvier and Valenciennes
obtained two specimens (the largest of which, at least, was
a large-mouthed Bass) from New York, under the name
of " Growler," and four specimens of the small-mouthed
Bass from the Wabash River, in Indiana, all of which
they identified with Lacepede's Labrus salmoides, and Le
Sueur's Cichla variabilis, and which they named Grystcx
salmoides; subsequently Cuvier and Valenciennes announced
that Lacepede's Micropierus dolomicu was also identical
with their Gri/stcs salmoides.

In 1842, Dr. DeKay, in his " Fishes of New York," after
reproducing Cuvier and Valenciennes' figures and descrij)-
tions of Huro nigricans and Grijsles salmoides, described
specimens of the small-mouthed Black Bass under two ad-
ditional names : Centrarchus fasciatus and Centrarchus oh-
SGurus^ claiming the latter as a new species.

SCIENTIFK' HISTORY OF THE KLACK BASS. 15

In the same year, Dr. Kirtland adopted Centrarchus
faftciatu.-i as synonYinoiis with Lc Sueur's and Rafinesque's
numerous descriptions of the small-mouthed species.

In 1850, Prof. Agassiz recognized the generic identity
of the former descriptions of the Black Bass by Le Sueur,
Cuvier and Valenciennes, and DeKay, and retained the
name Grystes for the same.

In 1854, Prof Agassiz obtained specimens of the large-
mouthed Bass from the Tennessee River, near Pluntsville,
Ala., which he named, provisionally, Grystes nobilis. In
the same year, Messrs. Baird and Girard described speci-
mens of the same species from Texas, as Grystes mieeensis.

In 1857, Dr. Garlick described the small-mouthed Black
Bass as Grystes nigricans, and the large-mouthed species
as Grystes megastomn.

In 1858, Girard described the large-mouthed Bass as
Dioplites miecensis.

In 1860, Prof. Theo. Gill restored Rafinesque's earliest
name for the small-mouthed form of the Black Bass, call-
ing it Lepomis achigan ; which, however, he changed in
1866 to MiGropterus achigan; and still later, in 1873,
he adopted Lacepede's name, Micropterus salmoides, for
the same species.

In 1865, Prof. Cope named the large-mouthed Bass, 3ficrop-
terns nigricans, which name was also adopted by Prof. Gill in
1866.

In 1874, when, apparently, the oldest generic and specific
names had been restored ; after Prof. Gill's masterly review
of the species in the previous year (when the tangled web
had been, seemingly, straightened), when dry land was
thought to have been reached at last; — then came the
French naturalists, again. MM. Vaillant and Bocourt,

16 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

of PariS; instead of profiting by the experience of their
predecessors in this matter, tried to show that we had four
species of Black Bass, where but two really existed, and
this in spite of the fact that the Gallic misnomer of the
type species still existed as a terrible warning to them,
of the folly of indulging their national love of novelty
where so grave a matter as science was concerned. They
proposed the title Dioplites variabilis for the small-mouthed
form, and Dioplites treculii, Dioplites nuecensis and Dio-
jjlitcs salmoides, for the large-mouthed form, imder several
unimportant varietal, or individual, diiferences.

In 1876, Professor G. Brown Goode restored Le Sueur's
name, and called the large-mouthed Black Bass Micropterus
floridanus.

In 1877, Professor David S. Jordan restored the still
older name of Rafinesque for this species, and with the
full concurrence of Professor Theo. Gill, designated it
Micropterus pa Hid us.

In 1878, Professor Jordan divided the small-mouthed
species into two geographical varieties, distinguishing the
Northern form as 31. salmoides var. achigan, and the
Southern form as 31. salmoides var. salmoides.

Finally, MM. Vaillant and Bocourt (Miss. Sci. an
Mexique : ined.) adopted the generic title 3IicropteruSy
but recognized four provisional species: 31. dolomieu and
Jf. variabilis for the small-mouthed form and 31. salmoides
and 3L nuecensis for the Inrgo-mouthed form, under cer-
tain, evidently, unimportant variations. As they have not
yet published these names, they may conclude to suppress
or cliange some or all of them.

Thus, it will be seen that, from the first, the nomen-
clature of the Black Bass species had been involved in

SCIENTIFIC HISTORY OF THE BLACK BASS. 17

great doubt, uncertainty, and confusion ; and M'hile much
of the complexity liad been, apparently, dissipated, there
still existed among ichthyologists some diiference of opinion
as to the proper differentiation of the species. Even the
generally accepted nomenclnture of the past few years —
unfortunately and unavoidably established, as it was, on
an insecure basis — was liable, at any time, to fall to the
ground, while the said differences among the authorities
existed.

It was the earnest hope of the Avriter, however, that the
generic and specific names and distinctions as proposed by
Professors Gill and Jordan would be found correct, and
their position prove impregnable ; and that, in good time,
all naturalists, to avoid further confusion, would finally
agree to accept and adopt the same, and so set the vexed
question at rest forever; for these eminent ichthyologists
bad really investigated the matter more thoroughly and
intelligently, and had had larger opportunities and greater
facilities for doing so than all other ichthyologists com-
bined. They labored faithfully and well, with strict fair-
ness, and, with the light afforded them, in perfect accord-
ance with the established principles of nomenclature, and
had, at least, placed the anglers of America under a lasting
debt of gratitude.

But these very differences among the authorities showed
that the end was not yet ; that the problem had not been
solved ; that there was still something hidden that should
be brought to the light ; some flaw in the chain that
would eventually destroy it; some stone in the foundation
that would yet crumble and work the destruction of the
superimposing pile.

And, now, with much hesitation, and I hope with be-

18 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

coming modesty (for T do not wish to be thought presump-
tuous), and with feelings akin to regret — much like that of
tearing down an old homestead endeared by many tender
associations and fond remembrances, to make room for a
more substantial structure — but at the same time feeling
that I am doing an act that is simply right and just, I
feel constrained to make a radical change in the nomen-
clature of the Black Bass as it is at present understood
in America.

But in order to arriv^e at a clear understanding of the
subject, I propose, in the first place, to present to the
angler, as well as to the student of ichthyology, all that is
really worth knowing of the scientific literature of the
Black Bass; in doing which it becomes a matter of neces-
sity, as well as of choice, to draw liberally upon the
writing's of Professors Gill and Jordan.

The following disquisitional resume is from Professor
Gill's admirable monograph, entitled, "On the Species of
the Genus Micropterus (Lac.) or Grystes (Auct.),"* and is
the most able, concise and original paper ever written upon
the subject; and, so far as it goes, presents the whole
matter clearly and succinctly, and according to the views
of most of our best naturalists:

The nomenclature of the species has become involved in much
doubt, and, if we may judge from the literature and the distinctions
insisted on by Prof. Agassiz and others,-)- at least four or five species

*0n the Species of the Genus Micropterus (Lac.) or Grystes (Auct.).
By Theodore Gill, of Washington, D. C. <^ Proceedings of the American
Association for the Advancement of Science, XXII, 1873, pp. B. 55-72.

t In the nominal (1) "Grystes fasciatus Agass.," it is said, " the scales are a
little smaller, but of the same form as in (2) G. salmoides ; the radiating strijB
are perhaps less marked. They cover the opercular apparatus and the cheeks.

SCIENTIFIC HISTORY OF THE BLACK BASS. 10

are supposed to exist in our waters; but it is evident from a perusal
of the descriptions that the distinctions hitherto made are of very
doubtful value.

Having been requested by the United States Commissioner of
Fish and Fisheries (Prof. S. F. Baird) to determine the number of
species represented in the fresh waters of the United States, and the
earliest names respectively assigned to them, all the specimens in the
collections of the Smithsonian Institution were examined, as well
as a large series from many other localities kindly transmitted for
that purpose by the Museum of Comparative Zoology (Prof. Agassiz,
Director). Study and comparison of those specimens clearly demon-

but at this latter place their [the scales^] smaller size is quite remarkable; this
latter character is very striking wlien we compare both species." — Agass.,
Lake Superior, p. 296. — The italicized portion (not italicized in original)
indicates that the G. salmoides Agass. was a large-mouthed form. (3) "Huro
nigricans Cuv. is another species of the loAver Canadian lakes, which occurs
also in Lake Champlain .... I shall, therefore, call it in future Grystes
nigricans .... Dr. DeKay describes it as Centrarchus fasciatus. altliough
lie copies also Cvivier's descriiDtion and figure of Huro nigricans, but without
perceiving their identity." Agass., Lake Sui^erior, p. 191.— Huro nigricans
Cuv. and Val. and Centrarchus fasciatus DeKay are unquestionably distinct,
the former being the large-mouthed si^ecies, and the latter the small-
mouthed one. It is probable, however (thus giving him the benefit of the
doubt), that Prof. Agassiz based his idea of the species on the large-mouthed
form.

"The species of this group [Grystes Cuv.] are indeed very difficult to char-
acterize. Thej-diflTer chiefly in the relative size of their scales, the presence
or absence of teeth on the tongue, .... etc. There are, besides, marked
differences between the young and adults. These circumstances render it
Impossible to characterize any one species without comparative descriptions
and figures. (4) The species from Huntsville [Ala.] . . . differs equally from
[tr. fasciatus Agass. and G. " sabiioneus " Agass.J. I call this species pro-
visionally Grystes nobilis Agass." — Am. Jour. Sci. and Arts (2), xvii, p. 297,
298, 1854.

Prof. Agassiz thus recognized four species (besides indeterminate ones),
viz : —

1. G. fasciatus Agass. = J)/, salmoides.

2. G. salmoides Agass. (not Cuv. and Val. nor G. salmoneus Agass., 1854) =
M. nigricans.

3. G. nigricans Agass. = ^f. nigricans f

4. G. nobilis Agass. = M. nigricans.

Judging by the comparisons, Prof. Agassiz had in view, in 1854, in the
"G. salmoneus," the true J/, salmoides.

Baird and Girard added to these species, also, in 1854, (5) their G. nuecensis =
{M. nigricans). r

20 BOOK OP THE BLACK BASS.

strated that two perfectly distinct types of the genus were repre-
sented in most of the waters of the cismontane (east of the Rocky
Mountain) slope of the United States, except those of the New
England States and the Atlantic seaboard of the Middle States. In
limitation of this general statement it need only at present be re-
marked that but one of those types, the small-mouthed, appears to
have been an original inhabitant of the hydrographic basin of the
Ohio River.

In order to obtain as clear and unprejudiced ideas as possible
respecting the species, the specimens from all the localities were in
the first place examined without reference to their names but only
with the view to ascertain their relations to each other. This ex-
amination confirmed the previous experience of the author for a
more limited range, and led to the combination of all into the two-
groups just referred to : between these many differences existed,
but none were discovered which permitted further definite sub-
division. The differences thus ascertained may be tabulated as
follows :

Contrasted Differential Characteristics,
Small-Mouthed. Large-Mouthed.

Scales of trunk

Small {e. g. lat. line, 12-15; be- Moderate {e. g. lat. line, G5-70;

tween lateral line, and back, 11 between lateral line and back,
rows). 1\ or 8 rows).

Scales on nape and breast

Much smaller than those of Scarcely (on nape), or not

sides. much (on breast) smaller than

those of sides.

Scales of cheeJcs

Minute (e. g., between orbit Moderately small (e. 7., between

and preoperculum, about 17 rows orbit and preoperculum, about 10

in an oblique line and about 9 rows in an oblique line and about

in a horizontal one). 5-6 in a horizontal one).

SCIENTIFIC HISTORY OF THE BLACK BASS.

21

Scales of inferoperculum uniserial

Covering only about half the
width of tlic bone.

Covering the entire width of
the bone.

None.

Scales of preopercular limb

Developed in an imperfect row
(e. g., 3-5 in number).

Scales on dorsal

Developed as a deep sheath (in-
volving last spine) of small scales
differentiated from those on the
back, and v/ith series advancing
high up the membrane behind
each ray (except last two or
three).

Developed as a low (obsolete)
shallow sheath, and with series
ascending comparatively little
on membrane behind the rays
(none behind the last five or
six).

Scales on anal

Ascending high behind each
ray.

None (or very few).

Mouth

Moderate.

Large.

Siijiramaxillary
Ending considerably in front of Extending considerably behind

hinder margin of orbit (about
under hinder border of pupil).

the posterior margin of orbit.

Hays

Dorsal, articulated, 13.
Anal III, ]0-ll.
Pectoral, MG-M7.

Dorsal, articulated, 12 (I. 11).
Anal III, 10.
Pectoral, 1-14 (M3).

Dorsal Jin in front of soft 2'>ortion

Little depressed, the ninth spine Much depressed, the ninth spine

being only about a half shorter being only about a fourth as long |

than the longest (3, 4, 5) and a as the longest and half as long

fourth shorter than the tenth. as the tenth.

22 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

Thus numerous and well marked are tlie differences between the
two groups ; within the limits of neither of these groups were found
differences in the slightest degree comparable with them, or that
suggested the differentiation of the forms into distinctly marked
subordinate types: in other words, no differences were found of
specific value, and, although a renewed examination may possibly
result in the discovery of some, their value must be very slight in
comparison with those distinguishing the two groups indicated:
these groups may therefore be considered as specific. The question
now arises. What are the names to which they are respectively en-
titled? In order to ascertain this, it is advisible to enter quite fully
into the very complicated history of the genus. Bearing strictly in
mind the differential features of the two species, we may now
proceed to an analysis of the successive descriptions of forms of the
genus and endeavor to refer them to their respective types.

The first scientific allusions to any species of the genus are found
in the great Avork on fishes by Comte de Lacepede.*

In 1800, in the third volume (pj). 716, 717), Lacepede introduced
into his system, under the name Labrus salmoides, a species based on
a description and figure sent him by Bosc fi-om South Carolina,
which, according to Cuvier and Valenciennes, relate to the small-
mouthed type.

In 1801, in the fourth volume (p. 325), Lacepede described, as a
new generic type, named Micropterus Dolomieu,^ a fish concerning
which no particulars were given as to habitat or station, and which
could not have been positively identified from the description : the
original specimen having been preserved, however, Cuvier and Val-
enciennes ascertained that it belonged to the genus Grystes, and was.

* Lacepede (Bernard Germain Etienne de la Ville-sur-Illon, Comte de).
Histoire Naturelle des Poissons, . . . Paris, . . . [179S-1S03, 4to, 5 v].
t" 121e genre. Les Micropteres.

" Un ou plusieurs aiguillons, et point de dentelure aux opercules ; un bar-
billon, ou point de barbillon aux machoires ; deux nageoires dorsalos; la
seconde tres-basse, tres-courte, et comprenant au plus cinq rayons.
" Espece. Le Microptere Dolomieu.

" Caracttres. Dix rayons aiguillonn^s et sept rayons articul^s ft la premiere
nageoire du dos; quatre rayons a la seconde; deux rayons aiguillonngs et
onze rayons articulfis ft la nageoire de I'anus ; la caudate en croissant ; un ou
deux aiguillons ft la seconde piece de chaque opercule." [Br. 5; p. 16 ; v. i, 5;
c. 171.

SCIENTIFIC HISTORY OF THE BLACK BASS. 23

in fact, identical with the species described by Lacepede from the
notes and figures of Bosc as Labrus salmoides.

In 1817, C. S. Eafinesque* described a form of the same genus
under the name Bodianns achigan Avhich evidently belonged to the
small-mouthed type : while most of the characters noted are common
to all the species (or erroneous), the number of rays (D. IX I, 14 f;
A. Ill, 11 J) and the absence of scales on the x>reoperculum (gill
covers "all scaly except the second") indicate the pertinence of the
species to the group in question : the number of rays (15) attributed
to the pectoral does not confirm this identification, but the number
(admitting even the accuracy — very doubtful — in the case of the
very careless observer) is within the range of variation of the type.
Tlie exact locality from which Eafinesque derived his types was not
si)ecified, but they were probably observed by him at Lake Cham-
plain, where he had shortly before collected (See Am. Month. Mag.
and Crit. Rev., ii. p. 202, Jan., 1818).

In 1820, the same naturalist described, in his way, various speci-
mens which appear, almost Avithout doubt, to be referrible to the
same type. These descriptions appeared originally in the "Western
Review and Miscellaneous Magazine," published at Lexington, Ken-
tucky, and were reprinted (from the same types) for the " Ichthyo-
logia Ohiensis." § No less than six generic and subgeneric names
appear to have been based primarily on a species of this type and as
many as seven nominal species, viz.:

*Rafinesque-Schmaltz (Constantine Samuel). IMuseum of Natural
Sciences. By C. S. Rafluesque, Esq. First Decade of New North American
Fishes. <The American Monthly Magazine and CriticaJ Review. Vol. li,
New York, . . . 1817 (pp. 120, 121).

t " The dorsal depressed in the middle and with twenty-five rays, whereof
ten are spinescent." It is assumed that the last or double branched ray is
counted as two.

X " Anal fin with fifteen rays whereof three are spinescent and short." The
last ray was also in this case probably counted as two.

§ Ichthyologia Ohiensis, or Natural History of the Fishes inhabiting the
River Ohio and its tributary streams. . . . Lexington, Kentucky ; printed for
the author by W. G. Hunt. (Price one dollar.) 1820. (Pp. 26-36). Reprinted
(with separate pagination and adjustment for form) from the Western Re-
view and Miscellaneous Magazine, Lexington, Ky. Vols, i, ii and iii (Dec.
1819 to Nov., 1820).

24 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

Genera and Subgeneea.

1. Calliurus (n. g.).

2. LeiJomis (n. g.).

Aplites (n. s. g.).
Nemocampsis (n. s. g. prov.).
Dioplites (n. s. g.).

3. [Etheostoma].

Aplesion (n. s. g.).

Species.

1. Calliurus punctulatus.

2. Lepomis pallida (s. g. Aplites).

3. Lepomis trifasciata (s. g. Aplites).

4. Lepomis flexuolaris (s. g. Aplites, or n. s. g. Nemocampsis).
6. Lepomis salmonea (s. g. Dioplites).

6. Lepomis iiotata (s. g. Dioj^lites).

7. Etheostoma calliura (s. g. Aplesion).

Of these, it need here only be in general remarked that the differ-
ential characters employed result (1) partly from erroneous observa-
tion, and (2) partly from erroneous assumptions : that is, because the
author had not signalized certain characters in specimens previously
examined, but which were noticed in others examined later, he as-
sumed that they did not exist in the former, and therefore the two
differed. Inasmuch, however, (1) as all the descriptions cited, best
(and decidedly so) agree with species of the genus Mici'optenis, and
(2) as, in those respects in which they differ, they equally deviate
from all known forms in the waters from which they were obtained,
and (3) as it is in the highest degree improbable that forms better
agreeing with them have been overlooked, the names in question are
all relegated to the synonymy of Micropfenis. Within that genus in
almost every case some specification (chiefly as to the number of
rays) indicates that the several descriptions were based on individ-
uals of the small-mouthed type. This probability is greatly en-
hanced by the fact that (so far as known or recorded) the small-
mouthed species was the only one known from the localities where
Eafinesque observed.

SCIENTIFIC HISTORY OF THE BLACK BASS, 25

The description of CalUurus jmnetulafui^, however, it has heen
thought by Prof. Agassiz, was based on a form of the sunfish type
with hirge mouth. But such could not have been the case, as is quite
evident from the armature of the operculum ("opercule with an
acute and membranaceous appendage, before whieli stands a flat
spine"), the contour of the dorsal {"depressed in the middle"), and
above all the number of the rays of that fin ("dorsal fin yellow with
twenty-four rays, of which ten are spiny"); in all these respects (as
well as others), the description is inapplicable to a Pomotid and only
apijlicable to a Mlcropterus.

A couple of years later (in 1822), a much more reliable natural-
ist* published descriptions of five supposed new species of the genus
Cichla of Bloch (as supposed to have been adopted by Cuvier). All
except one (C. (vnea = Ambloplites rupestris) really belong to the
genus Microptenis, and all the northern forms {C.fasciata, C. ohiensis,
C. 7ninima), as is evident from the allusions to the number of rays,
squamation, or size of mouth, belong to the small-mouthed typ*,
while the description of the Floridian species {C. floridana) is as ap-
plicable to the same as to the large-mouthed type. The descriptions
are not sufficiently contrasted, and are too general and therefore
vague ; nor, on comparison with specimens, are the differences sug-
gested by the mention of characters in one case and their neglect in
another apparent. As no reference was made to the forms of the
same type previously described, although the author was doubtless
acquainted with Rafinesque's memoir, it is presumable that the neg-
lect was intentional (and doubtless provoked by the character of that
author's work) and not without strong suspicion that the species
named had already, perhaps, received designations, but with unrec-
ognizable descriptions.

In the great " Histoire Naturelle des Poissons,"f Cuvier and
Valenciennes described the two species of the genus, but, deceived
by the state of their specimens — in one case at least {Huro nigricans),

"Le Sueur (Charles A. . . ). Descriptions of the [sic] five new species of
the genus Cichla of Cuvier. By C. A. Le Sueur. Read June 11, 1822. <Jour-
nal of tlie Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. Vol. ii. Part i.

Philadelphia, 1821. [Pp. 214-221].

t Cuvier (Georges Chretien Leopold Dagobert baron) and Achille Valen-
ciennes. Histoire Naturelle des Poissons, .... Paris, .... 1828-1849. [t. ii,
1828, pp. 124-12G ; t. iii, 1829, pp. 54-58].
3

26 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

completely failed to recognize the relations of the two. (1) In 1828
(tome second, pp. 124-126) they described the large-mouthed species
as a new generic type (under the name Htiro nigricans), but, misled
by an injury to the spinous portion of the dorsal fin (and apparently
the loss of the seventh spine), they ranked it in their group of Per-
coids with two dorsal fins, attributing to it a first dorsal with six
spines, and a second with two spines in front (instead of ten dorsal
spines). (2) In the following year (1829) and volume (tome troisieme,
pp. 54-58), they described the small-mouthed species, identifying it
with the Lahrus salmoides of Lacepede, and forming for it (and at
the same time associating with it an Australian fish) the genus Grys-
tes : this was referred to the section of Percoids with a single dorsal
fin and placed after Centropristes and before Bhypticus. The de-
scriptions of both species (after making allowance for the error in-
duced by the state of the dorsal in Huro) were quite good, and es-
pecially in the case of Grystes salmoides, much better than any sub-
sequently published, and they can consequently be identified without
difliculty.

Subsequently, Dr. DeKay, in his "Zoology of New York,"* re-
produced the figures and (in a modified form) the descriptions of
the two species from Cuvier and Valenciennes' work; but, failing to
identify them, redescribed and refigured one of them {Grystes sal-
moides) under two names (Cenirarchus fasciaiiis=Cichla fasciata
Les., and Cenirarchus obscurus DeKay, n. sp.). Of course all were
adopted by Dr. Storer in his '' Synopsis of the Fishes of North Amer-
ica."! I" those works, therefore, the species stand vmder three generic
and four specific names.

In 1850, Prof. Agassiz, in his " Lake Superior," J decidedly advanced

"'•DeKay (James E. . .). Zoology of New York, or the New York Fauna;
comprising detailed descriptions of all the animals hitlierto observed within
the State of New York, with brief notices of those occasionally found near its
borders, and accompanied by appropriate illustrations. By James E. DeKaj'.
Part IV. Fishes.— Albany ; printed by W. & A. White & J. Visscher. 1842.
[4to, xiv [1, errata], 415 pp.; atlas, 1 p. 1., 79 p. 1].

t Stoker (David Humphreys). ASynopsisof the Fishes of North America.
<Meinoirs of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences. New series.
Vol. ii. (Cambridge, 1846), pp. 253-550.

A synopsis of the Fishes of North America. . . . Can\bridge: Met calf and

Company, printers to the University. 1846. [4to, 1 p. 1. (= title ), 29S pp.]

J Ag.\ssiz (Louis). Lake Superior; its Physical Character; Vegetation

SCIENTIFIC HISTORY OF THE ELACK BASS. 27

beyond his predecessors, (1) recognizing, for tlie first time, the generic
identity of the forms described by LeSueur, Cuvier and Valenciennes,
and DeKay, (2) retaining for the genus thus enhirged the name
Grystes, and (3) recognizing two species as inhabitants of the north ;
he was, however, less fortunate in his appreciation of their sjx'cific
relations, (1) his Grystes fasciatas being the small-mouthed form, (2)
his " Grystes salmuneus " (as is evident from the contrasted charac-
ters noticed in his comparison of G. fusciatus with it) being the
large-mouthed southern form, and (3) his Grystes nigricans being
difterentiated without statement of reasons and the Centrarchns fas-
ciatiis of DeKay identified with it.

At a later period (1854), Prof. Agassiz distinguished specimens
of the genus obtained from Huntsville,* Alabama, as Grystes nobilis,
which evidently belongs to the large-mouthed type ; the brief notice
is only comparative, contrasted with the small-mouthed type, and
contains no specific peculiarities.

Ill the same year and month (^March, 1854), Messrs. Baird and
Girardf described specimens of the same type from the " Rio Frio
and Rio Nueces, Texas," under the name Grystes nuecensis. This
form was subsequently described in greater detail and illustrated by
Dr. Charles Girard, in the Report on the Mexican boundary Survey.

In 1857, Dr. Theodatus Garlick,:j; of Cleveland, Ohio, in a treatise
on the propagation of fish, described and published rough woodcut
figures of the two forms of the genus: (l)'the small-mouthed species
under the name "Grystes nigricans ; or black bass;" (2) the other,
as a new species, designated "Grystes megastoma ; or large-mouth

and Animals, compared with those of other and similar regions. . . . Boston;
1&50. (p. 295.)

=•= Agassiz (Louis). Notice of a collection of Fishes from the southern bend
of the Tennessee River, Alabama. . . <The American Journal of Science and
Arts, second series. Vol. xvii. . . . 18;54. [pp. 297-308; 3o3-365=Grystes, pp. 297,
298].

t Baikd (Spencer FuUerton) and Charles Giraed. Descriptions of new
species of Fishes collected in Texas, New Mexico, and Sonorn,by Mr. John H.
Clark, on the U. S. and Mexican Boundary Survey, and in Texas bj' Capt.
Stewart Van Vliet, U. S. A. . . .<Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sci-
ences of Philadelphia. Vol. vii, 1854, 1855. [pp. 24-29; Grystes, p. 25].

X Garlick (Tlieodatus). A treatise on the Artificial Propagation of certain
kinds of Fish, with the descriptions of such kinds as are the most suitable for
pisciculture. . . . Cleveland, Tho. Brown, publisher, Ohio Farmer office, 1857.
[12mo, 142 pp. Grystes, pp. 105-110.]

28 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

black bass."* The species are quite well distinguished by the size
of the mouth and the comparative size of the scales: his Grystes ni-
gricans is, however, not the true Grystes nigricans (Huro nigricans,
Cuv. & Val.), as that name really belongs to his Grystes megastoma.

In 1859, Dr. Giintherf described specimens of the small-mouthed
species under the name Grystes salmoides, azid first restricted the
genus to that species (having removed the Australian species as the
type of a new genus— 0//r/orw.s). Having overlooked the rectifica-
tions by Prof. Agassiz, he continued the errors ot his predecessors,
admitting as nominal species (1) Huro nigricans, (2) Centrarchus
fasciatus, and (3) Centrarchus obscurus, and also the same species
as doubtful forms (in foot-notes) of Grystes, i. e., G, nuecensis and
G. J'asciatus.

For the present, the notices and descriptions of the several forms
of the genus by other authors may be passed over in silence, as they
do not involve any questions of nomenclature. It may be added,
however, (1) that the author had long recognized the existence and
differences of the two species of the genus, one under the name Mi-
cropterus achigan, the other as Micropterus nigricans, and (2) that
Prof. Cope, under the names Micropterus fasciatus (which he at-
tributed to the present author through some misapprehension) and
Mlcropdcrus nigricans has signalized the same species from widely
distant regions {e. g., Michigan, Virginia, North Carolina), and has
evidently understood their relations.

Analysis of all the published descriptions and comparison with the
fishes themselves, led to the following conclusions :

Section 1. — Morphological.

After an examination and comparison with each other of specimens
from the great lakes (Champlain to Michigan), the states of New York,
Pennsylvania, Ohio, Michigan, Illinois, Iowa, Kentucky, Missouri,
Tennessee, Alabama, Texas, Wisconsin, West Virginia, Virginia, North

* " This flsh has been identified witli the common blacli bass (Gryslcs fasci-
atus), but is by no means tlie same flsli, differing in many respects, both in its
liabits and physical structure, and has not been described in any worli on
American flslies, so far as I can learn " {op.cit. p. lOS).

fGuNTHKR (Albert). Catalogue of the Acanthopterygian Fishes in the
Collection of the British Museum, . . . Vol. i, . . . Loudon, . . . 1859 [pp. 252-255].

SCIENTIFIC HISTORY OF THE BLACK BASS. 29

and South Caroliiui, unci Georgia, no dillerences could be found
much, if any greater, than such as could be detected among numer-
ous individuals froua any given locality. There are diflerences result-
ing from age and condition ; the fins may be (slightly) more or less
developed, and the colors may be more or less intense, but no devia-
tions have been found, from the ordinary standard, of such a charac-
ter as at all to compare, for example, with the differences between the
large-mouthed and small-mouthed forms, or to indicate that there
are any specific differences among the small-mouthed or large-mouthed
forms. The natural course, then, appears to be to recognize only the
two forms whose ditterences are so obvious as species, and — at least
till ditterences nuiy be detected, of which none have yet been found-
to consider all the other forms, and from all localities, however di-s-
tant they may be, as representatives or varieties of those species.

Section 2.— Nomenclature.

A critical analysis of the numerous notices and descriptions of
the forms of the genus indicates that the ditterences between the
respective species have been very imperfectly apprehended, and
mostly confined to the size of the mouth and in vague terms to the
size (comparatively large or small) of the scales: most of the other
differences signalized are either non-existent or individual and de-
pendent on the condition of the specimens. The charge of vague-
ness and insufiiciency of diagnosis is especially applicable to the
first descriptions of species of the genus; guided, however, by a
knowledge of the geographical distribution of the genus and hints
furnished by the radial formulas, etc., it nuiy be safely concluded,

(1) that most of the names referred to in the historical introduction
may be relegated to the synonymy of the small-mouthed species;

(2) that the first name applied to that species was Labrus sulmoides ;

(3) that only the names Htiro nigyicans, (and most of its derivatives),
Grystes megasfoma, Gn/stes nobilis, and Dioplites nuecensis belong
to the large-mouthed species ; (4) that the name nigricans is there-
fore the first specific term applicable to it; (5) that the name Micro-
pterus was the first applied to the genus; and (6) that therefore, if we
only take into consideration the priority of the names (irrespective
of the applicability or erroneousness of the description), and combine
the first specific names applied to the respective species with the first

30 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS,

generic name given to a representative of the genus, the two species
should be designated as (a) Microptertis sahnoides, the small-mouthed
])lack bass, and {h) 3Iicropterus nigricans,\y~\ the large-mouthed
black bass.

In 1873, Professor Gill traced back tlie large-mouthed
Black Bass only to Huro nigricans Cuv. & Val., and
named it Micropierus nigricans (C. & V.) Gill, as shown in
the foregoing review.

But in 1874, Professor G. Brown Goode, while collect-
ing in Florida, found this species exceedingly abundant,
and the only species of the Black Bass represented in that
State; consequently, in 1876, he restored the name be-
stowed on this species, from the same locality, by Le Sueur,
in 1822 (^Cichlafloridana), and in accordance with the law
of priority, called it 3Iicropterus floridanus (Le Sueur)
Goode.

In the following year (1877), however, Professor Jordan
found that the same species was very numerous in the
tributaries of the Ohio River, in Kentucky, where Rafin-
esque fished in 1818-20, and after a thorough investigation,
he and Prof. Gill identified this species as Lepomis pallida
Raf.; whereupon, in obedience to the same law of pre-
cedence, they gave to it its present name, Micropierus
pallidus (Raf.) Gill and Jordan ; which, by the way, is as
appropriate as all other synonyms are incongruous, and
which might be expected from its having been the name
by which the species was designated by a naturalist who
took his specimens, alive and kicking, from nature's book. f

* Profs. GiU and Jordan subseqnently substituted Micropterus pallidus for
Micropierus nigricans, for reasons which wiU appear later in this chapter. —
J. A. H.

t " In further justification of the opinions here advanced, it may be

scip:ntific history of the elack bass. 31

In order to make it perfectly clear why this change of
name was considered necessary, I can not do better than
to reproduce the following characteristic communication
from the pen of Prof David S. Jordan to the anglers of
America : — *

Since tlie publication of the name Micropterus paUldus (Raf.),
Gill and Jordan, as a substitute for Microptenis nigricans for the
scientific name of the large-mouthed Black Bass, I have received
numerous congratulations, verbal and written, from brother fisher-
men on the appropriateness of the name "selected," and I presume
that my colleague in this matter. Professor Gill, has had a similar
experience. Lately, a correspondent of Forest and Stream sug-
gests that the name 3ficropferns salmoides be likewise "stamped out"
to make room for some more appropriate appellation. It seems
timely, therefore, that we should " rise and explain."

The name Micropterus pallidus is not a name of our own selection,
but a name which by the laAvs of scientific nomenclature we are
bound to use. By the operation of these laws every genus must
bear tlie oldest (generic) name bestowed on any of its members,
unless this name has been previously used for something else, or is
glaringly false (not simply irrelevant or inapprofiriate), or is other-
wise ineligible ; every species must bear the first (specific) name

proper for me to state that I had the pleasure of M. Eafinesque's society,
during the three years of my official residence in Sipily, from 1807 to
1810, and again in 1812, when we were both at Palermo, prosecuting our
botanical and ichthyological researches together. . . . M. Rafinesque,
unfortunately, was unable to publish more than a synopsis of his ichthy-
ological discoveries; and his figures, being very slight, are often not
calculated to clear up those doubts which the brevity of his descrijjtions
sometimes creates ; nevertheless, to one Avho examines the species on the
spot, in a fresh state, there are few which may not be identified. M.
Cuvier often asserts that all M. Rafinesque's species were described from
preserved specimens ; but this is an error — they were all taken from the
life." — SwAiNSON, Nat. Hist, and Class, of Fishes, I, 62, 1838.

* Scientific Names of the Black Bass. By David S. Jordan, M. D.
< Forest and Stream, XI, 1878, p. 340.

32 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

imposed upon it (unless, as before, it be for one reason or another
ineligible), and the proper name of any species must be made by
combining the above-mentioned specific and generic names.

This is the law on the subject, and, as elsewhere, the law is usually,
though not always, simply right. We accept many meaningless or
even objectionable names to avoid the confusion attendant upon
arbitrary changes. Were it not for these rules science would ever
suffer, as it has much suffered in the past, from the efforts of the
improvers of nomenclature — men who invent new names for old
objects for the purpose of seeing their own personal designations :
Smith, Jones, Brehm, Reichenow, or what not, after them. In the
words of "a right Sagamann," John Cassin : "There is not, evi-
dently, any other course consistent with justice and the plainest
principles of right and morality, and, in fact, no alternative, unless,
indeed, an operator is disposed to set himself ujj for the first of all
history, as is said of an early Chinese emperor. The latter course,
in a degree, singular as it may appear, is not entirely unknown to
naturalists, especially to those who regard science as a milch cow
rather than as a transcendent goddess, a distinction in classification
first made by the great poet Schiller."

Now, as to the names of our species of bass, I take it for granted
that the reader knows («) what a Black Bass is and what it is not (6);
that there are two species of Black Bass, the large-mouthed and the
small-mouthed, the latter being with most anglers the Black Bass par
excellence, the other the off horse, and (c)what the difference between
them is. In any event you will find it all written in Professor Gill's
most excellent paper, " On the Species of the Genus. 3Jicropfents,'"
in the " Proceedings of the American Association for the Advance-
ment of Science in 1873."

The earliest published notice of a Black Bass with a scientific name
was of one of the small-mouthed kind, sent to Lacepede from South
Carolina. This siiecimen bore with it the name of " trout," after
the abominable, contemptible, pernicious and otherwise detestable
custom of our erring Southern brethren of calling a Black Bass in
the river, or a weak fish in the sea, a "trout." Now, we may pre-
sume that the great French naturalist was puzzled by this name,
and put on his spectacles to see Avhat in the world could be " trout-
like " about such a fish, with its coarse scales and spinous fins. To

BCIENTIFIC HISTORY OF THE BLACK BASS. 33

him it looked more like a wrasse or dinner, Labriis, than a trout;
but no matter, it must resemble a trout somehow or the Americans
would not call it so. So he put it down in his great work as Lahrns
salinoides, the trout-like Labrus, to the everlasting injury of the
fish. The name is not only senseless, but bad Latin, the proper
form of the word being Snlmonokles.

Lacepede had another specimen of the Black Bass, without label,
and from an unknown locality. This one had the last rays of the
dorsal broken and torn loose from the rest, and was otherwise in a
forlorn condition. This specimen he considered as a genus distinct
from the other, and he gave it the name of ^licrojytenis dolornicu —
" Dolomieu's small-fin." Dolomieu was a friend of Lacepede. who
had had about as much to do with the fish as George Washiniiton or
Victor Hugo. Ko one could tell, either from figure or description,
what this Micropterus dolomieu was; but Cuvier, thirty years later,
found the original type and pronounced it a Black Bass, in poor con-
dition, and declared that "the genus and sjiecies of il/Zcro^j^erMs ought
to disappear from the catalogue of fishes."

Then the versatile and eccentric Professor Rafinesque apjieared
upon the scene, and in rapid succession gave the small-mouthed
Black Bass names enough for a whole family. First he called it
Bodianus achiffan, being told that the Canadian voyageurs knew the
fish as Vachigan. Then afterward specimens of different sizes ap-
peared as Calliurus pvnctulatiis, Lepomis trifasciatu, Lepom is Jfe.ruolariSf
Lepomis salmonea, Lepomis noiata, and Etlieostoma calliura. Soon
after Le Sueur, with a lofty scorn for Eafinesque and his doings,
named specimens of diflferent sizes, Cichla fasciata, Cichla ohiensis,
and Cichla minima. Lastly, DeKay, in 1842, called it Centrarchus
ohscurus, and we hope this may be the last.

Now, the name salmoides, being the oldest, is, of course, the one
to be adopted. But suppose we " stamp it out." Is Microptenis
dolomieu any better? Out with it! Micropterus achiganf Just as
bad. I fear that the "stamping out" process would have to be
continued too long. You may spell it salmonoides if you like, but
you can not get rid of it.

Now for the large-mouthed Bass. The oldest description we find
is that of a young specimen from the Ohio by Eafinesque, in 1820,
as Lepomis pallida. The description is poor enough, and not

34 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

aitogetlier correct, but the name is a happy inspiration, as good as
salmoides is bad. Soon after (1822) Le Sueur described the same fish
from Florida as Cichlafloridana, a name which Avould be well enough
if it were confined to the streams of the orange groves, but it seems
rather narrow in view of the fact that the fish is found in Mexico
and Manitoba, and every-where between.

Next, a specimen came to Cuvier and Valenciennes, under the
ititle of "Black Bass of Lake Huron." To their eyes the fish was
black enough, but not a Bass {%. e. Labrax), and they called it Huro
nigricans, the " Black Huron," making a new genus for it because
their specimen had but six dorsal sj)ines, the last four having been
broken off, leaving two dorsal fins. The colored figure which they
published remained a standing puzzle for some time.

In Dr. Kirtland's private copy of his own fishes of Ohio he had
carefully drawn ofi'and colored a copy of Cuvier's figure of his Black
Huron, and had all his life sought for such a fish in the lakes and
never found it. About a year before his death. Dr. Kirtland asked
me if I had ever seen that fish or could tell him what it was, and I
had the pleasure of informing him that it was a demoralized Black
Bass. Next, in 1854, Professor Agassiz, thinking that this fish in the
Tennessee Eiver could not be the saine as in Lake Huron, called it
Orijstes nobilis, a good name enough, but 84 years too late. In the
same year, specimens from Texas were named Orystes nuecensis by
Baird and Girard, but the fish is found in other streams than the
Kio Nueces. Then a meaty and excellent name, Grysfes megastoma,
was given by Dr. Garlick in 1857, which closes the American synony-
my, but the disease has broken out in France again, and Messrs.
Vaillant and Bocour.t, of Paris, who ought to know better, have again
described it as Dioplites treculn and Dloplites variabilis. The poorest
business a French naturalist can engage in is that of describing new
species of American fishes. A good share of our cumbersome and
confusing synonymy is due to Gallic assistance.

Now, in 1873, Prof. Gill, in his masterly review of these species,
followed the thread back only to Ifuro nigricans in 1828, and so
called the big-mouthed Black Bass, as he was bound to do, Microp-
terus nigricans. The names floridaims and pallidus were presumed by
him to refer to the other species, for the reason that he had never
seen a big-mouthed Black Bass, either fx'om the Ohio Kiver or from

SCIENTIFIC HISTORY OF THE BLACK BASS. 35

Florida. In 1876, Prof. Goode had collected it in Florida, and so
felt bound to restore Le Sueur's name and to call it Micropterus fior-
idaniis. In 1877, I called Professor Gill's attention to the fact that
there were big-mouthed as well as small-mouthed Black Bass in the
streams where Rafinesque fished, and he agreed with me at once that
the Lepomis pallida of Rafinesque was the big-mouth, which is why
the big-mouthed Black Bass, Oswego Bass, Grass Bass, and Bayou
Bass is Micropterus jjallldns (Rafinesque) Gill and Jordan, at present
date, and such may it ever remain.

Now, as to the name of the genus itself, the difficulty is just as
great. The name Micropterus is unquestionably the oldest. But (a)
Ave are j^erhaps not absolutely certain that the original Micropterus
dolomleu was a Black Bass at all ; (6) it was described as distinct
under the erroneous impression that it had a little adipose fin behind
the dorsal, and (r-) the name (small fin) refers to this imaginary pe-
culiarity, and is therefore incorrect.

On the other hand, the Black Bass really has smaller fins than
any of its relatives, and the name has therefore a certain appropri-
ateness. I think, with Professor Gill, that it should be retained, al-
though Professor Cope and others, as good authority as we are, are
inclined to demur.

Next comes GalUurus (beautiful tail), not a bad name, for the
young Bass have the tail ornamented with black, white, and yellow,
but not a very good name. Then comes Lepomis (scaly opercles),
previously applied to the sunfishes, and therefore not usable for a
Bass. Then come Rafinesque's Aplltes, Nemocampjsls, Dloplltes, and
Aph'sion, unworthy of any attention, although, for some reason, Dlo-
plltes has kept up a sort of life, while the other three have wliolly died.

Next come the name JIuro for the large-mouthed, and Grystes for the
small-mouthed. Of cotirse the two do not belong to separate genera.
The name Grystes was given as a translation of the name Growler,
under which name the Black Bass was sent to the museum at Paris.
Thus our two species are often called in foreign books the Black
Huron {Huro nigricans), and the Salmon-formed Growler {Grystes
salmoides). The name Grystes is a graceful one, and has been used
more frequently than any other, but there are seven names ahead of
it on the record, and first come first served and synonymy take the
hindmost.

36 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

The names Labrus, Bodianus, Clchla, and Centrarchus belong to
wholly different fishes, and were given by different authors through
mistakes as to the relationship of the Black Bass.

I trust that this hasty and rather rambling account will be of some
service to the numerous class of my fishing brethren who like to be
right in their use of names, and who want to know, you know, but
who, like Wilhelm Tell, can not " lange jirufen oder wahlen."

In the summer of 1877, while investigating the fish
fauna of the Alleghany region of South Carolina, Georgia,
and Tennessee, Professor Jordan became impressed with
the fact that the small-mouthed Black Bass of the South-
ern States differed constantly in some features from the
Northern form of the same species ; consequently, he sep-
arated the species into two varieties, designating the North-
ern form as 3Iicropterus salinoides var. achigan, and the
Southern form as Mlcropicrus salinoides var. saJiaoidcs.
His views and arguments are detailed in the following
extract : — *

The small-mouthed Black Bass or " Trout " of the Southern
streams {i. e., Savanah, Altamaha, Chattahoochee, Alabama) differs
so constantly from Northern representatives of the same species that
the two forms may be taken as geographical varieties of one species,
and it is probably worth while to distinguish each by name. The
Labrus salmoides of Lacepede was collected by Bosc, near Charleston,
S. C. It was therefore, presumably, the Southern variety which
should be designated as var. salmoides. The oldest name known to
apply to the Northern form is that of Bodianus achigan Rafinesque.
The Northern form may therefore be designated as Micrnpterus sal-
moides var. achigan, whenever it is deemed desirable to call attention
to these variations.

The body is appreciably longer and slenderer in var. salmoides
than in var. achigan, the head being about 3] in length instead of

* Contributions to N. A. Ichthyology, No. 3, p. 30. <BuIletin U. S.
National Museum, XII, 1878.

scip:ntific history of the black bass. 37

about 2!|. The :iiuil ruys in salmoides are usually 10 instead of 11 ;
the dorsal formula X, 1, 12, instead of X, I, 13. The scales are larger
in salmoides, there being about 70 in the lateral line instead of 77.
The coloration of salmoides is uniformly unlike that ol' achigan. The
lower part of the sides is marked by pretty regular lines of dark
olive-green spots along the series of scales. The lower fins are usu-
ally more or less red, and the black, yellow, and white coloration of
the caudal fin, so conspicuous in young specimens of the Northern
form — in the Western States, at least — is not noticeable in the South-
ern variety.

And now, if we could feel perfectly confident and rea-
sonably sure that the premises adopted by our American
naturalists were correct, to wit : that Labrus salmoides La-
cepede, was the Jirst scientific description of the small-
mouthed Bass, we could then leave this subject here, with
the firm conviction that this matter was settled for all time,
and could thus feel assured of the ultimate and universal
adoption and perpetuity of the American nomenclature of
the Black Bass, viz : 3Iicropterus salmoides (Lacepede)
Gill, for the small-mouthed species, and Micropterus pallidus
(Rafinesque) Gill & Jordan, for the large-mouthed species.
In this event, I say, we could rest content; for, although
the generic appellation, and the specific title of the small-
mouthed Black Bass, as proposed, are misnomers (the
generic name is not very inappropriate, inasmuch as the
fins are really smaller than in other centrarchids, though
not in the sense intended by Lacepede ; and the specific
name, though not in any degree descriptive, was conferred
by reason of its being called " Trout" in its native waters),
they are the only names that could rightly be bestowed,
under the circumstances, and we could well afford to sub-
rait gracefully to wdiat could not be bettered, or helped.

But now come our Gallic friends, MM. Vaillant and

38 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

Bocourt, " once more unto the breach," to tell us what
they know, about the Bkick Bass. In their work (Mis-
sion Scientifique auMexique: ined.), they propose once
more to split up our genus Micropterus, this time into
four species, viz : —

M. variabilis (Le S.) V. & B. {~M. salmoides var. achigan Jordan.)
M. dolomieu (Lac.) V. & B. {=^M. salmoides yar. salmoides Jordan.)
M. salmoides (Luc.) V. & B. {=31 pallidus (Eaf.) Gill & Jordan.)
M. nuecensis (G'rd) V. & B. {=M. pallidas, with lingual teeth.)

Dr.Vailkmt, however, has only proposed these species
provisionally, and acknowledges that upon examining a
considerable number of specimens these specific distinctions
shade into each other :

" Au premier abord, on reconnait sans peine plusieurs types, en
ayant egardaux proportions du corps, au nombre des ecailles et a
diverses autres particularites, niais si on examine un certain nombre
d'individus, les differences s'attenuent par des transitions gradu-

elles."*

Perhaps Dr. Vaillant's views can not be better expressed
than by the annexed analytical table (^'tableau dichoto-
mique") of provisional species as defined by him, and
which explains itself:

f JJ^L-?) fiO to TO scales along (with lingual teeth M . nxiecensis G' rd.

Eows of scales '

TO scales along f With lingua
lateral line. |Withoutlino

low the lateral j ((toll) (09 to 75

lino > Lateral line : <

''"''• L25to.30J \80to86

It will be observed that Dr. Vaillant proposes the title

, , 1.') to ''0 t the lateral line, j Without lingual teeth — M . salmoides 'Lsi.c.

above and be- ] -' '-

low the lateral j ((toll) ^ , , ,. fOQ to 75 scales M. variabilis 'Le

86 scales M. dolomieu Lac

Mission Scientifique au Mexique, Zool. iv : ined.

SCIENTIFIC HISTORY OF THE BLACK BASS. 39

3ficropterus scdmoidcs for the large-mouthed Bass; and as
we call the small-mouthed Bass by the same name, it
would produce endless confusion were this state of thino's
to continue. If the Black Bass of Europe were always to
be confined to a few preserved specimens and plaster casts
in the museums, it would not matter so much; but as this
desirable game fish has been already introduced into Eng-
lish waters, and will no doubt, in time, be transplanted
into those of the Continent, it would seem to be a matter
of some interest to obtain a correct, uniform, and universal
nomenclature of the species. Even at the present day,
Dr. Giinther, the great English authority, in a work re-
cently issued (Introduction to the Study of Fishes, 1880),
nails Grystes and Huro to the mast-head as valid
genera.

It will be noticed that Dr. Vaillant adopts the north-
ern and southern varieties of the small-mouthed Bass as
provisional species, and likewise separates the large-
mouthed Bass into tAvo species, one being distinguished
by teeth on the tongue, the other by their absence. I have
often noticed this peculiarity of the presence or absence of
lingual teeth in the large-mouthed species in fish from
various waters, (and am not sure but I have observed it
in the small-mouthed species occasionally), but I have
always considered it as developed, possibly, by the char-
acter of the food in certain localities, or merely a phase
of individual variation. Prof. Jordan takes this same
view of it, as the following extract will show : *

* Notes on a Collection of Fishes from East Florida, obtained by Dr.
J. A. Henshall. By David S. Jordan, M.D. -^Proceedings of United
States National Museum, III, 1880, pp. 17-22.

40 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

12. MiCEOPTERUS PALLIDUS {Rof.) Gill & Jordan.

Dr. Leon Vaillant (Mission Scientifique au Mexique: ined.)
divides this species provisionally into two, adopting the name " Mi-
cropterus salmoides " for the ordinary form, and that of Micropferus
nuecensis (Baird & Girard) for the south-western form (Texas and
Mexico). According to him the two are externally identical, but
M. nuecensis is distinguished by the presence of a small patch of
teeth on the tongue, the tongue being entirely smooth in the ordi-
nary form.

I have examined a number of specimens in regard to this point.

I find lingual teeth in the following specimens:

(1.) Two specimens, one large, one small, from the Falls of the
Ohio.

(2.) One small specimen fi'om a tributary of White Eiver at
Bloomington, Ind.

(3.) One specimen (in the museum at Paris) from Texas.

I find them absent in the following :

(1.) Several specimens in Henshall's collection from Indian River,
[Fla.].

(2.) Specimen from Neuse River.

(3.) Specimens from White River at Indianapolis.

(4.) Specimens from Lake Erie.

The presence of these teeth evidently does not depend on age, and
apparently not op sex. It may be a specific feature, but I am in-
clined at present to think it only a feature of individual variation.
I have not seen such teeth in the small-mouthed Black Bass.

In 1878, Professor Jordan, while in Europe, gave great
attention to the investigation of the Black Bass from the
Paris standpoint. He examined, with the greatest care,
Lacepede's original type specimen, and the specimens of
Cuvier and Valenciennes, which are still preserved in the
Museum of Natural History at Paris, He was deter-
mined to get to the bottom of the matter, if possible, and
to this end consulted freely, and compared notes, with the

SCIENTIFIC HISTORY OF THE IlLACK BASS. 41

French ichthyologists, who aided him in every })ossible
way.

Professor Jordan afterwards published the result of his
researches, which f )rnis one of the most valual)le papers
yet added to the literature of the Black Bass, and which I
take great pleasure in reproducing here:*

In a recent visit to Europe the writer has had the privilege of ex-
amining the original types of certain species of American fishes de-
scrihed by Dr. Albert Giinther from specimens in the British
Museum, and by Cuvier, Valenciennes, and others from examples in
the Museum at Paris. Notes on some of these, the proper identifi-
cation of which may affect our nomenclature, are here presented.

1. MiCROPTERlTS DOLOMIEU Lacephle.
Lac6pSde, Histoire Naturelle des Poissons iv, 324.

The original type of this species is a large specimen, still in good
condition. Its peculiarity, which led to its separation from "Labrus"
by Lacepede, is that the last rays of the dorsal are detached from
the others, and somewhat distorted, the result of some accident tc
the fish while young. The injury to the specimen is therefore not a
museum mutilation, as I had heretofore understood, but a healed
wound. This specimen belongs to the southern variety of the small-
mouthed Black Bass, recognized by me (Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus., xii,
1878, p. 30) as Micropterus salmokles var. salmoiden. Prof. Vaillant
recognizes this form provisionally (MSS. Mission Scientifique au
Mexique) as a di.stinct species {Micropterus dolomieu Lac.) from the
northern form, but the differences seem to me to have no more than
varietal value.

As shown below, there is little doubt that the specific name ihlo-
mieu is che first ever distinctly applied to our small-mouthed Black

"•■■ Notes on Certain Typical Specimens of American Fishes in the
British Museum and in the IMuseum D'Histoire Naturelle at Paris. By
David S. Jordan, M. D. < Proceedings of United States National
Museum, II, 1879, pp. 218-226.
4

42 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

Bass, as the name Micropterus is its earliest generic appellation.
Unless we adopt the earlier salmoides, its name should, therefore, be
Micvopterns dolomieu.

On the other hand, it is true that the name Micropterus dolomieu
was applied to a deformed specimen, which was considered as a dis-
tinct genus and species solely on account of its deformity.

It is an established rule of nomenclature (Dall, Eept. Comm.
Zool. Nomenc, 48) that " a name should be rejected . . . -when
it expresses an attribute or character positively false in the majority
or the whole of the group in question, as in cases (among others)
when a name has been founded on a monstrous, abnormal, immature,
artificial or mutilated specimen."

The name 3Iicroptenis was founded on a monstrous specimen; iu
the sense intended by its author it expresses a false character,
although the species really have smaller fins than are found in re-
lated genera. In the opinion of some writers it should be set aside
and the next name in order (Calliurus Eaf.) should be adopted in its
stead. The species might then stand as Calliurus dolomieu. The
specific name " dolomieu'" is also open to objection, as it is a French
noun having neither a Latin nor a genitive form, but being an un-
modified name of a person. This hardly seems to me a reason for
rejecting the name, although, if retained, it should receive a genitive
form, as dolomii or dolomiei.

The question of the adoption of the name Micropterus is still an
open one. The weight of authority is, however, at present in favor
of its retention, and the writer sees no sufficient reason for setting it
aside.

2. Grystes salmoides Cuvier & Valenciennes.

Labrus salmoides Lac6p6de, Hist. Nat. des Poiss. Ill, 716.
Grystes salmoides Cuv. & Val., Hist. Nat. des Poiss. HI, 54, pi. 46.

It seems rather a thankless task to reopen the question of the
proper nomenclature of the Black Bass, but it is evident that we
have not yet reached the bottom. The name 3ficropferus salmoides
is now generally adopted in America as the proper name of the
small-mouthed Black Bass, not only among naturalists but among
anglers and sportsmen as well. In the Museum at Paris, however.

SCIENTIFIC HISTORY OF THE BLACK BASS. 43

the same name is fully adopted for the hirge-nioutlied Black Bass.
Let U.S inquire into the history of the use of the name sahnoides.

In 1800, the name Labrus sahnoides was given by LacepCde to a
fish inhabiting the waters of Carolina, and known to Americans as
" Trout." This fish was known to Lacepede only through a drawing
and manuscript description by Bosc. Both species of VAack Bass
occur in Carolina, the large-mouth most abundantly. Neither draw-
ing nor description is exact enough to enable us to tell with certainty,
or even with reasonable probability, which species was meant by
Bosc and Lacepede. It is unlikely that Bosc discriminated between
them at all, both being alike "Trout" to the Carolina fishermen.
In the figure the mouth is drawn large, and if we must choose, the
large-mouth is best represented.

The specific name salmnides next appears in the great work of
Cuvier and Valenciennes (III, p. 54) as Gnjsfes sahnoides. The descrip-
tion here given is for the most part applicable to both species; the
small size of the scales ("il y en a quatre-vingt-dix sur une ligne
longitudinale et trente-six on quarante sur une verticale." *) and the
naked preoperculum render it evident that at least that part of the
description was taken from a smaJl-mouth, while the accompanying
figure more resembles the large-mouth.

We are, however, not here left in doubt. The original material
of the French naturalists is still preserved in the museum. It con-
sists of the following specimens as described by Cuvier and Valen-
ciennes:

1. "Nous avons regu, par M. Milbert, un individu de huit a neuf
pouces et un de six a sept. C'est ce dernier qui a six rayons a la
membrane des ouies et quatorze rayons mouse a la dorsale."

From one of these specimens the figure in the Histoire Naturelle
des Poissons (pi. 46) was taken. f This specimen is unquestionably
a large-moutliod Black Bass.

2. " Plus tard, M. Lesueur nous en a envoye de la riviere Wabash
un individu long de seize pouces, et trois autres qui n'en ont guere
que cinq. Les jeunes sont d'un vert plus pale, et ont sur chaque
flanc vingt-cinq a trente lignes longitudinales et paralleles brunes,
qui paraissent s'effacer avec I'age."

*The very sm ill precaudal scales are doubtless here included,
ti^tde Vaillant.

44 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

The»e specimens are slill preserved, bearing the MSS. name of
Cichla variabilis Le Sueur, and belong to tlie small-mouthed species.
This name, which, so far as I know, Avas never published by Le
Sueur, is thus noticed by Cuvier and Valenciennes :

" M. Lesueur, croyant I'espece nouvelle, en a publie une descrip-
tion dans le Journal des sciences a Philadelphie, sous le nom de
cichla variabilis; mais nous avons tout lieu de croire que c'est ce
poisson qui est represente et decrit par M. de Lacepede (t. iv, p. 716
et 717, et. pi. 5, fig. 2), sous le nom de labre sahnoide, d'apres des
notes et une figure fournies par M. Bosc qui le nommait perca tnitte.
La figure en est un peu rude, mais la description s'accorde avec ce
que nous avons vu, sauf quelques details, qui tiennent peut-etre
moins au poisson meme qu'a la maniere dont il a ete observe."

Later (vol. v, p. v), the type of 3flcropterus dolomieu was re-
examined and fully identified by Cuvier as a Grystes sahnoides.

It is thus evident that Cuvier and Valenciennes completely con-
founded the two species under the name Grystes salmoides, and that
the uncertain salmoides of Lacepede became in their hands a com-
plex species. We may perhaps say that their sahnoides must be the
fish described by them, and that the figure is to be taken into consid-
eraticm only when other evidence is wanting. M. Vaillant, how-
ever, maintains that the large-mouthed species should be considered
as the salmoides of Cuvier and Valenciennes, inasmuch as one of that
species served as the type of their published figure.

The next writers who use the name salmoides (De Kay, Storer,
etc.), have merely copied or echoed the description of Cuvier and
Valencienne.s, and have in no Avay given precision to the name.

Later Aga.ssiz uses the name '^ salmonevs'^ (slip of the pen for
salmoides'" f) apparently referring to the large-moutlied species.

The description given by Dr. Giinther of Grystes salmoides in the
Catalogue of the Fishes of the British Museum, I, 252, adds nothing
to the precision of our knowledge of the species, the characters
given being either taken from Cuvier and Valenciennes, or else
common to both species.

Next a description is given of Grystes salmoides by Holbrook (Ich.
S. Car., p. 28, pi. 4, f. 2), accompanied by an excellent fi>iure, which
leaves no possible doubt of the species intended. This is the large-
mouthed Bass.

SCIENTIFIC HISTORY OF THE BLACK BASS, 45

Omitting papers of lesser iniportaiice, we come finally to the very-
able discussion of these questions by Professor Gill (Proc. Am. Ass.
Adv. Sci., 1873, p. 55-72), in which the whole subject is exhaustively
treated, and the name Micropterus salmoides is definitely adopted for
the small-mouthed Black Bass. This arrangement has been followed
by most recent iclithyologists. In an important paper just now pass-
ing through the press (Mission Scientifiqut' au Mexique), however,
Messrs. Yaillant and Bocourt have adopted the name Mierojiterns sal-
vioides for the large-mouthed species, for the reasons indicated above.

This question resolves itself into two. Is the specific name sal-
moldes available for either species? and if so, for which?

Between the publication of the works of Lacepcde and Cuvier
both species had been more than once described under different
names by Rafinesque and Le Sueur. Of these names, Lepomls pal-
lida Raf. for the large-mouthed Black Bass, Micropterus dolomieu Lac.
for the southern, and Bodlanus achigan Raf. for the northern variety
of the small-mouth have priority over the others. All these, there-
fore, antedate any precise definition of the name salmoides.

Tlie question as to Avhether a specific name, at first loosely applied
and afterwards precisely fixed, shall claim priority from its first use
or not, has been differently answered by different writers, and has
perhaps never been settled by general usage. I suppose that the
amount of doubt or confusion arising from its use or rejection enters
with most writers as an element. The name salmoides, left unsettled
by Lacepcde, has been generally received by writers, in consequence
of the supposed precision given to it by Cuvier. We have seen,
however, that both species were included by Cuvier under one name,
and that we must look farther for real restriction of the species.
The first distinct use of the name salmoides for any particular species
is by Holbrook, for the large-mouthed form. On the basis of the
first unquestionable restriction, the name, if used at all, must be
applied to that species. Forty years previous to this restriction,
however, the specific name pallidas was conferred on the same fish
by Rafinesque.

In the writings of nearly all the older naturalists, as well as in
many of the later ones, we find descriptions of species which are
really generic in their value, and which, as our knowledge of species
becomes greater, can not be disposed of with certainty or even with

46 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS,

any high degree of probability, for absolute certainty rarely accom-
panies any identification.

In the absence or impossibility of any general rule regarding such
eases, the following supposed examples will illustrate what seems to
the present writer a fair method of treating them.

Let us suppose that the genus Micropterus contains two well-
marked species;, that to one of these the name salmoides was early
applied ; that next the names dolomiei and palUdus were applied to
the two respectively, and that subsequently the name salmoides was
restricted to the one called j)<^dlldus.

Now if (1 ) the original salmoides were definitely a complex species,
distinctly including both, we may hold its author to be a " conserva-
tive" writer, and that the subsequent restriction, like the restriction
of a genus, is a change of view or the elimination of an error. In
this case, the name salmoides should be retained, dating its priority
from its original use, and applying to the f^jyeciea pallidus.

If (2) the original salmoides be not complex, but simply uncertain,
the probabilities being undeniably in favor of its identity with
pallid us rather than with dolomiei, it should be adopted instead of
pallidus. Absolute certainty of identification can not be expected
of many names older than the present generation, and each writer
must judge for himself of the degrees of probability. If we may
express it numerically, a probability of 75 per cent, should perhaps
be sufficient, and this probability should be unquestionable — that is,
not merely subjective and varying with the mental differences of the
different writers.

If (3) the original salmoides be evidently a 3Hcroptcrus, but hope-
lessly uncertain as to the species intended, it should claim priority
from its first use for a definite species of Micropterus. If the name
pallidus intervene between its first use and its final precise use, sal-
vioides should become a synonym of jaa^/iV^iis, and should not be
available for the other species. This rule is followed more or less
consistently by most writers, and it seems to me a fair one. The
revival of hopelessly uncertain ancient specific names in place of
well-defined modern ones is productive only of confusion, and is
open to gross abuse. The revival even of well-defined but forgotten _
names is confusing enough, and it has been strongly objected to by
many writers.

SCIENTIFIC lIISTOIiY OF THE l!i>ACK EASS. 47

If (4) the iiiime sahiioides, left hopelessly uncertain by its author^
should have been definitely used for some species to which it might
not improbably have referred before the use of the name pallidiis for
the same species, it sliould be retained, dating its acceptance from
its second use, and the name jMi/lidus should be considered as a
synonym of sahnoides.

If (5) the name sahnoides sliould have been adopted by the second
author supposed in (4) for some species not a Mkropterus, or for
some species which could not reasonably be identical with the
original sahnoides, the identification sbould be taken as an erroneous
one, and should not be considered in our nomenclature.

The actual state of tlie name salmoides is that supposed under (3)
above. I do not consider the name sahnoides as rightfully entitled to
priority over either jxtUidus or dolomiei as the specific name of a
species of -Black Bass. If it must be used, however, I think it wisest
to retain it, with Professor Gill, for the small-mouthed species. For
this purpose, we must consider tl^ sahnoides of Lacepede as complex,
including both species. The case would then be that supposed by
(1) above. We must hold further that Cuvier and Valenciennes
restricted the name to the small-mouthed form. No possible settle-
ment of the case can be free from question or objection. I jDropose
to adopt the following view of the case, proposed by Dr. Gill (in
lit.), to whom I have submitted the evidence above given.

Dr. Gill remarks :

" I think we can retain our old names (i. e., Microjjterus salmoides
and Microjotenis pallidus) on the following grounds:

"(1) Let us admit that Labrus salmoides Lac. may be the small-
mouthed.

"(2) The name salmoides, it may be considered, was re-established
by Cuvier and Valenciennes for the largest specimen (the small-
mouthed, according to your observations). The description was
evidently based on that, as appears from the number of scales, the
absence of any on the preopercular limb (' le linibe de son preoper-
cule [etc.] en manquent'), and the form of the dorsal. Even if it
is certain that the figure was taken from a large-mouthed specimen,
this would not aiFect the question, inasmuch as we must accept the
description when that is definitive, and such is the case here.

" (3) It may be held that the name is further specialized by Cuvier

48 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

and Valenciennes by its use to supersede the name of Le Sueur
(p. 55), and as a substitute for M. Dolomieu (vol. v, p. 5).

"(4) The majority of the C. & V.'s specimens belonged to the
small-mouthed Bass.

" (5) The figure was based on a large-mouth simply through acci-
dence of size and condition, not selected on account of exhibition
of characters. In the same way, W3 might maintain that the type
of Pomotis vulgaris C. & V. (although the description plainly points
to Ei(pomotis aureus) was Lepomis pallidus [rather auritus'], for the
figure apparently represents such."

3. MiCROPTERUS VARIABILIS Vaillant & BocOuH.

Cichla variabilis Le Sueur, MSS.

Micropterus variabilis Vaillaut & Bocourt, MSS., Mission Scientifique au
Mexique.

This is the ordinary Northern small-mouthed Black Bass, Micro-
pterus achigan, or var. aehigan of authors, Micropterus salmoides achigan
of the present writer.

The conclusions of Professor Gill at the close of the
paper just quoted, are based, apparently, on his faith in
Cuvier and Valenciennes, superinduced, perhaps, by a
reluctance to re-open the question, and a desire to retain
our present nomenclature of the Black Bass ' s]>ecies,
for the sake of peace and harmony. If Dr. Gill's
conclusions could be sustained, and our nomenclature of
the species become universally adopted, no one would be
more gratified than the writer ; but we can not expect
peace or security until the matter is definitely, positively,
and indisputably settled, or, at least, so far as this can be
done, consistently, with the facts.

After a careful reading- of the foregoing review, it would
seem that the estimate of the Black Bass species, as enter-
tained by Dr. Vaillant, should have great weight, and
meet with profound consideration ; and it might be ques-

SCIENTIFIC HISTOEY OF THE BLACK BASS. 49

tioned whether 3Iicroptcrns dolomieu for the small-mouthed
Bass, and 3Iicropteras salmoidcs for the large-mouthed Bass,
are not more in accordance with the evidence set forth in
Professor Jordan's clear and exhaustive paper, than our
own view of the matter, based, as the latter is, upon the
conflicting testimony of Cuvier and Valenciennes, who
embraced every thing known of the Black Bass, in their
day, in their Grystes sabnoides, except Huro nigricans ; and
had it not been for the gap in its dorsal fin, the inference
is, they would have included that also. I do not make
this statement unguardedly, or disrespectfully; for while 1
venerate the name of Cuvier, I am convinced that he failed
to discriminate between the two species of Black Bass.*

T incline to the belief that Professor Jordan, with his
usual acumen, is disposed to take some such view as this,
for he says : —

" As shown below, there is little doubt that the specific
name dolomieu, is the first ever distinctly applied to our
small-mouthed Black Bass, as the name Micropterus is its
earliest generic appellation. Unless we adopt the earlier
salmoidcs, its name should, therefore, be Micropierus
dolomieu.'^

But why adopt salmoidcs for the small-mouthed Black
Bass at all? It is only synonymous with dolomieu on the
authority of Cuvier and Valenciennes. Does not the

■•■ "We are again obliged to advert to the p.artial and often the super-
ficial examination with which nearly allied species have too often been
regarded by the authors of the Hist. Nat. des Poissons; an imperfection
which we can only account for by nearly all their descriptions having
been made from preserved specimens; and by supposing that these
eminent writers, not unfrequently, have been absolutely overwhelmed
with their materials." — Swainson, Nat. Hist, and Class, of Fishes, II, 407,

1839.

5

50 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

weight of evidence favor the adoption of salmoides for the
large-mouthed Bkick Bass ? We certainly must take this
view of it if we set aside Cuvier and A^aleiiciennes' de-
scription of Gri/stcs salmoides, whether we retain their
figure (which was taken from a large-mouthed Bass) or
not, and we would be justified in excluding their descrip-
tion, for, as Professor Jordan truly says : —

"It is thus evident that Cuvier and Valenciennes com-
pletely confounded the two species under the name Grystes
salmoides, and that the uncertain salmoides of Lacepfede
became in their hands a complex species."

Now, if we discard both the description and figure of
Cuvier and Valenciennes' Grystes salmoides, we have left
(ignoring for the time both Rafinesque and Le Sueur)
only Lacepcde's Labrus salmoides and Micropterus dolomieu.

Then, let us take Bosc's figure of Labrus scdmoides, first.
Of this. Professor Jordan says : —

" In the fio-ure the mouth is drawn lar^e, and if we
must choose, the large-mouth is best represented.'^

Now, if we conclude from this that Labrus salmoides is
the large-mouthed Black Bass, then the small-mouthed
Black Bass claims its birthright of Micropterus dolomieu,
which unquestionably belongs to it.

This, in short, seems to be the view of Dr. Vaillant,
and it seems to me to be the correct one, though he takes
the figure of Grystes salmoides as additional evidence.

There is but one contingency that could prove the
right of the small-mouthed Bass to the name 3Iicropterus
dolomieu in a stronger, or absolute manner, and it would
be stronger, because incontrovertible, namelv: the jjrioriiy
of Lacepede's description of Micropterus dolomieu to his
■^lescription of Labrus salmoides.

SCIENTIFIC HISTORY OF THE BLACK BASS. 51

Now, the writer proposes to show that this is the actual
state of the case, and that Lacepede really described and
named 3Ilcropterus dolomieu, from tlie s})ecimen which is
still preserved in the Museum D'Histoire Naturelle at
Paris (and which Professor Jordan examined and declared
to be a small-mouthed Black Bass), before he described and
named Labrus salmoides from M. Bosc's drawing and de-
scription of the Carolina " Trout." ^

After reading Professor Jordan's paper, so often referred
to here, and from my personal knowledge of the Carolina
Black Bass or " Trout," I became convinced, in my own
mind, that the name Micropterus dolomieu should be re-
stored to the small-mouthed Bass, and that the name Labrus
salmoides should be restricted to the large-mouthed Bass ;
and entertaining these heretical views, I scanned closely
the literature relating to the early history of the species.

In collating the bibliography of the Black Bass for the
present work, I discovered an apparent discrepancy, which,
if it really existed, had an important and significant bear-
ing on the proper nomenclature of the species. I noticed
that most American authors, in referring to Lacepede's de-
scription of Labrus salmoides, gave the reference as " La-
cepede, Hist. Nat. des Poiss. Vol. Ill, p. TIG, 1800?",
and that of Micropterus dolomieu as " Lacepede, Hist. Nat.
des Poiss. Vol. IV, p. 325, 1800?"; thus, of course, giving
the priority to Labrus salmoides, as we have always un-
derstood and accepted it.

On the other hand, I noticed that Cuvier and Valen-
ciennes* gave the reference to LjCibrus salmoides in La-
cepede's work as " Vol. IV. p. 716, 717," and that of

® Cuv. & Val. Hist. Nat. des Poiss. Vol. Ill, p. 55, 1829, and Vol. V,
p. V, 1830.

52 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

Mlcropterus dolomieu as "Vol. IV. p. 325." I noticed
further that all references to the figure of Lacepede's Ml-
cropterus dolomieu were given as " Vol. IV, pi. 3, fig. 3,"
and that of Labrus sahnoides as "Vol. IV, pi. 5, fig. 2."
I was at once struck with this discrepancy, for if Cuvier
and Valenciennes' reference of Labrwi sahnoides Lacepedo
(Vol. IV. p. 716, 717) was correct, it would give the pri-
ority of description to 3Ilcropterus dolomieu Lacepede
(Vol. IV. p. 325). The numerical sequence of the plates
also gave it priority.

While revising this chapter of the present book for the
press, I learned from Professor Jordan that lie had just
received from France, a -copy of Lacepede's original edition
of his great work. I at once wrote to liim to ascertain
which reference to Labrus sahnoides was the correct one.
His characteristic reply was: —

"In answering your questions I have struck a mare's
nest; M. dolomieu, Vol. IV, 325, 1802; L. sahnoides, Vol.
IV, 716, 1802; the latter being in a supplement, which, in
some of the reprints, is restored to its proper place in the
genus Labrus in Vol. III. From this you will see that
dolomieu has priority over sahnoides. I still believe that
sahnoides was intended for the large-mouthed Bass, but
don't know that I can prove it."

Thus, after the lapse of four-fifths of a century, the
small-mouthed Black Bass has recovered the name to which
it is clearly entitled, Mlcropterus dolomieu; truth and
justice have prevailed; Lacepede and his illustrious friend
Dolomieu have been vindicated.

And now let us inquire as to Labrus sahnoides* This,

" Certain it is, however, that Lacepede's Ichthyology will always be a

SCIENTIFIC IIISTOKY OF THE BLACK BASS. 53

as we know, was the name applied by Lacepede to Bosc's
drawing and description of the Carolina "Trout."

It has never been definitely settled which species of
Black Bass was best represented by the drawing or its de-
scription ; but I think this vagueness existed more in the
imagination than in realty, and that "the wish was father
to that thought ; " or, in other words, that we were willfully
blind in deference to authority ; for, as Cuvier had identi-
fied it with his Grystcs salmoides (which we have supposed
to be the small-mouthed Bass, inasmuch as he included,
also, Cichia variabilis Le Sueur, and llicropferus dolomieu
as synonyms), Labrus salmoides must, therefore, either be
pronounced a small-mouthed Bass, or be invested with suf-
ficient ambiguity to admit of its becoming synonymous
with Grystes salmoides.

On the other hand, Dr. Vaillant, as we have seen, main-
tains that Cuvier and Valenciennes' Grystes salmoides is
the large-mouthed Bass, and therefore truly synonymous
with Labrns salmoides, he claiming the latter to be the
large-uKHithed Black Bass. Viewed in either light, Grystes
salmoides Cuv. and Val. is a crux criticorum', but fortu-
nately it is not essential to us now.

Let us take Lacepede's figure and description of Labrus
salmoides, just as they are, on their own merits, without
any reference to Cuvier's valuation of them ; and to render

standard authority, even for his supposed errors ; and it will be found by
those who have occasion to consult them, that he is by no means charge-
able with several that have been of late attributed to him. The figures,
on the other hand, although well engraved, are, in general, very deficient
in accuracy ; the major part being either copies, or drawn by artists who
were totally ignorant of the scientific details of their subject." — Swain-
son, Ned. Hist, and Qass. of Fishes, I, 59, 1838.

54 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

the matter plain, I have reproduced, at the close of this
chapter, /((c-simile representations of, Lacepede's plates of
both Labrtis salmoides -dnd Micropterus dolomieu, with his de-
scriptions, from the original edition of his " Histoire Xat-
iirelle des Poissons."

In the first place, as Professor Jordan says of the figure
of Labrus salmoides: " if we must choose, the large-mouth
is best represented." This is reasonably correct, for no
one could mistake this figure for a small-mouthed Black
Bass. Then, Lacepede's description says the opening of
the mouth is veri/ larc/e ("I'ouverture de la bouche fort
large "). The radial formula of the dorsal fin is given as
nine spinous rays and thirteen soft rays (" neuf rayons
aiguillones et treize rayons articules a. la nageoire du
dos"). This number of dorsal spines will hold good
in seventy-five per cent, of cases, in the large-mouthed Bass
of the South ; sometimes there will be found but eight.
The rest of the description will apply to either species.
Then, again, Lace})ede, on the authority of M. Bosc, says the
species is very abundant in the rivers of Carolina, where
they are called " Trout," and are caught with the hook
baited with a minnow ('* On trouve un tres-grande nonibre
d'indivdus de cette espece dans toutes les rivieres de la
Caroline ; on leur donne le nom de traut ou truite. On les
prend a I'harae^on ; on les attire par le moyen de morceaux
de cyj^rin").

Now, if we had not been trying to reconcile Labrus
salmoides with the small-mouthed Bass, contrary to the
evidence of our own senses, so as to accord with Cuvier's
creation of the complex Grt/stes salmoides — becoming blind
to the points of difference and enlarging upon the vague-
ness and inaccuracy of the drawing and its description — we

SCIENTIFIC HISTORY OF THE BLACK BASS 55

might have discovered that this figure had, as Lacepede
says, a " very large mouth ; " and tliat while the large-
mouthed Black Bass, .or "Trout" is ^^ very abundant" in
Carolina waters, the small-mouthed BlacK Bass is appar-
ently unknown, at least in the vicinity of Charleston,
where Bosc collected.

As an angler, I have fished fi^r the Black Bass in all the
South Atlantic States, from Maryland to Florida ; and
while I have found the large-mouthed Bass " very abun-
dant " in all parts of North Carolina, South Carolina, and
Georgia, I never took a single small-mouthed Bass in either
of these latter states within a hundred miles of the coast.
I have taken it in the hill-country of each of these states,
about the head- waters of the rivers flowing into the At-
lantic, but I doubt very much if it is found anywhere in
the lowland region of that section of country.

Professor E. D. Cope, who fished the streams of North
Carolina, in the autumn of 1869, from the Cumberland
Mountains to the sea, found the large-mouthed Bass,
"abundant in all the rivers of the state," but failed to find
the small-mouthed Bass, except in the Alleghany region of
the extreme, western part of the state ; and says that it is
" apparently not found east of the great Water-shed."*

If the small-mouthed Black Bass inhabits the Atlantic
slopes of North Carolina, South Carolina, or Georgia, Dr.
Holbrook would have known it; for there has been no
ichthyologist before or since his time, who understood the
structure and habits of the " Carolina Trout " so well, or
caught more of them. The best description, and the best

* A Partial Synopsis of the Fresh Water Fishes of North Carolina.
By E. D. Cope, A.M. <Pro. Am. Phil. Soc., p. 450, 1870.

56 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

figure of the large-mouthed Bass (Trout) ever published, is
found in his work (Ichthyology of South Carolina).

In order to show that he clearly miderstood the relations
of the Black Bass species, I will quote as follows: — "The
Trout has, however, its representatives both in the North
and West, with which it is closely allied : as Grystes JSi-
gricojis (Hiiro nigr'iGans) of Cuvier and Valenciennes, and
Grystes fasciatus [Cychla fasciata) of Le Sueur, both of
which have been referred by Agassiz to the genus Grystes."*
Dr. Holbrook knew that the southern Trout (large-mouthed
Black Bass) was neither Huro nigricans (with its two dis-
tinct dorsal fins), nor Gichla fasciata (the small-mouthed
Bass). He called the " Trout " Grystes salmoides Lace-
PEDE, for he knew that Lacepede's Labrus salmoides, or
Bosc's Perca trutta could be nothing else but the " Caro-
lina Trout " (large-mouthed Black Bass) ; and, moreover,
he distinctly repudiated Cuvier and Valenciennes' complex
Grystes salmoides.

Professor Agassiz clearly recognized the complex char-
acter of Cuvier's Grystes salmoides, saying he "probably
mistook specimens of our Grystes fasciatus for the south-
ern species. "f Professor Agassiz regarded Grystes sal-
moides as the projDcr name for the southern large-mouthed
Black Bass (Trout), and in comparing with it Grystes fas-
ciatus Agassiz, says: "The mouth is less opened and the
shorter labials do not reach a vertical line drawn across
the hinder margin of the orbits, whilst they exceed such
a line in G. salmoides" %

•■■■ Ichthyology of South Carolina. By John Edwards Holbrook, M.D.
25, 1855. '
t Agassiz, Lake Superior, p. 295, 1850.
X Agassiz, Lake Superior, p. 295, 1850.

SCIENTIFIC HISTORY OF THE BEACK BASS. 57

And yet wc have deceived ourselves, with all this evi-
dence staring us in the face, with the flimsy delusion that
Bosc's drawing of the ''Carolina Trout" was a small-
mouthed Bass, simj)ly because Cuvier pronounced it sy-
nonymous with Cichla variabilis Le Sueur and 3Hcvopterus
dolomieu Lacepede.

Presuming that I have proved the names 3Iicroptcrus
dolomieu for the small-mouthed Black Bass, and MicropteruH
salmoides for the large-mouthed Black Bass to be rightly
bestowed, and the names by which the two species should
hereafter be designated, perhaps it will be well to refer to
some objections heretofore raised to the generic appellation
Mieropterus, and the specific titles salmoides and dolomieu,
on the score of irrelevancy. I can do no better than to
refer the reader to Professor Jordan's paper on this sub-
ject, on page 31. I might add, however, that jiTiority, like
charity, covers a multitude of sins.*

MiGroptevus (little-fin) is really less objectionable than
any of the names yet proposed for the genus, for it has,
comparatively, smaller fins than any of the related genera.

Calliurus (beautiful tail) is not at all characteristic of
the genus, though the young of the small-mouthed species,
in certain localities, has the tail marked as described by
E-afinesque : " base yellow, middle blackish, tip white."

Grystes (growler) is certainly not applicable in this sense.

*" To those anglers who are better posted in the technical terms of the
great American "game" introduced to the nobility of England by Gen-
eral Schenck, than in the technical terms introduced here in reference to
the nomenclature of the great American "game-fish," I need only say
that Miewpterus, and the specific names dolomieu and salmoides, " hold the
age" over all other synonyms that have taken a hand, from time to time,
in the "little game." This comparison may be more striking than ana-

58 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

I have never met an angler who had heard a Black Bass
" growl/' yet it was on the supposition that it did so,
that Cuvier gave it this name. We had better stop here,
for if we go farther w^e shall fare worse. We will there-
fore now refer to the objectionable features of the specific
names dolomieu and salmoides.

Salmoides (trout-like; literally, salmon-like). Lacepede
conferred this name simply (and appropriately, so far as he
was concerned) because the figure was sent to him as the
"Trout/' or "Trout-Perch" of Carolina; (he might have
called it boseii. It is my belief that if he had received
Bosc's drawing prior to his specimen — 31. dolomieu — he
would have named it — the drawing — Lahrus dolomieu.) If
we take its game qualities into consideration, there is no
fish that is so " salmon-like " as the Black Bass; none that
exhibits so nearly the characteristic leap, the pluck, and
the endurance of the " king of the waters." The name is,
therefore, not altogether inappropriate.

Dolomieu being a French proper noun, without a Latin
or genitive form, might be considered objectionable,
liacepede used the name, however, in this form, advisedly;
not through ignorance, nor by accident, but for the sake of
euphony, and to perpetuate the name of his friend in its
integrity. In the original edition of his work he uses the
French form dolomieu, but has the Latin form as a foot-
note under each specific heading; while in many of the re-
prints the editor has left out these Latin names as irrelevant.

In order to recognize and respect Lacepede's motive, it
is best to let the name stand just as he wrote it, dolomieu.

logical, but as Jack Bunsbj would say, its force "lies in the application
of it."

SCIENTIFIC HISTORY OF THE BLACK BASS. 59

As Dr. Vaillant acl()})ts this form, and doubtless for the
same reason, it is important for the sake of uniformity to
allow it to stand. There is no lack of precedents for this
form of specific title. I will merely mention as an exam-
ple: Icterus baltimore — the Baltimore oriole. The title
baltimorc, as here used, is a proper noun, and was bestowed
in honor of Lord Baltimore, whose livery was black and
orange^ the colors of the oriole or hanging-bird. Let the
name of the small-mouthed Bass, then, stand as dolomieu —
the name of a brave man for a brave fish.

60

BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

IVJICROPTERE DOLOMrCU.

(This engraving is a facsimile of that in Lac(^pMe'.s Hist. Nat. des Poissons,
Vol. IV, pi. 3, flg. 3.)

Le Microptere DOLOMIEU.*

Je desire que le nom de ce poisson, qu'aucun naturaliste n'a encore
decrit, rappelle ma tendre amitie et ma profonde cstime pour rillus-
tre Dolomieu, dont la victoire vient de brlser les fers. En ecrivant
mon Discours sur la duree des especes, j'ai exprime la vive douleur
que m'inspiroit son affreuse captivite, et Tadmiration pour sa con-
stance heroique, que I'Europe meloit a ses vceux jwur lui. Qu'il
m'est doux de ne pas terminer I'immense tableau que je taclie
d'esquisser, sans avoir sente le bonlieur de le serrer de nouveau dans
mes bras !

Les micropteres ressemblent beaucoup aux scienes : mais la peti-
tesse tres-remarquable de leur seconde nageoire dorsale les en separe;
et c'est cette petitesse que designs le nom generique que je leur ai
donne.f

La collection du Museum national d'liistoire naturelle renferme
un bel individu de I'espece que nous decrivons dans cette article.
Cette espece, qui est encore la seule inscrite dans le nouveau genre
des micropteres, que nous avons cru devoir etablir, a les deux

'■■ Micropterus dolomieu.

f Mi.Kpo5, eu grec, signifie petit.

SCIENTIFIC IIISTOllY OF THE BLACK BASS. 61

machoires, le palais et la langue, garnis d'uii trC'S-grand nombre de
rangees de dents petite, crochues et serrees; la langue est d'ailleurs
tivs libre dans ses niouvemens; et la niachoire inferieure plus avan-
cee que celle d'en-haut. La membrane branchiale disparoit entiLre-
ment sons I'opercule, qui presente deux pieces, dont la premiere est
arrondie dans son contour, et la seconde anguleuse. Get opercule
est convert de plusieurs ecailles; celles de dos sont assez grandes et
arrondies. La hauteur du corps proprement dit excede de beaucoup
cclle de I'origine de la queue. La ligne laterale se plie d'abord vers
le bas, et se reldve ensuite pour suivre la courbure du dos. Les
nageoires pectorales et celle de I'anus sont tres-arroiidies ; la premiere
du dos ne commence qu'il une assez grande distance de la queue.
EUe cesse d'etre attachee au dos de I'animal, a I'endroit oil elle par-
vient au-dessus de I'anale ; mais elle ce prolonge en bande pointue et
flottante jusqu'au-dessus de la seconde nageoire dorsale, qui est tres-
basse et trCs-petite, ainsi que nous venons de le dire, et que I'on
croiroit au premier coup d'ceil entierement adipeuse.* — (Lacepede,
Hist. Nat. des Foiss. Vol. IV, 325, 1802.)

= 5 rayons & la membrane branchiale.
10 rayons a chaqne pectorale.

1 rayon aiguillonne et 5 rayons articul^s d, chaque thoracine.
17 rayons a la nageoire de la queue.
— [D. X, 7-4; A. II, IL]

62

BOOK OP THE BLACK BASS.

LABRE SALMOIDE.

(Tliis engraving is a facsimile from Lac^pfede's Hist. Nat. des Poissons, Vol.
IV, pi. 5, flg. 2.)

Le LaBKE SALMOIDE.*

On devra au citoyen Bosc la connoissance du labre salmoide et du
labre iris, qui tous les deux habitent dans les eaux de la Caroline.

Le salmoide a une petite elevation sur le nez; I'ouverture de la
bouche fort large; la macboire inferieure un peu plus longue que la
sup^rieure : I'une ct I'autre garnies d'une grande quantite de dents
tres-menues; la langue cbarnue; le palais lierisse de petites dents
que Ton voit disposees sur deux rangees et sur une plaque triangu-
laire ; le gosier situe au-dessus et au-dessous de deux autres plaque
ogalement berissees; I'oeil grand; les cotes de la tete, revetus de
petite ccailles; la ligne laterale parallele au dos; une fossette
propre a recevoir la partie anterieure de la dt)rsale ; les deux tho-
racines reunies nar une membrane; I'iris jaune, et le ventre blanc.

On trouve un t res grand nombre d'individus de cette espece dans
toutes les rivieres de la Caroline; on leur donne le nom de traui on
tniite. On les prend a I'bamecon ; on les attire par le moyen de
morceaux de eyprin. lis parviennent a la longueur de six ou sept
d''cimetres; leur cbair est fernie, et d'un goiit tres-agreable. — [Br. 6;
D. IX, 13; A. 13; P. 13; Y. G; C. 18.]— (Lacepede, Hist. Nat. des
Polss. Vol. IV, 716, 1802.)

'■' Labrus sal moid es.
Perca trutta. Manuscriis communiques par le citoyen Bosc.

CHAPTER II.

NOMENCLATURE AND MOEPHOLOGY.

Class PISCES.

Subclass TEIjEOSTEI.

Oeder ACANTHOPTERI.

Suborder PEROOMORPHI.

Family CENTRARCHID^.

SuBFA3irLY MIOROPTEEIE"^.

Genus MICROPTERUS Lac^pede.

SYNONOMY.

Micropterus Lacepede, Hist. Nat. des Poiss. IV, 325, 1802.
(Type M. dolomieu Lac.)

Labrus species, Lacepede, Hist. Nat. des Poiss. IV, 716, 1802.
(L. salmoides Lac.) (Not of Linnaeus, the type Labrus
mixtus L. belonging to the family of Labridce, the com-
mon wrasse-fish of the coasts of Europe.)
6 (65)

66 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

Bodiamis species, Rafinesque, Am. Mo. Mag. and Crit. Rev.

II, 120, 1817. (B. achigan Raf.) (Not of Bloch, the

type of Bodiamis, being a marine fish of the family

of Serranidce.)
Callmrus Rafinesque, Jour, de Phys. V, 88, 420, June, 1819,

and Ich. Ohi. 26, 1820. (Not of Agassiz, Girard,

etal.) (Type C. 2iundidatus Jiaf.)
Lepomis Rafinesque, Ich. Olii. 30, 1820. (Not Lepomis Raf.

Jour, de Phys. II, 50, 1819, the original type Labrus

auritus L. being a fresh water sunfish.)
Aplites Rafinesque, Ich. Ohi. 30, 1820. (As subgenus of Le-

pomis. Type L. pallidus Raf.)
Nemoeampm Rafinesque, Ich. Ohi. 31, 1820. (As subgenus

of Lepomis. Type L. fiexuolaris Raf. )
DiopUtes Rafinesque, Ich. Ohi. 32, 1820. (As subgenus of

Lepomis. Tyj^e L. sahnonea Raf.)
Aplesion Rafinesque, Ich. Ohi. 36, 1820. (As subgenus of

Etheostoma. Type E. calliura Raf.)
Cichla species, Le Sueur, Jour. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. II, 216,

1822. (C. fasciata Le S.) (Not of Cuvier, the type

CifJda ocellarls Bloch, being a South American fresh

water fish of the family of Cichlidce.)
Huro CuYiER & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. des Poiss. II, 124,

1828. (Type H. nigricans C. & V.)
Orystes Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. des Poiss. HI,

54, 1829. (Type Labriis salmoides Lac.)
Sura SwAiNSON, Nat. Hist, and Class. Fishes, etc., II, 200,

1839.
Orystes Swainson, Nat. Hist, and Class. Fishes, etc., II, 202,

1839.
Centrarchus species, Kirtland, Bost. Jour. Nat. Hist. V, 28,

1842. (C fasciatus K.) (Not of Cuvier, the tyj^e

Lahrus irideus Lac, being a fresh water sunfish.)

NOMENCLATURE AND MORPHOLOGY. 67

Centmrchiis species, DeKay, Fishes N. Y. 28, 1842. (C. fas-

ciatus DeK.)
Grystes Agassiz, Am. Jour. Sci. and Arts. (2), XVII, 297,

1854.
Dioplites Gieaed, U. S. Pac. R. R, Surv. X, Fishes, 4, 1858.
Micropterus Cope, Pro. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. 83, 1865. (Name

only.)
Micropterus Gill, Ann. Rep. Dept. Agric. 407, 1866.
Micropterus Gill, Pro. Am. Asso. Adv. Sci. XXII, B. 55,

1873.
Dioplites Vaillant & Bocourt MSS. Miss. Sci. au Mexique,

1874.
Suro Bleeker, Syst. Perc. Revis. <Ext. des Arc. Neer. XI,

15, 1875.
Micropterus Bleeker, Syst. Perc. Revis. <Ext. des Arc. Neer.

XI, 15, 1875.
Micropterus Jordan, Ann. N. Y. Lye. Nat. Hist. XI, 313,

1877.
Micropterus Jordan, Man. Vert. E. U. S. 229, 1876; and 2d

ed. 232, 1878.
Micropterus Jordan, Pro. U. S. Nat. Mus. II, 218, 1880.
Micropterus Vaillant & Bocourt, Miss. Sci. au Mexique : ined.

Etymology: ftt/fpd? (^nikros), small; -^tfpov (^piteron), fin.
Type : Micropterus dolomieu Lacepede.

Head well developed, its length varying from 3 to 3J
times in length of body ; compressed ; rather full between
the eyes; snout rounded; j^rofile straight; lower jaw
prominent and projecting. Scales on cheek, opercle,
subopercle, and interopercle, but none, or few, on the pre-
opercle. Eye moderately large, nearly median, but rather
nearer the snout than the preopercle. Nostrils round and
normal.

68 BOOK OP THI-: BLACK BASS.

Mouth large, with the cleft oblique ; the posterior ex-
tremity of tlie upper jaw extends nearly to, or beyond, the
posterior border of the eye. Lips but slightly developed.
Preoperele smooth and rounding at its angle. Opercle
nearly triangular, emarginate behind, ending in two flat
]3oints. Snbopercle extends beyond the opercle, ending in
a membranous point. Interopercle rounded below\ Gill
openings large. Branch! ostegals six on each side. Scales
on all of the opercular apparatus, except on the preoper-
cular limb, where there are none, or very few.

Both jaws are armed with pointed, sharp, card-like teeth,
curving backward. Patches of villiform teeth on vomer,
palatine and pharyngeal bones. Gill-rakers long and
stout, and armed with teeth. Tongue m.oderate and free ;
thick behind, narrow in front; its surface usually smooth.

Body elongate, ovate-fusiform, somewhat compressed;
deepest just behind the ventrals. Scales moderate; smaller
on breast and nape. Lateral line following curve of the
back.

Dorsal fin with ten spines; a deep notch between the
spinous and soft portions. Anal fin with three spines.
Caudal emarginate.

Pyloric coeca fourteen or more. Air-bladder simple,
slightly notched behind.

Generic Characterizations.

MrcROPTERUS Lacepede, 1802. — " Uu ou plusiers aiguillons,
et point de dentelure aux opercules; uu barbillon, ou point de
bai'hillon aux machoires ; deux nageoires dorsales ; la seconde
tres-basse, tres-cnurte, et comprenant au plus cinq rayons." —
(Lacepede, Hid. Nat. des Poiss. IV, 325, 1802.)

Calliurus Rafinesque, 1819. — "Corps oblong comprime.
Tete et opercules ecailleux, preopercule lisse, a 3 sutures care-

NOMENCLATURE AND MORPHOLOGY. 09

nees reunies en angle superieurenient, opercule posterieur a
epine .sur un appendice niembraneux angiileux. Bouche tres-
fendue, machoires a grandes dents, sans levres, rinferieure pro-
longee. Una nageoire dorsale depriniee au confluent des rayons
epineux. Nageoires thoraciques a 5 rayons dont 1 epineux.
Anus au mileu. A genre differe priiicipalenient du genre EtJte-
odoina par la forme du corps de la bouche et I'opercule ecailleux.
C. pioictidatas. Olivatre, parseme de points noirs tres, rap-
proches, ligne laterale pen courbee; queue bilobee, Jaune a la
base noire au milieu, blanche au bout. D. \^, A. y^^^, P. 15,
C. 24. Noms vulgaires de I'Ohio, Black-perch et Fine-tail." —
(Rafinesque, Jonr. de Physique, V, 88, 420, June, 1819.)

Calliukus Raflnesque, 1820. — " Body elongate, compressed,
scaly ; fore part of the head without scales, neck and gill-covers
scaly ; mouth large with strong teeth in both jaws, and without
lips. Gill-cover double, preopevcule divided downwards into
three curved and carinated sutures, without serrature; ojDercule
with an acute and membranaceous appendage, before Avhich
stands a flat spine. One dorsal fin, spiny anteriorly, depressed
in the middle. Anal fin with sj^iny rays, thoracic with none,
and only five soft rays. Vent nearly medial.

The generic name means fine-tail. It diflJers principally from
the genus Holocentrus, by the head, scaly gill-cover and singular
preopercule : genus 12 of my 70 new genera of American ani-
mals."—(Rafinesque, Ich. Ohi. 26, 1820.)

Lepomis Rafinesque, 1820. — "This genus differs from Holo-
centrus by having the opercule scaly, from Calliurus by the
opercule only being sucli, while the preopercule is simple and
united above with a square suture over the head, besides the
thoracic fins with 6 rays. Perhaps the CaUmrus ought only to
be a subgenus of this. From the G. IdJielis it differs by the
large mouth and spines on the opercule.

The name means scaly gills. The species are numerous
throughout the United States. They are permanent ; but ram-
blers in the Ohio and tributary streams. They are fishes of

70 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

prey, and easily caught with the hook. I shall divide them
into two subgenera, I had wrongly blended this genus and the
Idheli under the name Lepomls. 13. G. of my Prodr. N. G."
— (Rafixesque, Ich. Ohi. 30, 1820.)

Aplites Rafinesque, 1820. — " Only one flat spine on the
opercule decurrent in a small medial opercule : first ray of tlie
thoracic fins, soft or hardly s])iny. Meaning, single weapon."
— (Rafinesque, Ich. Ohi. 30, 1820.)

Nemocampsis Rafinesque, 1820. — "This fish [Lepomisy?e.rMO-
laris] might perhaps form another subgenus, by the large month,
head without upper sutures, s-piue hardly decurrent, nearly
equal jaws, gill-covers, lateral line, etc. Its tail and pre-
opecule are somewhat like CalUurus. It might be called Xe-
mocavipsis, meaning flexuose line." — (Rafinesque, Ich. Ohi. 31,
1820.)

DiOPLiTES Rafinesque, 1820. — " Opercule with two spines
above. Fiist ray of the thoracic fins spiny. Lateral line
curved as the back. Meaning two weaj)ons." — (Rafinesque,
Ich. Ohi. 32, 1820.)

Etheostoma Rafinesque, 1820.—" Body nearly cylindrical
and scaly. Mouth variable with small teeth. Gill cover
double or triple unserrate, with a spine on the oj^ercule and
without scales. Six branchial rays. Thoracic fins with six
rays, one of which is spiny. No appendage. One dorsal fin
more or less divided in two parts, the anterior one with entirely
spiny rays. Vent medial or rather anterior.

A singular new genus, of which I have already detected five
species, so different from each other that they might form as
many subgenera. Yet they agree in the above characters, and
differ from the genus Sciena by the shape of the body and
mouth, and the divided dorsal fin. The name means different
mouths. I divide it into two subgenera. They are all very
small fishes, hardly noticed, and only employed for bait; yet
they are good to eat, fried, and may often be taken with

NOMENCLATURE AND MORPHOLOGY. 71

baskets at the falls and mill races. They feed on worms and
spawn." — (Kafinesque, Ich. Ohi. 35, 1820.)

Aplesion Rafiuesque, 1820. — (As subgenus of Etheostoma.)
"Dorsal fin single, sj^lit in the middle. INIeaning nearly
simple."— (RafixNesque, Ich. Ohi 36, 1820.)

HuRO Cuvier and Valenciennes, 1828. — " Nous croyons pou-
voir donner ce uom a un poisson que M. Richardson a pris re-
cemment dans le lac Huron, et qui aurait tons les caracteres de
la perche, s'il ne mauquait de dentelures aux os de la tete et de
I'epaule, et specialement au preopercule, qui n'en manque
presque dans aucune espece de cette famille.

" Less Anglais des environs de ce lac I'appellent black-bass ou
l^erche noire, parce qu'il ressemble en effet assez pour le port et
pour les teintes a un autre poisson qui jDorte le merae nom aux
Etats-Unis, et que nous decrirons plus loin dans notre genre
centropriste, auquel il appartient." — (Cuvier and Valen-
ciennes, Hist. Nat. des Poiss. II, 124, 1828.)

Grystes Cuvier and Valenciennes, 1829. — " Comme il y a
des poissons qui, avec tons les caracteres des serrans, manquent
de dentelures au preopercule, il y en a aussi qui joignent cette
integrite de preopercule a tous les caracteres des centropristes.
lis sont a ces derniers ce que les bodians de Bloch etaient a ?es
holocentres ; et si nous ne reunissons pas les Grystes et les cen-
tropristes en un seul genre, comme nous avons reuni les bodians
et les holocentres dans notre genre serran, c'est que nous ne
trouvons pas entre eux les memes passages insensibles." —
(Cuvier and Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. des Poiss. Ill, 54,
1829.)

HuRO Swainson, 1839. — " Preoperculum entire; body fusi-
form, but broad in the middle ; head large ; mouth oblique, sub-
vertical, large; lower jaw longest; chin projecting; dorsal fin,
distinct, the first smallest; caudal emargiuate." — (Swainson,
Nat. Hist, and Class. Fishes, II, 200, 1839.)

Grystes Swainson, 1839. — "Dorsal fin almost divided into

72 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

two, the anterior or spinous division shortest, the posterior
lobed ; preopereukim smooth ; moutli large, sub-vertical ; lower
jaw largest ; caudal emarginate ; sides of the head sealed ; pec-
toral and ventrals small; anal fin shorter than the hind part of
the dorsal. Representing Huro in the circle of Percinae." —
(SwAiNSON, Nat. Hist, and Clcuis. Fishes, II, 202, 1839.)

Grystes Agassiz, 1854. — "I have already shown in my
* Lake Superior ' that the genera Grystes and Huro of Cuvier
do not differ essentially one from the other, and must therefore
be united into one natural group ; moreover, when the fishes of
Kentucky shall be better known, it may ])ecome necessary to
substitute for either of them the name of Lepomis, introduced in
ichthyology by Rafinesque, as early as the year 1820, for the
western species of this genus. If I hesitate to make the change
now, it is simply because I have not the means of deciding
upon the value of his many species. The species of this group
are indeed very difficult to characterize. They differ chieffy in
the relative size of their scales, the presence or absence of teeth
upon the tongue, though Cuvier denies the presence of teeth on
the tongue of any of them, etc. There are, besides, marked
differences between the young and the adults. These circum-
stances render it impossible to characterize any one species
without comparative descriptions and figures." — (Agassiz, Am.
Jour. Sci. and Arts, (2), XVII, 297, 1854.)

Grystes Hoi brook, 1855. — " Dorsal fin single, though deej)ly
notched; intermaxillary, maxillary, vomerine and palatine
teeth small and thickly set, or card-like ; preopercle not ser-
rated ; branchiostegal rays, seven." * — (Holbrook, Iclithy. Sou.
Car. 25, 1855.)

DiOPLiTES Girard, 1858.—" Body elongated, sub-fusiform in
profile, compressed. Head Avell developed. Preopercle smooth
and entire. Mouth large ; lower jaw longest. Velvet-like teeth

* " Sometimes there are but six raji^."— Holbrook.

NOMENCLATURE AND MORPHOLOGY. 73

on the jaws, front of vomer, and palatine bones. Tono-ue
smooth. Cheeks and opercular ajjparatus scaly. Branchial
apertures continuous under the throat. Two dorsal fins contig-
uous upon their base. Three small anal spines. Insertion of
ventrals on a line immediately behind the base of pectorals.
Caudal fin posteriorly sub-cresentic. Scales well developed and
posteriorly ciliated." — (Girard, U. S. Pac. R. R. Surv. X,
Fishes, 4, 1858.)

Grystes Giinther, 1859. — " Six or seven branchiostegals.
All the teeth villiform without canines ; teeth on the palatine
bones ; tongue smooth. One dorsal, with ten spines, the anal
fin with three. Operculum with two points, prseoperculum with
a single smooth-edged ridge. Scales moderate. The number
of the pyloric appendages increased. Air-bladder simple,
slightly notched behind." — (GiJNTHER, Gat. Fishes Brit. 3Ii(S. I,
252, 1859.)

HuRO Giinther, 1859. — " Six branchiostegals. All the teeth
villiform, without canines; palatine bones ?; tongue ? Two
dorsals, the first with six, the anal fin with three spines. No
denticulations on the bones of the head; operculum with two
flat obtuse points. Scales moderate." — (Gunther, Cat. Fishes
Brit. Mus. I, 255, 1859.)

MiCROPTERUS Gill, 1873. — "Body ovate-fusiform, compressed,
deepest behind the ventrals, with the caudal peduncle elongated,
scarcely contracted towards the base of the fin.

"Scales small or moderate; quadrate, rather higher than
long, with the exposed portion densely muricated, rounded
behind and about twice as high as long ; with the fan with few
(4-9) folds ; extending to the nape and throat.

"Lateral line regularly parallel with the back, in scales
nearly like but smaller than the adjoining ones.

"Head compressed and oblong conic, with the low^er jaw
prominent and the profile rectilinear ; Avith scales (more or less
smaller than those of the trunk) on the cheeks, operculum, sub-
7

74 BOOK OP TPIE BLACK BASS.

operculum and interoperculum ( (1) none or (2) few on the pr©^
operculum); operculum ending in a flattened point {s2:)ine) aud
with the border above it eraarginated; suboj)erculum with a
pointed membrane extending beyond (behind and above) the
opercular spine ; jDreoperculum entire. Eyes moderate, about
equidistant from the snout and preoperculum ; notrils normal ;
anterior with a posterior lid ; posterior i^atulous.

"Mouth, with the cleft moderately oblique, large (the supra-
maxillary (1) nearly to or (2) beyond the vertical of the pos-
terior border of the eye). Supramaxillary with the accessory
ossicle well developed. Lips : upper, little develoj^ed ; lower,
moderate on the sides, but separated by a very wide isthmus.

" Tongue moderate and free.

"Teeth on the jaws in a broad band, acute, curved back-
wards, and increasing in size towards inner rows ; on the vomer,
palatines and j^terygoids, villiform.

" Branchiostegal rays six (exceptionally seven) on each side.

"Dorsal with its origin behind the axil of the ventral; (1)
its spinous portion longer but much lower than the soft portion,
with ten spines more or less graduated before as well as behind,
and the ninth much shorter than the tenth ; (2) the soft portion
well developed.

"Anal with its base shorter than the soft portion of the
dorsal, nearly coterminal with it, with three spines, of which the
third is much the longest.

" Caudal emarginated aud with obtuse lobes.

' ' Pectorals and ventrals normal.

" This enumeration of the characters common to the known
forms of the genus has been drawn up with a view to exhibit
the features differentiating the genus from the other representa-
tives of the family Pomotidse. The difference indicated by the
general expression is coordinated with the greater distance of
the eye from the preoperculum, the armature of the operculum,
*he peculiar form of the dorsal and the relatively small size of

N()MEX(;r.ATURE AND MORIMIOLOGy. 75

the anal fin. The ehicidation of the anatomical characters of
the genus and comparison thereof with those of other genera
are reserved for a future occasion when the distinctive features
can he illustrated." — (Gill, Ptoc. Am. Asso. Adv. ScL XXII,
B. 55, 1873.)

Phalanx Grysteini (^^Mkropterinie Gill.) Bleeker, 1875. —
*' Perca3 formes corpore oblongo vel subelongato, capita superne
squamato vel Isevi ; dentibus maxillis ; vomerinis et palatinis
parvis ; prajoperculo edentulo inermi ; squamis trunco parvis
vel mediocribus sessilibus ; anali spini 3." (Bleeker, Sydema
Percarum Pevisum <^E.vtrait des Archives Neerlandaises, XI, 15
1875.)

HuRO Bleeker, 1875. — "Corpus oblongum. Caput vertice,
regione temporali, genis ossibusque opercularibus tantum squama-
tum. Squamaj trunco cycloideaj ? 65 circ. in serie longitudinali.
Piunpe dorsales non continute, anterior radiosa brevier spinis 6." —
(Bleeker, Sjjst. Perc. Pevis. <^Ext. des Archiv. Neerland. XI,
15, 1875.)

MiCROPTERUs Bleeker, 1875. — "Corpus oblongum. Caput
genis ossibusque opercularibus tantum squamatum. Squamte
trunco ctenoideffi 90 circ. in serie longitudinali. Pinna dorsalis
parte spinosa et parte radiosa continuis subsequilongis, spinis 9
vel 10." — (Bleeker, Syd. Perc. Pevis. <^Ext. des Archiv.
Neerland. XI, 15, 1875.)

MiCROPTERUs Jordan, 1878. — "Body elongate, not greatly
compressed ; spines little developed, those of the anal fin, three
in number, small and weak ; those of the dorsal, ten, low, the
eighth and ninth quite short, so that there is a deep notch be-
tween the spinous and soft parts of the dorsal, almost breaking
the continuity of the fin ; caudal emarginate ; operculum emar-
ginate behind, ending in two flat points ; mouth very large, the
lower jaw longest; palatine teeth well developed; tongue and
pterygoids toothless ; gill-rakers long and stout, armed with
teeth ; supplemental maxillary bone well developed." — (Jordan,
Man. Vert E.U. S., 2d ed.,'233, 1878.)

76 . BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

MiCEOPTERUS Vaillant & Bocourt : ined.

' ' Perco'ides a ventrales thoraciques ; six ou sept rayons,
branchiosteges, ime seule dorsale, occupant la plus grande partie
de la longueur du dos, avec la portion epineuse munie normale-
ment de dix epines ; anales presentant trois epines croisant en
longeur de la premiere a la troisieme et a peu pres d'egal ibrce;
toutes les dents en velours; preopercule a bord lisse, angle
operculaire en pointe arrondie ne formant pas une veritable
epine. Ecailles raediocrement nombreuses, ctenoides, polys-
tiques.

"Ce' genre, ainsi delimite, ne comprend qu'un petit nombre
d'especes proi^res aux cours d'eau de I'Amerique septentrionale.

"Les ecailles sont ctenoides, mais en general les spinules sont
ou rudimentaires ou incompletement developpes ; les variations,
que nous avons pu saisir, sont les suivantes. Tantot les spinu-
les ne sont nettement calcifiees que sur une zone jilus ou moins
etroite, bordant la portion libre de I'ecaille et le reste de I'aire
3pinig^.re n'est qu' indistinctenient hispide. Cette zone pent se
reduire sur ses parties laterales et n'occuper que I'extreniite
de I'ecaille. D'autre fois le bord libre est sans spinules et celle
ci ne ce rencontrent que vers le foyer dans un espace triangu-
laire formant la partie centri2:)ete d'un secteur; c'est sur le
Microptcrus variabilis, Le Sueur, que nous avons particulierement
observe cette disposition. Enfin, les spinules peuvent etre a
peine perceptibles et il faut y regarder de bien pres 2)our ne pas
croire les ecailles de la ligne laterale sont toujours depourvues
de spinules, leur canal est a deux ouvertures comme cbez les
centropomes.

Ces variations, auxquelles on serait tente d'attribuer une
certaine valeur dans la distinction des especes, ne nous out mal-
heureusement pas presenti une assez grande Constance })our
pouvoir etre mises un usage, les observations devraient porter

INOMENCT.ATURE AND MORPHOLOGY. 77

sur un plus grand nonibre de sujets que ceux que nous avons
eus a notre disposition.

La denomination de Mkropterus parait devoir etre adoptee
preferablenient a cell de Grystes, etablie par Cuvier dans sou
Recjne animal ou a celle de Dioplites Rafinesque, reprise par
M. Girard. C'est sans doute une application en quelque sorte
exagiree du droit de priorite, car les caracteres du genre sont
tres-imparfaitenient donues par Lacepede el la denomination
meme est fondee sur une anomalie evidente, cependant, I'individu
type etant parfaitraent connu, il pent y avoir avantage a re-
prendre ce nom, comme Font dega fait plusieurs auteurs con-
temporains.

S'il est ainsi possible de limiter le genre, il n'est pas aussi aise
d'en distinguer les differentes especes, lesquelles, aujourd'hui
comme a I'epoque ou I'ecrivit L. Agassiz, sont excessivement
difficiles a caracteriser. Au premier abord, on reconnait sans
peine plusieurs types, en ayant egardaux projiortions du corps,
au nombre des ecailles et a, diverses autrcs particularites, mais
si on examine un certain nombre d'individus, les differences s'at-
tenuent par des transitions graduelles.

D'une maniere generale, le Micvopterus variabilis Le Sueur,
a le corps le plus elevo et le Micropterus sahno'ides Lacep., le
plus bas, les Micropterus nuecensis Grd., et Micropterus dolomieu
Lacep., etant intermediaires sous ce rapport. L'epaisseur donne
des differences peu sensibles ; on salt d'ailleurs que ces varia-
tions, pouvant dependre de la saison et du sexe, leur importance
est moindre dans des especes aussi voisiues. La longueur de la
tete rapportee a la longueur totale donne les nombres extremes
29 et 25, peu differents I'un de I'autre et qui de plus se ren-
contrent tons deux sur une des especes, la mieux caracterisee
peut-etre, le Micropterus nuecensis Grd., Le museau et la
largeur de I'espcce interorbitaire varient dans une assez grande
mesure, 35 et 26 pour I'un, 29 et 20 pour I'autre; mais il y a

78 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

melange eiitre les difFerentes especes, que nous croyons pouvoir
distinguer, en sorte qu'il est assez difficile d'en faire emploi.

Lecart considerable que presente la formula de la ligne later-
ale est un des lait les plus importants, comme indiquant la dis-
tinction necessaire de plusieurs types, puisque cette formule pent
varier de 60 a 86. II existe, ii est vrai, un grand nombre
d'intermediaires, dont le tableau pent faire juger au premier,
coupd'ceil. La formule de la ligne transversale suit une marche
analogue, puisqu'au dessus de ligne laterale les chiffi-es varient
de 7 ii 11 et au-dessous, de 15 a 30. II est aussi important de
remarquer que la progression dans les deux formules est la
meme, c'est-a-dire que les ecailles sont beaucoup plus petites
pour les especes citees les premieres dans le tableau que pour les
suivantes.

Quant aux formules des nageoires, la seule exception con-
statee pour les epines de la dorsale sur le premier exemplaire doit
etreconsideree comme une auomalie. Les rayons mous ne nous
donneut que des differences peu significatives.

Enfin les dent linguales, par leur presence ou leur absence,
four nissent un caractere specifique de premier ordre, d'autant,
comme le montre le tableau, qu'il a pu etre abserve sur des in-
dividus de tallies tres-variees et paraitrait par consequent ne
pas subir de modifications avec I'age.

En ayant egard a la combinaison de ces caracteres on pent,
croyons-nous, d'apres les exemplaires de la collection de museum,
distinguer quatre esjieces, que ne sont toutefois proposees qu'a
titre proviSoire, vu I'insuffisance des materiaux dont nous avons
pu disposer. Le tableau dichotomique suivant donnera une idee
de leur comprehension : "

I / a 8 ) jjane laterale; 5 r>03 dents linguales — M. nuecensis Grd.
Ligne transversale | i", ,\ 20 5 W il 70 ecailles. ( Pas de dents linguales- Jlf. soimoides Lac6p.
ayant •{

pour formule I JIAJJ I ( 6!) k 75 Scailles M. variabilis Le S.

I 25 a 30 3 ^''""^ laterale: | g^ ^ gg gcailles M. dolomieu Lacep.

(Vatllant & BocouRT, 3Iission Scientijique au Mexique, IV,
Zool.: ined.)

NOMENCLATURE AND MOEPHOLOGY.

81

CHRONOLOGICAL CATALOGUE

Of the Nominal Species of Micropterus as noticed by various Authors, with

Identifications.

NOMINAL SPECIES.

IDENTIFICATIONS.

Micropterus dolomieu Lacepede

Labrus salmoides Lacepede

Bodianus achigan Eafiiiesqiie

Calliurus punctulatus Rafinesque

Lepomis pallida Kafinesque

Lepomis trifasciata Eafinesque

Lejjomis flexuolari.s Eafinesque

Lepomis salmonea Eafinesque

Lepomis notata Eafinesque

Etln^ostoma calliura Eafinesque

Cichla variabilis Le Sueur, MSS.

Cichla fasciata Le Sueur ,...

Cichla ohiensis Le Sueur

Cichla minima Le Sueur

Cichla floridana Le Sueur

Huro nigricans Cuvier & Valenciennes

Grystes salmoides Cuvier & Valenciennes..

Centrarchus obscurus DeKay

Centrarchus fasciatus Kirtland

Grystes nigricans Agassiz '.

Grytes fasciatus Agassiz

Grystes nobilis Agassiz

Grystes nuecensis Baird & Girai-d

Grystes salmoides Holbrook

Grystes megastoma Garlick

Grystes nigricans Garlick

Dioplites nuecensis Girard

Grystes salmonoides Giinther

Grystes nigricans Herbert

Lepomis achigan Gill

Micropterus nigriciins Cope

1802
1802
1817
1819
1820
1820
1820
1820
1820
1820
1822
1822
1822
1822
1822
1828
1829
1842
1842
1850
1850
1854
1854
1855
1857
1857
1858
1859
1859
1860
1865

cropterus
cropterus
cropterus
cropterus
cropterus
cropterus
cropterus
cropterus
cropterus
ci'oiJterus
cropterus
cropterus
cropterus
cropterus
cropterus
cropterus
cropterus
cropterus
cropterus
cropterus
cropterus
cropterus
cropterus
cropterus
cropterus
cropterus
cropterus
cropterus
cropterus
cropterus
cropterus

dolomieu.
salmoides.
dolomieu.
dolomieu.
salmoides.
dolomieu.
dolomieu.
dolomieu.
dolomieu.
dolomieu.
dolomieu.
dolomieu.
dolomieu.
dolomieu.
salmoides.
salmoides.
dolomieu?
dolomieu.
dolomieu.
salmoides.
dolomieu.
salmoides.
salmoides.
salmoides.
salmoides.
dolomieu.
salmoides.
dolomieu.
salmoides.
dolomieu.
salmoides.

82

BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

NOMINAL SPECIES.

Micropterus fasciatus Cope

Micropterus achigan Gill

Micropterus salmoides Gill

Dioplites treculii Vaillant & Bocourt

Dioplites nuccensis Vaillant & Bocourt

Dioplites variabilis Vaillant & Bocourt

Dioplites salmoides Vaillant & Bocourt

Micropterus floridanus Goode

Micropterus pallidus Gill & Jordan

Micropterus salmoides rar. salmoides Jordan.
Micropterus salmoides var. achigan Jordan.
Micropterus salmoides Vaillant & Bocourt...
Micropterus nuecensis Vaillant & Bocourt...
Micropterus variabilis Vaillant & Bocourt..
i\Iicropterus dolomieu Vaillant & Bocourt...

IDENTIFICATIONS.

1865
1866
1873
1874
1874
1874
1874
1870
1877
1878
1878
ined.
ined.
ined-
ined

Micropterus dolomieu.
Micropterus dolomieu.
Micropterus dolomieu.
Micropterus salmoides.
Micropterus salmoides.
M. dolo. var. achigan.
Micropterus salmoides.
Micropterus salmoides.
Micropterus salmoides.
M. dolomieu var. dolo.
M. dolo. mr. achigan.
Micropterus salmoides.
Micropterus salmoides.
M. dolo. var. achigan.
M. dolomieu var. dolo.

SYNOPSIS OF SPECIES OF MICROPTERUS.

Common Characters. — Body elongated, ovate-fnsiform ; slightly
compressed ; arched and thick along the back, thinner
and straight along the belly ; lower jaw longest ; both
jaws armed with broad bands of small, pointed, re-
curved, card-like teeth of uniform size ; villiform teeth
on vomer, palatine and pharyngeal bones ; teeth on
gill-rakers; spinous and soft portions of dorsal fin
partly divided by a notch ; anal fin with three spines ;
caudal fin emarginate; opercule emarginate behind,
ending in two flat points; supplemental maxillary
bone well developed.

* Mouth large ; angle of mouth anterior to the posterior border
of the eye.

t Third dorsal spine only one-half higher than the first.

a. Notch between spinous and soft rays of dorsal comparatively
shallow.

NOMENCLATURE AND MORPHOLOGY. 83

6. Scales small on body, much smaller on breast and back of
neck, and quite small on cheeks; eleven rows of scales
between lateral line and dorsal fin ; 70 to 80 scales
along the lateral line (exclusive of small pre-caudal
scales).

e. No scales on preopercular limb.

d. Anal fin almost without scales. (?)

e. Head moderate in size ; slightly convex between the orbits.

/. Color, slaty or dusky green on back and sides, shading to
white on belly and lower jaw ; young brighter green,
and more or less spotted and marked with vertical
bars; tail in young (in some localities), yellow at
base, middle black, tip white ; opercle with several
oblique olivaceous streaks; D. X, 13; A. Ill, 11.

DOLOMIEU.

** Mouth very large ; angle of mouth extends beyond the pos-
terior border of the eye.

ft Third dorsal spine twice (at least) as high as the first.

aa. Dorsal notch deep, almost dividing the fin into two.

bb. Scales moderate ; not much smaller on cheeks, nape or
breast ; eight rows of scales between lateral line and
dorsal fin ; 65 to 70 scales along latei-al line (exclusive
of small pre-caudal scales).

cc. A single row of scales on preopei'cular limb.

dd. Anal fin somewhat scaly. (?)

ee. Head large ; flat between the orbits.

ff. Color, olive green, darker on back and shading to white on
belly and under side of lower jaw ; more or less sjDOtted
when young ; not barred, though sometimes an irreg-
ular dark lateral band; three oblique streaks on
cheeks ; these markings grow obscure Avith age ; D. X,

12; A. HI, 10 SALMOIDES.

84 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

MICROPTERUS DOLOMIEU Lacepede.
THE SMALL-MOUTHED BLACK BASS.

SYNONOMY.

1802 — Mlcrojoterus doloviieu Lacepede, Hist. Nat. des Poiss.,

IV, 325.

Mkropterus doloviieu Vaillant & Bocourt, Miss, Sci.
au Mex., Zool.: ined.
1817 — Bodianus achigan Rafinesque, Am. Mo. Mag. and Crit.
Rev. II, 120.
Lepoinis achigan Gill, Pro. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. 20, 1860.
Micropterns achigan Gill, Rept. Com. Agri, 407, 1866.
Micropterus acJdgan Goode & Bean, Bull. Essex Inst.
XI, 19, 1879.'*
1820 — Galliurus pimctidatus Rafinesque, Ich. Ohiensis, 26.
1820 — Lepomis trifasciata Rafinesque, Ich. Ohiensis, 31.
1820 — Lepomis Jlexuolaris Rafinesque, Ich. Ohiensis, 31.
1820 — Lepomis sahnonea Rafinesque, Icli. Ohiensis, 32.
1820 — Lepomis notata Rafinesque, Ich. Ohiensis, 32.
1820 — Etheostoma calliura Rafinesque, Ich. Ohiensis, 36.
1822 — Cichla variabilis Le Sueur, MSS., in Museum d'Hist.
Nat. Paris.
DiopUtes variabilis Vaillant & BoCourt, MSS. Miss.

Sci. au Mexique, 1874.
Micropterus variabilis Vaillant & Bocourt, Miss. Sci.
au Mexique: ined.
1822— Cichlafasciata'L'E Sueur, Jour. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. II, 216,
Cichla fasciata Kirtland, Zoology Ohio (2d An. Rept.

Geol. Surv. Ohio), 191, 1838.
CentrarcJius fasciatus Kirtland, Bost. Jour. Nat. Hist.

V, 28, 1842.

"•■■ Used on the supposition that the name " Labre salmo'ide" as used by
Lacepede was vernacular (French), unaccompanied by a classical form,
and therefore not available

NOMENCLATURE AND MORPHOLOGY. 85

Centr ar chics fasc kit as DkKay, Fishes N. Y. 28, 1842.
Centrarchus fasciatus Storer, Syn. Fishes N. A. 38, 1846.
Grystes fasciatus Agassiz, Lake Superior, 295, 1850.
Centrarchus fasciatus Thompson, Hist. Vt. 131, 1853.
Grijstes fasciatus Eoff, Smithsonian Report, 289, 1854.
Grystes fasciatus Gill, Smithsonian Report, 257, 1856.
Centrarchus fasciatus Gunther, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus. I,

258, 1859.
Grystes fasciatus Gunther, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus. I. 252,

1859. (Name only.)
Centrarchus fasciatus Roosevelt, Game Fish of North,

217, 1862.
Micropterus fasciatus Cope, Pro. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. 83,

1865. (Name only.)
Grystes fasciatus PuTNA:\r, Storer's Fish Mass. 278, 1867.
Micropterus fasciatus Cope, Jour. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. VI,

216, 1868.
Micropterus fasciatus Cope, Pro. Am. Phil. Soc. 450, 1870.
1822 — Cichla ohiensis Le Sueur, Jour. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. II,

218.
Cichla ohiensis Kietland, Rept. Zool. Ohio : 2d Geol.

Rept. Ohio, 191, 1838.
1822— Oic/ikmmiHiaLE Sueur, Jour. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. 11,220.
Cichla minima Kirtland, Rept. Zool. Oliio: 2d Geol.

Rept. Ohio, 191, 1838.
1829 — f Grystes sahnoides Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat.

des Poiss. Ill, 54.
Grystes sahnoides Jardine, Nat. Lib. I, Perches, 158,

1835.
Grystes sahnoides DeKay, Fishes N. Y. 26, 1842.
Grystes salmoides Storer, Synopsis Fishes N. A. 36, 1846.
Gristes salmoeides Herbert, Fish and Fishing, 197, 1859.
Grystes sahnonoides Gunther, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus. I,

252, 1859.

86 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

Micropter as salmoides Gill, Pro. Am. Asso. Adv. Sci.

B 55, 1873.
Mierojyterus sahnoides Jo:rt>a^, Incl. Geol. Siirv. 214, 1874.
Micropterus salmoides Jordan, Mau. Vert. E. U. S. 230,

1876.
Micropterus salmoides Uhler & Lugger, Fishes of Md.

Ill, 1876.
Micropterus salmoides Jordan, Ann. N. Y. Lye. Nat.

Hist. XI, 314, 1877.
Micropterus salmoides Jordan, Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus. IX,

and X, 1877.
Micropterus salmoides Hallock, Sportsman's Gazetteer,

373, 1877. (In part.)
Micropterus salmoides Jordan, Man. Vert. E. U. S. 2d

ed., 236, 1878.
Micropterus salmoides Jordan, Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus.

XII, 30, 1878.
Micropterxis salmoides Henshall, Kept. Ohio Fish Com.

31, 1879.
Micropterus salmoides Jordan, Pro. U. S. Nat. Mus., II,

218, 1880.
1842 — Centrarchus obscurus DeKay, Fishes New York, 30.

Centrarchus obscurus Storer, Syn. Fishes N. A. 40, 1846.
Centrarclms obscurus Gunther, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus.

I, 258, 1859.
1857 — Gnjstes nigricans Garlick, Treat. Art. Prop. Fish, 105.
Grystes nigricans NoRRis, Am. Anglers' Book, 103, 1864.

Etymology: Dolomieu, proper name ''in honor of M. Dolomieu).
Habitat: Canada to Alabama ; along the Appalachian Chain and west-
ward ; introduced eastward.

Specific Descriptions.

Micropterus dolomieu Lacepede, 1802. — " Dix rayons
aiguillones et sept rayons articules a la premiere nageoire du dos ;

NOMENCLATURE AND MORPHOLOGY. 87

qiiatrc rayons a la seconde; deux rayons aiguillones efc onze rayons
articules ii la nageoire de I'anus ; la caudale en croissant ; iin
ou deux aiguillons a la seconde piece de chaque opercule." —
[Br. 5; P. 16; V. I, 5; C. 17].— (Lacepede, Hist. Nat. des
Poiss., IV, 325, 1801).

BoDLVNUS ACHIGAN Rafinesque, 1817. — "Lower jaw much
longer, gill-coyers with two flat and short thorns, lateial line
nearly straight, base ascending diagonal ; blackish with round
scattered fulyous spots, belly gray, fins brown, the dorsal de-
pressed in the middle and with twenty-fiye rays, whereof ten are
spinescent, tail lunulated, with a gray edge. — Obs. vulgar names
in the United States Black Bass, Lake Bass, Big Bass, Oswego
Bass, Spotted Bass, etc., and in Canada Achigaa or Achigan verd
or Achigan noir; but many species are probably blended under
those names, this is probably the Achigan of Charleyoix. It is a
fine fish, from one to three feet long, and weighing sometimes eight
to twelve pounds, affording a good food, etc. It is found in all
the large lakes of New York and Canada. It has many rows
of small teeth, and is voracious; eyes blue, iris gilt-brown; anal
fin with fifteen rays, whereof three are spinescent and short,
pectoral fins fulvous dotted of brown at the base, and with fif-
teen rays, thoracic fins with six rays, whereof the first is spines-
cent, caudal fins with twenty rays. This sj^ecies and the forego-
ing have six branchial rays, and the gill-covers are composed of
four pieces, all scaly except the second. Body more cylindrical
than in the foregoing."*— (Rafinesque, Amer. Mon. Mag. and
Grit. Rev. II, 120, 1817.)

Calliurus punctulatus Rafinesque, 1820. — "Lower jaw
longer; body olivaceous, crowded with blackish dots; head
brownish, flattened above; lateral line hardly curved upward
at the base ; tail unequally bilobed, lower lobe larger, base yel-
low, middle blackish, tip white ; dorsal fin yellow, with 24 rays,
of which ten are spiny.

An uncommon fish from four to twelve inches long. I ob-
served it at the Falls; rare in the Ohio, more common in some

\_Bodianus rupestris.~\

88 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

small streams. Vulgar names, Painted Tail or Bridge Perch ; tail
with two lobes, slightly unequal, base flexuose ; belly and lower
fins pale, anal fin with 13 rays, the three anterior s^iiny and
shorter, behind rounded and far from tlie tail, although nearer
than the dorsal tin ; thoracic fin with five rays, none of which
appear spiny, and no ap})endnge; pectoral fins short, trapezoidal,
with 15 rays ; branchial rays concealed." — (Rafinesque, Ich.
Old. 26, 1820.)

Lepomls trifasciata Rafinesque, 1820. — "Whitish, crowded
with unequal and irregular specks of gilt olive color, none on
the belly ; gill covers with three large oblique streaks of the same
color; opercule without appendage, spine acute, a taint brown
spot below the lateral line; lower jaw longer ; dorsal fin streaked
behind ; tail forked, yellow at the base, brown in the middle,
tip pale.

"Found in the Ohio and many other streams; reaches over a
foot in length sometimes ; vulgar names. Yellow Bass, Gold Bass,
Yellow Perch, Streaked Head, etc. Fins olivaceous; dorsal
hardly depressed in the middle with 24 rays Avhereof 10 are
spiny, tind part with three brownish and longitudinal streaks ;
anal fin rounded with 13 rays, 3 of which are spiny, 2 short and
a long one; pectoral fins nearly triangular and acute, 16 rays;
thoracics 6, tail 2, very broad, forks divaricate nearly lunulate ;
eyes small black, iris brown ; lateral line following the back ;
diameter less than one-fourth of the length." — (Rafinesque, Ich.
Ohi. 31, 1820.)

Lepomis flexuolaris Rafinesque, 1820. — "Olivaceous brown
above, sides with some transversal and flexuose olive lines, belly
white ; lateral line nearly straight flexuose ; spine broad acute,
behind the base of the opercule, no appendage nor spot, pre-
opercule forked downwards; upper jaw slightly longer; tail bi-
lobed, base olive, middle brown, tip white.

"A fine species, reaching the length of two feet, and affording
an excellent food. Common all over the Ohio and tributary

NOMENCLATURE AND MORPHOLOGY. 89

streams ; vulgar names, Black Bass, Brown Bass, Black Perch,
etc.; tins olivaceous, dorsal with 23 rays, whereof 9 are spiny
and rather shorter ; anal with 12 rays, whereof 2 are spiny ;
pectorals ti-apezoidal, 16 rays; branchial rays uncovered; iris
brown. This fish might jierhaps form another subgenus, by the
large mouth, head without upper sutures, spine hardly decur-
rent, nearly equal jaws, gill covers, lateral line, etc. Its tail
and preopercule ai'e somewhat like Calliurus. It might be called
Nemocampsis, meaning flexuose line. Diameter one-fourth of the
length."— (Rafixesque, Icli. Ohi. 31, 1820.)

Lepomis salmonea Rafinesque, 1820. — "Olivaceous brown
above, sides pale with some round yellowish spots, beneath
white ; preopercule simple, head without sutures, lower jaw
hardly longer, spines flat, short, acute, and decurrent above and
beneath, opercule acute beneath the spines; tail lunulate, tip
blackish ; vent posterior.

" Length from 6 to 24 inches. Vulgar names White Trout,
Brown Trout, Trout Pearch, Trout Bass, Brown Bass, Black
Bass, Black Pearch, etc. Common in the Kentucky, Ohio,
Green and Licking rivers, etc. It offers a delicate white flesh,
similar to the Perca salmonea. It is a voracious fish, with many
rows of sharp teeth on the jaws and in the throat. It bites
easily at the hook, and eats suckers, minnows and chubs.
Diameter one-fifth of the length. Fins olivaceous brown ; dorsal
with 25 rays, whereof 10 are spiny, slightly depressed between
them; anal rounded small, 3 and 11 rays. Pectoral acute trap-
ezoidal 18 rays. Thoracic 1 and 5, spiny ray half the length.
Tail with 2-4 rays. Iris silvery." — (Rafinesque, Ich. Ohi. 32,
1820.)

Lepomis notata Rafinesque, 1820. — "This species differs
merely from the foregoing \_Lepomis salmonea'] by having a black
spot on the margin of the opercule, two diagonal brown stripes
on each side of the head below the eyes, and all the fins yellow,
except the tail, which is black at the end, with a narroAv white

90 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

tip. It is also smaller, from 3 to 8 inches long. It bears the
same vulgar names, and is found along with it, of which some
fishermen deem that it is the young. But I have seen so many-
false assertions of the kind elsewhere that I am inclined to doubt
this fact, as it would be very strange that the gradual changes
should be so great. Yet this ought to be inquired into, since
many vulgar opinions are often found to be correct." — (Rafln-
ESQUE, Ich. Old. 32, 1820.)

Etheostoma calliura Rafinesque, 1820. — "Body slightly
fusiform and compressed, silvery, olivaceous above, some flexuose
transversal brownish lines on the sides; lower jaw longer, preop-
ercule double, opercule with an augular appendage and an
obtuse spine behind it ; scales smooth, lateral line flexuose ; tail
forked, tricolored, and with a brown spot at the base.

"The largest species of the genus from 3 to 9 inches long.
It has some similarity with the Lepomis jlexuolaris, and some
other river Bass, wherefore it is called Minny Bass, Little Bass,
Hog Bass, etc. Common in the Ohio, Salt River, etc. It has
sharp teeth. The head is large, rugose above ; iris large, gilt
browm ; branchial rays uncovered. Diameter one-seventh of
the length. Lateral line curved upwards at its base. Fins
olivaceous. Dorsal with 9 and 14 rays, beginning behind the
pectorals and ending far from the tail, like the anal, which has
12 ravs, whereof one is spiny. Pectoral fins short, trapezoidal,
16 rays. Tail 24, fine, base with a yellow curved ring, followed
by a forked band of a pale violaceous color, tip hyalin. Mouth
straight."— (Rafinesque, Ich. Oki. 36, 1820.)

Cicedla fasciata Le Sueur, 1S22. — "Fourteen or fifteen
transverse brown bands on each side of the body, and two or
three oblique ones on the opercula, scaly margined with black ;
spinous and soft parts of the dorsal fin equal in length, the fin
less arquated upward than the posterior one.

"Body elongated, compressed, tapering at the two extremi-
ties, three and one-half times the length of head, by one length

NOMENCLATURE AND MORPHOLOGY. 91

in depth ; head of moderate size, narrow, destitnte of scales be-
tween the eyes, and upon the snout, which is short ; mouth ex-
tending beneath the eye; jaw large, truncated posteriorly, inter-
maxillary long and narrow ; teeth very small, numerous pointed,
curved and serrated in the manner of a card on the jaws, palate
and extremity of the vomer ; inferior ja,w hardly longer than the
superior jaw, mandible strong, enlarged, spoon-sliaped ; eve
small and round; iris white, brown and red; pupil small and
of a deep color; dorsal fin high, rounded behind, arquated
before, and very low at its junction with the soft part, the
spinous rays imbricated and reclined into the longitudinal cavity
of the back ; anal rounded, shorter than the soft part of the
dorsal, with three sj)inous rays anteriorly ; pectorals moderate,
rounded ; thoracics truncated, hardly longer than the pectorals,
distant from the anal, and armed with a strong spinous ray;
caudal slightly emarginate, lobes rounded with 17 principal
rays, including the lateral flat ones, beyond Avhich are 8 small
ones; scales rounded, not denticulated, sub-irregularly placed,
large on the sides, smaller on the back, small upon the back of
the neck, very small under the belly, throat and cheek, and a
little larger on the preoperculum and suboperculum ; there are
also very small ones between the rays of the anal and caudal
fins; general color brownish-olivaceous, deep and fuliginous
upon the back, lighter on the sides, the middle of the scajes
browned with a black margin ; anal fin greenish ; posterior jiart
of the dorsal and the caudal violaceous, abdomen and throat
bluish and violaceous, the 13, 14 and sometimes 15 bands with
which this- species is ornamented are a little deeper than the
■general tint ; they are more pei'ceptible in the fresh state of
the fish, when but recently taken out of the water; the opercula
are also traversed with many olivaceous bands, the lateral line is
undulated oblique: the color changes in the dying fish, it is
then sometimes all blue or bluish, or entirely black, and the
transverse bands disappear. Length 18 or 20 inches.

92 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

"This is one of the best fish of Lake Erie fox- the table, and
with that which the fishermen call Herring Salmon {Coregonus
Artedi Le Sueur, Vol. I, par. II, p. 231), it is salted to j^reserve
it till sold. They are taken at all seasons of the year by
the seine, and hook and line. We observed them at Erie in the
month of July, 1816, and at Buffalo, at which latter place we
captured many with the seine. A variety occurred in Lake
George, of which the specimens appeared to us to have the low^r
jaw more advanced. The fishermen name them Black Bass.
B. 6; P. 18 to 20; T. 5; D. 10, 15; A. 3, 12; C. 17|."— (Le
Sueur, Jour. Ac. Nat. Sd. Phil. II, 216, 1822.)

CiCHLA OHiENSis Le Sueur, 1822. — "Extremity of the anal
fin sensibly more remote from the head than that of the dorsal ;
scales more regular than in the preceding species.

"The larger of the two individuals, which w'ere brought from
the Ohio River by Mr. Thomas Say, and deposited in the
cabinet of the Academy, is 22 inches long by 5 deep, and
about 3 in thickness ; the skin of these two specimens is
stronger in its texture than in specimens from Lake Erie ; the
scales are more uniformly disposed and equal ; the anterior por-
tion of the dorsal fin is not so much elevated, less arquated, but
also furnished with 10 spinous rays; the soft ])art is equally long
with the first, but is more elevated, rounded and composed of
14 branched rays; the anal fin is rounded, short with 14 rays,
of which the 3 anterior ones are spinous; the extremity of this
fin extends beyond that of the dorsal, in these individuals,
further than in the species of Lake Erie. If tliis character is
constant, we must regard it as belonging to a distinct species,
but I think it is proper to wait for further observations for con-
firmation.

"The scales are in the same progression; large, rounded on
the sides, moderate on the back towards the spinous portion of
the dorsal fin, small upon the neck; upon the middle of the
abdomen they are a little more elongated ; very small between

NOMENCLATURE AND MORPHOLOGY. 93

the thoracic and pectoral fins, on the throat, the cheek, and
hirger on the preoiicrcuUun and suboperculum ; the teeth also
differ little from the preceding species ; the pectoral and thoracic
fins are equal and similarly situate ; lateral line near the back,
a little undulated, originating from the angle of the opening of
the operculum, passing on the middle of the tail ; color in the
dried specimens, yellowish brown; the scales did not appear to
me to be margined with black as in the preceding species.
B. 6 ; P. 18 ; T. 5 ; D. 10, 14 ; A. 3, 11 ; C. 16|."— (Le Sueur,
Jour. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. II, 218, 1822.)

CiCHLA MINIMA Le Sueur, 1822. — " Dorsal long, spinous and
soft jDarts of equal length, the foi-mer straight and very low;
anal long, equal to the soft part of the dorsal ; eye large.

"Body very long and subcompressed, more elevated towards
the dorsal anteriorly ; head arquated ; eye very large ; pupil
and iris very large; dorsal fin long, divided into two equal
parts, the anterior part of 9 spinous rays, and much lower than
the soft part, which is rounded, with 14 divided rays; anal
equal to the posterior part of the dor.-al and of 13 rays, of w hich
3 are spinous, caudal of 15 to 18 rays; pectorals large, placed
yerv low near the operculum ; thoracic fin much smaller than
the pectoral, and placed exactly beneath them ; anal large ;
scales very small ; color deep gray, tinted with bluish on the
back, with metallic reflections on the sides and abdomen and
back, and a spot upon the neck, lateral line straight, on the
middle of the body; caudal fin subtruncated of 17 or 18 rays;
teeth very small, in many ranges on the jaws and palate ; mouth
deeply divided.

"Lives in the small lagoons of tranquil water, which dis-
charge by narrow channels into Lake Erie. Length is 9 lines."
— (Le Sueur, Jour. Ac. Nat. Sci. Pkil II, 220, "l822.)

Grystes salmoides Cuvier and Valenciennes, 1829. — "Tel
est le groivler de New York, dont nous devons la connaissance a
M, Milbert, mais qui n'a point ete decrit par M. Mitchill.

94 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

" Ce nom de growler, qui signife grogneur, vient peut-etre de
quelque bruit qu'il fait entendre comme les scienes ou les trigles,
mais nous n'avons a cet egard aucun renseignement positif.
Grystes en est I'equivalent grec.

" M. Le Sueur, croyant I'espece nouvelle, en a public une
description dans le Journal des sciences de Philadelphie, sous le
nom de cichla variabilis; mais nous avons tout lieu de croire que
c'est ce poisson qui est represente et decrit par M. de Lacepede
(t. IV, p. 716 et 717, et pi. 5, fig. 2) sous le nom de labre sal-
moide, d'apres des notes et une figure fournies par M. Bosc, qui
le nommait perca trutta. La figure en est un peu rude, mais la
description s'accorde avec ce que nous avons vu, sauf quelques
details, qui tiennent peut-etre moins au poisson meme qu'a la
raaniere dont il a ete observe.

" Ce pretendu labre, au rapport de M. Bosc, est tres-commun
dans les rivieres de la Caroline, ou on lui a transports le nom
de trout (c'est-a-dire trinte). II atteint deux pieds de longueur.
C'est un excellent manger; sa cliair est ferme et savoureuse.
On le prend aisement a rharae§on, surtout en mettant un mor-
ceau, de cyj)rin pour appat.

' ' Le growler a a peu pres la forme d'un serran. Sa plus grande
hauteur, qui est vers le milieu, ne fait pas tout-a-fait le quart
de sa longueur, et son epaisseur ne fait pas moitiS de sa hauteur.
La longueur de sa tete n'est que trois fois et demie dans sa
longueur totale. Son profil descend tres-peu. Sa niachoire
inferieure est un peu plus longue que I'autre, et a quatrc ou cinq
pores sous chaeune de ses branches. De larges baudes de dents
en velours les garnissent toutes les deux, ainsi que le devant de
son vomer et ses palatins. Le bord de son preopercule est par-
faitement entier, et a Tangle un peu arrondi. L'opercule osseux
se termine ])ar deux pointes peu algues, dont la superieure est
la plus courte. La membrane branchiale a six et quelquefois
sept rayons, variation qui est assez singuliere, mais que nous
avons constatee. Les os de I'epaule sont lisses, mais entiers,

NOMENCLATURE AND MORPHOLOGY. 95

commo le })rcopercule. Le sous-oibitaire a quelqups rides. Les
ecailles sout raediocres : il y en a quatre-vingt-dix sur une ligne
longitudinale, et trente-six ou quarante sur une vertieale. Son
front, son muscau, scs niachoires, le linibe de son preopercule,
la membrane des ouies en nianquent ; mais il y en a sur sa joue
et ses pieces operculaires. II en porte de petites sur les parties
molles de sa dorsale et de son anule, et sur la caudale. Toutes
sont finement ciliees et pointillees a leur partie visible, et ont
huit crenelures a leur base. La ligue laterale, un pen arquee
vers le bas, a son origine, suit du reste a pen pres la courbure
du dos. La dorsale ne commence que sur le milieu des pector-
ales. Les epines sont faibles ; la plus haute, qui est la quatrieme,
n'a pas le tiers de la hauteur du tronc sous elle. L'echancrure
entre la penultierae et la derniere est prononcee ; I'anale ne
commence que sous sa partie molle. Les deux nageoires finis-
sent vis-a-vis Fune de I'autre, et laissent entre elles et la caudale
un espace qui fait presque le quart de la longueur totale. La
caudale se termine un pen en croissant ; les pectorales et les
ventrales sont petites ou mediocres.

D. 10, 13 ou 14; A. 3, 11 ou 12; C. 17; P. 16 ; V. 1, 5.

" Tout ce poisson, devenu adulte, est d'un brun-verdiitre fence,
avec une tache d'un noir bleuati'e a la pointe de I'opercule.

"Nous avons re9U, par M. Milbert, un individu de huit a
neuf pouces et un de six a sept. C'est ce dernier qui a six
rayons a la membrane des ouies et quatorze rayons mous a la
dorsale.

"Plus tard, M. Le Sueur nous en a envoye de la riviere Wa-
bash un individu long de seize pouces, et ti'ois autres qui n'en
ont guere que cinq. Les jeunes sont d'un vert plus pale, et ont
sur chaque flanc vingt-cinq a trente lignes lougitudinales et
paralleles brunes, qui paraissent s'effacer avec I'age.

" Le foie du growler est tres-petit, presque entierement place
dans le cute gauche ; I'cBsophage, tres-court, se dilate en un esto-
raac ovale assez grand, a parois minces et sans plis. Le pylore,

96 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

pres du cardia, est large et entoure de quatorze appendices
coecales, dont dix a gauche et quatre a droite, assez grasses et
assez longues. L'intestin remonte jusque sous le diaphragme,
descend jusqu'aupres de I'anus, puis retourne jusqu'aupres dii
pylore, d'ou il va droit a I'anus. Son dernier repli a deux
etranglemens assez marques. La rate est petite, au milieu de
I'abdomen, pres de la pointe de I'estomac. La vessie natatoire,
tres-grande, mince, peu argentee, s'eteud depuis le diaphragme
jusqu'aupres de I'anus. Tout le peritoinea un bel eclat d'argent.
L'estomac etait rempli d'une graude quantite de fourmis ailees,
de tipules de cousins et autres i^etits insectes volans, communs
sur les eaux donees." — (Cuvier and Valenciennes, Hist. Nat.
des Poiss. in, 54, 1829.)

Grystes salmoides Jardine, 1835. — " D. 10, 13 or 14; A.
3, 11 or 12; C. 17; P. 16; V. 1, 5.

" Growler is the provincial American name for this fish, which
Cuvier thinks has been given from some noise or croaking sound
uttered by it. Two fish only have yet been discovered which
will rank under its character; the present a native of North
America and another produced from the New Holland seas.
In form of the body they somewhat resemble the last, but are
at once distinguished from them and the preceding forms, by
the smoothness and the want of any covering on the head ; the
opercle and preopercle having neither spines nor teeth on their
margins. The present species, a native of the North American
waters, and abundant in the neighboi'hood of New York, has
been named Salmoides, from its resemblence to the salmon or
trout, being in some parts termed ' Trout.' It reaches a length
of two feet, is of excellent flavor, and is much esteemed as an
article of food ; and it afibrds sport to the angler, taking the
hook readily. The general colors, an unobtrusive tint of olive,
lightening towards the under parts where it becomes grayish
white. The first dorsal fin is weaker in proportion than most of
the forms we have already seen, but the last rises high behind

NOMENCLATURE AND MORPHOLOGY. 97

and assumes a shape somewhat like that of some of the Grey-
lings. Tlie tail is shaped a good deal like the Salmoidce, and in
this fish has a dark bar across the center." — (Jardine, Nat. Lib.
I, Perches, 158, 1835.)

CiCHLA FA8CIATA and CiCHLA OHiENSis Kirtland, 1838. —
"The Black Bass of the Lake and of the Ohio River. Le Sueur
has described them as distinct species. I have no doubt they
are specifically identical. They differ in form and color at differ-
ent seasons and in different localities, and even the same in-
dividual will change its color repeatedly in a short space of time
if confined in a vessel of water.

" Rafinesque has described that from the Ohio under the
generic name of Lepomis, and taken these changings of color as
a distinction upon which he has founded several of his species.
His Lepomis notata is no other than the young of the common
Black Bass. Their appearance varies at different ages.

"This fish readily bites at a hook, and is valued as an article
of food."— (Kirtland, Rej^t. Zool. Ohio, 191, 1838.)

CiCHLA MiNENiA Kirtland, 1838. — " Le Sueur describes this
as an inhabitant of Lake Erie. I am suspicious it is only the
young of the preceding species, as I have never been able to find
it, though I have searched repeatedly in the lake and its trib-
utaries."— (Kirtland, Rept. Zool. Ohio, in 2d Geol. Rept. Ohio,
191, 1838.)

Centrarchus fasciatus Kirtland, 1842. — "This species
presents such a variety of forms, colors and habits, and is so
much influenced by age, sex, seasons and locality, it is not re-
markable that its varieties should have been described as dis-
tinct species. Still I am convinced that the synonyms I have
enumerated embrace only one true species (these are Lepomis
pallida, trifasciata and flexuolaris, Raf. , Icth. Ohiensis, p. 30, 31;
Etheostoma calliura Raf, Icth. Ohiensis, p. 36; Qchla fasciata
Le Sueur, J. A. N. S.; C. fasciata Kirtland- Report Zool.
Ohio; C. Ohiensis Le Sueur, J. A. N. S.); and I am inclined to

98 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

add to tliem C. minima of Le Sueur, as I have never been able
to find in the lagoons about our rivers and the lake any fish
that answers to his description, except the young of the Black
Bass at a certain stage of growth.

" This species is found universally in our western waters. It
frequently is taken by hooks and in seines, and also gives amuse-
ment to our marksmen in the spring, when it runs into shallow
water for the jrarpose of sj^awning. At this time it is often
shot with rifles. Its flesh resembles in flavor that of the Black
Fish (Tautoga Americana Cuv.) and by many persons is es-
teemed as the best fish for the table that our western waters af-
ford."—(Kirtland, Bost. Jour. Nat. Hist. V, 28, 1842.)

Grystes salmoides DeKay, 1842. — "Greatest depth, to its
length as one to four nearly ; its thickness not quite half of its
depth. Profile not very declivous. Lower jaw longest with 4
or 5 pores under each of its branches. Minute teeth in broad
bands. Opercle terminates in two moderate points, of which
the uppermost is short. Branchial rays six and occasionally
seven; a notable variatio)i, but which is positively established.
Humeral bone smootli. Scales ciliate, moderate; ninety in a
longitudinal series and 36-40 in a vertical line. Scales only on
the opercular bones and cheeks; small ones on the soft portion of
dorsal, anal and caudal fins. Lateral line concurrent with the
back. Dorsal fin commences about the middle of the pectorals;
the fourth ray highest. Pectoral and ventral fins small. Cau-
dal fin slightly crescent shaped.

"The adult, deep greenish brown, with a bluish black spot on
the point of the opercle; young with from 25-30 brownish longi-
tudinal bands, which appear^ to become effaced with age. Length
6'0-24'0. (Copied from Cuvier.) Fin rays: D. 10, 13 or 14;
P. 16; V. 1, 5; A. 3, 11 or 12; C. 17."— (DeKay, Fishes
N. Y. 26, 1842.)

Centrarciius fasciatus DeKay, 1842. — " Body compressed;
back arched gibbous ; profile descending obliquely to the rostrum,

NOMENCLATURE AND MORPHOLOGY. 99

which :s moderately prolonged ; scales large, truncate and with
radiating plaits at the radical portion ; the free portion small,
rounded, concentrically striate, minutely denticulate on the mar-
gin; scales on the opercle large, with a single series on the sub-
opercle, much smaller on the preopercle, and ascend high up on
the membrane of the soft dorsal and caudal fins ; the intraorbital
region and the jaw scaleless; lateral line concurrent with the
back; eyes moderate; nostrils double, vertical, contiguous; the
anterior on its posterior border with a membranous valve, near
these a few open pores; opercles pointed with a loose membrane;
lower jaw somewhat advanced with a single series of from eight
to ten distant pores beneath ; both jaws armed with a broad patch
of minute conic acute recurved teeth ; an oblong patch of rasp-
like teeth on the vomer, and a long band of similar teeth on
the palatines ; a transverse membrane on the anterior part of
both jaws; a small patch of minute teeth on the center of the
tongue, which is free and thin on the margins ; branchial arches
minutely toothed on the upper surface near the tongue, with
long serrate, spinous processes above; pharyngeal teeth in rounded
patches; branchial rays six. Dorsal fin commences slightly be-
hind the pectorals; the anterior portion consists of nine stout
spines, received into a sheath below; the first is shorter than
the second, which again is not so long as the third, and this
latter issubequal with the remainder; a small and not very evident
depression separates it from the other portion, which consists of
1 spinous and 14 branched rays; it terminates above the end of
the anal; this portion of the dorsal fin is high, and somewhat
rounded; the second simply articulated, not branched, and the
three posterior rays successively shorter ; the pectorals under the
posterior angle of the opercle broad and obtusely pointed; it
contains 18 rays, of which the 5, 6, and 7 are the longest;
ventral fins placed slightly behind the pectorals and composed
of 5 robust branched rays; anal fin higher than long, commenc-
ing under the third soft ray of the dorsal and composed of 3

100 BOOK OP THE BLACK BASS.

spinous and 12 articulated rays, of which latter the 4, 5, 6, 7
are longest; the first spinous ray very short, the second slightly
longer, and the third double the length of the preceding ; caudal
fin emarginate, tips rounded, and composed of 16 flat robust,
multifid and six accessory rays on each side; length 13.5; of
head, 4.0; greatest depth, 4.2; fin rays, D. 9.1,14; P. 18; V. 6;
A. 3, 12; C. 16f

This species is common in the great lakes and in the numer-
ous smaller ones in this state, where it is generally known under
the name of Black Bass. This species appears to differ very
much in difterent localities, not only in color but in form, and
according to Dr. Kirtland, the same individual will change its
color repeatedly in a short space of time if confined in a vessel of
water."— (DeKay, Fishes N. Y. 28, 1842.)

Centrarchus obscurus DeKay, 1842. — " Body compressed,
regularly arched above, not gibbous, highest along the spinous
portion of the dorsal fin ; scales small, orbicular, concentrically
striate on their free surfaces, covering the head and body and
rising very slightly on the base of the dorsal; lateral line tubular
above the upper margin of the opercle ; makes a curve down-
wards over the point of the opercle, then rises a little anterior
to the first spinous ray of the dorsal, and then becomes concur-
rent with the line of the back ; head moderately small, and some-
what pointed, sloping gradually to the nape, thence ascending more
rapidly to the dorsal ray; eyes very large; nostrils double, dis-
tant, the posterior largest; a small mucous pore below the an-
terior nostril ; lower jaw longest ; numerous fine teeth in both
jaws, very acute and recurved, forming many rows in front and
fewer on the sides of the jaw ; still more minute teeth on the
vomer and palatines; opercular bones scaly; the opercle with a
membranous margin, and terminating in a flat point, which is
occasionally double ; the dorsal fin arises behind the base of the
pectorals, composed of 9 spinous and 13 simple rays; the first
spinous is shortest; the first of the soft portion simple, the re-

NOMENCLATURE AND MORPHOLOGY. 101

raaiuder articulated and much higher than the spinous portion ;
it is coterminal with the anal fin; pectorals oblong and composed
of 16 rays ; the upper ray subspinous, simple ; ventral fin
pointed, contiguous, composed of 1 spinous and 5 branched rays;
anal rounded of 8 spinous and 12 branched rays, the first spine
short, the others gradually longer ; caudal fin emarginate of 17
entire and 3 accessory rays on each side. All the rays of this
fin are broad and compressed, with scales ascending high uj) to-
wards their extremities ; a general greenish brown or dark olive
Avith a faint metallic bronze on the upper parts, beneath lighter;
length, 6.0-8.0; fins, D. 9.1, 12; P. 16; V. 1, 5; A, 3, {2; C.
17f. This species was obtained from Onondaga creek, there
called Black Bass."— (DeKay, Fishes N. Y. 30, 1842.)

Grystes salmoides Storer, 1846. — "The adult fish is of a
deep greenish brown color, with bluish black spot at the angle
of the operculum ; the posterior portion of the dorsal fin rises
high, and resembles somewhat that of some of the Greylings;
the tail is shaped much like that of the Salmonidie, and has a
dark brown band crossing its center. The young are marked
with numerous longitudinal bands. D. 10, 13 or 14; P. 16;
V. 1, 5; A. 3, 11 or 12 ; C. 17 ; length, 2 ft."— (Storer, Syn-
opsis Fish. N. A. 36, 1846.) (Copied.)

Centrarchus fasciatus Storer, 1846. — "Body compressed;
back arched and gibbous ; of a dusky bluish color, often with
transverse bands; anal fin with three spines. D. 9, 1,14; P.
18; V. 5; A. 3, 12 ; C. 16f ; length, 18 to 20 in."— (Storer,
Synopsis Fish. N. A. 38, 1846.) (Copied.)

Centrarchus obscurus Storer, 1846. — "Body not gibbous,
of a general greenish brown or dark olive color, with faint
metallic bronze on upper parts; beneath lighter. D. 9, 1, 12;
P. 16; V. 1, 5; A. 3, 12; C. 17f; length, 6 in."— (Storer,
Synopsis Fishes K A. 40, 1846.) (Copied.)

Grystes fasciatus Agassiz, 1850. — "This species is very
closely allied to the Grystes salmoides of the Southern States,

102 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

from which it is,* however, distinguished by the profile of the
more raised back, and of course by a broader body. The sur-
face of the skull is uniformly rounded and not depressed, as in
G. salmoides; the proportions of the head compared with the
body are the same as in this latter, but the mouth is less
opened, and the shorter labials do not reach a vertical line
drawn across the hinder margin of the orbits, whilst they exceed
such a line in G. salmoides; the teeth are arranged like cards,
and are similar in both species. The fins upon the whole seetn
to be cut on the same pattern as in G. salmoides, but when we
examine them attentively, we see that they are all stabbed like
the body itself; the ventrals and pectorals shorter and more
widened; the dorsal and anal lower. As for the other details
of their structure they are about the same, as we may see from
the following formula:
Br. 6; D. X, 14; A. Ill, 10; C. 7, 1, 8, 7, 1,6; V: 1,5; P. 16.

" The scales are a little smaller, but of the same form as in
G. salmoides; the radiating striae are perhaps less marked; tliey
cover the oj)ercular apparatus and the cheeks, but at this latter
place their smaller size is quite remarkable ; this latter charac-
ter is very striking when Ave compare both species.

"Our specimens are from Lake Huron ; one of them measures
twelve inches, and the other seven. I have also received two
specimens from Lake Michigan, through the care of Mr. Samuel
C. Clarke, the largest of which measures eighteen inches.
Professor Baird forwarded to me specimens from Lake Champ-
Iain. Dr. DcKay has found it in Lake Oneida. Finally, this
species extends to Pennsylvania, as I was able to convince
myself by two specimens collected at Toxburg, and for which

■•••■ " Gnjstc!^ salmonem docs not occur in the Northern nor in the Middle
States, although Dr. DeKay mentions it upon the authority of Cuvier, who
probal)ly mistook specimens of our Grysles fcu^ciatm for the southern spe-
cies. Having, however, failed to discover this confusion, Dr. DeKay de-
scribes the same fish again, under the name of Cenlrarchus obscurus." —
(Agassiz, Lake Superior, 295, 1850.)

NOMENCLATURE AND MORPHOLOGY, 103

I am under obligation to Professor Baird."— (Agassiz, Lake
Superior, 295, 1850.)

Centrarchus fasciatus Thompson, 1853. — "Form some-
what elliptical compressed, a little convex on the sides and
pointed forwards; color dark greenish above, lighter and faintly-
mottled on the sides, and grayish white beneath; sides of the
head fine light green ; scales firm, moderate on the sides and
operculum, but very small on the cheeks, back of the neck,
throat, and belly; preoperculum with its upper limb nearly
vertical and nearly at right angles with the lower, without
spines or serratures ; inter and suboperculum*upon the upper
side and smooth below ; operculum triangular, with a mem-
branous prolongation posteriorly, and the bony part terminating
posteriorly in two thin lobes with a deep notch between them,
the lower lobe, which is the largest, ending in several short
spines; teeth small, sharp, and numerous in both jaws, on the
lower anterior edges of the palatine bones, and on the vomer,
with a small cluster near the base of the triangular tongue, all
standing like the pile on velvet, but looking a little inward, those
on the jaws largest; fins small brownish and their soft parts
covered with a rather thick mucous skin ; the dorsal rounded
behind, low at the junction of the spinous and soft parts, and
the spinous rays capable of being reclined, imbricated, and con-
cealed in a longitudinal groove along the back ; ventrals a little
behind the pectorals ; the anal under the posterior portion of the
dorsal, and extending a little further back; tail slightly emar-
ginate, with the lobes rounded, vent a trifle nearest the posterior
extremity; eyes moderately large; lower jaw a trifle longer than
the upper, with several visible pores along its margin; length
of the specimen before me, 19 in. The greatest depth equals
one-third of the length, exclusive of the tail. — Rays: Br. 6; P.
17; B. 1, 5; D. 10, 15; A. 3, 11; C. 17.

"The Black Bass, by which name this fish is here generally
known, ranks as one of the best fishes taken from our waters,

* The word " scaly " was evidently omitted here. — J. A. H.

104 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

but as is apt to be the case with good fishes, it is much less
abundant than several other species which are greatly its inferior
in point of quality. It is usually taken with tlie seine and its
weight varies from one to five or six pounds." — (Tho:mpson, Hist.
Vermont, 131, 1853.)

Grystes nigricans Garlick, 1857. — "The body is com-
pressed, oval, back arched ; of a dusky greenish color, often
with transverse bands, with 3 olilique stripes on the operculum
or cheek. . , . The Black Bass, when full grown, measures
from 12 to 18 inches in length. The largest one by far that I
have ever seen was caught last summer by Prof. Ackley in the
Cuyahoga River: its length was a little over 22 inches, and must
have weighed 8 pounds or more.

*' This fish is found from the St. Lawrence to the tributaries
of the Ohio, and perhaps still further south; it is quite common
in all the rivers and lakes of Ohio and all the Western States.

" He is a bold biter, and when hooked fights with the most de-
termined fury to the very last, affording the best of sjDort to the
angler, and is excelled but by a very few fish w^hen placed upon
the table."— (Garlick, Treat. Art. Prop. Fish, 105, 1857.)

Gristes salmoiedes Herbert, 1859. — "This fish, in general
form, closely corresponds with that last described [(?. nigricans^.
It has the same gibbous back, with the lateral line following the
dorsal curve, and the same protruded lower jaw. Its teeth are
set minutely in broad bands or patches. The operculum has
two moderate points.

" Its color is deep greenish brown, w^ith a bluish black spot on
the point of the operculum. AVhen young it has 25 or 30 longi-
tudinal brownish bands, which become effaced by age.

"The first dorsal has 10 spines, the second 13 or 14 soft
rays ; the pectorals 16 soft raj'^s ; the ventrals 1 spine and 5 soft
rays; the anal 3 spines and 11 or 12 soft rays; the caudal fin,
which is slightly lunate, has 17 soft rays." — (Herbert, Fish and
Fishing, 197, 1859.)

NOMENCLATURE AND MORPHOLOGY. 105

Gkystes salmonoides Giinther, 1859. — " B. 6-7; D. y^.-j-^;
A. yy?3-2 5 -^- ^''^^- 90. Ciec. Pylor, 14 and more. The height
of the body is nearly one-fourth of the total length ; the length
of the head is contained 3^ therein. Lower jaw prominent.
Preoperculum and suprascapular entire. Operculum with two
spines. PrsBorbital with or without some slight denticulations;
pectoral and ventral fins short. The fourth dorsal spine longest;
the second of the anal much shorter than the third. Caudal is
slightly notched. Uniform greenish brown, with a black spot at
the posterior angle of the operculum. Young with indistinct
longitudinal streaks." — (GtJnther, Qit. Fishes Brit. Mus. I, 252,
1859.)

Centrarchus fasciatus Giinther, 1859. — " D. \^; A. y\.
Body gibbous; the height is 3J in the total length. Dusky
bluish, often with transverse bands." — (Gunther, Cat. Fishes
Brit. Mus. I, 258, 1859.)

Centrarchus obscurus Gunther, 1859. — " D. -LQ- ; A. -^j.
Body rather elongate, not gibbous ; the height is one-fourth of
the total length. Uniform greenish brown." — (Gunther, Cat.
Fishes Brit. Mus. I, 258, 1859.)

Lepomis achigan Gill, 1860. — " Rafinesque first indicated
the C'lchla fasciata of Le Sueur, or Centrarchus obscurus of
DeKay under the name of Bodianus achigan. His specific
name must be presei'ved." — (Gill, Pro. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. 20,
I860.)

Centrarchus fasciatus Roosevelt, 1862. — " The gill cover
has two flat points, the teeth are minute, while the back fin,
though single, is partly divided into 2. It contains 10 hard
and 14 soft rays, the ventral 6, the first one almost spinous, the
anal 3 spines, the first very short, and 1 2 soft rays, and the tail
16 soft rays."— (Roosevelt, Game Fish of the NoHh, 218, 1862.)

Grystes nigricans Norris, 1864. — "The color of this fish,
which appears to vary with the locality or the season, is gener-
ally dark olive green on the back, shading gradually into a

106 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

brownish yellow on the sides; belly opaque white. Body com-
pressed oval, back arched, belly less curved tlian the superior
outlines ; breadth as 2 to 7. Lateral line concurrent with the
back. Head small, little less than ^ the length of body ; pre-
opercle covered with small scales, scales larger on opercle. The
eye is on a line between the snout and posterior angle of the
opercle, J distant from snout, and is about f of an inch in
diameter ; the irides are dark brown above and pale yellow
below. Nostrils small, double. Tongue toothless ; both jaws
with small brush-like teeth, small patches of the same on each
side the pharynx as well as on the branchial arches. Branchial
rays 7. The first dorsal fin has 10 sharp S2)ines, the anterior ray
being short. The second dorsal is covered at its base with
scales, and has 15 rays, preceded by an obtuse spine of ^ their
length ; this fin is arched and rounded posteriorly. The pec-
torals beginning immediately beneath the point of the opercle
are yellow, nearly obovate in shape, and have 18 rays. Ventrals
commencing slightly posteriorly have 5 branched rays. The
anal terminating beneath the posterior point of the second dorsal
has 2 sharp, and 1 longer obtuse spine, and 12 branched rays.
The caudal is very slightly forked and has 18 rays. . . . This
fish differs from the Oswego Bass, to which it has so close a re-
semblance, in having a smaller head, and its belly less protuber-
ant, though the position of the fins, their shape, and number of
spines and rays, are almost identical." — (Norris, Am. Angler's
Booh, 103, 1864.)

MiCROPTERUS ACHiGAN Gill, 1866. — "The common small-
mouthed species (3flcropterus aehigan) is, in truth, well entitled
to command the efforts of the pisiculturist, and could be intro-
duced most advantageously into many sheets of water at present
aflbrding fishes of inferior quality." — (Gill, Rept. Com. Agric.
408, 1866.)

Grystes fasciatus Putnam, 1867. — "This species, Avhich is
the common Lake Bass and Black Bass of the great lakes. Lake

NOMENCLATURE AND MORPHOLOGY. 107

Champlain and several lakes in New York, and Avhich also ex-
tends further south, has been introduced into Great Sandy Lake
in Wareham. In the summer of 1862 a specimen of this fish
was caught in Massachusetts Bay by one of the members of the
state legislature, and is now in the state cabinet. The fish had
evidently found the salt water not much to its liking, as it was
much emaciated, and had changed so in its general appearance
as at first sight hardly to be recognized." — (Putnam, Storer's
Fishes Mass. 278, 1867.)

MiCROPTERUS FAsciATUS Copc, 1868. — "This specimen is
abundant in Holston River; individuals are identical with others
from Miami River; Indiana; Wabash; Kiskiminitas ; from
Michigan and Lake George, N. Y. It grows to a considerable
size and is much valued for food.

"The absence or rarity of this species and the Ambloplites
rupestris in the Kanawha River, in Giles County and above is
remarkable. During a residence of six weeks on its banks, I
never caught or saw a specimen of either, and they are not
clearly known to the fishermen." — (Cope, Jour. Ac. Nat. Sci.
Phil. VI, 216, 1868.)

MiCROPTERUS SALMOiDES Gill, 1873. — "Scales small, in about
70 to 80 oblique rows between the head and caudal, and 11 long-
itudinal ones between the back and lateral line, decreasing very
much towards the nape and (esjiecially) the breast; forming a
sheath encroaching considerably upwards upon the soft portion
and last spine of the dorsal. Head transversely (slightly)
convex between the orbits, with (1) scales on the operculum
larger than those of the nape, (2) on the suboperculum (in
front) in two rows, (3) on the interoperculum narrow, mostly in-
vested in the membrane (in one row), (4) on the cheeks very
small (in about 17 to 20 rows), and (5) on the preoperculum
none. Mouth moderate, the gape from the symphysis to the
angle being little more than one-third (1 : 2J) of the head's
length. Supramaxillary ending in advance of vertical from the

108 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

hinder margin of the orbit (about under the posterior border of
the pupil).

"Dorsal fin with its anterior spines rapidly graduated (1=1;
11=1-5; 111=1-90; IV=2-05; V=2-30) to the fifth; fifth,
sixth and seventh longest and about equal to the space betvveen
the back and lateral line ; the succeeding ones very gradually
diminishing to the ninth which is shortest (three-fourths — 1 :
1-25 — of fifth) the tenth being about as long as the eighth and
about a third shorter than the longest, i. e., fifth.

" Dorsal fin with scales differentiated from those of the sheath,
and advancing high up on the membrane behind each soft ray
(except the last two or three).

" Anal fin with scales ascending high on the membrane behind
the several rays.

"Color, in young and adolescent, bronzed grayish, with (1)
irregular darker spots, tending to arrangement in three series
alternating with each other above the lateral line, and (2) indis-
tinctly maculated with darker and yellow below ; head dark
above, gray on sides, with three oblique or horizontal bands, viz.:

(1) from margin of upper jaw to below angle of preoperculum,

(2) from lower angle of orbit to margin of preoperculum, (3)
from hinder border of orbit to angle of operculum, and with a
crescentiform band (curved forwards) in front of the forehead
between the eyes ; spinous dorsal simply punctulated with dark ;
the soft with a series of bronzed spots between the respective
rays; and greenish with a marginal band of grayish-white; in
adults the markings are more or less obliterated and the color a
uniform dead green." — (Gill, Pro. Am. Asso. Adv. Sci. XXII,
B. 69, 1873.)

Micro PTERUS salmoides Uhler and Lugger, 1876. — " Elon-
gated oval, arched; thick and rounded along the back; thinner
and nearly straight at the belly. Head very large and thick,
especially between the eyes , snout full and rounded ; eyes very
large. Head and body dusky above, with a greenish or bronzed

NOMENCLATURE AND MORPHOLiOGY. 109

tint ; lower jaw and belly white ; along the flanks runs a dusky
band, more or less distinct according to the age of the fish; a
bluish-black spot on the point of the opercle. Total length 14
iuclies, but occasionally 24 inches.

" Fin rays :—D. 9,14; P. 14; V. 1,5; A. 3,12; C. 19."--
(Uhler & Lugger, Fishes of Md. <^BepL Finh Com. Md.
Ill, 1876.)

MiCROPTERUS SALMOiDES Jordan, 1877. — "In the Etowah,
Oostanaula, and Coosa Rivers [Ga,], . . . The yellow and
black caudal markings, so striking in young specimens from the
Ohio River, and which suggested to Rafinesque the name of
Calliurus, are not well shown by my specimens. The lower fins
are unusually red, and there is a tendency to the formation of
parallel lines of dusky spots along the rows of scales. These
peculiarities perhaps indicate a permanent variety." — (Jordan,
Ann. N. Y. Lye. Nat. Hist. XI, 315, 1877.)

MiCROPTERUS SALMOIDES Jordan, 1877. — "The peculiar col-
oration of the caudal fin which suggested the name of Calliurus,
' base yellow, middle blackish, tip white,' belongs among Ohio
fishes only to tlie young of the Black Bass. Calliurus, therefore,
as shown by Professor Gill, is a synonym of Micropterits, and
can not be applied to a distinct genus." — (Jordan, Contrib. N.
A, Ich. No. 1. <:BidL U. S. Nat. 3fus. IX, 18, 1877.)

MiCROPTERUS SALMOIDES Hallock, 1877. — "Head and body
dusky above, often with a greenish or bronzed tint; lower jaw
and belly white ; opercle with a bluish-green spot at its angle.
Along the flanks runs a dusky band, Avhich is more or less ap-
parent according to the age of the fish. It is most remarked in
the young. Fins yellowish." — (Hallock, SpoHsman^s Gazetteer,
373, 1877.)

MiCROPTERUS SALMOIDES Jordan, 1878. — "Dark green; young
brighter and more or less barred and spotted, but without lateral
band ; tail yellow at base, then black, and edged with white ;
opercle with oblique olivaceous streaks ; third dorsal spine half

110 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

larger than first; dorsal notch rather shallow; scales smaller
than in 31. pallidus — eleven rows between lateral line and dorsal ;
mouth smaller; anal nearly scaleless ; D. X, 13; A. Ill, 11;
lat. 1. 70 to 80. Great lakes and streams from L. Champlain
S. and W.; common in New York and in most reuions west of
the Alleghanies ; introduced eastward." — (Jordan, Manual
Vertebrates E. U. S. 2d ed. 236, 1878.)

MICROPtERUS SALMOIDES (Lac.) Henshall.
THE LAEGE-MOUTHED BLACK BASS.

SYNONYMY.

1802 — Lahrus sahnoides Lacepede, Hist. Nat. des Poiss. IV,

716.
Grystes saJmoides Agassiz, Lake Superior, 295, 1850.
Grystes sahnoides Holbrook, Ich. So. Car. 25, 1855, and

2d ed. 28, 1860.
Grystes salmoides Noeris, Am. Angler's Book, 99, 1864.

(In part.)
Dioplites sahnoides Vaillant & Bocourt, INISS, Miss.

Sei. au Mexique, 1874.
Micropterus salmoides Vaillant & Bocourt, Miss. Sci.

au Mexique: ined.
1820 — Lepomis pallida Rafinesque, Ich. Ohiensis, 30.

3Iicropterus pallidus Jordan, Ann. N. Y. Lye. Nat. Hist.

XI, 314, 1877.
3Iicropterus 2)(dHdus Jordan, Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus. IX

and X, 1877.
Micropterus pallidus Jordan, Bull. U. S. Nat. ]\Ius. XII,

1878.
Micropicrus pallidus Jordan, Hayd. Geol. Surv. Ter.

Bull. IV, No. 2, 435, 1878.

NOMENCLATURE AND MORPHOLOGY. Ill

Micrapterm palUdits Jordan, Man. Vert. E. U. S. 2d

ed., 236, 1878.
Micropterus pallidus Goode, Pro. U. S. Nat. Mus. II,

115, 1879.
Micropterus paUldus Goode & Bean, Bull. Essex Inst.

XI, 19, 1879.
Micropterus paUidus Goode & Bean, Pro. U. S. Nat.

Mus. II, 138, 1879.
Micropterus pallidus Henshall, Kept. Fisli Com. Ohio,

31, 1879.
Micropterus pallidus Jordan, Pro. U. S. Nat. Mus. Ill,

19, 1880.
1822 — Oichla floridana Le Sueur, Jour. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. II,

219.
Micropterus Jloridanus Goode, Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus. VI,

63, 1876. (Name only.)
lS28—^IIuro nigricans Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. des

Poiss. II, 124.
Suro nigrica7is Jardine, Nat. Lib. I, Perches, 108, 1835.
Suro nigricans Eichardson, Fau. Bor. Am. Ill, 4,

1836.
Huro nigricans DeKay, Fishes N. Y. 15, 1842.
Huro nigricans Storer, Syn. Fishes N. A. 25, 1846.
Grystes nigricans Agassiz, Lake Superior, 297, 1850.
Grystes nigricans Herbert, Fish and Fishing, 195, 1859,
Huro nigricans GiJNTHER, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus. I, 255,

1859.
Suro nigricans Roosevelt, Game Fish of the North,

219, 1862.
Micropterus nigricans Cope, Pro. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. 83,

1865. (Name only.)
Micropterus nigricans Gill, Kept. Com. Agric. 407, 1866.
Micropterus nigricans Cope, Pro. Am. Phil. Soc. 451,

1870.

112 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

Micropterus nigricans Gill, Pro. Am. Asso. Adv. Sci.

B. 70, 1873.
Micropterus nigricans Jordan, lud. Geo!. Surv. 214,

1874.
Micropterus nigricans Jordan, Man. Vert. E. U. S. 229,

1876.
Micropterus nigricans Hallock, Sportsman's Gazetteer,

273, 1877. (In part.)
1854 — Grystes nobilis Agassiz, Am. Jour. Sci. Art, XVII,

298.
Grystes nobilis Putnam, Bull. Miis. Comp. Zool. I, 6,

1863. (Name only.)
1854 — Grystes nuecemis Baird & Girard, Pro. Ac. Nat. Sci.

Phil. VII, 25.
Dioplites nuecensis Girard, U. S. Pac. R. R. Surv. X,

Fishes, 4, 1858.
Grystes nuecensis Gunther, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus. I,

252, 1859. (Name only.)
Dioplites nnecensis Girard, U. S. Mex. Bound. Surv. II,

3, 1859.
Dioplites nuecensis Vaillant & Bocourt, MSS. Miss.

Sci. au Mexique, 1874.
Micropterus nuecensis Vaillant & Bocourt, Miss. Sci.

au Mexique : ined.
1857 — Grystes megastoma Garlick, Treat. Art. Prop. Fish, 108,

1857.
1874 — Dioplites ireoulii Vaillant & Bocourt, MSS. Miss. Sci.

au Mexique, 1874. (Zoologie, j^t. IV, plate IV, f. 2.

No description ; the species since identified by its

authors with M. miecensis.)

Etymology : Sahnoides, trout-like ; salmon-like.
Habitat : Red River of the North to Florida ; Virginia
to Mexico; introduced eastward.

NOMENCLATURE AND MORPHOLOGY. 113

Specific Descriptions.

Labrus salmoides Lacepede, 1802. — "Neuf rayons aiguil-
lones et treize rayons articules a la nageoire du dos ; treize rayon
a la nageoire de I'anus ; Topercule compose de quatre lames, et
termine par une prolongation anguleuse ; deux orifices a chaque
narine; la couleur generale d'un brun noiratre." [Br. 6; P.
13; V. 6; C. 18.]— (Lacepede, Hist. Nat des Foiss. IV, 716,
1802.)

Lepomis pallida Rafinesque, 1820. — " Olivaceous above,
white beneath, a brown spot at the base of the lateral line, an
obtuse appendage on the opercule, spine behind it : 3 faint
obHqual streaks on the gill-covers ; lower jaw longer : tail forked,
pale yellow, tip broAvn.

"Not uncommon in the Ohio, Miami, Hockhocking, etc. Vul-
gar name. Yellow Bass ; Common Bass, etc. Length from 4
to 12 inches. Shape elliptic, diameter one-fourth of the total
length. Fins olivaceous, without streaks, dorsal depressed or
interrupted in the middle, 9 spiny rays to the fore part, the
medial longer, 1 spiny ray and 14 soft rays to the hind part.
Anal fin rounded 13 rays, whereof 2 are spiny and short. Pec-
torals rounded with 14 rays ; tail with 18 ; thoracics with 6.
Eyes large, black, iris brown with a gold ring. Lateral line
following the back, straight near the tail." — (Rafinesque, Ich.
Old. 30, 1820.)

CiCHLA floridana Le Sueur, 1822. — "Dorsal fin with 9
spinous rays anteriorly, and 15 soft ones posteriorly; anal with
3 spinous rays and twelve divided soft ones.

" The total length of this fish is one foot five inches, in dejjth
5 in. towards the dorsal fin ; the body is attenuated ; more ob-
tuse anteriorly ; snout short ; inferior jaw a little longer than
superior one; mouth deeply divided; intermaxillary bone long;
maxillary bone prolonged unto the end of the eye ; teeth very
small, equal, approximate ; card like before, smaller and more
10

114 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

delicate at the angles of the mouth, on the vomer and on the
wings of the palate they are small and like velvet ; eye round,
near the summit of the head; scales rounded, large upon the
sides near the pectoral fins, diminishing towards the back, and
in approaching the tail and the abdomen, smaller, and subequal
on all the pieces of the operculum; the snout and the upper
part of the head are destitute of scales; mandible and post
mandible very strong and broad ; dorsal fin divided into two
nearly equal parts, the anterior spinous, elevated before, very low
behind and but little arquated ; the posterior part mc^re elevated
and rounded ; the anal fin short, extending beyond the dorsal
as in the species of the Ohio, so that its middle corresponds
with the posterior base of the dorsal ; the rays of the fins are
also much divided and articulated ; pectorals small and rounded ;
thoracic fins subtriangular, as long as the j)ectorals ; operculum
without any denticulation, or spine; lateral line oblique, undu-
lated ; the color of this dried specimen is black on the back and
lighter towards the abdomen.

" We are indebted for this species to the researches of Messrs.
Maclure, Ord, Say, and Peale, who brought it from East Flor-
ida."—(Le Sueur, Jour. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. II, 219, 1822.)

HuRO NIGRICANS Cuvier & Valenciennes, 1828. — "II a le
corps un peu plus haut a proportion que la perche ; le museau
un peu plus court ; le front moins concave ; sa raachoire iuferi-
eure se porte un peu plus en avant. Sur son front se voient des
stries fines et nombreuses, mais toutes dirigees vers le bord de
I'orbite. II a des dents en velours aux memes endroits que la
perche; son maxillaire a le bord superieur dilate; son front, son
museau, ses machoires, n'ont point d'ecailles; mais il y en a sur
son crane, sa tempe, toute sa joue et toutes ses pieces operculai-
res, leurs bords exceptes. Le limbe de I'opercule en est depour-
vu, et son bord parfaiteraent entier et sans dentalures s'arrondit
dans le bas, apres avoir fiiit un tres-leger arc rentrant. L'oper-
cule osseux se terraine en deux pointes plates, separees par una

NOMENCLATURE AND MORPHOLOGY. 115

petite enchancrure aiguii et oblique. Aucune des pieces de
I'epaule n'a de dentelure. La premiere dorsale, beaucoup plus
petite qu'a la perche, n'a que six rayons, et demeure assez
eloignee de la seconde, qui est plus elevee, et pent avoir avee ses
deux epines douze ou treize rayons mous. (Elle est en pavtie
niutilee dans notre individu.) L'anale a trois epines et onze
rayons mous; elle est aussi un peu plusgrande a proportion qu'a
la perche. Quant aux pectorales et aux ventrales, elles sont a
peu pres pareilles a celles de la perche, et la caudale aussi.

B. 7 ; D. 6.-2, 12 ? A. 3, 11 ; C. 17 ; P. 15 ; V. 1, 5.

"On compte soixante et quelques ecailles entre I'ouie et la
caudale, et vingt-cinq ou vingt-six entre la premiere dorsale et le
ventre. Elles paraissent toutes lisses et entieres.

" La couleur de ce poisson, que nous n'avons vu que desseche,
parait avoir approche de celle de la carpe. Son dos est d'un
brun verdatre, qui s'afFaiblit sur les cotes, et passe sous le ventre
au blanc-jau natre argente ; une ligne grisatre suit le milieu de
chaque rangee longitudinale d'ecailles.

" L'individu que nous avons eu sous les yeux, etait long de
seize pouces.

" Nous laisserons a I'espece I'epithete qu'elle porte dans son
pays natal, Hitro nigricans." — (Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist.
Nat. des Poiss. II, 124, 1828.)

HuRO NIGRICANS Jardine, 1835. — "The first is the Black
Bass or Black Perch of the English residents on the banks of
the Huron. Its flesh is firm and white, and it is much esteemed
during the summer. The upper parts of the fish are of an olive
brown, changing into yellowish white on the belly, and along
the central ridge of each scale is a line of the same color with
the upper parts, giving it a striped appearance on the sides;
the body is rather deep in proportion ; the under jaw slightly
projects, and the head, cheeks and opercles are scaled ; the teeth
are nearly similar to tliose of the perch ; the first dorsal is much
less, contains only six rays, and is placed at a considerable dis-

116 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

taiice in front of the second ; the anal fin is again considerably
larger in proportion and has three spiny, with eleven soft rays ;
the others are very similar to those of the perch. Cuvier's spec-
imen was 16 in. in length, and although the flesh is esteemed,
and seems abundant in its native country, little is yet known
regarding it." — (Jardine, Nat. Lib. I, Perches, 108, 1835.)

HuRO NIGRICANS Richardson, 1836. — " Profile elliptical, the
ellipsis commencing acutely in the somewhat pointed chin and
conical head, but passing gradually into the thickish tail; the
depth of the body is greatest under the first dorsal and appears to
be about equal to the length of the head, -or one-tliird of the
total length, excluding the caudal; head flat above, covered with
scales as far as the posterior margin of the orbit ; the forehead
shows a slight median ridge with a more prominent lateral one,
and there are many fine sti'eaks on the upper margin of the
orbit; the anterior suborbital bone is marked by some short di-
verging ridges, and the under and posterior margin of the orbit
is more distinctly roughened by many small irregular promi-
nences ; tlie orbit is circular, situated close to the forehead, and
two of its own diameters and one-half above the articulation of
the lower jaw ; it is also a diameter and one-half behind the ex-
tremity of the upper jaw, and four diameters from the point of
the suboperculum or most posterior part of the gill cover ; the
mouth acquires a somewhat vertical aspect from the chin or tip
of the lower jaw, projecting about a quarter of an inch beyond
it, and from its opening descending from the plane of the fore-
head, at a considerable angle as it runs backwards ; the articula-
tion of the lower jaw is opposite the posterior margin of the
orbit; the labials have a lengthened triangular form, the narrow
apex only passing under the edge of the suborbital bone ; the
posterior dilated and truncated extremity projects considerably
beyond the tip of the intermaxillary and extends further back
than the orbit ; it is further widened by the addition of a superior
piece, or apoplysis whose corner is rounded ; there are no pores

NOMENCLATURE AND MORPHOLOGY. 117

in the lower jaw, but two circular openings of canals in the
bone are visible through the dried skin which covers them.
The opposing surfaces of the intermaxilhiries and lower jaw are
covered with densely-crowded, curved, fine card-like teeth, or
as they ougiit, perhaps, to be called, in conformity Avith Cuvier's
nomenclature, rather coarse "dents en velours;" the dental sur-
face being broad anteriorly and narrowing to a point behind ;
the transverse, anterior, projecting extremity of the vomer and
the outer edges of tlie palate bones are armed with fine teeth " en
velours; " the dental surface of the latter narrowing to a point,
posteriorly, like those of the mandibles ; there is, however, a de-
tached but contiguous patch just beyond this point on the edge of
the palate ; the whole vault of the palate is smooth ; the tongue, as
we have already mentioned, has been removed, and if Mr. Todd's
account of tlie pharyngeal teeth be correct, they are not distributed
into the same number of patches as in the perch. Preoj^erculum
having a narrow upright limb, covered with smooth skin, there
being a single scale only just above its angle ; the lower limb is
wider and has tl'ree scales in a single row which does not cover
half its surface ; the whole edge of the bone is smooth and even,
with the exception of a very shallow, wide notch at the base of
the upper limb. The interoperculum is comparatively broad, its
depth exceeding that of either the preopereulum or suboperculum,
it is covered by'a row of ten scales, which leave its under border
naked ; the bony operculum has an acute oblique notch in its
posterior margin, producing two thin points; the lower point is
closely applied to the apex of the suboperculum, forming with it
one obtuse thin plate, which, together with the upper point,
are concealed by the membrane which borders them ; the under
margin of the subopeiTulum is slightly waved, forming two ob-
scure lobes ; as in many, or perhaps in most of the percoidere
with scaly gill covers, the margins of the pieces composing them
are covered with a smooth skin; there is even a wider naked
place than usual behind the points of the operculum, and the

118 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

anterior border of that bone is as wide and prominent as the
limb of the preoperculum to which it adjoins ; the forehead,
snout, infraorbital bones, and margins of the orbits, mandibles,
labials, branchiostegous membranes and edges of the different
opercular bones, are covered with a smooth skin ; the rest of
the head, including the temples and the top of the cranium as
far as the " linea rostri basalis," are clothed with tiled scales;
the bones lining the posterior edge of the gill openings are like-
wise scaleless, and their edges, though undulated, are destitute
of spines or serratures; the nape is supported by a median ridge
of the cranium and a thin lateral one on each side equally high ;
there are also several interspinous bones anterior to the first
dorsal; the branchiostegous membrane contains 6 curved rays,
the anterior ones cylindrical, the posterior ones becoming more
and more flat and wider. Br. 6; D. 6-2, 8 ?: P. 15 ; V. 1, 5;
A. 3, 11 ; C. 17f

" The pectorals consist of fiften rays, the first of which is short
and its articulations very obscure, being visible only at the tip
and with a lens; the ventrals are attached directly under the
pectorals and contain 6 rays, of which the first is spinous and
one-third shorter than the succeeding ones ; the first dorsal con-
sists of 6 acute spinous rays, having the connecting membrane
notched between them ; the first ray is one-third shorter than the
third, which is the longest and stands about an inch behind the
insertion of the pectorals and ventrals, the fourth and fifth are
nearly as long as the third ; the second dorsal is one-third higher
than the first, and commences nearly an inch behind the posterior
insertion of the membrane of the latter, the 2 anterior rays
are spinous and separated by membrane — the first of them equal
in height to the corresponding ray of the first dorsal, the first
ray is simple but articulated ; the succeeding ones are branched
at the tips, and nearly equal to each otter, the seventh being,
however, rather the highest; the fifth ray is opposite the anus,
and the tenth .... is opposite to the fifth of the anal;

NOMENCLATURE AND MORPHOLOGY. 119

the anal contains 15 rays, the two first of them shorter, spinous,
and very acute, the branched rays equal those of the dorsal in
height; the first dorsal ray stands half an inch behind the anus.
If the fish, exclusive of the caudal fin, be divided into three
parts, the head will form one, and the first spine of the anal
will stand at the commencement of the third ; the space between
the anal and the caudal considerably exceeds that occupied by
the attachment of the former; the caudal is somewhat rounded
and very slightly emarginated, its base is covered with small
scales, which terminate by an even line rounded off on the three
exterior rays, while they cover the accessory short rays above
and below to their tips, thus producing a notch at each end of
the line. The scales are rather large, the exterior edge forming
a segment of a circle, and being quite smooth, the sides almost
parallel, and the base truncated and crenated in correspondence
with 10 or 11 furrows which diverge from the center, like the
sticks of a fan; there are 60 scales on the lateral line exclusive
of about 9 smaller ones, forming a continuation of the same
row on the base of the caudal, and 26 in a vertical row beneath
the first dorsal, of which 7 are above the row which forms the
lateral line; a linear inch measured along the sides includes 5
scales and one-half; the scales on the gill covers are a little
smaller than those on the body, those on the cheeks are still
less, and the scales on the caudal and on the space before the
ventrals are the smallest of all; a scale taken from the lateral
line under the first dorsal is 4f lines wide and 3^ lines long;
the lateral line runs parallel to the curvature of the back and
is distant from the belly — it is marked by a tubular elevation
on each scale ; back and sides dark, with a faint longitudinal
streak through the center of each row of scales ; belly yellowish
white." — (EiCHARDSON, Faun. Bor. Am. Ill, 4, 1836.)

HuRO NIGRICANS DcKay, 1842. — "General form that of the
Perch ; greatest depth of body under the first dorsal, and equal
to one-third the length of body; scales large, smooth, covering

120 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

the head as far as the orbit, and extending also on the oiDercles;
lateral line tubular, concurrent with the dorsal outline; head
flattened above with strise diverging to the f)rbits. Lower jaw
directed obliquely upwards and projecting 0.25 beyond the upper;

velvet-like teeth on the jaws, vomer, and palatines; tongue ;

the bony opercle has an acute, oblique notch on its posterior
margin, producing two thin points ; the branchial membrane, ac-
cording to Cuvier, with 7 rays. Richardson enuniej-ates but 6.
The first dorsal small ; its third ray longest, the fourth and fifth
nearly as long ; the second dorsal an inch behind the first and
one-third higher; the two first rays spinous, short; the first ray
articulated, simple, the remainder branched. In tlie only spec-
imen hitherto examined the rays of this fin were injui-ed, but
Cuvier supposes there must have been 12 or 13, only 8
were visible; pectorals with the first ray very short; veutrals
immediately beneath them ; anal, with its branched rays, equal
in height to those of second dorsal ; caudal slightly emarginate,
with its tips rounded. Color, taken from a dried specimen, back
and sides dark, with a fiiint longitudinal streak through the
center of each row of scales; belly yellowish white. Length 17.5;
Fins, D. 6-2, 8, or 12; P. 15; V. 1, 5; A. 3, 11; C. 17f

"This is a remarkably firm and Avell flavored fish, taken
readily with the hook during the summer months in Lake
Huron, where it is called Black Bass. It will probably be found
in Lake Erie, and of course within the limits of the State. As
I have not seen it, I have availed myself of the descriptions and
figure given by Cuvier and Valencieinies. Its history is yet
imperfect, nor Avith our present knowledge can we assign it pos-
itively its proper place in the family." — (DeKay, Fishes N. Y,
15, 1842.)

HuRO NIGRICANS Storer, 1846. — "Above of an olive brown,
changing into yellowish white on the belly and along the central
ridge of each scale is a line of the same color with the upper
parts, giving it a striped appearance on the sides; the first

NOMENCLATURE AND MORPHOLOGY. 121

dorsal fin is smaller than that of the Perch, and is placed at a
considerable distance in front of the second ; the anal fin is some-
what larger in proportion. D. 6-2, 12; P. 15; V. 1, 5; A. 3, 11 ;
C. 17 ; Cuv. & Val. D. 6-2, 8 ; P. 15 ; V. 1, 5 ; A. 3, 11 ; C.
17f Rich."— (Storer, Synopsis Fish. N. A. 25, 1846.) (Copied.)

Grystes nigricans Agassiz, 1850. — " Huro nigricans Cuv.
is another species of the lower Canadian lakes, which occurs also
in Lake Chaniplain. The generic distinctions from Grystes does
not, however, rest u^Don sufficient characters to warrant its pres-
ervation in the system of fislies; I shall, therefore, call it in
future Grystes nigricans. It is a very common fish in some of
the lakes, and highly esteemed as an article of food. Through-
out the lake region it is known under the name of Black Bass,
and may be seen in large numbers in the enclosure under the
gallery of the Cataract Hotel at Niagara. Dr. DeKay describes
it as Centrarchus fasciatus, although he copies also Cuvier's de-
scription and figure of Huro nigricans, but without perceiving
their indentity.

"In the northern lakes there is only one species of true Cen-
trarchus found, the Centrarchus ceneus; but it does not occur as
far north' as Lake Superior, though it is common in Lake Huron
and the other great lakes. " — (Agassiz, Lake Superior, 297, 1850.)

Grystes nobilis Agassiz, 1854. — "The species from Hunts-
ville, known there under the name of trout, differs equally from
the northern species mentioned in my ' Lake Superior,' and
from that of the Southern States described by Cuvier and Valen-
ciennes as Grystes sabnoneus. Its snout is shorter, the posterior
end of the upper maxillary extends beyond the hinder border of
the eye, the head is higher, and the scales much larger in the
dorsal as well as in the ventral regions. No teeth on the tongue.
I call this species provisionally Grystes nobilis Ag. It reaches a
large size, and weighs occasionally from 10 to 14 pounds."
—(Agassiz, Am. Jour. Sei. Arts, XVII, 297, 1854.)

Grystes nuecensis Baird & Girard, 1854. — " Head forming
11

122 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

y\ of the entire length. Mouth deeply cleft ; its angle reach-
ing a vertical passing backwards of the eye; lower jaw longer
than upper. Eyes rather large; their diameter contained six
times in the length of side of head. Scales on the cheeks a
little smaller than those on the opercular apparatus. First
dorsal lower than the second, caudal subcrescentic posteriorly.
Anal extended a little further behind the second dorsal, though
shorter and less deep. D. X, 13; A. Ill, 11; C. 4, 1, 8, 8,
1, 3; V. 1, 5; P. 15.

"Ground color of back, black clouded ^vith greyish brown.
Sides dull-yellow gray, with an interrupted darker baud. Be-
neath light yellow. Eio Frio and Rio Nueces, Texas." — (Baikd
& GiRARD, Pro. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. VII. 25, 1854.)

Grystes salmoides Holbrook, 1855. — "Head and body
dusky above, often with a greenish or bronzed tint ; lower jaw
and belly Avhite ; opercle with a bluish-green spot at its angle.
D. 9, 14; P. 14; Y. 1, 5; A. 3, 12; C. 19.

"This fish is of an elongated oval form, arched; thick and
rounded along the back, thinner and nearly straight at the
belly. The head is very large and thick, especially between the
eyes, and the snout is full and rounded ; the facial outline is
nearly sti'aight, though the prominence of the intermaxillary
bone gives it an incurved appearance. The eye is very large ; it
is placed one diameter and a quarter of the orbit from the snout,
and two and a quarter diameters from the posterior extremity of
the opercle, with its lower margin slightly above the mediuin
plane of the head. The nostrils are round ; the anterior and
smaller is rather nearer to the eye than to the snout, and both
are on a line within the orbit.

"The mouth is very large; the posterior extremity of the
upper jaw extending behind the orbit ; the lower jaw is the
longest, and so projects as to make a part of the facial line when
the mouth is shut. Both jaws are armed with numerous small
conical, pointed recurved card-like teeth ; they are all nearly of

NOMENCLATURE AND MORPHOLOGY. 123

the same size, except some in the upper jaw, which are directed
inwards and backwards. Tlie vomer lias in front a large arrow-
headed group of minute villiform teeth ; and the pahite-bones
have on each side a long and rather broad patch of similar
teeth. The pharyngeal teetli resemble those of the jaws in size
and form. The tongue is large and thick behind ; thin, narrow
and rounded in front, smooth and tolerably free.

" The preopercle is nearly semicircular at its angle, which is
smooth or not serrated, but the ascending border is slightly
emarginate above the angle. The opercle is subtriangular, with
its base before and apex behind, and emarginate. The sub-
opercle is quadrilateral, and extends as far back as the opercle.
The interopercle is rounded below, and ascends for some distance
between the preopercle and the opercle. The head is covered
with scales above and at the sides as far as the posterior margin
of the orbit, but the superior maxillary bone is naked. The gill
openings are very large ; there are 7 branchial rays.

"The dorsal fin is very large and long; it begins rather
behind the base of the pectoral, and is single, though deeply
emarginate; its anterior portion has 9 spines, partially received
in a groove ; the posterior or soft portion of the dorsal fin is
more elevated and has 14 articulated rays. The pectoral is
broad, but short and rounded behind ; it arises rather before the
termination of the opercle, and has 14 rays. The ventral begins
nearly even with the pectoral fin and is shorter ; it has 1 spine
and 5 soft rays, the internal of which is bound to the belly for
half its length. The anal arises nearly in a line vertical with
the root of the third dorsal ray, and has 3 spines and 12
branched rays. The caudal is large, broad, slightly crescentic,
and has 19 rays.

"The scales are nearly semicircular in shape, with the
diameter in front, straight and marked with 12 radiating lines.
The lateral line is concurrent with the back, and runs along the
superior fourth of the body ; its scale is narrower behind than
the others, and its excretory duct is placed obliquely.

124 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

"The head is dusky above, and silveiy though shghtly
clouded on the sides, with a bluish green blotch at the opercle ;
the body is also dusky above, or of a bronzed colour with a
greenish tint; the belly is silvery, and along the flanks runs a
duskv band more or less evident according to the age of the
animal ; it is remarkable in the young. The dorsal fin is trans-
parent, with only here and there dusky shades ; the membrane
of the pectoral is transparent, but the rays have a yellowish tint;
the ventral is yellowish, and the anal is slightly tinted with the
same color ; the caudal is dusky, with a very obscure yellowish
shade.

"The entire length from the opercle to the tip of the tail is
equal to two heads and a half; the greatest elevation is seven
eights of a head ; total length 14 inches ; specimens have been
observed nearly 2 feet in length.

"The peritoneum is silvery. The liver is large, and of a very
pale color ; it consists of a single rhomboidal mass, as there are
no marks of lobes ; it is placed mostly in the left side, and pro-
jects but slightly into the right. The gall bladder is large,
round, and is in great measure uncovered by the right margin of
the liver. The oesophagus is large and broad. The stomach is
large, and has thick, firm muscular walls, with deep folds of its
mucous membrane witliin ; the pyloric portion is short, thick,
stout, and departs at a right angle at its posterior third. The
intestine runs to the vent whence it is reflected to the pylorus,
and then it turns backwards to end in the rectum ; its walls are
remarkably thick and firm, and its mucous membrane is beauti-
fully reticulated, and presents numerous small areola? for two-
thirds of its length, and beyond this, longitudinal folds begin
which are continued into the rectum. There are 11 primitive
coecal appendages, which soon divide into 2 or 3 others, so that
as many as 28 may at times be counted. The spleen is rather
small, very pale, and is situated so fiir back that its anterior ex-
tremity scarcely reaches the stomach. The air-bladder is large,

NOMENCLATURE AND MORPHOLOGY. 125

and extends throughout the abdominal cavity ; it is full in front,
but is 2^''ii"tially subdivided into two small pouches behind ;
witliin it is bright yellow at its superior and posterior part. The
ovaries are suboval, rather broad, and unite in substance behind
before they open," — (Holbrook, Ich. So. Car. 25, 1855, and 2d
ed. 1860.)

Grystes megastoma Garlick, 1857. — "This fish has been*
identified witli the common Black Bass (Grystes fasciatus) , but is
by no means the same fish, differing in many respects, both in its
habits and physical structure, and has not been described in any
work on American fishes, so far as I can learn.

" The great distinguishing feature of this Bass is its immense
mouth, which has induced me to call it Grystes megastoma, or
large-mouthed Bass.

"In its general form it resend)les the common Black Bass,
though somewhat thicker. The head is much larger in propor-
tion to its size, and if a vertical line be drawn, passing through
the center of the eye, we shall find that the end of the upper
jaw projects back or behind the line quite a distance ; whereas,
in the common Bass the jaw will not reach as far back as the
line. The scales are much larger, and thickly set over the gill
covers. Back, of a dark greenish, olive color, fading gradually
to white underneath. If found in dark-colored water, the white
will be tinged with a pinkish hue. A darkish mottled band, of
about half an inch in width, embracing the lateral line, traverses
the whole length of the body.

"Br. rays, 6; Dor, 23: Sp. 9, Soft 14; A. 14: Sp. 3, Soft
11; C. 20; V. 6: Sp. 1, Soft 5; P. 13."— (Garlick, Treat.
Art. Prop. Fish. 108, 1857.)

DiOPLiTES NUECENSis Girard, 1858.— "Body elongated, sub-
fusiform ; head constituting a little less than the third of the
entire length ; posterior extremity of maxillary extending to a
vertical line drawn i)osteriorly to the orbit ; scales on the cheeks
nearly equal in size to those on the gill covers ; origin of ventrala

126 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

posterior to the base of pectorals ; upper regions, reddish brown,
maculated ; a lateral dark band ; inferior regions whitish, uni-
color.

"It is closely related to, if not identical, with Orystes. nobilis
Agassiz, from the southern bend of the Tennessee River. It has,
also, much greater affinities with D. fasciatus than with D. ml-
moides." — (Girard, U. S. Pac. R. R. Exp. and Surv. X, Fishes,
4, 1858.)

HuRO NIGRICANS Giinther, 1859. — "D. 6j\; A. j\.; L. lat.
60-65. Height of body equal to one-tliird of the total length,
excluding the caudal; cleft of the mouth obliquely running up-
Avards towards the plane of the forehead ; caudal slightly notched ;
coloration uniform." — GiJNTHER, Cat. Fishes, Brit. Mm. I, 255,
1859.)

DiOPLiTES NUECENSis Girard, 1859. —"Body elongated sub-
fusiform; head constituting a little less than the third of the
entire length ; posterior extremity of maxillary extending to a
vertical line drawn ^posteriorly to the orbit ; scales on the cheeks
nearly equal in size to tliose on the gill covers; origin of the
ventrals placed posteriorly to the base of the pectorals ; upper
regions reddish brown, maculated; a lateral dark band; inferior
regions whitish uni-color.

" This species is more closely related to D. fasciatus than to D.
salmoides, and probably identical with Grystes nobilis (Ag.).
At any rate the latter has greater affinities with D. fasciatus than
with D. salmoides, the latter being restricted to its proper limits.

"The body is jDroportionally more elongated than in D. fas-
ciatus, resembling more in that respect D. salmoides. It is com-
pressed and sub-uniform when seen in profile. The greatest
depth is somewhat less than the fourth of the total length, in
which the head enters a little less than three times; the mouth
is nu)re deeply cleft than in any other of the known sjaecies of
the genus, and its gap, is as usual, oblique upwards, owing to
the constant protrusion of the lower jaw beyond the upper,

jyOMENCLATURE AND MORPHOLOGY. 127

which it does very prominently in this species. The posterior
extremity of the maxiUary is very much dilated, extending to
a vertical line drawn considerably back of the whole orbit; the
tongue is large and stout at its base, thinning and tapering
towards its apex, which is broadly rounded ; it is smooth ante-
riorly, being j^rovided posteriorly and upon its middle with a
narrow band of velvet-like teeth ; both nostrils are nearer the
anterior rim of the orbit than the extremity of the snout; the
anterior one is a little smaller than the posterior, and j)laced
more outwardly with reference to the middle of the snout ; the
eye is of moderate development, sub -circular in shape, reaching
to the summit of the cranium, its diameter enters about six times
and one-half in the length of the side of the head, twice in ad-
vance of the anterior rim of the orbit ; the opercular apparatus
is perfectly smooth and deprived of either spines or serratures;
the scales upon the cheeks are but slightly smaller than those
covering the opercular pieces; the gill openings are wide and
continuous under the throat. The base of the first or spiny
dorsal is longer than that of the second, but the fin itself is lower
and more arched in its outline ; the first and second spines are
shorter than the third, which is the highest, the remaining ones
diminishing gradually posteriorly ; the tenth spine by its position
belongs rather to the second than the first dorsal ; the second
dorsal is higher than long, sub-trapezoid, its upper edge being
but slightly convex and the posterior rays almost as high as the
anterior ones ; the posterior margin of the caudal is sub-cres-
centic or sub-concave ; the fin itself is contained 5^ times in
the total length ; the origin of the anal corresponds to a vertical
line intersecting the anterior third of the second dorsal ; its base
extends a little further back than that of the latter, although
the tips of the posterior rays of both fins are nearly even, the
anal being not quite so deep as the second dorsal is high ; its
whole base, including the three small and slender spines at its
anterior margin, is shorter than that of the second dorsal; the

128 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

origin of the ventrals corresponds to a vertical line drawn imme-
diately behind the base of the pectorals; the fins themselves are
broad and short, since their posterior margin does not reach the
vent, which is situated a little way in advance of the anterior
margin of the anal fin and under a vertical Ime drawn between
the two dorsal fins; the pectorals are of moderate development,
not extending quite as far back as the ventrals.

Br. VI; D. X, 13; A. Ill, 11; C. 4, 1, 8, 8, 1, 3; V. I,
5; P. 15. (Rio Cibolo.)

Br. VI; D. X, 13; A. Ill, 12; C. 4, 1, 9, 8, 1, 3; V. I,
5; P. 15. (Rio Blanco.)

"The scales are of moderate development, sub-oblique, deeper
than long, provided with radiating grooves on their anterior
section only, and pectinated posteriorly ; the pectinations of the
scales of the dorsal regl(Mi are either obsolete or else deciduous,
and easily removed with the epidermis. As a whole, the fish
has a rather smooth appearance, reminding us more of a Trout
than a Perch were it not for its anterior spiny dorsal fin. From
29 to 30 longitudinal rows of scales may be counted upon the
line of the greatest depth, 19 below and 9 above the lateral line;
the scales under the throat are quite reduced in size, those on
the cheeks l)eing nearly as large as those on the opercle; minute
scales may be observed on the caudal fin to almost three-fourths
of the length of its rays, and a few scattered ones upon the base
of the second dorsal ; the lateral line itself from the uj)per region
of the gill covers is slightly arched upwards until under the
second dorsal fin, hence runs nearly straightway along the middle
of the peduncle of the tail to the base of the caudal fin. The
upper regions are reddish brown, of a more or less deep huC;
and maculated with dark brown or black, while the inferior re-
gions are whitish or yellowish and uni-color; a lateral, more or
less interrupted dark band may be traced from the black patch
at the posterior margin of the opercle to the base of the caudal
fin ; three obsolete streaks may be seen upon the cheeks diverg-

NOMENCLATURE AND MORPHOLOGY. 129

ing from the orbit; the fins are uiii-color except the second dorsal,
which exhibits two longitudinal bars upon its base; the upper
ones are greenish olive, the lower ones are yellowish olive." —
(GiKARD, U. S. Mex. Bound. Surv. II, 3, 1859.)

Grlstes nigricans Herbert, 1859. — "In color, this fish is
of a dusky bluish black, sometimes with bronze reflections, the
under parts bluish white, the cheeks and gill-covers nacreous, of
a bluish color.

"The body is compressed; back arched and gibbous; profile
descending obliquely to the rostrum, Avhich is moderately pro-
longed; scales large, truncated; scales on the operculum large;
a single series on the suboperculum, much smaller on the pre-
operculum, ascending high up on the membrane of the .^oft
dorsal and caudal fins; eyes large; nostrils double ; operculum
pointed, with a loose membrane; the lower jaw is somewhat long-
est ; the jaws are smooth and scaleless ; both jaws are armed with
a broad patch of minute conic acute reserved teeth ; an oblong
patch of rasp-like teeth on the vomer, and a band of the same
kind on the palatines; branchial arches minutely toothed;
pharyngeal teeth in rounded patches. The dorsal fin is com-
posed of 9 stout spines; the second dorsal of 1 spine and 14 soft
rays ; the pectorals have 18 soft rays, the ventrals 1 spine
and 5 soft rays, the anal 3 spines and 12 soft rays, and the
caudal 16 soft rays." — (Herbert, Fish and Fishing, 195, 1859.)
— (I think this description more ai^plicable to the large-mouthed
Black Bass than the small-mouthed form, although Herbert
copied it from DeKay's C. fasciatiis; but I think he considered
the latter the same as H. nigricans C. & V., on the strength of
Professor Agassiz's estimate of, and statement concerning, the
same species, viz: "Dr. DeKay describes it l^Hitro nigricans'] as
Centrarchus Jasciaiiis, although he copies also Cuvier's description
and figure of Huro nigricans, but without perceiving their iden-
tity."* It is also evident from the context of Herbert's descrip-

« " Lake Superior," p. 287, 1850.

130 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

tion that lie means the large-mouthed Bass, though I am of the
opinion that he knew very little about either species of Black
Bass. Accordingly, I have used Gnstes nigricans Herbert, as a
synonym of M sahnoides (Lac.) Henshall. J. A. H.)

Grystes salmoides Norris, 1864. — "The following is an
abridgment of Holbrook's description, connected with a few
observations of the writer: Head and body dusky, olive above,
sometimes with a yellowish tint, lighter on the sides; belly
white; opercles light green or greenish yellow; first dorsal fin,
9 spines and 15 soft rays ; pectorals 15 ; ventrals 1 spine and 5
rays; anal 3 spines and 12 rays; caudal 19 rays; body elon-
gated, oval, straight on the belly; eye large; mouth very large,
lower jaw longer ; the vomer has brush-like teeth in front; teeth
on the palatines and pharyngeal bones ; tongue smooth, without
teeth in front." — (Norris, Am. Angler's Book, 99, 1864.)

MiCROPTERUS NIGRICANS Cope, 1870. — "The Green Bass is
abundant in all rivers of the State [N. C] I have it from the
Neuse, Yadkin, Catawba, upper and lower French Broad, and
from the Clinch in Tennessee. Specimens from the Neuse and
from near Norfolk, Virginia, six in number, differ from those
of the other rivers, in having a deeper body, and generally
longer and more prominent mandible. The depth enters the
length 2.75 times; in the more western forms always 3.25 times;
in the former it is greater than the length of the head, in the
latter it is considerably less. Other differences are not discover-
able, and I regard it as a marked variety only." — (Cope, Pro.
Am. Phil. Soc. 451, 1870.)

MiCROPTERUS NIGRICANS Gill, 1873. — " Scalcs moderate, in
about sixty-five oblique rows between the head and caudal, and
eight (or seven and a half) longitudinal ones between the back
and lateral line, decreasing little towards the nape but more
towards the throat ; with the sheath enveloping the base of tlie
soft portion of the dorsal very low and developed towards the
end of the fin. Head flat between the orbits, with (1) scales

NOMENCLATURE AND MORPHOLOGY. 131

on the operculum about the size of those of the nape, (2) on
the suboperculum broad and in one row, (3) on the intex'oper-
cuhim broad, conspicuous and regularly imbricated, in one row,
(4) on the cheeks moderate (in about ten rows in an oblique
line, and five or six in a horizontal one), and (5) on the pre-
operculum (two to five) in an incomplete row. Mouth large, the
gape from the symphysis to the angle of supramaxillary equal-
ing nearly a half of the head's length. Supramaxillary not con-
tinued backwards decidedly beyond the vertical from the hinder
border of the orbit.

"Dorsal fin with the anterior spines slowly graduated (the
first being comparatively long) to the third (1 = 1; II = 1.30;
111 = 1.50); fourth longest (but little more so than the third)
and equal to or exceeding the interval between the back and
lateral line; succeeding ones successively and in increased ratio
abbreviated to the ninth, which is very short (two-sevenths —
1:3.5 — of fourth), the tenth being longer than the eighth
(shorter than the seventh) and about two-thirds as long as the
longest (i. e. , fourth).

"Dorsal fin with scales ascending comparatively little behind
on the membrane behind the soft rays (none behind last five or
six).

"Anal fin ^Yith no (or very few) scales.

"Color, in young and adolescent, greenish-black, verging to
yellowish-white on lower sides and abdomen, with (1) a series
of large blotches arranged in a regular line, from shoulder to
caudal, on the middle of sides, the posterior third of which be-
comes a continuous stripe and (2) below this middle series,
rather irregular, small blotches, with tendency to become a con-
tinuous stripe on posterior thiixl of body. Head dark above,
wliite from lower half of maxillary bone, and suboperculum to
chin and throat, and with three ol)lique and horizontal bands
upon cheek, viz.: (1) one from angle of upper jaw to margin
of preoperculum, (2) one from lower edge of orbit to angle of

132 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

operculum, and (3) one radiating slightly upward from posterior
margin of orbit to operculum. Apex of operculum with large
dark spot, upper fins dusky, lower yellowish-white.

" The stripes on the body frequently continue until the fish is
well grown, though gradually becoming obsolete ; black spots
upon the scales remain more or less permanently, giving the
appearance, in old fish, of fine lines or stripes. {Color fide J.
W. Milner, MSS.) "—(Gill, Pro. Am, Asso. Adv. ScL XXII,
B. 71, 1873.)

MiCROPTERUS PALLiDUS Jordan, 1877. — "Rafinesque's de-
scription of his Lepomh pallida seems to have been drawn from
this species. His specific name should therefore be adopted.
This change is especially desirable, as it does away with the ob-
jectionable local name fioridanus for this widely distributed
species."— (Jordan, Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus. X, 43, 1877.)

MiCROPTERUS PALLIDUS Jordan, 1878. — " Dull olive green,
more or less spotted when young, but not barred ; usually with
an irregultvr dark lateral band, and three oblique stripes on
opercules; ends of caudal fin blackish, these markings growing
obscure w'.th age ; third dorsal spine twice as high as first ; notch
between spines and soft rays deep ; eight rows of scales between
lateral line and dorsal; anal fin somewhat scaly; mouth very
wide; D. X, 12; A. Ill, 10; lat. 1. 65 to 70. Great lakes and
rivers of the West and South, abundant in most regions, and
highly valued as a food fish." — (Jordan, Manual Vertebrates, E.
U. S. 2d ed. 236, 1878.)

MiCROPTERUS PALLIDUS Goode & Beau, 1879. — "According
to Mr. Stearns this species enters the brackish and salt waters
of the Gulf of Mexico, whence he sends a specimen. No. 21,311,
12 inches in length. D. IX, I, 13 ; A. Ill, 10; P. II, 12; V.
I, 5; C. + 17+. L. lat. 65; L. trans. 3^."— (Goode & Bean,
Pro. U. S. Nat Mus. 138, 1879.)

» 5

? s

P. a

o

■H

00 O

. ®

^ M

S d

^^-^

rt=^^

e^'" .

' +^

c5 C «=

g«|

3 cs m

c "2 .

hH fl CO

., c5 ^

^ o

M . aj

-3 ^ a

fl

C5 fl 1^

03

«;^oj

•l-t

,d

'^ ct

o

- fl .

? > "S

u

5.0

(4-1

m S3

o

4^- _ a?

o

to

flj -^ 1— 1

•a
c

03

M

OS

o

4s^ G £;

^

CS

u a o

0

s

p > a
^. 2

"3

TJ

•;: "^ s

P

., Gei
fln.
0. In

S

01

"3

'^

o

CTe ^

i)

a

w h 6

iS

M

"3

. Leet,
3. Pect
xipercl

o

g

(-1

s

: c a:

^«c^

^1.,

H

fl 5 (D fl

fl . Ph <i>

(N

h-1

a

a?

■ — '

fl

.fl

'S

H

c3
a:

CO

CO

O

-a

fl

aj

7)

cl

fl

1

o

t-

•^

fl

fl

fl

0)

<i>

rr

a>

is

a

(134)

CHAPTER III.

GENERAL AND SPECIFIC FEATURES.

" Like — but oh ! how clifFerent !" — Wordsworth.

As has been shown in the preceding chapter, the genus
MiCROPTERUS includes hut two species, viz : Jlicropterus
dolomiea Lacepede, the small-mouthed Black Bass, and
Micropterus salmoides (Lacepede) Henshall, the large-
mouthed Black Bass, or, as it is sometimes called, the
Oswego Bass. The small-mouthed Bass, however, ex-
hibits some minor points of difference between its North-
ern and Southern forms, which are now regarded as of
varietal importance, and this species has consequently been
divided into Micropterus dolomien var. ackigan, the small-
mouthed Bass of the North, aYid Micropterus dolomieu var.
dolomieu, the small-mouthed Bass of the South ; the differ-
ences, however, are not of much moment, as they shade
into each other, and are to be regarded as merely geo-
graphical variations.

Possibly no genus of fishes has been the occasion of so
much confusion, scientifically and popularly, as the Black
Bass, This is owing, no doubt, to its extensive habitat
and wide-spread distribution; the original habitat of the
species being the great basin of the St. Lawrence, the
whole Mississippi Valley — or nearly the entire range of
country lying between the Appalachian Chain and the
Rocky Mountains — and the South Atlantic States from

(1-^5)

136 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

Virginia to Florida; including also the widely-separated
sections of the Red River of the North and East Mexico.

It would naturally be exjDected, in view of this extra-
ordinary and expansive habitat, to find diiforences in color,
habits and conformation; indeed, it is surprising that the
variations are not more marked, and the number of species,
consequently, greater, when one considers the great natural
differences and conditions of the numerous waters, and the
varieties of climate to which this genus is native. To the
careless observer, however, there is but little to determine
the differences between the two species of Black Bass. I
have known anglers who had "slain their thousands" of
both species, but wdio had never suspected that there was
any difference except in color, until I pointed out to them
the specific characteristics. Even those of more attentive
observation, but who have never seen the two species
together, find it difficult to readily comprehend the differ-
ence. To the trained observer, however, it is an easy
task to distinguish the variations ; and when specimens
of equal weight, of both species, are placed side by side,
the difference is at once apparent.

As widely distributed as the Black Bass is, we find that
the most striking variation, in either species, is in color,
which will run from almost black through all the shades
of slate, green, olive and yellow to almost white ; and in-
deed these variations in color can be found in almost any
one State, and to a great extent in any one stream, or lake,
at different seasons of the year. In some sections of the
country one species may be more or less spotted or barred,
while the other species may exhibit well-defined lateral
bands of dark spots, though these peculiarities are more
likely to occur in young or adolescent specimens.

GENERAL AND SPECIFIC FEATURES. 137

The fins will also be found to vary somewhat in color-
ing, while the scales and fin-rays may differ slightly in
number, as a variation of one-sixth, more or less, from
established formulas is not unusual. Slight dissimilarities
of contour, and some diversities of habits, also, exist. But
all of these differences obtain, not only with regard to the
Black Bass, but to most other species of fresh water fishes,
and depend on well-known natural causes.

I resided for ten years in Wisconsin, where there were
twenty lakes, abounding in Black Bass, within a radius of
eight miles of my residence ; and from close and constant
observation of the characteristics of the Bass inhabiting
them, I could almost invariably tell, upon being shown a
string of Black Bass, in what particular lake they had been
caught.

Where both species co-exist in the same waters, the
small-mouthed Bass is generally of a darker or more
somber hue than the large-mouthed Bass, whose color is
more inclined to shades of green. The coloration of the
small-mouthed Bass, however, in some localities, approaches
shades of olive or yellow, and there will often be more or
less red in the iris of the eye, in some instances shading
down to orange or yellow; this latter distinction, though,
like the double curve at the base of the caudal fin, and the
more forked tail — which have been regarded by some
anglers as distinguishing characteristics of this species —
can not be depended on, as one or all of these distinctions
are often lacking.

The most distinctive feature, as between the two species,

is the gape of the mouth, which in the large-mouthed Bass

seems simply enormous to those who have previously seen

but the small-mouthed species. The contrast in build,
]2

138 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

and external conformation, of the two species, is at once
striking and characteristic. The large-mouthed Bass is
thicker, especially through the shoulders, deeper in the
body, with a more pendulous abdomen, and seems a
heavier fish for its length than the other species, convey-
ing the impression that it is the stronger and more power-
ful fish, as, indeed, it is ; while the small-mouthed Bass,
owing to its trim, slender and more graceful shape, truly
convinces one that it is the more active and agile.

The relative size of the scales is all important in the
differentiation of the two species. In the large-mouthed
Bass these are much larger, there being but from sixty-
five to seventy scales along the lateral line, running from
the head to the tail; while in the small-mouthed species
there are from seventy to eighty. Between the lateral line
and the base of the dorsal fin there are but eight horizontal
rows of scales in the large-mouthed Bass, while there are
eleven similar rows in the small-mouthed Bass. The scales
on the nape and breast in the large-mouthed species are
not much smaller than those of the sides; but in the
other species they are very much smaller ; and while the
scales on the cheeks and gill-covers of the large-mouthed
Bass are small, those of corresponding situations in the
small-mouthed Bass are quite minute, with a small por-
tion of the gill-covers (preopercular limb) entirely bare.

The size and shape of the fins also differ somewhat,
especially the dorsal, which in the small-mouthed Bass
has the rays of the spinous portion higher and more uni-
form in size, rendering this fin higher, not so arching, and
with a shallower notch than in the large-mouthed form.

The differences, then, in the form, gape of mouth, and
size of scales and fins of the tAvo species of Black Bass,

GENERAL AND SPECIFIC FEATURES. 139

without reference to color, are sufficiently pronounced to
enable the angler to readily determine, by comparison, the
small-mouthed from the large-mouthed Bass; for these
differences are constant wherever the Black Bass exists,
from Maine to Mexico, or from Canada to Floridii. To
the specialist there are other points of differentiation as
detailed in the preceding chapter.

In preparing tables of exact measurements of the species,
as also tables showing the relative weight as to length, I
found so much discrepancy in these respects, in the same
species from different localities, owing to slight variations
of shape and conformation, that I concluded they would
not subserve the purposes of a general guide^ and so
omitted them.

Both species are remarkably active, muscular and vora-
cious, with large, hard and tough mouths ; are very bold
in biting, and when hooked exhibit gameness and endur-
ance second to no other fish. Both species give off the
characteristic musky odor w"hen caught.

Both species generally inhabit the same waters, and
there is a slight diversity in their habits where they co-
exist together. Naturally, the small-mouthed Bass prefers
rocky streams or the gravelly shoals and bottom springs
of lakes and ponds, while its large-mouthed congener
lurks about the submerged roots of trees or sunken logs in
rivers, and delights in the beds of rushes and aquatic
plants of lacustrine waters ; but they readily adapt thcm-
selv^es to waters of various conditions, when transplanted,
easily accommodating themselves to their surroundings,
and have a happy faculty of making themselves at home
wherever placed, so that in some localities their habits are
as anomalous as their colors.

140 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

There is a wide-spread and prevalent notion that the
small-mouthed Bass is the " game " species par excellence,
but I doubt if this distinction is well founded. In
common with most anglers I at one time shared this belief,
but from a long series of observations I am now of the
opinion that the large-mouthed Bass, all things being
equal, displays as much pluck, and exhibits as untiring
fighting qualities as its small-mouthed congener.

Fish inhabiting swiftly running streams are always more
vigorous and gamy than those in still Waters, and it is
probable that where the large-mouthed Bass exists alone
in very shallow and sluggish waters, of high temperature
and thickly grown with algse, it will exhibit less com-
bative qualities, consequent on the enervating influences
of its surroundings; but where both species inhabit the
same waters, and are subject to the same conditions, I am
convinced that no angler can tell whether he has hooked a
large-mouthed or a small-mouthed Bass, from their resist-
ance and mode of fighting, provided they are of equal
weight, until he has the ocular evidence.

I use the expression " equal weight " advisedly, for most
anglers must have remarked that the largest Bass of either
species are not necessarily the hardest fighters; on the
contrary, a Bass of two or two and a half pounds weight
will usually make a more gallant fight than one of twice
the size, and this fact, I think, will account in a great
measure for the popular idea that the small-mouthed Bass
is the '* gamest " species for this reason :

Where the two species co-exist in the same stream or
lake, tlie large-mouthed Bass always grows to a larger size
than the other species, and an angler having just landed a
two pound small-mouthed Bass after a long struggle, next

GENERAL AND SPECIFIC FEATURES. 141

hooks a largc-moiitlicd Buss weighing four or five pounds,
and is surprised, probably, that it '' fights " no harder or
perhaps not so hard as the smaller fish — in fiict, seems
"logy"; he, therefi^re, reiterates the cry that the small-
mouthed Bass is the gamest fish.

But, now, if he next succeeds in hookinc: a laroe-
mouthed Bass of the same size as the first one caught, he
is certain that he is playing a small-mouthed Bass until it
is landed, when to his astonishment it proves to be a large-
mouthed Bass; he merely says, " he fought well for one of
his kind," still basing his opinion of the fighting qualities
of the two species upon the first two caught.

Perhaps his next catch may be a small-mouthed Bass of
four pounds, and which, though twice the weight of the
large-mouthed Bass just landed, does not offer any greater
resistance, and he sets it down in his mind as a large-
mouthed Bass; imagine the angler's surprise, then, upon
taking it into the landing net, to find it a small-mouthed
Bass, and one which, from its large size and the angler's
preconceived opinion of this species should have fought
like a Trojan.

Now, one would think that the angler would be some-
what staggered in his former belief; but no, he is equal to
the occasion, and in compliance with the popular idea, he
merely suggests that " he is out of condition, somehow," or
"was hooked so as to drown him early in the struggle;"
and so, as his largest fish will necessarily be big-mouthed,
and because they do not fight in proportion to their size,
they are set down as lacking in game qualities — of course,
leaving the largest small-mouthed Bass out of the calcula-
tion.

Gentle reader, this is not a case of special pleading, nor

142 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

is the angler a creation of the imagination lugged in as an
apologist for the large-mouthed Bass ; he is a veritable
creature of flesh and blood, of earth earthy, and with the
self-conceit, weaknesses and shortcomings characteristic of
the genus homo ; I have met him and heard his arguments
and sage expressions scores of times, and if you will think
a moment I am sure you have met him yourself.

Icthyologists have at various times given to the genus
3Iicropterus numerous appellatives, and to the species more
than fifty specific names, Avhile laymen in different sections
of the country have contributed their quota of vernacular
names, among which may be mentioned : Bass, Black Bass,
Green Bass, Yellow Bass, River Bass, Bayou Bass, Slough
Bass, Lake Bass, Moss Bass, Grass Bass, Marsh Bass, Os-
wego Bass, Perch, Black Perch, Yellow Perch, Trout
Perch, Jumping Perch, \Yelshman, Salmon, Trout, Black
Trout, White Trout, Chub, Southern Chub, Boanoke
Chub, etc., etc.

In addition to this formidable and perplexing array of
names, there are other evils which add very much to the
confusion attending the nomenclature of the Black Bass.
Among them is the careless habit of many correspondents
of our sportsmen's journals, who write of Bass, Bass tackle,
Bass fishing, etc., meaning Black Bass in each instance,
but leave it to the imagination of the readers of those
journals as to what particular kind of "Bass" is meant.

Now this is all wrong, and is owing to gross carelessness,
or perhaps in some instances to a want of propei* informa-
tion, and is a habit that ought to be reformed. We should
learn to call things by their right names. A vose by any
other name may smell as sweet, but as there are many va-
rieties of roses they must be distinguished by correct and

GENERAL AND SPECIFIC FEATURES. 143

specific; names, and not by their odors. It is just as easy
to write tlie distinctive name " Black Bass " as the general
name " Bass."

Bass is a very vague term at best, meaning one thing in
one part of the country, and a totally different thing in
another. Along the eastern coast it means a Striped Bass
{Roecus lineafus), or a Sea Bass {Chifroprisfes atrarius) ; in
Florida it means a Channel Bass [Sciccnops ocellatufi) ; in
the west it may be either a Black Bass {Microptevus), a
Rock Bass (Ambloptites rupestris), a White Bass (Roecus
chrysops), or a Calico Bass (Fomoxys nigromocidatus) ;
while in Otsego County, New York, it means an Otsego
Bass (Coregonus clupeiformis var. otsego), which is not a
Bass at all but a white fish.

Then, again, some of these correspondents write of the
real Black Bass, meaning usually M. dolomieu, the small-
mouthed species, seeming to imply that the other species is
not real, or at least is not the Black Bass, but something
else — a kind of pseudo variety. Others in writing of the
large-mouthed species, 31. sabnoides — owing to its former
name, 31. nigricans — have called it the real Black Bass^
under the impression that as it was named nigricans — /. e.,
black — the other species must be some other color, and
could not be the simon-pure article. Now, one species is
not more real than the other; the small-mouthed Bass is
regarded as the type species because it was the first to be
described by a naturalist, and given a specific and generic
name.

The term " Black Bass," then, is distinctive, and should
always be used when alluding to the genus generally.
The different species should be mentioned as the small-
mouthed Black. Bass or the large-mouthed Black Bass, as

144 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

the case may be, no matter whether the color be black,
green or yellow. Every one will then know exactly what
is meant, and much of the confusion and uncertainty that
now prevail in connection with the nomenclature of the
Black Bass will be cleared away.

*'Not chaos-like, together crush'd and bruis'd,
But, as the world, harmoniously confus'd,
Where order in variety we see,
And where, though all things differ, all agree." — Pope.

CHAPTER IV.

COLOEATION OF THE BLACK BASS.

"And it is so wltti many kinds of flsli, and of fronts especially; wliich
differ in tlieii' bigness and shape, and spots and color."— Izaak Walton.

The external appearance of the Black Bass, as exhibited
in the colors and markings, differs so greatly and con-
stantly in different sections of our country, that it would
be useless to describe them minutely in a specimen from
any given locality; for as the vernacular names of fishes
are usually bestowed with reference to the outward pecu-
liarities of coloring, this has already given rise to much
confusion in naming the species. Thus they are called
black, green, or yellow Bass, respectively, in different sec-
tions of the United States, and not without reason, for
black, green and yellow are the predominating primary
colors of the two species, though these colors are often
toned down to any of the intermediate shades, with j)lum>
beous, olivaceous or ochreous tints.

The color, however, is always darkest on the back, with
a gradual shading or paling towards the belly or abdomen,
which is always white or whitish. Where the two species
of Black Bass are common to the same stream or lake,
the small-mouthec' Bass is generally the darkest in color,
though this is by no means an invariable rule; for in
other waters the small-mouthed Bass may be of a lighter
or paler hue than the other species — usually yellowish-
13 (145)

146 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

olive or yellowish-white, but often pale green — while the
large-mouthed Bass will be of a dark green coloration,
and sometimes quite dusky.

Then, again, in some waters, no distinct coloring is
apparent, tlie fish presenting merely a pale or faded ap-
pearance; especially is this likely to be the case in large
streams much subject to overflow, and whose Avaters are
often muddy or discolored. Hence, as may be surmised,
color is not an important factor in the differentiation of
the Black Bass species.

While some have no distinct markings, others are
marked by dark, maculated, transverse or vertical bars ;
some, again, by longitudinal or lateral bands; and still
others by mottled lines, dusky spots, or finger marks.
Usually when Bass are so marked, the mottled bands run
lengthwise in the large-mouthed species, while the small-
mouthed Bass is marked by transverse bars or finger
marks ; but these distinctions are not infallible, for the
small-mouthed Bass of the Southern States often exhibits
well-defined mottled lines running lengthwise along the
series of scales.

After being taken out of the water, the colors and
markings change materially ; generally, the brighter colors
fade rapidly, while the dusky spots, bars, or bands become
more distinct; this change of color is more frequently ob-
served in the small-mouthed species. Sometimes, how-
ever, the markings will disappear, and the sides of the
fish will assume a uniform coloration.

Then, again, the colors of the Black 'Bass frequently
change with each season of the year; and there is, more-
over, always a marked difference in the colors and mark-
ings of the fish at different stages of its growth. In the

COLOEATION OF THE BLACK BASS. 147

young;, the colors are brighter and the markings more
distinct than in the adult fish, and it is my opinion that
the latter become entirely obsolete with age.

The fins are likewise subject to variation in coloring
and markings ; they may be either dusky or greenish ;
reddish or yellowish ; and are, usually, more or less punc-
tulated or spotted. The tail is often lighter in color at
the base and outer edge, and dark or dusky between; thus
one of the names proposed by Rafinesque for the small-
mouthed species — CaUiurus punctulatus, i. e., "dotted
painted-tail " — was founded upon the peculiar coloration
of the tail of a young Bass, his description of the caudal
fin being : " base yellow, middle blackish, tip white."
Sometimes, however, especially in mature specimens, the
tail has a dark border, while the middle is of a lighter
tinge ; and often the entire caudal fin will have a uniform
coloration.

There are commonly, several — usually three — dusky or
olivaceous streaks along the cheeks and gill-covers.

Inconstancy of coloration is not exceptional with the
Black Bass, for all other genera of fresh water and ana-
dromous fishes exhibit this peculiarity in a greater or less
degree. Among the causes assigned for this phenomenal
feature, and which have been either proven true or made
tenable by actual experiment and careful observation, are :
(1) character of food ; (.2) condition, depth and tempera-
ture of water; (3) color and character of beds of streams,
lakes or ponds; (4) atmospheric conditions; (5) age;
(()) season of the year; and (7) the changes incident to
the breeding season ; while some assume that (8) the
power of changing color is voluntary with some, if not
all, fishes.

148 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

Professor J^iohard Owen, in his admirable work, "Anat-»
omy of the Vertebrates,'' A^)l. I, says: —

" The varied, and often brilliant colors of fishes, are due
to pigment cells at different depths of the skin, but chiefly
in the active or differentiating area. Those of silvery or
golden luster are mostly on the surface of the scales. The
silvery pigment called ' argentine ' is an article of com-
merce used for the coloring of fictitious pearls, and offers a
crystalline character under the microscope. The blue,
red, green, or other bright-colored pigment is usually asso-
ciated with fine oil, and occupies areolae favoring accumu-
lation at, or retreat, from, the superficies, and thus effecting
changes in the color of the fish, harmonizing their exterior
with the hue of the bottom of their haunts."

From the nature of the pigment cells, as portrayed in
this description, it is easy to imagine how susceptible
they are to the influences of such causes as those above
enumerated.

The Salmonidce have been more studied, perhaps, than
any other family of fishes, and yet in none has there been
more confusion in classification, owing in a great measure
to the differences of external appearance, as caused by
these various influences.

The eminent German naturalist, Seibold, says : — " In
none of our native [German] fish is there such variety of
color, according to the different influences of food, water,
light and temperature, as in the toothed salmons."

Another able German scientist, Carl Peyrer, says of the
common brook trout of Germany ( Trutta fario) : — " The
color, and partly also the size which it reaches, vary ac-
cording to its location, the influences of light, the season,
water, and food, and therefore several varieties are dis-

COLORATION OF THE BLACK BASS. 149

tinguislied, such as the forest or stone trout, the alpine or
mountain trout, the gokl or pond trout, the lake trout, and,
according to the lighter or darker coloring, the white
trout, the black trout, etc." Truly almost as polyonomous
as our Black Bass,

That difference in food produces difference in coloration
does not admit of a doubt. Those of the Salmonidce which
feed upon Crustacea and larvae exhibit the most brilliant
colors, while those which live upon insects, minnows,
worms, etc., are much duller in hue.

Sir Humphrey Davy, in his familiar work, "Salmonia,"
says : " I think it possible when trout feed much on hard
substances, such as larvje and their cases, and the ova of
other lish, they have more red spots and redder fins. This
is the case with the gillaroo and the char, who feed on
analogous substances; and the trout that have similar
habits might be expected to resemble them. When trout
feed on small fish, as minnows, and on flies, they have
more tendency to become spotted with small black spots,
and are generally more silvery."

The well-known artist and angler, Charles Lanman,
states: "Various causes have been assigned for the great
variety in the color of the brook trout. One great cause
is the difference of food; such as live upon fresh water
shrimps and other Crustacea, are the brightest ; those which
feed upon May-flies and other aquatic insects are the next;
and those which feed upon worms are the dullest and dark-
est of all."

Dr. A. T. Thompson, the author of " Treasury of Nat-
ural History," observes: "That each species of trout has
its peculiarities of color, but the common trout is the most
beautiful of its-class; the variations of its tints and spots,

150 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

from golden-yellow to crimson and greenish-black, are
almost infinite, and depend in a great measure on the
nature of its food, for the colors are always the most
brilliant in those fish that feed on the water shrimp."

Near Waterville, Waukesha County, Wisconsin, is the
extensive trout hatching establishment of Mr. H. F. Dous-
man, where a number of fine springs form a considerable
stream after leaving the ponds and flumes, and into which
a number of brook trout have escaped at various times,
so that finally it became well stocked with trout, which
propagate naturally in the stream. The trout which are
reared artificially are kept in covered plank flumes, and in
open ponds, and are fed principally on chopped liver;
those in the ponds getting some addition to this fare, how-
ever, in aquatic flies, insects, etc. The stream contains a
great many crawfish, Avhich often do much damage to the
dams and ditches of adjacent cranberry marshes. Upon
visiting this establishment, I was at once struck with the
remarkable difference in - the colors of the trout in the
flumes, in the ponds, and in the stream. Those in the
flumes were quite dull in appearance ; those in the ponds
were brighter; while those in the stream were the most
brilliantly colored trout I ever saw, caused, no doubt, by
their feeding upon the Crustacea with which the stream
abounded. The dull color of the trout in the flumes was
partly owing to their shaded condition.

Not only does the character of the food influence the
external coloring of the Salmunida', but the tint of the
flesh, if I may so call it, is also affected by the same cause;
thus Professor Agassiz states that the most beautiful salmon-
trout are found in waters which abound in Crustacea, direct
experiments having shown to his satisfaction that the

COLORATION OF THE BLACK BASS. 151

intensity of the red colors of their flesh depends upon the
quantity of Gammaridce which they have devoured.

A striking instance of the diflFerence in coloring of the
flesh from the influence of age or season, is related by the
well-known European ichthyologist, Dr. Fric, in regard
to the salmon of Bohemia. He says that there are three
different ascents of the salmon during the year: The first
ascent begins in February or March under the ice, and
lasts till May. These salmon weigh from twenty-five to
fifty pounds, and are famous under the name of " Violet-
salmon." The second ascent begins in June and lasts till
August. These fish have a reddish flesh, and weigh from
twelve to twenty -two pounds, and are known as "Rose-
salmon." The third ascent is from September until De-
cember. These fish are mostly weak, weighing from three
to fifteen pounds. Their flesh is pale, and they are usually
called "Silver-salmon."

The trout of the mountain lakes of the Alps [Salmo
salvelinus), according to the season and the nature of the
water they inhabit, have their flesh whitish or reddish.

The color and condition of the icater has likewise a very
marked effect upon the external appearance of the Salmon-
idce. Agassiz found that the . color of brook trout of
neighboring streams was influenced by the color and
quantity of the water, and that even trout of the same
stream differed in color as they frequented the shady or
sunny side. He also found that fish in clear, sunny waters,
with gravelly bottoms, were highly and brightly colored;
while those in shady streams, or where the bottom was
dark or muddy, and the water not so clear, were corre-
spondingly dusky in hue ; and that bright fish taken from
waters of the former character and placed in those of the

152 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

latter, would begin to fade in a few hours, and in a few
days or weeks would become entirely changed in hue.

The great lake trout (^Cristivoincr nainaycusli) exists in
three different states of color, according to situations in
which it is found, and were thought by the French hab-
itans of the great lakes to be three distinct fishes, known
as Truite de Greve, or trout of the muddy bottom; Truite
des Battures, or trout of the rocky shores ; and Truite du
Large, or trout of the deep, open waters ; the first being
dull-colored, the second bright and handsomely mottled,
and the last bluish and silvery.

Charles Lanman truly observes, that the fish of streams
rushing rapidly over pebbly beds, are superior both in
appearance and quality to those of ponds or semi-stagnant
brooks. But this may arise, not so much from any par-
ticular components of the waters themselves, as from the
fact that rapidly running and falling water is more highly
aerated, the atmosphere being more freely iutermingled
with it, and therefore more conducive to the health and
condition of all that inhabit it.

The influence of light in producing color in fishes is very
evident when we reflect that fishes are always colored
upon the back, which is exposed to the direct rays of light,
and pale underneath, usually being quite white on the
abdomen. This fact is especially pronounced in the flat
fishes, which swim upon the side; thus the flounder, the
sole, the turbot, the halibut, etc., are dark and variously
colored upon the side presented to the light, while they
are quite pale or white on the under side. Fishes which
inhabit dark caves, owing to the absence of light, are
entirely colorless.

That the age of fish has much to do with their color is

COI-ORATION OF THE BLACK BASS. 153

well known ; a familiar example being the common gold-
fish, which in early youth is black or dark colored, and
only assumes its beautiful golden hue at maturitA^

During the breeding season of fishes their colors become
much heightened, but they lose their brightness and
l:)rilliancy in many cases when the season is over. A sal-
mon fre.sli-run from the sea is justly considered the most
beautiful of fishes, but after the spawning season there is
none more sorry and ill-looking. Darwin mentions some
very interesting particulars, among which, that the pike,
especially the male, during the breeding season, exhibits
colors exceedingly intense, brilliant and iridescent.

Another striking instance out of many is afforded by
the male stickleback, which is described l)y Mr. Warring-
ton (England) as being then beautiful beyond description:
" The back and eyes of the female, on the other hand, are
the most splendid green, having a metallic luster like the
green feather of humming-birds. The throat and belly
are of a bright crimson, the back of an ashy green, and
the whole fish appears as though it was somewhat trans-
lucent, and glowed with an internal incandescence. After
the breeding season, these colors all change; the throat
and belly become of a paler red, the back more green, and
the glowing tints subside."

The well-known and beautiful spring, or breeding
dresses of many of our darters and minnows, are common
illustrations of the influence of the breeding season upon
the change of color in fishes.

CHAPTER y.

GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION.

"You may remember that I told you, Gesuer says there are no pikes
in Spain ; and doubtless, there was a lime, about a hundred or a few more
years ago, when there were no carps in England."— Izaak Walton.

The Black Bass is wholly unknown in the Old World,
except where recently introduced, and exists, naturally,
onlv in America. The original habitat of the species is
remarkable for its extent, for, with the exception of the
New England States and the Atlantic seaboard of the
Middle States, it comprises the whole of the United States
east of the Rocky Mountains, Ontario (Canada), and East
Mexico. So far, but one species, the large-mouthed Bass,
is known to inhabit Florida, but it is my opinion that the
small-mouthed species Mill also be found in some of the
streams in the western part of that State.

Of late years the range of the Black Bass has been ex-
tended through the efforts of public-spirited individuals,
and by the Fish Commissioners of various States ; so that
at the present time this noble fish may be said to have a
" local habitation and a name " in every State of the Union.
It has also been successfully introduced into England.

The following account, by the late James W. Milner,
Assistant U. S. Fish Commissioner, of the introduction
of the Black Bass into new waters, will be found very in-
teresting and instructive, and is taken from the Report
of the U. S. Fish Commissioner for the years 1872-73 : —
(154)

GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION. 155

"Among numerous records of their introduction, in
very few instances discriminating properly between the
two species, we give the following: In 1850, twenty -seven
live Bass were brought by Mr. Samuel Tisdale, of East
Wareham, Mass., from Saratoga Lake and put into Flax
Lake, near his home. In the years 1851 and 1852, others
were brought to the number of two hundred and reared
in ponds in the vicinity. The matter was kept quiet and
fishing discouraged for five years, when the fish were found
to have increased very rapidly. Some twenty-five ponds
were stocked in the same county after Mr. Tisdale had
initiated the experiment. Afterward, Black Bass from
Mr. Tisdale's pOnds were supplied to a lake in New
Hampshire in 1867, and to waters in Connecticut and
Massachusetts. In 1866 the Cuttyhnnk Club, of Massa-
chusetts introduced Black Bass into a pond in their grounds.
In the year 1869 the Commissioners of the State, together
with private parties, stocked several ponds and the Concord
River with Black Bass, and in the following year other
waters were stocked.

"In Connecticut, in the winter of 1852-53, the Black
Bass was introduced into Waramang Lake, in Litchfield
County. They were brought from a small lake in Dutchess
County, New York. A few years later they were said to
have increased greatly. Another lake in the same county
was stocked not long afterward.

" Salstonstall Lake, near New Haven ; East Hampton
Pond, in Chatham ; Winsted Pond, in Winchester, and
many ponds and lakes of the State, particularly in the
northwest portion, were stocked with the Black Bass
previous to the year 1867.

"In the years'l869, 1870, 1871, and 1872, thirty-seven

156 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

lakes and ponds in different parts of the State were sup-
plied with Black Bass.

"As early as 1864 or 1865 Black Bass had been put
into Rust's Pond, near Wolloorough, New Hampshire ; in
1868 a few were brought to Charlestown and Lakes Mas-
sabesic, Sunapee, Pennacook, and Echo, and Enfield,
Wilson's and Cocheco Ponds were well stocked; in 1870
and 1871 the New Hampshire Commissioners introduced
the Black Bass from Lake Champlain into the waters of
the State at Meredith, Canaan, Webster, Canterbury, Plar-
risville, Munsonville, Hillsborough, Warner, Sutton, New
London, Andover, Loudon, Concord, and in Croydon. In
Massabesic and Sunapee Lakes, where they had been in-
troduced, in 1868 and 1869, they were found to have
increased, and, on the authority of Dr. W. W. Fletcher,
they have become exceedingly numerous in Sunapee
Lake.

" The Commissioners of the Slate of Rhode Island, since
1870, have stocked thirty ponds or small lakes in different
parts of the State with the Black Bass.

" In ^Slaine, in the fall of 1869, the State Commissioners
and the 0«piossoc Angling Association introduced from
Newburgh, New York, a quantity of Black Bass. The
waters of Duck Pond, at Falmouth; Fitz Pond, in Ded-
ham ; Newport and Philips Ponds, Coclmewagan Pond, in
Monmouth; Cobbosseecontee Lake, in Winthrop and ad-
joining towns, were stocked, and a few years afterward
were reported to have increased largely in numbers.

'^ Since the year 1871, Black Bass {Micropterus salinoides)
and Oswego Bass {^Mieropterus nigricans) have been put
into seventy lakes, ponds, or streams of the State of New
York by the Commissioners. They had made their way of

GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION. 157

their own accord throiigli the canals connecting Lake Erie
with tiie Hudson, into that stream.

" Private citizens of Pennsylvania introduced the Bll^ck
Bass (^Micropterus salmoides) into the Susquehanna about
1869, at Harrisburg. In 1873 the tributaries of the Sus-
quehanna, the Potomac, and Delaware Rivers were sup-
plied with Black Bass by the Commissioners at thirty-five
different points.

" In the year 1854, Mr. William Shriver, of Wheeling,
Virginia, planted in the canal basin at Cumberland, Mary-
land, his former home, a number of the Black Bass (Mi-
cropterus salmoides) ; from the basin they escaped into the
Potomac River, where they have increased immensely at
the present day. They \verc moved from the waters of
the Ohio River to their new locality in the tank of a loco-
motive. Numerous cases have also occurred of transfer
from one locality in tlie Southern States to another.

" There have been very many transfers of these valuable
species that have not been recorded, as they are easily kept
alive Avhile being moved from one place to another, and
propagate surely and rapidly in ponds, lakes, and rivers.

" These details are given because they show the facility
Avith which comparatively barren waters may be stocked
to a considerable extent with good food-fishes, and they
exhibit the o-eneral interest and attention that have been
given to this mode of propagation."

In the account above given, reference is made to the
stocking of the Potomac River with Black Bass by Gen-
eral W. W. Shriver, of Wheeling, West Virginia. As
this matter is often alluded to on account of the marvelous
increase of the fish from so small a beginning — less than
thirty Bass having been originally transplanted — and as

158 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

other parties have been accredited with the praiseworthy-
act who had nothing whatever to do with it, and whom I
will not even mention here, it may not seem out of place
to give the subject a little more space in this connection.

The earliest reference to the matter, of which I have
any knowledge, is contained in a letter describing the hab-
its of the Black Bass, written by Mr. John EofF, of \yheel-
ing. West Virginia, and published in the Rei)ort of the
Smithsonian Institution for 1854, and is as follows: —

" Mr. William Shriver, a gentleman of this place, and
son of the late David Shriver, Esq., of Cumberland, Mary-
land, thinking the Potomac Riv^er admirably suited to the
cultivation of the Bass, has commenced the laudable un-
dertaking of stocking that river with them ; he has already
taken, this last season, some twenty or more in a live box,
in the water-tank on the locomotive, and placed them in
the canal basin at Cumberland, where we are in hopes they
will expand and do well, and be a nucleus from which the
stock will soon spread."

General Shriver, himself, in a letter to Philip T. Tyson,
of Baltimore, Agricultural Chemist of Maryland, in Sep-
tember, 1860, says : —

a ;K * >i< 'j'l^g enterpri.se or experiment was contemplated
by me long before the completion of the Baltimore and
Ohio Railroad to the Ohio River at Wheeling, but no
satisfactory mode of transportation presented itself to my
mind until after the comjiletion of the great work (in, I
believe, the year 1853), and in the following year I made
my first trip (although I made several afterwards in the
same year), carrying with me my first lot offish in a large
tin bucket, perforated, and which I made to fit the open-
ing in the water-tank attached to the locomotive, which

GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION. 159

was supplied witli fresh water at the regular water stations
along the line of the road, and thereby succeeded well in
keeping the fish (which were young and small, having
been selected for the purpose) alive, fresh, and sound.

" This lot of fish, as well as every subsequent one, on
my arrival at Cumberland, were put into the basin of the
Chesapeake & Ohio Canal, from which they had free egress
and ingress to the Potomac River and its tributaries, both
above and below the dam. * * * "

General Shriver also states in a subsequent letter to Dr.
Asa Wall, of Winchester, Virginia, dated September 17,
1867 :—

" The number of these Black Bass taken to the Potomac
River by me, as well as I can now recollect, was about
thirty. * * * "

Mr. Edward Stabler, a well-known and reliable gentle-
man of Maryland, in a letter to G. T. Hopkins, of the
Board of Water Commissioners of Baltimore City, dated,
''Baltimore, 10th Mo., 28, '65," and published in the
Baltimore Stm during the same month, says : —

" After much delay and frequent disappointments and
loss, from the lack of suitable transportation, I have suc-
ceeded in taking in the Upper Potomac, and safely trans-
porting to Baltimore, a fine lot of 'Black Bass' [Grystes
nigricans Agassiz), with which to stock 'Swan Lake,' and
also those in Druid Hill Park.

"As a brief history of the introduction of this superior
fish into the tributaries of the Chesapeake, and east of
the Alleghanies — for they are, in my opinion, before the
Trout, both for sport and the table — may not be without
interest to some, it may be stated that some thirteen years
since, my son, A. G. Stabler, then a conductor on the

160 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

Baltimore & Ohio Railroad, in connection with two pub-
lic-spirited gentlemen of Wheeling (Forsythe and Shriver),
brought from Wheeling Creek, West Virginia, a small lot
of Bass in the water-tank of his tender. They were placed
in the Potomac, near Cumberland, and from this stock,
the Potomac, for more than two hundred miles, and all its
large tributaries — the Seneca, Shenandoah, Cherry Creek,
Sleepy Creek, Great and Little Cacapon, Patterson's Creek,
South and North Branch, etc. — aiford fine fishing.

" They are, I know, from the Great Falls to a consid-
erable distance west of Cumberland, for I have recently so
taken them, and often weighing from five to seven pounds
— from four to five pounds is not unusual. * * * "

The Baltimore American in June, 1874, in an article on
Fish Culture, remarked incidentally : —

"It was twenty years ago, that Alban G. Stabler and
J. P. Dukehart, together with Forsythe and Shriver,
brought a small lot of Black Bass in the tender of a loco-
motive from Wheeling Creek, West Virginia, and put
them in the Potomac. From this small beginning, sprang
the noble race of fish which now swarm in the river."

It is certain from the above evidence, that General
Shriver was the leading spirit in the enterprise, assisted,
no doubt, by Mr. Forsythe, of Wheeling, and Mr. A. G.
Stabler, of Baltimore. The latter g'entleman, being the
conductor of the train which carried the Bass — and there
is no evidence showing that more than one lot was taken —
certainly had some share in the transaction ; and if he was
a "chip off the old block" — for his father, above-men-
tioned, was an enthusiastic angler — it would naturally be
expected that he would have taken a lively interest in the
aifair.

GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION. 161

The circumstance is one in which I have always felt the
greatest interest, for it occurred at the time when I first
left ray native city of Baltimore for a home in the West ;
and I have a distinct impression of the matter, made at
the time of its occurrence, either from having heard it fre-
quently spoken of, or from reading accounts of it in the
public prints of the day ; and my early impressions have
always connected the name of Mr. Stabler, then a con-
ductor of the Baltimore & Ohio Railroad Company, with
the praiseworthy act.

At all events, it excited my curiosity as to the Black
Bass, ^vhich I had then never seen, and prompted me to
seek the acquaintance of that grand game-fish, which I very
soon afterwards proceeded to do, in the Miami River, near
Cincinnati. It is scarcely necessary to say that I have
ever since been on terms of the closest intimacy with him,
he having entirely supplanted, in my aifections, the love
I once bore my former piscatorial friends, the Striped Bass,
the Blue Fish, and the White Perch of the Chesapeake
and the Patapsco ; but I must confess to an occasional
retrospective weakness, and a kindly yearning for the old-
time friends of my boyish days, not excepting the diminu-
tive, but delicious "Gudgeon" of the Upper Patapsco and

Herring Run.
14

CHAPTER YI.

HABITS OF THE BLACK BASS.

«' * =:= :;= they mutually labor, both the spawner and the melter,— to cover their
spawn with sand,— or, wateli it,— or hide it in some secret place, unfrequented
by vermin or by any fish but themselves."— Izaak Walton.

Spawning and Hatching.

Black Bass are very prolific, the females yielding fully
one-fourth of their weight in spawn. The period of spawn-
ing extends from early Spring to Midsummer, according
to the section of country, and temperature of the water
and without regard to species ; in the Southern States oc-
curring as early as March, and in the Northern States and
Canada, from the middle of May until the middle of July,
always earlier in very shallow waters, and somewhat later
in those of great depth.

In Waukesha County, Wisconsin, I have observed a
difference of from one to four weeks in the time of spawn-
ing, in the numerous lakes of that locality, owing to the
difference in temperature of said lakes, caused by their
varying depths.

The Bass leave their Winter quarters in deep water
about a month or six weeks previous to the spawning
season, at which times they can be seen running up streams
and in the shallow portions of lakes, in great numbers.
Soon afterwards, the males and females pair off and pre-
pare for breeding.

They select suitable spots for their nests, usually upon a
(162)

HABITS OF THE BLACK BASS. 163

gravelly or sandy bottom, or on rooky ledges, in water
from eighteen inches to three feet deep in rivers, and from
three to six feet deep in lakes and ponds; and, if possible,
adjacent to deep water, or patches of aquatic plants, to
Avhich the parent fish retire if disturbed.

The nests are circular, saucer-like depressions, varying
from one to three feet (usually about twice the length of
the fish) in diameter, which are formed by the Bass, by
fanning and scouring from the pebbles all sand, silt, and
vegetable debris, by means of their tails and fins, and by
removing larger obstacles with their mouths. This gives
to the beds a bright, clean, and white appearance, which
in clear water can be seen at a distance of several score
yards. I have seen hundreds of such nests, in groups, al-
most touching each other, in the clear-water lakes of Wis-
consin, Michigan, and Minnesota.

Sometimes the nests are formed upon a muddy bottom,
with a pavement or foundation of small sticks and leaves,
from which the mud and slime have been washed and
scoured ; and as this often seems to be a matter of choice,
there being beds upon gravelly situations in the same
waters, I have sometimes thought that this discrimination
in the location of the nests, might be owing to some differ-
ence of habits in this resj)cct, in the two species of Black
Bass ; but of this I am by no means sure.

The females deposit their eggs on the bottom of the
nests, usually in rows, which are fecundated by the male
and become glued to the pebbles or sticks contained therein,
The eggs are hatched in from one to two weeks, de})end-'
ing on the temperature of the water, but usually in from
eight to ten days.

When hatched, the young Bass are almost perfectly

164 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

formed, from one-fourth to one- half of an inch in length,
and cover the entire bed, where they can be easily detected
by their constant motion. After hatching, the young fry
remain over the bed from two to seven days, usually three
or four, when they retire into deep water, or take refuge
in the weeds, or under stones, logs, and other hiding-places.

During the period of incubation the nests are carefully
guarded by the parent fish, who remain over them, and by
a constant motion of the fins, create a current which keeps
the eggs free from all sediment and debris. After the
eggs are hatched, and while the young remain on the nests,
the vigilance of the parent fish becomes increased and un-
ceasing, and all suspicious and predatory intruders are
driven away.

Their anxiety and solicitude for their eggs and young,
and their apparent disregard of their own safety at this
time, is well-known to poachers and pot-fishers, who take
advantage of this trait and spear or gig them on their
nests. I have known, also, some who call themselves
ano;lers — Heaven save the mark ! — who take the Bass at
this time in large numbers, with the minnow or crawfish.
Of course the Bass do not " bite " at this season, volun-
tarily, but when the bait is persistently held under their
noses, they at first endeavor to drive it away or remove it
from the nests, and finally, I think, swallow it in sheer
desperation.

Food and Growth.

After the young Bass leave the spawning beds their
food at first consists of animalculfe, larvee, insects, and the
ova of other fish ; as they grow older and larger they de-
vour worms, tadpoles, small fish, etc.; and, in later life,

HABITS OF THE BLACK BASS. 165

they vary their diet with crawfish, frogs, mussels, and
water-snakes, until, attaining a weight of two pounds, they
will bolt any thing from an angle-worm to a young musk-
rat.

Where food is plentiful they grow rapidly, reaching a
length of two inches in a few months after hatching, and
at a year old, will measure, at least, four inches. At two
years of age, they will be found from eight to twelve
inches in length, weighing about a pound, and will grow
nearly or quite a pound a year thereafter, until they attain
their maximum weight.

They arrive at maturity in from two to three years, ac-
cording as the conditions for their growth were favorable
or otherwise. The maximum weight of the small-mouthed
form of the North and West may be said to be four or
five pounds, and of the large-mouthed form, from six to
eight pounds, though there are rare exceptions to this
rule.

An instance, showing the rapid growth of Black Bass,
is related by Mr. Charles J. Pearson, at that time Fish
Warden for Morris County, New Jersey : He states that
in the fall of 1876, fifty Black Bass, measuring from two
and a half to four inches in length, were placed in D. L.
Miller's pond at Madison, Morris County, New Jersey.
On October 17th, 1877, about one year from the time of
putting them in, Mr. Miller had occasion to draw the
water down, for some repairs. He had the flume so ar-
ranged as to take any fish that might run out. Eleven
Bass were caught. They measured from ten to thirteen
inches in length, and were undoubtedly the same fish
which were put in the year before, as none of this species
of fish were ever known in the pond before.

166 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

There is not an absolute uniformity of growth in fishes,
any more than in other creatures ; thus, some fish will out-
grow others of the same hatching until double their size,
a fact made very apparent in the artificial culture of brook
Trout, Salmon, etc. ; but Black Bass will grow with wonder-
ful rapidity where an equable temperature of water and an
abundance of food obtain. As an instance of the influence
of an abundant supply of food upon the growth of Black
Bass, A. N. Cheney, Esq., of Glens Falls, New York, re-
lated to me the following circumstance, and presented me
with a fine photograph of the two fish alluded to : —

" I send you a photograph of two large-mouthed Bass
caught by myself. They are, or, rather, one of them is,
the largest Bass ever caught in any waters about here,
weighing seven jwunds and fourteen ounces, and the other
six and a quarter pounds. The most remarkable fact is,
perhaps, the eflPect of food upon the growth of fish. The
two fish in question were caught in Long Pond, near here,
August 1, 1877. Long Pond was stocked with six small
Bass from Lake George, New York, in 1866, they having
been put into a stream emptying into the Pond by some
gentlemen, who, on their way from camping a week at
Lake George, had to cross this stream to reach home ; and
the putting the fish into the stream was suggested by their
catching a number of small Bass during the last day in camp.

" The fact of their deposit was almost forgotten, when,
in 1874-'75, quantities of Bass were discovered in the
Pond, which had hitherto been inhabited by Pickerel,
Perch, and quantities of bait fish, minnows, silver and gold
shiners, etc. While Lake George has never been known
to yield a Bass over six and a half pounds, Long Pond has
turned out at least a dozen over that wei<i;ht.

HABITS OF THE BLACK BASS, 167

"The laro;est small-mouthed Bass ever caught in this
region, was a five pound fish from the Hudson River,
taken by Colonel Jeptha Garrard, of Cincinnati, with a fly,
while fishing with me. Two years later, I caught one of
equal weight, near the same place."

The following very interesting account of the food and
growth of the Black Bass, and which, at the same time,
exhibits its voracity and pugnacity, was contributed to
the columns of Forest and Stream, by William A. Myuster,
of Council Bluffs, Iowa. Mr. Mynster is an exceptionally
close observer, and takes especial delight in watching and
tending his "finny pets :"

I had a dam constructed in my spring branch, immediately
below my fish ponds, in such a manner as to form a small body of
pure, clear water. In this I placed some seven or eight hundred
native fish of different varieties, embracing the blact bass, sheeps-
heads, buffaloes, and pickerel. From the banks of this body of clear
water I was enabled to see every movement of my finny jiets, and
many moments of leisure have I spent in watching their habits.
The Black Bass {Micropterus pallid us) would usually swim into the
current, where he would sport about on the gravelly bottom, while
the buffalo would retire into stiller water and browse in the grass
and water-cress growing on the bottom.

Thus I ascertained their habits of feeding, and was enabled to
determine what growth they would make in a given time without
being fed artificially. Hence I seldom, if ever gave them any food.
The Buffalo {Bubalichthys hubalus), in a few weeks became attenuated,
and began dying. This I attributed to their being in cold spring
water with a current too rapid, and their not being able to procure
sufficient food. The Black Bass, on the other hand, thrived amaz-
ingly well, and were making a most marvelous growth. This I
attributed to the fact that they were in pure water of a uniform
temperature. The Bass, although found in all kinds of water, un-
doubtedly thrive best in clear, pure, spring brooks with gravelly
bottom. The size .of these Bass when I first put them in this place

168 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

was from four to six inches in length, and in less than three weeks
had grown upwards of an inch.

This, I must confess, notwithstanding I had implicit confidence
in their making a rapid growth, astonished me much. I had always
been a believer in heavy feeding, and felt satisfied that the amount
of growth that would be derived in a certain time depended mainly
upon the quantity of feed that had been consumed. This led me
to speculate where these Bass obtained their food, confined as they
were in a very small body of water containing some eight hundred
fish, and immediately below my ponds containing some 40,000 sal-
mon, young and older. For the purpose of ascertaining this, I
made my Bass frequent visits, and by remaining quietly secreted
on the banks, soon discovered the source of their food supply.

One day as I was thus occupied, in company with my eldest boy,
he called my attention to the fact that a snake ( Trojjidonotus (jmhami)
was leisurely swimming through their midst. At first I felt inclined
to pursue the snake, fearing that he might in some manner injure,
if not destroy, a large portion of my native stock. My fears were,
however, speedily terminated by one of my larger Bass making a
rapid dart at the snake with open mouth, and nearly severing its
head quite close to the body. The scene that then ensued beggared
description. Never shall I forget it — such a floundering and splash-
ing ! The surface of the water for an instant seemed literally cov-
ered with perpendicular tails enveloped in foam. So great was the
commotion that we were compelled to retire to a greater distance
in order to avoid being thoroughly drenched.

After the disturbed w^aters had become somewhat calmed, we
resumed our former position in order to make further observations,
and found our large Bass hero, wdth one end of the snake in its
mouth, rapidly making away Avith it, and a smaller, but not less
pretentious brother, at the other end, endeavoring with all his might
and main to eat even with him. Thus these gamey lads continued
for some time, swimming up and down the stream, like two boys
running with a rope. The distance between them, however, rapidly
diminished.

This had continued for some time, when we saw emerging from
under a log at the edge of the banks one of my pike {Esox luchis).
At first he came slowly but steadily, when he made a rapid dart,

HABITS OF THE BLACK BASS. 169

with open mouth, at my smaller Bass, and, at a single gulp, placed
himself outside of it! Then he came face to face with our hero.
It was an awful moment of suspense for some time. Our finny
gladiators remained motionless, eyeing each other, measuring the
dimensions of each other's mouth, as it were. The crisis at length
came. The Bass, by force of digestion, had made way with his
part of the snake rope, and making one mighty effort, stretching
maxillary and dental to their utmost capacity, soon enveloped the
jjike to a point just below the operculum. At this point we de-
parted, feeling perfectly satisfied that our hero would take care of
himself.

I presume it is unnecessary to say that I no longer entertain any
doubts as to the ability of the Bass to take care of himself, and that
heavy feeding is indispensable to a rapid growth.

The above may, perhaps, seem somewhat fishy to a great many,
but when we consider the structure of the Bass, our doubts will be,
in a great measure, abated. The variety above-mentioned has a
very large mouth — in fact, they seem all mouth, thus enabling them
to envelop any thing not exceeding their own circumference, with
ample room for respiration through the gills. The oesophagus is
very large (about the size of the stomach) and short. This enables
them to take into the stomach all that may be embraced by the
mouth.

In the warm waters of the extreme South, which pre-
serve a more equable temperature than those of the North-
ern States, the Black Bass grow to an immense size, their
maximum weight, in Florida, being from twelve to four-
teen pounds ; but while I have seen them of these weights,
I never took one, there, weighing more than nine pounds,
with the artificial fly, but, doubtless, T could have done so
with live bait or tlie trolling spoon.

In Northern waters they do not grow nearly so large,
six to eight pounds being the limit. Under conditions
and circumstances favorable to their growth they will in-
crease in weight, as before stated, about a pound a year;

170 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

but under adverse circumstances or unfavorable condi-
tions their growth is much slower; therefore, no rule of
general application can be established from any single
instance, or as the result of any exclusively local test or
experiment.

The growth of Black Bass is affected not only by the.
supply of food and temperature of water, but also by the
extent of range. Bass in small ponds do not thrive so
well, nor grow so fast; the smaller the extent of their
range, the slower will be their growth, and, indeed,
this is true of any other fish ; for it is well known that
fish confined in aquaria, in springs or wells, grow so
very slowly, that their increase in size is hardly appre-
ciable from year to year, even though their supply of food
be abundant.

An equally well-attested fact is, that the largest Bass
are found in the largest bodies of water, or where the
range is extensive ; extreme depth of water seeming to be
more favorable to their growth than mere extent of sur-
face. For example, I know of several shallow lakes in
Wisconsin, where the Bass seldom grow to exceed two
pounds, while in deeper lakes in the same vicinity they
attain the usual maximum weight of four or five pounds;
and in Green Lake, a large and deep lake near Ripon, in
the same State, I once caught a string of thirty Black Bass,
mostly of the large-mouthed species, weighing from four
to eight pounds each, and fully averaging six pounds.

HiBEENATION.

Black Bass undoubtedly hibernate, except in the ex-
treme Southern and South-western States; but in the

HABITS OF THE BLACK BASS. 171

colder climate of the North and West, it has been proven
in numerous instances, that they bury themselves in the
mud, in the crevices of rocks, under masses of weeds, or
sunken logs, in the deepest Avater, and remain dormant
until spring'.

This habit has been doubted by some, inasmuch as an
occasional Bass has been caught through the ice; though
such instances are rare indeed, and all those of which I
have any knowledge occurred late in the winter, or early
in the spring. As one swallow does not make a summer,
these unusual cases must be considered as merely excep-
tions to the general rule.

During a residence of ten years in Wisconsin, where
fishing through the ice was constantly practiced during
the winter, and where tons of pickerel, pike-perch and
yellow-perch were so taken in a single season, I never
knew of a single Black Bass being so taken except very
late in the winter, or in early spring, say in March, just
before the breaking up of the ice; and even those instances
were of rare occurrence, and happened only during un-
usually mild weather ; and these same waters, be it remem-
bered, afforded the finest Black Bass fishing during the
summer and fall.

Dr. D. C. Estes, of Lake City, Minnesota, an accom-
plished angler and naturalist, records a similar experience
in regard to Lake Pepin ; he says : —

"The Pike and Pickerel are the only fish taken here in
the winter. It is strange to many what becomes of the
countless numbers of other game fish that throng these
waters in the summer season. Bass, which are so numer-
ous then, are never seen in winter. I am quite sure that
not a single Bass was ever caught here through the ice.

172 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

I have for years tried all depths of water to raise one, or
to discover one, but have thus far failed. I must believe,
then, that they hibernate."

Genio C. Scott, in " Fishing in American Waters,"
quotes an intelligent and veteran Black Bass angler of
Central New York, in regard to this habit, and who fur-
nishes the following conclusive evidence : —

" I have never known them [Black Bass] to be taken in
winter, and I think they seek a particular location and
remain torpid during winter. My attention was directed
to this fact about thirty years since. At that time I was
in the habit of spearing fish in a mill-dam on the outlet of
Seneca Lake, at Waterloo, Seneca County, New York.
From April to November I found numbers of Bass; from
December to March I found all other varieties, but no
Bass.

"In the winter of 1837, the water was shut off at the
lake for the purpose of deepening the channel to improve
the navigation. This was considered a favorable time to
quarry the limestone in the bed of the river; and upon
moving the loose rock in the above-named mill-dam, where
the ledges cropped out, there were found hundreds of Bass
imbedded in their slime, and positively packed together in
the crevices and fissures of the rocks. My subsequent
experience has done much to convince me that my theory
is correct."

On this point, A. N. Cheney, Esq., of Glens Falls, New
York, related to me the following incidents : —

"A few years ago a man, Seth Whipple, living on the
Hudson River, near Glens Falls, in drawing some sunken
logs from the river, during the winter, for firewood, found
in the hollow of one of the logs, six Black Bass (small-

HABITS OF THE BLACK BASS. 173

mouthed), weighing from a half to two pounds ; they were
nearly dormant.

" The father of Pension Commissioner Bentley, who lives
at Glens Falls, and has some Trout ponds on his place, to
gratify a boy bought of him a Black Bass, and placed the
fish in a spring. When autumn came the fish was missing,
and was supposed to be stolen. During the succeeding winter
the spring partly dried up, and to restore the water supply
the spring was dug deeper. During the operation it was
found necessary to remove an old stump in the side of the
spring, when to his surprise the Bass was found under-
neath the stump, in a hole, evidently prepared for winter
burrow."

Mr. John Eoff, of Wheeling, West Virginia, a remark-
ably close observer, says, in the " Report of the Smithsonian
Institution," for 1854 : —

" In the winter season they retire to deep and still water,
and apparently hide under rocks, logs, etc., and remain
there until the firsc of April."

I could multiply evidence on this point, if necessary,
but these several opinions, founded ui)on observations
made in the widely separated States of Wisconsin and
Minnesota in the northwest. New York in the north,
and West Virginia in the middle section of our country
must suffice.

That Black Bass do not hibernate in the extreme South,
is well-known ; and to this circumstance, perhaps, may be
attributed, in a measure, their larger growth. Still it is
not unreasonable to suppose, that the Black Bass of that
section have a period of repose and seclusion, analogous
to hibernation, at some other season of the year, possibly
during the fervid heat of the summer solstice ; for it is

174 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

usual for the Bass of the North-west to cease biting and
retire to the deepest water during an nnusually heated
term in summer.

The fact that the best season for Bhick Bass fishing
varies in different sections — in the North being from July
till October ; in the West and most northerly of the South-
ern States in the spring and fall; and in the extreme South
during the winter season — would naturally lead one to *■
suppose that the period of dormancy in the Black Bass
occurs at different seasons in different localities, and is
influenced by climatic conditions, or the supply of food.

CHAPTER VII.

INTELLIGENCE AND SPECIAL SENSES.

Venator. But, master ! do not trouts see us, in the night ?
Piscator. Yes; and hear, and smell, too, both then and in the day-time.—
IzAAK Walton.

The brain of fishes difl'ers so materially in size, con-
formation, substance and analogy from that of other ani-
mals, that it has been the rule of specialists to attribute to
this class of vertebrates a very low order of intelligence.
In opposition to this theory, however. Dr. F. Day recently
read a paper before the Linnsean Society of London, En-
gland, in which he endeavored to show that fishes possessed
a far higher order of intelligence than is usually accorded
them.

He claimed that the experience of himself and others
indicated that they possessed emotions and aifections, and
in support of that view he showed that they constructed
nests, transported and defended their eggs, protected their
young, manifested their affections for each other, recognized
human beings, could be tamed, exhibited the emotions of
fear, anger, and revenge, uttered sounds, hid from danger,
sought protection by attaching themselves to the bodies of
other animals, and had peculiar modes of defense ; that
they left the water in search of food, and that tliey some-
times combined for attack and defense.

Every observant angler and naturalist has, in his own

(175)

176 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

experience, proved the truth of many of the above asser-
tions, and, no doubt, some have observed traits of intelli-
gence still more convincing.

The wonderful faculty of anadromous fishes, seeking out
and ascending their native streams during the breeding
season, even after being purposely carried hundreds of
miles away, has commanded the admiration of biologists,
yet they can see nothing in the small and jelly-like brain
of the fish to account for the marvelous habit, but instinct;
on the same principle, perhaps, that Coleridge accounts
for the blindness of Love :

" His eyes are in his mind."

Sense of Sight.

We are led to believe, from the investigations of anato-
mists, that the organs of special sense in fishes are very
imperfectly developed; but while this may be true, in the
main, as regards the special senses of touch and taste, I am
constrained to believe, from the observations of myself
and many others, that fishes, in general, have the senses
of sight, hearing, and smell developed in a much greater
degree than is generally supposed.

The diversities in form and position of the eyes of
different fishes, prove that they are of the greatest use
to them, in procuring food, and in escaping frsm their
enemies; and are placed "where they will do the most
good."

In the majority of fishes, which are constantly moving
about, and frequent alike the surface and bottom of streams,
the eyes are placed in the usual position of most other

INTELLIGENCE AND SPECIAL SENSES. ITT

animals, one on each side of the head. In those which
stay more constantly in the lower depth of waters, the eyes
are placed on top of the head, as in the star-gazers ; while
in the flat fishes, which recline or swim on one side near the
bottom, both eyes are placed on the same side of the head,
enabling them to obtain the benefit of both eyes while in
that position. In the Pike-perch, which is nocturnal in its
habits, the eyes are unusually large, as is the case with
other animals who seek their food mostly at night.

It is a popular idea that fish are necessarily near-sighted
on account of the conformation of the eye, which is large,
round and prominent; and the main argument adduced to
support this theory, is the readiness with which they will
take an artificial fly, trolling spoon or other artificial bait,
which resemble in but slight degree the natural objects
of food that they are intended to represent, if, indeed,
they are intended to represent any thing.

It is very often the case that those anglers who are most
strenuous in their theory that fish are near-sighted, stultify
themselves by carrying a large and most varied assort-
ment of artificial flies, of all shapes and colors, in order
to meet the " fastidious taste " of the fish, that often refuse
one pattern or color, and rise eagerly to another, which
could not be the fact were they so near-sighted as many
believe. The consistency of these anglers would be more
apparent, if they would adopt Mr. Cholmondely Pennell's
theory of artificial flies, and confine themselves exclu-
sively to his three typical flies — brown, yellow, and green
hackles.

Now, I am not of those who believe that our brave
game fishes possess such extreme gullibility, as to mistake
an artificial lure fi)r the genuine article, upon the hypo-

178 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

thesis of near-sightedness. My opinion, founded upon
numerous experiments, is, that fishes see and hear as
well in and through the medium of the water, for all
practical purposes, as the angler does through the medium
of the atmosphere ; the clearer and more rarified the me-
dium, the clearer and greater the range of vision in both
instances.

In muddy or turbid waters the sight of fishes is neces-
sarily limited, as ours would be in hazy or foggy weather.
It is neither fair nor logical to presume that fishes, in
water, ought to discern objects in the atmosphere above,
any clearer or plainer than we can perceive objects in the
water, while standing on the brink.

We are altogether too prone to judge every thing from
our own Mandpoint, and to attribute to our own clever-
ness results that in all probability depend upon other and
extraneous circumstances. Who, of us, could tell a skill-
fully tied artificial fly from a real one, beneath the water,
when its surface was ruffled by a brisk breeze, shadowed
by drifting clouds, covered with the froth and suds of
an eddy, or surmounted by the foam and bubbles of a
rapid ?

Yet, there are those who contend, because fish fail to
detect this difference through the same obstacles to clear
vision, that they are of a verity near-sighted, and easily
fooled by the very poorest semblance of a fly or feathery
nondescript; but let one of these persons try a cast of the
best flies upon a bright, still day, when the water is per-
fectly clear and the surface like a mirror, and if he expects
to get a rise under such conditions, he himself must be
very near-sighted indeed.

On the other hand, any one who has seen a Black Bass

INTELLIGENCE AND SPECIAL SENSES. 179

dart like an arrow and seize a minnow swimming quietly
thirty feet away, or a Brook Trout flash like a meteor for
a dragon fly hovering near the water at the same distance,
must admit that their visual powers are sufficient for all
practical purposes.

It is quite amusing to hear an angler expatiate learnedly
on the dimness of sight and dullness of hearing in fishes,
and in the next breath caution the tyro to have his cloth-
ing conform as nearly as possible with the hues of the
foliage skirting the stream ; to keep out of sight, tread
lightly, and make as little noise as possible; and to assure
him, that, even then, the chances are that the fish will see
the novice before he sees the fish.

It is a curious contradiction of theory and practice, a
fishy illustration of the abstract and concrete. The expla-
nation I conceive to be this : Our Piscator would be
considered a scientific angler, which, in his case, be-
comes a contradiction of terms; for while blindly holding
to the opinions of some closet naturalist, he is practically
following the dictates of his own experience and common
sense.

Now, it is possible to be scientific and an angler, too,
but our science, like our angling, must be practical, and
must of necessity be learned by close observation and study
of the habits of the fishes as they exist in nature, and not
alone from the study of the physical construction of a
preserved specimen.

I am well aware that scientists consider fish myopic, or
near-sighted; not, however, on account of excessive con-
vexity of the cornea, as is popularly supposed, for it is an
exploded theory in medical science that myopia depends
necessarily upon this condition; indeed, in fishes the

180 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

cornea is almost flat, while in birds of prey, which have a
very extended range of vision, the cornea is qnite convex.

From the lack of analogy, from the great difference in
construction of the ocular and auditory apparatuses of
fishes and terrestrial animals, and from the wide difference
in the properties of the media of air and water, I am con-
evinced that the organs of the special senses of sight and
hearing in fishes are not well understood at the present
day; and I am confident that future investigations will
prove them to be possessed of much greater acuteness of
vision and hearing, than is now accorded thera.

It is a well-known fact that fishes are attracted by any
gay, bright, or glittering substance, as a finger-ring, a
sleeve-button, or a coin, and have deliberately swallowed
them when dropped in the water. I have caught Brook
Trout witli wintergreen and partridge berries, the bright
scarlet color seeming to allure them, and I have even
caught them with a naked bright fish-hook ; but all this
does not prove that they were the victims of a myopic
mistake, or that in their near-sightedness they mistook
these various articles for something else ; neither does it
prove that a Black Bass will grab at a trolling spoon, a
Bluefish snap at a bone squid, or a Spanish Mackerel
seize a metal or pearl troll under the delusion that they
are really choice shiners, or delicate piscatorial tidbits.

A camel, it is said, will bolt all sorts of substances^ as
metal, glass, stones, leather, etc., but wdien were his short-
comings attributed to short-sightedness? Our dogs will
often refuse good, clean food and hunt up an old dry bone,
a stone, an old shoe, or a stick, and will gnaw them with
delight, and even swallow them with evident gratification.
Birds will peck at and swallow bright beads, colored

INTELLIGENCE AND SPECIAL SENSES. 181

threads, etc., and kittens will seize, claw and bite almost
any moving small obje<'t ; hnt these vagaries are attribnted
to the idiosyneracies of the animals mentioned, while in
fishes they are ascribed to defective sight.

But what are a fish's eyes for? According to our
present knowledge they are to enable him to become " a
snapper-up of unconsidered trifles" with hooks attached
to them !

Now, so fur as the artificial fly is concerned, when it is
cast lightly upon a fretted surface, I think it is generally
taken by a fish under the impression that it is a natural
insect ; but with regard to trolls of all kinds, as spoons,
squids, spinners, proj^ellers, etc., and very often with re-
gard to the artificial fly, I am of the opinion that they are
taken through a spirit of mere bravado, curiosity or wan-
tonness, and not with the idea that they are living objects
of prey. They are seized by the fish because they are
bright, attractive and in motion ; not because they are
hungry, but because they are in a biting mood, for we
often find, nav, most always find, that fish so taken are
already gorged with food.

Sense of Heaeing.

There is no external ear in fishes, the internal ear alone
existing, and which is extremely delicate in its construc-
tion.

Dr. John Hunter observed that it varied much in the
different genera of fishes, but that in all it consisted of three
curved tubes, which united one with another. The whole
organ is composed of a kind of cartilaginous substance,

182 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

and in some fishes is crusted over with a thin lamella to
keep it from collapsing.

The canals terminate in a cavity, in which cavity there
is a bone or bones. These ear-bones are familiar to most
anglers, and are sometimes very beautiful, resembling
porcelain, and are often called " brain-ivory ; " those of
the sheepshead {Haploidonotus grimniens) of our Western
waters are known as "lucky stones," and are highly
prized by boys as pocket pieces.

A remarkable instance, demonstrating the acuteness of
the sense of hearing in fishes, has recently occurred in
California. As it is an exceedingly interesting and well-
authenticated fact, and one so totally at variance with pre-
conceived notions, I feel justified in reproducing it here.
The account was published in the San Francisco Chronicle,
upon the authority of Mr, B. B. Redding, one of the Fish
Commissioners of California :

In Siskiyou County there is a caravansary kept by George Camp-
bell, and known as the Upper Soda Springs Hotel, which is situated
on a semicircle of land formed by a bend in the Sacramento River.
Wishing to have a supply of fresh Trout close at hand, Mr. Camp-
bell had a supply of water conducted through a board flume from
the river to a natural depression in the ground, thereby creating
an excellent fish pond of about half an acre in extent, which he
supplied with full-grown Trout caught in the river. The supply
flume is, for some distance, raised about four feet above the ground.
About four hundred feet from the pond, a small rivulet, wdiich is an
outlet for irrigating water, flows under the flume, crossing it at right
angles and about four feet below it, and empties into the river.

The fall of water from the end of the flume to the surface of the
pond is two feet, the water in the flume flowing with a velocity of
three miles an hour. The porid has an outlet, which is screened to
prevent the escape of the Trout. Shortly after the pond was estab-
lishedj the discovery was made that numbers of fish were missing

INTELLIGENCE AND SPECIAL SENSES. 183

from it. Mr. Campbell instituted an investigation, which resulted
in discovering that the fish, dissatisfied with their new quarters^
had leaped through the waterfall two feet into the flume, and, swim-
ming against the strong current until they reached where the stream
crosses under the flume, they had leaped out of the latter to the
stream four feet beneath.

Upon discovering the method of flight adopted by his finny acrobats,
Mr. Campbell prevented further escajie by placing a screen at the
mouth of the flume. Up to last accounts the dissatisfied fish had
discovered no other method of getting into their favorite Sacramento.
The questions immediately suggest themselves : How could the fish
know that a stream flowed under the flume, the sides of which were
considerably above the surface of the water, and if they possessed
that knowledge, how were they to know that they were immediately
over it? Mr. Redding examined the ground carefully along the
flume, and could not discover a single instance of a Trout having
jumped out at any other place.

Mr. Redding subsequently communicated to the Forest
and Stream the following solution of the' matter: —

The attention of Prof E. D. Cope, the eminent naturalist, hav-
ing been called to the above facts, he has given me an explanation
which seems entirely satisfactory. He tells me that at the base of
every scale of the Trout, at a point where the scale is united with
the skin, is a nerve ; that all these nerves, from the base of every
scale; lead to a large ganglion situated on the center of the forehead
of the fish below the eyes ; and that nerves from this ganglion com-
municate to the internal ear. These nerves, at the base of each
scale, are formed to receive vibrations in water. Any vibration in
water reaching the scales of the fish is thus communicated to the
internal ear. If, as was the fact, one of the timbers that supported
the flume rested in the running water on the ground, the vibrations
of this running water on the ground would be carried by this timber
to the flume and to the water in it, four feet above, and the ear of
the fish would separate and take cognizance of the difference in the
vibrations, as the human ear in the air distinguishes the difference
between the voices of friends.

184 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

It has, generally, been conceded that fish can hear
sounds or vibrations produced on, or in, the water, but
that they can hear sounds produced in the air is doubted
by many ; but every observant angler can recall instances
where this doubt has been refuted.

It is well known to many, though still doubted by some,
that fish can be tamed and taught to come to the surface
of the w^ater to be fed, answering prom])tly to the sounds
of the voice, a bell, or a whistle. I have observed in-
stances of this kind, myself, and under such circumstances
as rendered it impossible for the fish to see the person
producing the sounds mentioned.

I have frequently observed fish exhibit symptoms of
great fright or alarm at the report of fire-arms, or other
loud noises, and to be scared and dart away at the sound
of the human voice, or the barking of a clog, when the
fish could not see the ori2;inators of the noises.

CHAPTER VIII.

ON STOCKING INLAND WATERS WITH BLACK BASS.

"And it is observed, that in some ponds Carps will not breed, especially in
cold ponds; but where they will breed, they breed innumerably."— Izaak
Walton.

The Black Bass is peculiarly adapted, in every respect,
for stocking inland waters. There is no fish that will
give more abundant and satisfactory returns, and none in
which the labor and expense attending its introduction is
so very slight.

As a food fish, there are very few more palatable fresh-
water fishes, its flesh being firm, white, and flaky, and
when cooked, nutty, tender, and juicy ; it has few bones
and little offal, and as a pan-fish is unexcelled. Its game
qualities are second to none, and it will thrive and multi-
ply in waters where the Sahnonidce can not exist.

There are few fish more prolific, while there is none
more hardy, healthy, and better able to take care of itself,
and none that protects or cares more tenderly for its young ;
consequently, there is no limit to its production and in-
crease in suitable waters, save from a lack of natural food.

In view, then, of its many good qualities, there is no
fish more worthy of cultivation ; none that can be so easily
transplanted, and none that is so Avell adapted to the vari-
ous waters of our country, for there is no game-fish that
has such an extensive original habitat.

16 ' (185)

186 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

Every attempt that has been made, intelligently, to stock
suitable waters with the Black Bass, has been crowned
with signal success, which, unfortunately, has not been
the case with the introduction of other game and food-
fishes. The praiseworthy efforts that have hitherto been
made to introduce the Salmon and Brook Trout, even in
streams formerly inhabited by them, have either totally
failed, or the results, in a majority of instances, have not
been at all satisfactory ; nor does it seem, now, as though
these efforts will ever prove successful, owing to causes
which I have mentioned elsewhere.

Streams which are necessarily obstructed by dams — even
when the most approved fishways are provided — or whose
waters are polluted by the refuse of manufactories, can
never be successfully stocked with the salmonids ; but the
Black Bass seems to thrive wonderfully well in spite of
these and other disadvantages.

From what has been said in regard to their habits, it
will readily be seen that there is no necessity for hatching
Black Bass artificially, in the manner practiced with the
Salmon, Trout, or Shad, nor would the method be as suc-
cessful, for reasons well known to fish culturists.

The Salmonidce of the Eastern United States, with the
exception of the grayling, prepare their beds and deposit
their spawn late in the fall, or early winter. This being
accomj)]ished, all further interest in the procreation of
their species, for the time, ceases; the eggs are left to them-
selves, and such as escape being devoured by their nu-
merous enemies are hatched in from two to four months,
according to species and temperature of water. The
young are provided with a yolk-sack, which nourishes
them for a period of from twenty-five to forty-five days,

ON STOCKING INLAND WATERS. 187

varying with the species, when they begin to look for other
means of snbsistence.

During all this time, from spawning until the absorption
of the yolk-sac — from three to six months, as the case may
be — the eggs and young are helplessly exposed to the
ravages of predatory fish, reptiles, and birds. Under these
circumstances, comparatively few fish arrive at maturity,
and streams are soon depopulated by seining, injudicious
angling, and natural vicissitudes; hence arises the necessity
for their artificial cultivation and the re-stocking of such
waters.

The eggs of the salmonids are of a separate and non-
adhesive character, which admits of their being easily
handled and managed for the purposes of artificial repro-
duction, while those of the Black Bass are glutinous and
adhesive, which renders them very difficult to manipulate
for similar purposes.

The Black Bass being hatched with but a rudimentary
or very small umbilical vesicle or yolk-sack, needs the
fostering care and attention of the parent fish, who teaches
it how and where to find its food, and protects it from
its enemies in the same way that a hen cares for her
brood.

All that is required, then, to stock a stream or pond
with Black Bass, is to procure a small number of the fish,
at least a year old, and place them in the waters. If the
water is of a suitable character, and possesses a sufficient
supply of natural food, the Bass will propagate naturally,
and rapidly increase in numbers.

The only considerations to be looked after are the char-
acter and conditions of the waters to be stocked — sufficient
depth and extent of surface being more important than

188 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

quality of water — and the supply of food contained in
tliera. It is useless to attempt to stock very small and
confined ponds of less than three acres in extent ; for in
such ponds, without communication with running water,
the Bass will not increase beyond a certain limited num-
ber, which will usually be the number of fish originally
planted ; for the supply of natural food will soon become
exhausted, and the old fish will prey upon the young,
should any be hatched, until a certain average, propor-
tionate to the supply of food, is established and main-
tained.

In the case of newly formed ponds, they should be well
stocked with minnows, Crustacea, frogs, etc., at least a year
before the Bass are introduced. It is also necessary that
there should be in all ponds, deep holes of not less than
twelve feet in depth, to which the Bass can retire in very
hot weather, and where they can also hibernate.

In some waters, one species of Black Bass may prosj^er
better than the other ; for instance, in large ponds or
shallow lakes, with a sluggish current, muddy bottom, and
abounding in fresh-water algse, the large-mouthed Bass
will thrive better, perhaps, than the small-mouthed species.
But in streams, and ponds with a good supply of running
water, either, or both species may be introduced.

The Black Bass has been successfully acclimatized in
England ; and at the proper season advertisements may
now be found in English papers of young Bass from Amer-
ica for sale at high prices, for stocking English waters.
Mr. Silk, fish-culturist to the Marquis of Exeter, has taken
over two lots of young Bass from the Delaware River, the
first in 1878, and the second in 1879. In a letter to the
late Frank Buckland, Mr. Silk says : —

ON STOCKING INLAND WATERS. 189

In 1879 I went again, and started from America with 1,200
Black Bass, and on arriving home I had 812, having done better than
I did on the previous occasion. All of the Black Bass were for the
Marquis of Exeter, he having borne all the expense of the experi-
ment. Most of the fish were placed in a lake belonging to his lord-
ship, called Whitewater, near Stamford. Not any of them have
been caught yet, but two of them were found dead in a pipe, where
they had got jammed. The pipe supplied a filterer, and they had
got in and could not get out again. From what I could learn they
would be about half a pound each in weight, so that they had done
very well. The first lot that were put in will be three years old in
April, when they are expected to commence breeding.

In transporting Black Bass for the purpose of stocking
new waters, great foresight, care, and judgment must be
used. The size and number of the fish, the distance they
are to be carried, and the length of time to be consumed
in the journey, must all be taken into consideration. The
size and number of the fish will determine the size and
number of the containers; thus, while a common wash-
tub would be a safe receptacle to transport twenty-five
Bass, six inches in length, for a long distance, it would
not be sufficient for half the number of double the size,
for it would require a vessel that would contain at least
one and a half times the quantity of water. This is a safe
rule to follow, and calculations can be made accordingly.

For small fish, six to eight inches long, the largest size
wash-tubs are well adapted, but for larger fish the carrier
must be much deeper. If barrels are used they should not be
perfectly new, nor should they retain any vestige of their
former contents, as vinegar, oil, whisky, etc., if old ones.
The very best ones would be those that had been used to
hold water for a long time. Wooden tanks, constructed
for the purpose, are best, if they have been soaked in run-

190 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

ning water a sufficient length of time to take up and re-
move all the soluble matter of the wood, as tannic acid,
etc. Metal tanks, constructed of galvanized iron, heavy
tin, etc., though more expensive, are to be preferred, but
they must be rendered perfectly clean before the fish are
put into them.

If the number of fish to be carried is kirge, it is much
better to provide a sufficient number of containers than to
crowd the fish. There is no good plan yet devised for
aerating water, while in transit, by forcing air into it, for
most of it escapes at once, as the numerous bubbles that
appear on the surface, testify. The better way is to expose
the water to the air in finely divided particles, in the form
of spray or small drops, as by forcing or pouring it through
a fine rose. I have seen it successfully accomplished by
dipping the water out of the container with a common
sprinkling-can, or watering-pot, and pouring it back again
through the rose, or sprinkler, from a considerable height;
this is as simple and effectual a way as any yet devised.

It is a bad plan to change the water frequently, as is
often done, for the change in the character and temper-
ature of the water thus produced, affects the fish unfavora-
bly. The best plan, by far, is to aerate the original w^ater.
If in warm weather, the temperature of the water should
be noted, occasionally, and kept at its original temperature,
or a little lower, by the addition of small pieces of ice,
from time to time.

These instructions are only general, and must be varied
to suit particular circumstances. Sometimes, for short
distances, double the number of fish may be safely carried,
in the space I have designated. Moreover, it is possible
to be too attentive, and kill the fish with kindness. If the

ON STOCKING INLAND WATERS. 191

number of fish to be transported is large enough to justify
the experiment, the best and safest plan would be to carry
one vessel, with its allotted number, first, and, according
to the operator's best judgment ; then, as the experiment
proved successful, or not, would depend the transportation
of the balance, on the same, or some other plan of pro-
ceeding.

PART SECOND.

TOOLS, TACKLE, AND IMPLEMENTS.

17

CHAPTER IX.

FISHING RODS.

"And now, scholar ! I think it will be time to repair to our angle-rods."—
IzAAK Walton.

The first and most important article in the angler's
outfit is the rod ; it takes precedence of every other tool or
implement in his armamentarium. A thoroughly good
and well-balanced rod is the angler's especial joy and
pride. A true and tried rod of graceful proportions and
known excellence, which has been the faithful companion
on many a jaunt by mountain stream, brawling river, or
quiet lake, and has taken its part, and shared the victory
in many a struggle with the game beauties of the waters,
at last comes to be looked upon as a tried and trusty
friend, in which the angler reposes the utmost confidence
and reliance, and which he regards with a love and affec-
tion that he bestows upon no other inanimate object.

I doubt if rifle, shot-gun, or fowling-piece ever becomes
so dear and near to the sportsman as tlie rod to the an-
gler, for the rod really becomes a part of himself, as it were,
through which he feels every motion of the fish when
hooked, and which, being in a measure under the control
of his will, and responsive to the slightest motion of his
wrist, seems to be imbued with an intelligence almost life-
like.

The essential .qualities of a fishing-rod are balance,

(195'

196 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

strength, elasticity, pliancy, and lightness, and in its con-
struction such a wood, or combination of woods, must be
used as will best subserve these conditions. The natural
cane, or reed pole, when it is of good and true taper, is
the primitive model for a fishing rod, but it is not adapted
to all kinds of angling, being too long for one mode, too
stiiFfor another, and not well balanced for a third.

The nearest approach to a perfect rod, in theory, and
composed entirely and alone of any one variety of wood
proper, is a red cedar rod, made entirely of one piece from
butt to tip. It combines all of the essential qualities of a rod,
and can be made suitable for any method of angling, long
or short, stiif or pliant, and withal, is extremely light ;
but in practice it is not tough or strong enough for the
ordinary angler. And so each and every kind of wood
has some objections when used, alone, in the construction
of a rod ; most kinds of wood making a rod too heavy,
when other qualities are all right.

The next best thing is to use a combination of woods,
and this plan has been found by experience to be the best.
Another plan is to alter the natural conditions of a wood
by mechanical skill, as in the split bamboo rod, by which
the original natural good qualities are not only preserved,
but improved upon by the skill of the workman.

Material for Rods.

In order to get proper and desired action of combined
woods, and for convenience, portability, and ease of being
repaired, rods are very properly made in several pieces, or
joints. The fewer pieces used, however, the better will
be the action of the rod, and, in fact, two, or at most,

FISHING-RODS. 197

three pieces, are sufficient for all kinds of rods except
Salmon-rods, which are of a necessity the longest rods
made.

In the selection of woods for a rod, such kinds must be
used as possess the principal attributes of a fishing-rod,
which are toughness and elasticity ; and when these qual-
ities are combined with lightness, there is nothing more
to be desired, for proper modeling will insure perfect bal-
ance and pliancy.

Many kinds of native and foreign woods have been
tried and experimented with to produce a rod perfect
in action, such as cane, ash, hickory, maple, basswood,
ironwood, hornbeam, cedar, barberry, bamboo, memel,
lancewood, mahoe, greenheart, bethabara, or wasahba, etc.

Ash. — For butts of rods there is no w^ood so suitable
as good, close-grained, second-growth white-ash. It is
straight-grained, light, springy, and strong, and in some
kinds of rods it is also available for second pieces or j(Mnts,
having a springy " snap " possessed by no other wood.

Lancewood. — For second pieces and tij^s, lancewood,
when of good quality, stands pre-eminent, being close-
grained, tough, and extremely elastic, with sufficient spring
and snap for small joints. It is used for tops, or tips,
more universally than any other wood, on account of its
superiority over all other varieties for this purpose. It is
rather heavy for butts, though often used for this purpose,
some fly-rods being constructed entirely of this fine wood,
making very durable and beautiful rods, with a delightful
action, but still rather heavy for most anglers. Mr. Orvis,
of Manchester, Vermont, however, makes lancewood fly-
rods with a short hand-piece of other material, which are
most excellent and serviceable rods. I have used one with

198 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

the utmost pleasure and satisfaction, and can fully recom-
mend it.

Greenheart is next to lancewood for tips, and for
second joints is preferred by many ; it is somewhat heavy,
and quite tough and springy. Many rods are made entirely
of this wood, and are excellent, too, by the way, but most
too heavy for the admirers of light rods. It certainly
forms very handsome rods, when nicely polished, and
which are capable of good and hard service. In England
it is a favorite wood for fly-rods, where, as a rule, much
heavier rods are used than in our own country.

Bethabara, or Wasahba. — This wood was, I believe,
introduced several years ago by A. B. Shipley & Son, of
Philadelphia, who make a specialty of rods of this hand-
some material. It is very dark in color, resembling, some-
what, black- walnut in this respect. It is extremely hard
and close-grained, almost like bone in density, though it
is rather heavy, except for second pieces and tips. Messrs.
Shipley say that no other wood can equal it for great
strength, toughness, and elasticity. It is susceptible of a
beautiful polish, and I know of no other wood that makes
so handsome a rod in its natural color. Never having
tried a rod of this material, I can not speak of its action,
though I am sure, from its inherent qualities, as exhibited
in some specimens of the wood which I have examined,
that it is eminently serviceable for the smaller joints. I
have seen some rods of this material, made by George B.
Ellard, of Cincinnati, which have done good service, and
are much admired.

Cedar. — As before stated, red cedar nuikes a perfect rod,
except in its lack of toughness or strength. For Trout
fly-rods, in the hands of an expert with light rods, it is

FISHING-RODS. 199

all that can be desired, but it needs to be handled with the
skill of a master, and by one who loves his rod next to his
wife, de facto, or intended.

Hickory. — This wood was formerly much used, espe-
cially in the construction of certain parts of Salmon-rods,
but its use has been entirely discontinued, in this country,
at least. It is, of course, the toughest of woods, but lacks
spring and elasticity, having a tendency to warp and be-
come permanently bent, by the continual strain to which
a rod is subjected.

Hornbeam has been used to some extent in the manu-
facture of rods, and is well spoken of by those who have
used it. It is very difficult, however, to procure it straight-
grained, which it should be to make it available for fishing-
rods. It is quite tough, but pretty heavy, and is in no
way equal to lancewood for tips or second joints, for which
purposes it has been mostly used, though there have been
a few fly-rods constructed entirely of this wood. If per-
fectly straight-grained, it no doulit answers a good purpose.

Mahoe is a foreign wood now coming into vogue for rods,
and more especially for fly-rods. It resembles ash some-
what in its qualities, being not very heavy, and quite
springy and elastic. It is much used in Havana for springs
of that queer looking, high-wheeled vehicle, the volante.
It is much praised by some for producing rods of a su-
perior action, but as I have had no personal experience
with them, I am unable to say any thing for or against
them.

Maple and Basswood are used only in the construc-
tion of cheap and common rods, and need no further
mention here, except that curly maple is sometimes used
for short and ornamental butts, or hand-pieces.

200 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

Cane, or Reed. — Native and foreign cane poles are
much used for fishing-rods, especially in certain kinds of
angling where no reel is required, and for such service an-
swer a good purpose. The native canes are the lightest,
though not so strong and durable as the Chinese or Jap-
anese canes.

Calcutta Bamboo. — The East Indian, or, as it is gen-
erally termed, the Calcutta bamboo, is the best of all ma-
terial for the construction of a perfect rod when carefully
made by a skillful and master workman. In its natural
state it is almost perfect in its action, and possesses all the
desired qualities for certain modes of angling, but for
methods that require a shorter and lighter, or more pliant
rod, these additional features can be secured by altering
the original conditions of the cane, by sawing it into strips
and accurately fitting and gluing them together ; thus re-
ducing the caliber, and, at the same time, preserving and
enhancing all the essential and desirable qualities in a
more compact form.

There are two kinds of Calcutta bamboo, known to the
trade as "male" and "female" canes. The former is
nearly solid, hard, and very tough, with large and protuber-
ant knots or joints, where, wdien growing, are attached the
leaves and tendril-like branches, which are so tough as to
render it necessary to burn them oif ; this gives to these
canes the peculiar clouded and burnt appearance, which
adds so much to the beauty of the split bamboo rod. The
female cane is hollow through its entire length, except just
at the joints or bulges, which are not so prominent as in
the male cane. The male cane is the best to use in its
natural state, but for split bamboo rods, the selected female
cane is to be preferred, as it makes the most perfect rod.

fishing-rods. 201

Origin of the Split Bamboo Rod.

The split bamboo rod being an American institution,
and there being no reliable record of its early manufacture,
I may be pardoned for giving a brief space to its consid-
eration. I consider it the greatest invention ever made per-
taining to the art of angling, equaling the invention of
the breech-loading rifle and shot-gun for field sports.

The history of the " split bamboo," " section bamboo,"
or, as it is sometimes called, the "rent and glued bamboo"
rod, although of recent origin — dating back only some
thirty years — is somewhat obscure. Several persons have
laid claim to the invention, though with what justice, it
has, heretofore, never been clearly determined.

There is no important mechanical invention that has, in
its inception and principle, sprung entirely and spontane-
ously from the brain of any single individual, and this
will apply to the split bamboo rod as well ; for though
purely an American invention, as now constructed, the
idea, or principle, is really of English origin. Rods formed
of several pieces of wood, that is, from two to four longi-
tudinal sections mitred and glued together, were made in
England many years ago ; and Aldred, of London, made
rod tips, or, as they are called in England, " tops," of split
bamboo, long before the split bamboo rod, proper, was
made in this country. Aldred's tops, however, were nec-
essarily a failure, from the faulty method of their construc-
tion. He made them of- many short pieces, sawn from be-
tween the knots, or leaf-ridges, of the male cane, and
spliced, to form continuous lengths. So much for the
original idea.

It is not my province, nor desire, to detract one iota

202 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

from the credit or just clue of any one in this matter, but
rather to render unto Csesar those things that belong to
Csesar. I will present only such evidence as is entirely
trustworthy, having been obtained from authentic sources,
and put it on record here as reliable data in regard to the
earlv history of the American split bamboo rod; and in
so doing I hope to do justice to an obscure, but worthy
brother of the angle.

The first split bamboo rods were made by Mr. Samuel
Phillippi, a gunsmith of Easton, Pennsylvania, about the
year 1848. Mr. Phillippi was an angler of some local
repute, and died about 1878. Mr. Charles H. Luke, a
veteran angler of Newark, New Jersey, formerly lived in
Easton, and was a near neighbor of Phillippi, with whom
he fished and hunted on many occasions. He naturally
spent much of his spare time at Phillippi's gun-shop, where,
about 1850, he watched liim for hours at a time making
split bamboo trout fly-rods, in which, being a fine and exact
workman, he took great pride.

Mr. Charles F. Murphy, of Newark, New Jersey, famous
as one of the best makers of split bamboo rods, and who
has few, if any, superiors as a fly-fisher, corroborates Mr.
Luke's testimony, and says that Pliillippi used split bamboo
for fly-rods, certainly as far back as 1848, and further
says: "I am certain you can give Phillippi credit for the
discovery of split bamboo for fly-rods, without fear of con-
tradiction."

Dr. W. W. Bowlby, of New York City, a gentleman
well known as an angler, says : " My earliest recollection
of the split bamboo rod dates back to about the year 1852.
At that time I lived in New Jersey, near Easton, Penn-
sylvania, and fished in the same waters in New Jersey and

FISHING-RODS. 203

Pennsylvania with an old j:;unsmith, of Easton^ known
among us as "'Old Sam Phillippi." It was about the year
above named that I saw a split bamboo rod in his posses-
sion, and he informed me at that time, that he was the
originator of the idea; and to him, I earnestly believe,
belongs the credit of having first conceived the idea of
constructing a rod from such material. Phillippi's rods
were three joints, second joint and tip split bamboo ; butt
was made of ash."

I have similar statements from other gentlemen, whose
names I do not feel at liberty to disclose, but their testi-
mony is to the same effect, qualified in some instances by
the remark that Phillippi's rods were crude affairs ; and
which, though true, does not detract in any degree from
the credit due him. Phillippi's rods were made in three
joints, or pieces, two of which, only, were of split bamboo,
the butt being ash, and stained to imitate bamboo ; but
the bamboo joints were made on the same principle as
those of to-day, though composed of but four strips.
Phillippi's rods seem poor things now, but at that time
they seemed wonderful.

The first complete split bamboo rod, that is, all of the
joints being of this material, seems to have been made by
Mr. E. A. Green, of Newark, New Jersey, about 1860,
though some claim that the late Mr. Thaddeus Norris, of
Philadelphia, is entitled to this honor; however this may
be, they were both subsequent to Mr. Phillippi, and their
rods were merely improvements on his more primitive
efforts. Whether either or both of these gentlemen had
any knowledge of Mr. Phillippi's rods, or whether the idea
was original with them, is not material, and does not affect
Phillippi's claim of priority. Mr. Green being a skillful

204 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

and ingenious mechanic, and a thorough and expert angler,
produced excellent rods, though for his own use, only.

The first perfect split bamboo rods for the trade were
made by Mr. Charles F. Murphy, of Newark, who, after
seeing Mr. Green's rods, saw a chance for still greater im-
provement ; and Mr. Green, knowing him to be an artistic
and skillful wood-worker, encouraged him to undertake
their manufacture, which he did about 1863-'64.

Mr. Murphy made the first split bamboo Salmon-rod in
1865, which Dr. Andrew Clerk took to Scotland, where it
proved a success. Subsequently, Genio C, Scott took the
same rod to the St. Lawrence, and, on his returu, published
an interesting account of his trip, and the use of the rod, in
Wilkes' " Spirit of the Times," in the same year. The
first split bamboo Black Bass rod was made by Mr. Mur-
phy, in 1866.

Up to this time all split bamboo rods were composed of
but four strips or sections. About 1870, Mr. H. L. Leon-
ard, of Bangor, Maine, began makiug the six-strip bamboo
rod, and Dr. A. H. Fowler soon followed him. Mr. Leon-
ard is one of the most skillful makers of split bamboo rods
in the country ; the angler who is the fortunate possessor of
one of his best rods ought to be a happy man ; I speak
from experience. Although Leouard's rods were the first
six-strip rods put in the market, Mr. Murphy had perfected
one some time before.

To Andrew Clerk & Co., and their successors. Abbey &
Imbrie, 48 Maiden Lane, New York City, however, be-
long the credit and honor of bringing this rod to its present
state of perfection and prominence. They were the first
patrons of Phillippi, Murphy, and Leonard, and gave them
every assistance and encouragement.

FISHING-RODS. 205

This firm was the first to make a specialty of the manu-
facture of the split bamboo rod, and was the first to in-
troduce the six-section rod, those previously made for
them by Phillippi and Murphy being four-section rods.
They subsequently trained skilled mechanics to this branch
of their business, and until they had made a success of the
split bamboo rod, they stood alone in the enterprise, being
ridiculed by other manufacturers and dealers for pursuing
a phantom and a false idea.

They persisted in their course, however, in spite of
opposition and ridicule, and to-day enjoy the fruits of
their devotion to the idea of producing "the best rod
in the world." And by their pluck and commenda-
ble enterprise and persistent endeavors, notwithstanding
the repeated fiiilures and petty annoyances incident to
their experiments, they have at last the satisfaction of
knowing that their efforts have been appreciated by
anglers, and that their large experience has put them
far in the advance as manufacturers of this unexcelled
rod; and the fact that other manufacturers have since
taken up the making of this rod as an important part
of their business, proves that the original position and
faith of Andrew Clerk & Co., and their successors,
Abbey & Imbrie, in regard to the merits of the split
bamboo rod, were well founded.

The best form of the split bamboo rod, as proved by
actual service, is the round, six-section rod. Many ex-
periments have been made to improve upon this method,
but they have resulted in failure. The hexagonal rod is
claimed by its supporters to be preferable to the round
rod, inasmuch as there is no cutting away of the sur-
face enamel or outside siliceous coating, at the angles;

206 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

as in the formation of the round rod, and therefore is a
stronger rod.

While this looks plausible enough to the superficial
reasoner, it has no foundation in fact. The hexagonal
rod is not a true six-sided figure, but rather a round
figure with six angles; for the face of each section is
of course slightly rounded, or convex, as it originally
existed in the cane, and the extremely small amount of
outside surface that is taken off at the angles to make
the rod perfectly round does not amount to any thing in
reality, or weaken the rod a particle. On the contrary,
it lessens the liability of the sections becoming separated
by use, from the prominence of the jointed angles or
seams, as in the hexagonal rod, which are liable to
become bruised or chipped off by striking or rubbing
against hard substances, as rocks, trees, boats, etc., and
so exposing the seams to the action of air and moisture,
Avhich softens the glue and causes the strips to separate.

Another plan has been advocated, to reverse the pro-
cess in sawing the strips, and place the enamel or outside
coating at the interior of the rod. And still another,
and somewhat better plan, by the way, has been proposed,
more especially for tips, as follows :

a n

n D

The shaded sides of the sections represent the outer
coating. The sections are to be pressed together, and
glued in the position in which they are drawn in the
figure, which brings the enamel of each strip partly in-
side and partly outside ; the piece is then worked down

FISHING-RODS. 207

to a round form, having the center of enamel, and the
circumference of alternate strips of inside and a small
portion of the siliceous or outside layer.

Then these rods have been made of eight and nine
strips; but there is no real merit in any of these last-
mentioned plans, and the six-section, outside enamel,
hexagonal or round, is the only common-sense, practical
plan.

The following table of relative weights and measure-
ments of section-bamboo fly-rods, which, however, can
only be approximate, is furnished by Messrs. Abbey &
Imbrie, No. 48 Maiden Lane, New York City:

LENGTH OF ROD. WEIGHT OF EEEI. PLATE. TOTAL WEIGHT.

11 feet » If ounces. 9 ounces.

ll.\feet 2 " 10 "

12 feet 2^ " 12 "

14 feet 2i " 18 "

16 feet 2f " 28 "

16J feet 2J " 31 "

17 feet 3 " 36 "

17 J feet 3} " 40 "

18 feet 31 " 44 "

19 feet 3| " 50 "

20 feet 4 " 54 "

Black Bass Bait Rods.

The Black Bass and his mode of capture has hitherto
been altogether too much neglected, if not entirely
ignored, by most of our writers upon the gentle art,
either from a lack of interest, or a want of proper in-
formation, upon the subject. Some works, that have
been held in the highest esteem, contain the least infor-

208 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

mation upon Black Bass angling, and even that little is
totally unreliable and unsatisfactory. As a rule, our
angling authors have damned the Black Bass with faint
praise, and have given but the most primitive methods
for its capture.

Most writers have devoted their attention exclusively
to the Salmon and Brook Trout, among the fresh-water
game fishes, or to the Striped Bass, Blue Fish and Weak
Fish, among the salt-water species. While acknowledg-
ing the game qualities and fine sport afforded the angler
by these different species, and which acknowledgment is
founded upon ample personal experience with them all —
excepting the Salmon — I regard the Black Bass as one of
our gamest fishes ; and an experience of twenty-five
years has convinced me that the sport afforded by it
is not surpassed by the pursuit of any other member of
the finny tribe, excepting possibly the Salmon, with which
" King of the waters," as I have just stated, I have had
no experience.

But in order to realize Black Bass fishing in its per-
fection, suitable tackle must be employed. Fishing for
Brook Trout with a bean-pole for a rod, and a piece of
raw meat for bait, would not be considered sport in the
true meaning of the term, nor should the pursuit of the
Black Bass, under similar conditions, be so regarded ;
yet the methods of Black Bass angling heretofore de-
scribed by our angling authors, and practiced by most
anglers, are open to the same objections.

Until within the past few years such primitive rods as
the cane-pole of the South, the alder or hemlock of the
Middle States, or the tamarack pole of the North-west,
were, when well selected, light, and of true taper, equal

FISHING-RODS. 209

to or superior to any thing offered by the dealers. Ten
years ago, a person entering a tackle shop in a Western
town, and inquiring for Bass tackle, would be presented
with a rod from twelve to sixteen feet long, weighing
from one to two pounds ; a large brass reel, with a
handle like a coffee-mill crank ; a line like a chalk lin ?,
and a large ungainly hook with a side bend — and all tins
formidable array of clumsy apparatus to do battle with
such a thoroughbred and noble foe as the Black Bass!
Combination rods, general rods, perch rods, cheap striped
bass tackle, et Jioo genus omne, had been, as a rule, manu-
factured for the Western market, and sold for Black Bass
fishing.

This was the more surprising, as the Black Bass in-
habited so many of the waters of the Union, from New
England to Florida, and from Maryland to Missouri.
He was, moreover, the acknowledged jjeer of the Brook
Trout for gameness by those who knew him best ; and it
was "a consummation devoutly to be wished '^ that as
much skill should be displayed in his capture, and as
elegant and as suitable tackle employed for the purpose
as in the case of his speckled rival.

Those enthusiastic and observant anglers, who learned
from experience that there was a want not supplied in
Black Bass rods, as offered by the trade, and who pos-
sessed sufficient ingenuity, constructed their own rods,
and fished in their own way; and as these worthy souls
were generally regarded as authority in their respective
localities on the subject of Black Bass fishing, and not
without reason, their particular style of rod was adopted
in their particular locality as the "perfect bass rod."

This will account for the marked difference of opinion

18

210 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

upon this subject in different sections of the country,
for each such rod was made iu accordance with the style
of fishing, and the character of the waters to be fished.

Some years ago, while residing in Wisconsin, I con-
ceived the idea of writing a book on the Black Bass, in
order to do justice to a fish that seemed to be but little
understood; and likewise to divest the sport of Black
Bass angling — as it then existed — of some of its primi-
tive and disagreeable features, and give it a higher j)lace
in the catalogue of noble sports.

I was convinced that it was only necessary to present
the claims of the Black Bass in a proper light, and to
give a description of the most suitable tackle for its
capture, to induce the angling fraternity to accord full
justice to a noble fish, which I was satisfied was, for
many reasons, destined to become the leading game fish
of America.

Accordingly, I began making notes of my observations
of the habits of the Black Bass, and was collecting data
for the intended treatise, when, fortunately and opportunely,
Mr. Charles Hallock founded and established that excel-
lent journal Forest and Stream, which came just when it
was most needed. Here then was my opportunity to reach
the anglers of the country, and I was not slow to embrace
it, and at once began to champion the cause of the Black
Bass.

I prepared a series of articles on the Black Bass and
Black Bass angling, and described at some length the
proper rod, reel, line, hook, etc., and mode of using them,
to render it not oidy feasible, but practicable, to convince
the angler of the high order of game qualities inherent to
the Black Bass ; and that by the use of suitable tackle it

FISHING-RODS. 211

would not suffer by a comparison with other game fishes.
The seed of these articles was sown in good ground, and
yielded abundantly. I received letters from hundreds of
Black Bass anglers, in all parts of the country, thanking
and complimenting me for the ideas suggested, and for
espousing the cause of their favorite fish, the Black Bass.
The result proved far beyond my most hopeful anticipa-
tions, and I have the satisfaction of knowing that to-day
there is no game fish more eagerly sought for, and none
that is being more rapidly introduced into new, inland
waters by the advocates and admirers of this truly game
fish.

In February, 1875, I published an article, entitled,
''The Coming Black Bass Rod," in Forest and Stream,
which gave a description of my idea of a proper rod for
Black Bass angling, founded on many years experience,
and the use of many different rods for this purpose. Mr.
C F. Orvis, of Manchester, Vermont, an expert angler,
as well as a maker of fine fishing-rods, at once began the
manufacture of a Black Bass rod from those suggestions,
and they are to-day to be found in all parts of the country,
he having been remarkably successful in introducing them,
for they supplied a want long felt.

Other manufacturers, seeing the necessity for a new de-
parture from the old beaten path, soon began to make
short and light Black Bass rods, more in accordance wath
the spirit of the age, and the demands of their customers,
which they called the " Forest and Stream " Black Bass
rod, thus honoring and doing justice to the admirable
journal to whose columns are due the credit of completely
reconstructing the Black Bass rod, and of replacing the
former long, heavy and clumsy affair, by the elegant,

212 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

short, light and pliant rod of the present day. And not
only has the length and weight of bait rods been reduced,
but fly-rods of all patterns have been reduced at least a
foot in length, during the past five years, to their great
advantage.

The Henshall Black Bass Minnow Rod.

While a rod may vary somewhat, according to the mode
of angling, there is no good reason for such a wide diver-
sity of opinion as obtains on the question of Black Bass
rods. For instance : Fishing from the bank of a swift
and narrow stream, wading the bars of a wide river, or
fishing from a boat on a quiet lake, seem in themselves
apparently very different processes; but in reality they
are only slightly different means of securing the same end,
viz : the capture of the Black Bass with a minnow for
bait — for my remarks apply only to bait fishing — and a
properly constructed rod would answer in either place
and fulfill either condition, when accompanied by a light,
freely rendering reel, together with a fine trout line. An
artistic angler, fishing for Trout or Black Bass with the
fly, would use his fly-rod in either place ; from a boat,
from the bank, or while wading the stream ; he would
use the same rotl under any and every circumstance, wher-
ever he had room to make a cast. The Black Bass bait
fisher will in time become as consistent as the fly fisher,
but it will only be when he adopts the proper rod, which
rod I will now endeavor to describe.

I start out with the proposition that a first-class Amer-
ican, single-handed Trout fly-rod is, per se, the very per-
fection of rods and the chef'doeuvreof the rod-maker's art.

FLSIIIXG-RODS. 213

Such a rod is about eleven feet loiiii;, and is made of split
bamboo, or a combination of ash and laneewood, and should
weigh from seven to nine ounces. With such a rod, prop-
erly handled, either line, leader or hook may part, but the
rod ■will remain intact. It combines all the essential qual-
ities of a good rod, viz: balance, lightness, strength, elas-
ticity, and pliancy. A Salmon rod is only a Trout rod
enlarged, proportionately, in every particular, and made to
be used with two hands instead of one.

Now, if all fish were caught with the fly, there would
be no need for other rods than the Trout and Salmon fly-
rods; but as such, unfortunately, is not the case, we are
compelled to adopt other rods in accordance with the mode
of fishing, the character of the fish to be caught, and the
kind of bait to be used. But whatever may be the nature
of the rod that is to be made, let this general rule or prin-
ciple be followed in its construction : Let the rod conform
as nearly as possible to the typical rod, i. e., the Trout fly-
rod, as is consistent with the manner of service required
of it. If we follow this rule we can not go very far
astray.

Acting upon this principle, then, I have found in my
experience that the essential qualities or attributes of a
good Black Bass rod for bait fishing, are just the same as
the typical rod for balance, weight, strength, and elasticity,
with a happy medium of pliancy, between a Trout fly-rod
and a Trout bait-rod, which can hardly be expressed in
words. But this slight stiffening of the rod makes it cor-
respondingly heavier, and in order to maintain the same
relative weight, we must cut down the length of the rod
by taking off from two to three feet, thus reducing the
rod to eight or nine feet in length, which is found by ex-

214 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

perience to be far superior to longer rods for Black Bass
fishing.

As a long, withy, willowy rod is best for casting a fly,
so is a short, stiffish rod best for casting a minnow. With
a rod of this character, anjd a light-running, multiplying
reel, it is an easy matter to cast from thirty to forty yards.
The situation of the reel upon the butt must be a com-
promise between the single and double-handed fly-rods ;
for though the rod is used almost entirely with one hand,
yet there are emergencies when both hands must be used,
for occasionally a six-pound Bass or a fifteen-pound Pick-
erel, Pike-perch, or Catfish Avill be hooked; or an unusu-
ally bold or fierce fighting Bass may get the advantage
of one and take to the weeds or rocks. It is also essen-
tial to have plenty of room for the hand below the reel
in casting, as the thumb must control the running off
of the line, and prevent the reel from overrunning, as in
Striped-bass fishing. The rod must have light, standing
guides, instead of rings as in the fly-rod.

The rod from which my original description of the
" Coming Black Bass Rod " was taken is eight feet and three
inches long, and is in three joints; the first joint or butt is
composed of white ash, and the second joint and tip of
lancewood ; it weighs just eight ounces; it is finely bal-
anced, and has a true bend from butt to tip; with it I
have killed hundreds of Black Bass, weighing from two
to four pounds, and occasionally heavier, and Pickerel
from five to twelve pounds, with an occasional one scaling
fifteen pounds. I have used it many seasons, and do not
see where it can be improved ; it is as firm and elastic
as when first made. I have oftentimes cast out my
entire line of fifty yards, when casting with the wind.

FISHING-RODS. 215

I feci justly proud of the merits of this rod, for I made
it myself.

Messrs. Abbey & Imbrie, of 48 Maiden Lane, New
York City, made me a rod from designs and specifica-
tions furnished by myself, which comes as near the embodi-
ment of my ideas of a Black Bass minnow rod as any I
have seen. After a season of hard usage and thoroughly
practical tests, I am prepared to say that I do not see
how it can well be improved. It is fully the equal of
my own pet rod (which I made myself), and is of course
more highly finished ; indeed, in this latter respect it can
not be excelled.

The materials and mountings of this rod are of the
highest quality. The butt is prime wdiite ash, and the
second piece and tip are of selected Cuba lancewood. The
mountings are German silver, solid and strong. The fer-
rules are milled, capped and banded, and the guides solid,
light, and of a very graceful and new pattern, and are
lashed on. The butt has a wound grip, or hand-piece,
and the reel-bands and cap are very finely finished. The
metal tip is of the four-ring pattern, light and strong.

The joints are made solid and flush, without tenons or
dowels, or mortising. This I have found to be the best
way for fitting the joints, for the boring not only weakens
the joint, but the tapering tenon, acting like a wedge, will
cause the joint to separate by the continual springing of
the rod. Mr. C. F. Orvis, one of the best and most honest
tackle makers living, also constructs the joints of his rods
in this way.

The dimensions of the rod made by Abbey & Imbrie
are as follows : —

Total length, when put together, 8 feet 3 inches.

216

BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

V/6'

RinrJicc

The Henshall Bla k Bass Rod.— (Specifications.)
(Abbey & Imbrie.)

Standing Guides, to wrap.

Kod Tips.

Standing Guides, with bands.

FISHING-RODS. 217

Length of each piece, 34j inches, including ferrules.

Butt : Extreme end of butt, f inch in diameter.
Small end of butt, J inch in diameter.
Grip or hand-piece, ly'g- inch in diameter.
Reel-seat, 1 inch in diameter.

Second piece: Large end, -^ inch in diameter.
Small end, ^^ inch in diameter.

Tip : Large end, ^ inch in diameter.
Small end, -g^^ inch in diameter.

Reel-seat, 4 inches long.

From extreme butt to reel-seat, 7 (from 6 to 8) inches.

The weig-ht of a rod made from these dimensions will
be about nine ounces, depending upon the material em-
ployed in its construction. Its weight can be reduced to
eight ounces by taking off a sixty-fourth of an inch from
the several diameters, and can be increased to ten or
eleven ounces by enlarging the diameters in the same
ratio ; but it must be remembered, that in altering the
conditions of this rod, at all, in order to preserve its ad-
mirable balance and fine action, it is imperative that the
diameters be increased or dimi;iished, uniformly, through-
out the entire length of the rod, from the extreme butt to
the tip.

To attempt to secure lightness by reducing the caliber
of the butt-piece alone, would result in spoiling the rod ;
and as Messrs. Abbey & Imbrie truly say : " The angler
who seeks lightness in a rod at the expense of any tiling
else is worse than an infidel." While this rod may be
reduced to even six ounces, if its proper proportions are
observed in the modeling, and still be a good rod for
Rock Bass, Croppies and White Bass, it would be too

light for Black Bass angling.

19

218 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

This rod has a true and gradual taper from the reel-
seat to the tip, which gives it a back, which, while just
stiff enough for casting a minnow, is sufficiently pliable
and yielding to give a correct working to the rod under
the play of a lively fish. And just here is where so many
rods fail. Many rods are made too weak in the butt, or
the upper two-thirds of it, usually by a rapid and concave
taper to reduce the caliber of the rod at this point, in
order to gain lightness. But this can only be done at
the expense of weakening the rod, and spoiling its action.

When a rod has too weak a back, or too slender a butt
at this point, it causes the rod to be top-heavy, and pro-
duces what is known as a " double action " in the rod, or
a "kick in the handle;" qualities which were sought for
in some Salmon fly-rods in the old country, as it was sup-
posed that a fly could be cast farther with rods of this
character. But it was necessary that the angler should
become thoroughly educated in the handling of a rod with
this peculiarity, to be enabled to use it with any degree
of satisfaction.

However much this principle may have been desired by
British Salmon fishers, it becomes the very worst feature
in a Black Bass minnow rod. With this defect in a bait
rod, it is impossible to cast with any accuracy, or to any
great distance. And, moreover, it produces in the angler
a lack of confidence in his rod, for it " feels weak" to him
at the very point where it should feel the strongest, and
really the rod would give way at just this very point under
a heavy strain.

But, to refer to my rod again : I can easily cast a min-
now from forty to fifty yards, and with great accuracy^
with this rod, the back being just stiff and yielding

FISHING-RODS. 219

enough for this purpose. The bend from the last third
of the butt piece to the tip forms a true and perfect arch
under the strain of a hard-pulling fish, which is the bend
so desirable, and so hard to obtain in a fishing-rod. The
strain falls equally upon the entire rod, so that it is im-
possible for me to tell just where it would l)reak under a
sufficient strain. The weak part of an imperfect rod can
always be felt by an expert angler, and he knows perfectly
well, while playing a fish, just where the rod is weakest,
and just where it would fail.

In giving a description of this rod, I have given the
description of what I call a perfect Black Bass minnow
rod, and the reader can rely upon it as being correct in
principle, and satisfactory in practice. And should he ever
become possessed of such a treasure, he will, in the fullness
of his heart, be prepared to hold up both hands for me.

This same style of rod can be procured from any first-
class maker, as Conroy, Bissett & Malleson, No. 65 Ful-
ton Street, New York ; Charles F. Orvis, of Manchester,
Vermont ; or S. W. Goodridge, of Grafton, Vermont, all
of whom make excellent rods, from specifications furnished
by myself. I have examined and tested rods made by all
of them, and know whereof I speak.

Mr. Orvis informs me that some of his customers
ordered rods with the butt extending below the reel
clamps a foot or more, so as to reach under the elbow,
and thus form a j^oint d'appui. This demand is founded
upon laziness, carelessness, or "pure cussedness," which was
first induced by using the old-style rods, which were so
heavy and long as to require either this support, or, what
was worse, the holding of the rod with both hands.

Now, the object of the modern Black Bass rod is to dis-

220 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

pense entirely with this ungraceful and clumsy style, and
enable the rod to be used with the hand alone, as in fly
fishing. I siucerely hope that my brother anglers will not
thus handicap their skill, nor encourage this needless exten-
sion of butt. It will be well to remember, in this connec-
tion, that no excellence is gained but by great labor, and
no skill attained but by careful practice. There may be
born poets, but I doubt if there are born fishermen ; the
love may be innate, but its confirmation requires patience,
perseverance and elbow-grease.

The novice will be sometimes told by theoretical anglers
that he must procure a rod which accords with his size,
strength, and general build ; that a rod which suits one
angler, will be too long, too short, too heavy, or too light
for another. Now, this is all gammon ; a rod must be
made to suit the kind of fish, and the mode of fishing,
without any reference whatever to the angler himself.

In ordering a shot-gun that is to be used on all kinds
of game, from the lordly buck to the dainty quail, it is of
the highest importance that the gun should be built to fit
the sportsman in every particular, and he then varies the
charge according to the game. But there is no analogy
between a shot-gun and a fishing-rod; the latter weighs
but ounces, where the former weighs pounds, and the
weight of a rod for Black Bass angling will suit a weakly
youth, or the strongest man, as well. A half-pound in
weight is of no moment as compared to the strength of a
man ; and it is all stuff, and the sheerest nonsense, to talk
of making a rod of this weight conform to the muscular
requirements of any individual. A well-balanced rod feels
the same to the weakest man or strongest, the tallest man
or shortest; while a rod that lacks this quality will feel

FISHIXG-RODS. 221

right to no one. I have no patience or sympathy with
those visionary book-anglers, who talk or write such ridic-
ulous nonsense, or spin such fine-drawn theories.

A Home-made Black Bass Rod.

As the Black Bass anglers of Ohio, Kentucky, Ten-
nessee, Northern Alabama, and the South-west generally
are extremely partial to a natural cane or bamboo rod, I
desire to tell them how to make a good one of this ma-
terial at little cost, and which, though not a " thing of
beauty," will prove itself a "joy forever," in comparison
with the cane-rod, as generally used. After using such a
rod as I am about to describe for one season, the angler
will be ready to advance another step, and adopt a good
ash and lancewood rod, which contingency, I am free to
admit, is the principal motive for this information.

A natural bamboo-cane, as it is procured at the tackle
stores, is from fifteen to twenty feet in length; and it is
the custom, in the localities named, to use from ten to
twelve feet of the smaller or upper end of such a cane for
a Black Bass rod, after attaching standing guides and a reel
fastening. While such a rod is strong and light, with a
moderate degree of pliancy and elasticity, it entirely lacks
the great desideratum, balance, being decidedly top-heavy,
and is too small at the butt to allow of a firm grasp of the
hand, generally necessitating the use of both hands to hold
it. Now, to obtain the greatest amount of good and pleas-
ure from a rod of this character, proceed as follows :

Select a genuine Calcutta bamboo-cane, which may be
known by its dark, mottled markings, caused by its having
been burnt about the leaf-ridges, or knots. Select one that

222 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

is hard and elastic, with a good taper, and quite small at
the tip; those known as "male" canes are the best, having
larger bulges, or leaf-ridges, and being much tougher than
the " female " canes. Having chosen a good one, cut off
six and a half feet of the smaller end for the rod, the re-
maining larger portion of the cane will make a good han-
dle for a landing-net.

Now make a wooden butt of white-ash or black-w^alnut,
from eighteen to twenty inches long, of the following di-
ameters: At the extreme butt end, seven-eighths of an
inch ; now increase the diameter by a gradual taper to an
inch and one-eighth at a distance of five inches from the
extreme butt ; tlien decrease the taper to an inch at a dis-
tance of seven inches from extreme butt. The next four
inches forms the reel seat, and is one' inch in diameter
throughout its length ; now decrease the diameter by a
rapid, concave taper for a distance of two inches, to three-
fourths of an inch, and thence a gradual taper to the
smaller end of the butt, which must exceed the diameter
of the large end of tlie cane about one-sixteenth of an
inch ; the diameter of the large end of the cane-joint —
where cut in two — will be from half an inch to five-
eighths of an inch.

Having proceeded according to the instructions just
given, we have a cane-joint six feet and six inches long,
and a wooden butt say twenty inches long, with the grip
of one and one-eighth of an inch in diameter, and the reel
seat of one inch diameter, Now procure a set of reel
bands one inch inside diameter; a p:iir of ferrules for the
joint — the inside diameter of the smaller or male ferrule
being of the same diameter as the large end of the cane
piece, which can readily be ascertained with a pair of

FISHING-RODS. 223

calipers ; five standing guides, graduated sizes, and a solid
metal tip. These mountings should be brass or German
silver. The guides should be attached at equal distances
from the reel seat to the tip; and, having properly fitted
the ferrules and reel bands, give the rod two coats of shel-
lac or coach varnish. When dry, the rod is ready for use,
and Avill be about eight feet in length, and weighing not
more than eight ounces — a single-handed rod equal to any
rod made for casting, will be well-balanced and strong,
but will lack the pliancy, elasticity and perfect working
of a good ash and lancewood rod, yet it will be such a
great improvement on the cane-rod, as generally used,
that it has only to be tried to be appreciated.

A rod, similar to the above, originated, in Milwaukee,
in 1874, in this way: At that time I was the only one, of
a large number of anglers, who frequented the lakes in the
vicinity of Oconomowoc, Wisconsin, who used a short and
light Black Bass minnow rod, and which was often the
subject of many jokes on the part of my fellow-anglers.
But, as it was not always "the longest pole that got the
persimmons," some of them, at length, became convinced
of the superiority of the short rod in casting and general
convenience, though they were loath to alter their hand-
some ten and twelve feet rods.

I suggested to several to have short rods made of native
cane, in the manner above described, and which I had
formerly experimented with. I referred them to John C.
AVelles, of Milwaukee, as the proper person to make them.
Accordingly, he got ujd several, and, for convenience,
made them in three pieces — two cane-joints, of about
three feet each, and a short wooden butt or handle. The
result was, that the owners used them afterward in prefer-

224 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

ence to all other rods, and a demand at once sprang up for
the " Welles' rod," and they are still made and used to
some extent. Other Western manufacturers afterward
adopted the idea, and oifered them to anglers in lengths
of from seven to ten feet.

But while such a rod is cheap, light, and eminently-
serviceable, it has, to my mind, some very serious objec-
tions. In the first place, it is very homely and unsym-
metrical in form ; the short, stubby butt tapering so sud-
denly and abruptly to the cane-joint, gives the rod a very
awkward and unfinished appearance, and entirely destroys
the balance of the rod. Now, as remarked at the begin-
ning of this article, " a thing of beauty is a joy forever,"
and one can appreciate this quality in a fishing-rod, as well
as in a horse, a yacht, or a gun. In the next place, it is
too stiff and unyielding, except at the extreme tip ; the
bend not being equally distributed along the entire rod, as
it should be : and this fault, from the nature of the rod,
can not well be obviated. This I consider an insuperable
objection, for it precludes that nice discrimination in feel-
ing your fish when he is taking the bait, and that delicate
manipulation of him after he is hooked. The owners of
this rod, however, are very enthusiastic in its praise, and it
is, at least, a step in the right direction for a more perfect
Black Bass rod.

The Cuvier Black Bass Rod.

The most complete rod of this character which I have
seen, is made by Mr. George B. Ellard, of Cincinnati. It
is made in two pieces of choice, short-jointed Japanese
bamboo, with an adjustable handle, which can be detached

FISHING-RODS. 225

at pleasure. It is light, well balanced, honestly made, and
can be handled all day without fatigue. The arrangement
of the handle is a special feature; it can, with little
trouble, be adjusted to any other rod. With it and a reel
in his satchel, a dozen hooks, half a dozen guides, a solid
metal tip, and a piece of wound silk thread in his pocket,
an angler is never at a loss for the materials to enjoy a
day's sport at any little fishing town, where he may by
accident find himself, during the season, and where he can
buy a bamboo or other cane for fifty cents.

Mr. Ellard calls his rod the " Cuvier Bass Rod," after
the well-known club of that name in Cincinnati. It has
been thoroughly tested during the past season on Lake
Erie, and in the smaller waters of Wisconsin, Minnesota,
and Michigan, and has given universal satisfaction. Its
moderate price is not the least of its merits.

Section Bamboo Minnow Rod.

While, in my opinion, ash and lancewood, or some such
suitable woods are to be preferred for a Black Bass min-
now rod — the desired action' of such a rod being: more
easily obtained from these materials — there are some an-
glers who prefer a rod of split bamboo to any other ma-
terial, and for any kind of rod. And while it is possible
to make as good a rod for action, and a superior one for
strength and beauty from this material, the cost is neces-
sarily very much greater — at least three times as great —
for a perfect minnow rod of split bamboo.

For those who desire the best, at whatever cost, I can
recommend a rod of this material when made by a first-

226 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

class workman. But, at the same time, I would caution
the angler to take the most jealous and unceasing care of
such a rod, for it is not so serviceable as a wooden rod
when subject to the same conditions of usage.

In order to give the reader an idea of the construction
of a split bamboo rod, I can not do better than to repro-
duce here the following extract from a letter, written to
me on this subject by Mr. T. S. Morrell, an accomplished
and finished angler, of Newark, New Jersey — relating to
the construction of a split bamboo Black Bass minnow rod,
as made by himself: —

I have just finished a rod patterned after that described by you
in " Hallock'is Sportsman's Gazetteer " — a one-hand bait- rod for Black
Bass. I will briefly describe my method of manufacture, as I learned
it from Mr. E. A. Green :

The rod is eight and a half feet long, in three joints, of six-strip
baiTiboo. The ferrules, reel-bands, butt-cap, and guides, I had made
to order, not being an expert in working metals. The bamboo I got
from Mr. C. F. Murphy, and is as tough as bone.

I first sawed the piece in two strips with a fine, sharp hand-saw ;
then I took a board with a perfectly straight slit sawed the length
of a joint of the proposed rod. Laying the flat part of one of the
strips (I had just sawn asunder) on this board over the slit, I carefully
placed it so as to get the requisite taper, and then tacked it at the
edge§ firmly to the board.

Then, with rule and pencil I drew on the bamboo a straight line,
being careful to taper it right, and sawed it out — six pieces exactly
alike in size and taper — for a joint. The manner of getting the size
correctly, is to take the male ferrule for the thick end of the joint,
and the female ferrule for the small end ; stand each on end on a
piece of paper, and mark a circle outside; then, with a pair of small
compasses measure the circle into six parts, and draw a line from
point to point across the circle, so that all the lines meet in the
center. This will show the size and taper of each piece, and the ex-
act shape.

FISHING-RODS. 227

The board on which I sawed out my strips has grooves cut, so that
I easily phuie the inside of the strips for each joint; any inequality
I finish off with a file. I now place my six strips together, winding
twine around tightly, but some distance apart, so that I can get my
thumb and finger between, so that I can see the joints, and how they
come together. If they appear loose, and I can not get them to-
gether with thumb and finger, T mark the spots with a pencil, and
unwinding, file away until they come well together.

For the butt, I draw a plan on paper, that is, enough of it to rep-
resent the hand-hold, measure with compasses the distance across
each strip, or cut a pattern of paper, lay it on the bamboo and mark
it out. For the tip and middle joint, when I glue the strips to-
gether, I wind hard and tight and closely with twine ; now I
straighten them carefully (as the hot glue has made them pliant),
and lay away for twenty-four hours on a shelf. I never stand them
on end, as they are likely to warp out of shape.

For the butt, I have iron rings of many sizes ; when the strips are
glued together, I force on these rings, driving on hard, and close to-
gether. This brings the glued strips so tightly together that the
joints can not be seen. Twenty-four hours after gluing, I take off
the rings and wrappings of twine, and finish off with a file and
sand-paper; then fit on the ferrules, which I fasten on with cement.

Before putting on the guides and metal tip, I joint the rod to-
gether, and turn it in the ferrules until I get it perfectly straight;
then mai'k the places for the guides and tij), so that they are all in
a straight line, so that the fishing-line may have as little friction as
possible. I now cement on the metal tip, and lash on the guides
with a string, simply to hold them in place for the silk lashings.

The rod is now ready for the silk lashings, for which I use fine red
spool-silk. I wind the guides first ; winding on smoothly and closely.
AVhen one side of the guide is wound, I cut off the silk, leaving half
a yard, which T thread in a needle, and, pushing the latter under
the lashings, draAV it through tightly and cut off close. Then finish
the other side of the guide in the same way.

I now, with a pencil, mark the places for the lashings the whole
length of the joint, tip, or butt, on which I am w^orking. I draw off
from the spool about four feet of silk, cut it off and thread the
needle; this is enough-for several lashings of the tijj. I make not

228

BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

more than a half-dozen turns on the end of the tip, and place the
lashings about a half-inch ajmrt, increasing the number of turns and
the distance apart, so that at the butt of the rod the lashings are an
eighth of an inch wide and one inch apart.

When the lashings, guides, reel-bands, butt-cap, etc., are all on, I
give the rod its first coat of varnish, putting it on very thin and
evenly; it is quite an art to varnish well. I give the rod at least
four coats, each as thin as T can spread it, and each well dried before
the next is put on. I do not use shellac, but varnish of the best
gum.

I have, at some length, thus described my method of making a
split bamboo rod, as taught me by Mr. Green. There are several
other ways of doing it, and it must be understood that this is amateur
work. A circular saw is a great help, and indispensable to those
who make rods to sell.

Details of Split Bamboo Eod.

(Conroy, Bissett & Malleson.)

Cut No. 1 shows a transverse section of the cane, and the dotted lines where
a piece is split out. It is then planed down to the white line, leaving only the
hard enamel.

No. 2 shows the strips ready for cementing.

— ' — 1 —

1 1 i i

1 1 a ' 1 1 il

^-n a ai , 1

. . . a. 1 1 m9 ■ 1 1

■ ■ 0 ° ■ ' ■ , rt

Split Bamboo Fly-Rod.

(Conroy, Bissett & Malleson.)

fishing-rods. 229

The Black Bass Fly-Rod.

A few pages back, I made the statement that the Amer-
ican Tront fly-rod was the very perfection of fishing-rods,
and that all other rods should conform as nearly as possi-
ble to said model or typical rod, commensurate with the
manner of service required of them. Upon this principle,
an honest and well-made Trout fly-rod, about eleven feet
in length, and weighing from eight to nine ounces, answers
admirably for Black Bass fly-fishing ; and, fortunately, a
suitable rod of this character can be procured from any
first-class maker ; but I would caution the new hand against
the many cheap rods now in the market. A good rod can
only be obtained at a fair price.

At the same time, I would here enter my protest against
the lightest, and " withiest," Trout fly-rods, weighing from
six to seven ounces, being used or recommended for Black
Bass fishing. Such rods are but toys at the best, and only
admissible for fingerlings, or Trout weighing from a half-
pound downwards. I know that some anglers make a
boast of using such rods, but it is on a par with some
gunners who rush to the extreme in light shot-guns, and
claim that a sixteen or twenty-bore is capable of as good
general execution as the larger gauges. Xow these are
both palpable fallacies, as great as that of " sending a boy
to mill " in the " History of the Four Kings," as many
have found to their cost.

I am a great stickler for extreme lightness in rods when
compatible with strength and action, but there is a certain
limit in weight that must be observed, so as to conform to
and preserve other and equally essential qualities in a good
working rod. No^y, while I will guaranty, in open water,

230

BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

' 2

FISHING-RODS. 231

to land any Black Bass that swims with a well-made six
ounce split bamboo fly-rod, I will not undertake to say
how much time woukl be consumed in the operation; nor
do I envy the general demoralization and used-up condi-
tion of the flexors and extensors of my arms that would
ensue at the close of the contest. With a rod of suitable
weight, the largest Bass can be safely and pleasantly han-
dled, and it is worse than useless to make a toil of a pleas-
ure by using inadequate means.

I have an H. L. Leonard split bamboo fly-rod, weigh-
ing eight ounces, which I find " fills the bill " exactly in
all ordinary Black Bass fly-fishing; but, two years since,
in Florida, I used a twelve feet, twelve ounce ash and
lancewood fly-rod, made by Abbey & Imbrie, or at least
by their predecessors, Andrew Clerk & Co., ten years ago,
which I found none too heavy for the large Bass of the
waters of that State, and, in fact, there were times when
I wished for an additional ounce or two in weig-ht.

A Trout fly-rod, then, weighing eight or nine ounces,
and not more than eleven feet long, is just about right for
ordinary Black Bass fly-fishing; but where the Bass run
large, averaging nearly or quite three pounds, a somewhat
heavier rod, say ten ounces, will be found a more suitable
and pleasanter rod to handle, though the eight ounce rod
will do even here, for one who is an expert fly-fisher, and
who does not mind a little extra straining of the brachial
muscles.

But while an ounce, more or less, hardly seems an ap-
preciable quantity in the abstract, yet when added to or
taken from a fly-rod, like the fraction of an inch as applied
to a man's nose, it makes a very great difference in prac-
tice and reality ; and in the former case, it is better to have

232

BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

lilliilllllliiiilillilli

iil^^!i|illl!lit

iNiiiiiiiiimiiiii

lyi

Heel Plate, Ferrules, and Butt-Cap.
(A. B. Shipley & Son.)

."Rings, Guides, and Tip.
(A. B. Shipley & Son.)

FISHING-RODS. 233

an ounce too much, than a half ounce too little; for,
like the Winchester repeating rifle when tackling a grizzly,
it giv^es one a confidence in his resources which adds ma-
tcMally to the zest of his sport.

In the construction of a Black Bass fly-rod various ma-
terials are employed ; the best and handsomest is, of course,
section bamboo, but as I have before remarked, it is im-
perative to take the greatest care of such rods to preserve
their usefulness. By rough usage or careless handling,
the lashings are apt to become loosened, the varnish worn
off, and the strips to become eventually separated; in which
event the rod is worthless, for it soon goes to pieces.
With proper care, however, and a due attention to the
lashings, and a frequent varnishing of the rod, it will last
a prudent angler his life-time. It is a tool, believe me,
only to be used by an artiste.

But for every day fishing, on all sorts of waters, and
under all circumstances, in the hands of a careful angler
or a rough-and-tumble fisher, a good wooden rod is the
best for service and wear, day in and day out ; and, if
made of good stuff, its action is not excelled, even by the
graceful section bamboo.

My choice of materials for such a rod is ash and lance-
wood, which can not, I think, be excelled for a prime rod.
But others may think differently, and prefer greenheart,
mahoe, or bethabara, all of which woods are said to pro-
duce most satisfactory rods ; and far be it from me to dis-
sent from, or acquiesce in, their opinions, without a prac-
tical knowledge of the working of such rods, for, as I
have before remarked, I have had no personal experience
with these woods.

The fly-rod has the reel-seat at the extreme end of the

20

234 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

butt, and the hand piece, or grip, of course, above it ; for
the click-reel, which is used for fly-fishing, is a reel that is
intended to "take care of itself" in the rendering of the
line, and, therefore, is very properly placed where it is out
of tlie way, and where it adds very much to the balance
and general working of the rod.

The reel-seat in fly-rods is often made entirely of metal
and called a " reel-plate," and which, while much admired
by many, only adds to the weight of the rod, without be-
ing of material service. For myself, I prefer a plain reel-
seat, simply a depression, or groove, cut in the butt of the
rod, with reel-bands, as in the minnow rod. This answers
every purpose, and to my mind there is nothing that can
improve the beauty of a handsomely finished wooden butt;
and on this account, I am also prejudiced against the hand-
piece, or grip, being wound with cord, or ratan. The
self-wood, of which the butt is composed, seems to me to
be the best and most appropriate finish for the grip, both
as regards utility and beauty ; for the cord, or ratan, with
which the grip is usually wound, in fine rods, is extremely
liable to become loosened and worn off;

The wound hand-piece and the metal reel-plate look
very attractive, but are not proof against wear and tear ;
and for my own use, and in accordance with my idea of
the fitness of things, I think the less a rod is encumbered
with fanciful and ornamental appendages, the better. We
should ever bear in mind the original primitive cane fish-
ing-pole, upon which model all rods are founded, more or
less, and remember that simplicity and utility usually go
hand in hand.

A very good friend of mine, with whom I have spent
many pleasant angling days, once owned a very handsome

nSHING-EODS. 236

minnow rod, gotten up to his order in Boston, which was
to eclipse all other rods for style and stunning appearance.
Each piece, from butt to tip, was spirally wound with
ratan strij)s and silk, while the ferrules, reel-bands, reel-
plate, and guides were marvels of brightness and finish ;
but in its action, the rod, of course, was a complete failure.

"My friend always carried with him an extra rod, to be
used " in case of an accident " to his nobby rod. This
extra rod was a short and common, jointed, natural cane
rod, made after the plan of the " Home-made rod," described
on a previous page. And I noticed that the emergency
for using the common rod, always arose very soon after
making a few casts, with a great display and flourish with
the fine rod, or so soon as we were out of sight of other
anglers; for, as my friend often remarked, the flashy rod
was all very well for " dress-parade," but for real work it
" wasn't there; " and the homely, but serviceable cane-rod,
or, as he termed it, "old business," was invariably substi-
tuted.

While asking the reader's pardon for this digression,
which, however, was made more to point a moral than to
adorn a tale, I will simply add that a fishing-rod should
be made for " business," and not for display.

A Black Bass fly-rod should be made in three pieces;
the butt, we will say, of ash, and the second piece and tip
of lancewood, or if the reader please, of greenheart, mahoe,
or bethabara. The ferrules, reel-bands and butt-cap are
of the same pattern as those used on the minnow-rod, and
should be either solid brass, or German silver, without
plating of any kind ; let us have the real thing at all
events, for I despise affectation, or deception, in any matter
or thing whatever. Brass is a good, honest, and bright

236 B0(1K OF THE BLACK BASS.

metal ; will not rust or tarnish, and if it is used at all, let
us use it on its merits; and for decency's sake, avoid the
common practice of plating it with nickel, or, what is
worse, silver — for the plating soon wears off and exposes
the cheat.

Rings, instead of standing guides, are used, as they are
lighter, and on the fly-rod answer just as well ; they are
lashed on with spool-silk by means of small metal strips,
known as " keepers." The rings should graduate in size
from the butt to the tip, and should be of the same metal
as the ferrules. The metal tip of the fly-rod is a single
ring, which is preferable to a solid tip, or the three-ring
style, on account of its extreme lightness, for it will be
remembered that the tip, or top, of a fly-rod is of very
small caliber.

CHAPTER X.

FISHING-REELS.

And to that end, some use a wheel about the middle of the rod, or near
their hand ; which is to be observed better by seeing one of them, tlian by a
large demonstration of words."— Izaak Walton.

A FISHING-REEL is made in accordance Avith the special
service required of it, the objects of said service being
twofold. The first and most important is the proper
delivery of the bait in a manner and at a distance com-
mensurate with the mode of fishing ; and the second is to
play and land the fish after he is hooked, or to reel the
line for another cast. The reel which practically fulfills
these conditions with the greatest ease and facility — in the
method of fishing practiced — is the best reel to use.

The two modes of angling in which the reel is em-
ployed are bait-fishing and fly-fishing, and as the two
methods differ so essentially, they require reels of widely
different functions. Thus in bait-fishing the multiplying
reel is used, while in fly-fishing the click-reel is indis-
pensable.

The multiplying reel must be very rapid in its action so
as to deliver the bait as far as possible at a single cast, the
thumb, meanwhile, controlling the rapid rendering of the
line, so as to prevent back-lashing of the spool ; but in
fly-fishing the line is lengthened gradually, a few feet

( 237 )

238 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

being taken from the reel by the hand before each subse-
quent cast, while the click offers the necessary resistance
to the rendering of the line to permit this to be done
without overrunning.

As the multiplying reel is made wide, so as to allow for
the thumbing of the spool, and as this necessity is not
required in the click-reel, the latter is made quite narrow,
thus permitting the line to be reeled without bunching,
and, at the same time, allow of its being reeled rapidly
enough for all practical purposes, without a multiplying
action ; for the main object of a multiplying-reel, is for
rapidity of action in casting, and not in retrieving the line,
as is often erroneously supposed.

After a fish is hooked, a click-reel answers the purpose
of playing, and landing it, as well as the best triple or
quadruple multiplier made — if not better ; for often a fish
is reeled in by main strength with a rapid multiplier, and
an attempt made to land it before it has been killed on
the rod, thus curtailing the real sport of angling, and at a
great risk to the angler's tackle. I speak of this now, for
I have heard anglers praising a rajnd-working quadruple
multiplying-reel, because they could reel in a fish "so
fast," basing all of its merits upon this one quality; the
desire to get possession of the fish seeming to be paramount
to the real sport of hooking and playing it.

The Click-Keel.

The click-reel is a single-action reel, and, consequently,
is the simplest form of reel, from the fact that the service
required of it is simply a slow and gradual lengthening of
the line with each subsequent cast; the delivery of the fly

FISIIING-REET.S. 239

being accomplished by pulling off from the reel a few
additional feet of the line after each cast, until the desired
or maximum distance is reached, while the click offers just
enough resistance to the rendering of the line to allow this
to be done without confusion or overrunning. The han-
dle, or crank, is connected directly with the axle, or shaft,
and, consequently, "reeling in" the line would be slow
work were it not obviated by the reel being made very
narrow, so that the coil of line upon the shaft enlarges
rapidly, and the reeling is thus accomplished with greater
facility.

The click-reel is placed at the extreme butt of the fly-
rod, below the hand-grip, where it adds much to the
balance and general working of the rod. As the click
regulates the rendering of the line, and as the narrowness
of the reel obviates the necessity for guiding the line in
reeling, it is placed out of the way, at the extreme butt,
and " where it will do the most good." A reel should
always be placed underneath the rod, and not on top, as
is often done.

Click-reels are all constructed upon the same general
principle, but are of various patterns and composed of
various materials, being made of hard rubber, celluloid,
brass, bronze, and German silver; their weight depends on
the material used, and the angler has a large assortment
of styles and prices to select from. Any good Trout click-
reel is suitable for Black Bass fly-fishing, and can be
furnished by any of the first-class dealers.

In the choice of a click-reel, the angler should select
the lightest, when it is compatible with strength, and one
in which there is the least probability of fouling the line
on any prominent points, as projecting screws and caps,

240

BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

The " Abbey" Click-Reel.— No. 4.
(Abbey & Iinbrie.)

German Silver Click-Reel.

(Conroy, Bissett & Malleson.)

FISHING-REEI.S. 2^J

unprotected handles, etc. Metal reels are the strongest,
and not so liable to injury as rubber or celluloid, in case
of accidentally dropping, or striking them against rocks,
etc.; though the latter are much lighter, and with ordinary
care are just as serviceable.

There has been a very marked improvement in click-
reels during the past few years, the manufacturers seeming
to vie with each other to produce the lightest, neatest,
comeliest, and most serviceable reel.

Abbey & Imbrie make a superb reel, the "Abbey,''
composed of hard rubber, with German silver spool, rim
and fittings ; it is extremely light and has a protected
handle to prevent fouling of the line in casting, and is
first-class in every respect. Nos. 3 and 4, the latter being
the smaller, are the proper sizes. The " Imbrie " reel,
also made by this firm, although a multiplier — and a
most excellent one, by the way — has an adjustable click
which allows of its being used also for fly-fishing. And
the angler who is the fortunate possessor of one of these
reels, Nos. 4 or 5, can use it in Black Bass fishing for
either his minnow-rod or fly-rod.

Mr. C. F. Orvis, of Manchester, Vermont, has patented,
and manufactures, a simple, durable, and inexpensive
click-reel. It is very narrow, consequently takes up line
quite rapidly, while the frame and disks of the spool are
freely perforated, which renders it quite light, and assists
very much in drying the line, and in keeping it free from
sand and grit. Its low price, brings a good reel within
the reach of the most impecunious angler.

Wm. Mills & Son's (7 Warren Street, New York) reels
are unexcelled, either brass, German silver or rubber; they

are fitted with protecting bands to prevent the line from

21

242

BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

German Silver Click-Reel.— 40 yards.
(Wm. Mills & 8on.)

Pat. June 12, 1877.

The Leonard Click-Reel.
(Wm. Mills & Son.)

The Orvis Click-Reel.
(Charles F. Orvis.)

FISHING-REELS. 243

catching on the handle. Their thirty or forty yards reels
are the correct sizes for Black Bass fly-fishing.

The " Leonard reel," sold by this firm, is probably the
lightest metal click-reel manufactured, and holds a great
deal of line for its size, being of good width. It also has
a flush handle to prevent fouling of the line ; two and a
half inch diameter is the preferred size for Black Bass
angling.

Conroy, Bissett & Malleson, of New York, A. B. Ship-
ley & Son, of Philadelphia, and Bradford & Anthony, of
Boston, also furnish the best reels and other tackle for
fly-fishing. I think it but simple justice that all of these
houses, who are by an honorable competition doing so much
for the angler in the way of producing the most elegant
and suitable tackle, should be brought to the notice of the
angling fraternity.

On this point a veteran angler, the editor of the Rich-
mond (Va.) Whig, becoming " impressed with the vast
amount of industry, skill, talent, enterprise and genius,
and philanthropy (emphatically) devoted to this task of
supplying the needs and luxuries, and augmenting the
pleasures of the sporting community," further says :
" We say philanthropy, with emphasis — for those who thus
toil for the enjoyment and happiness of their fellow-beings
can not be enemies of their kind. But admit that self
enters as an element of the motive, in an enlarged sense,
it may be truly afiirmed that self, if not a virtue in itself,
is next kin to it, and is the basis and promj;ter of all the
virtues."

Multiplying Reels.
The multiplying reel is a decided improvement on the

244 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

old single-action English reel or winch. It is made of
metal or hard rubber, and of various styles or sizes, from
a Striped Bass-reel to a Perch-reel. In shape and con-
struction it differs necessarily from the click-reel, having a
different office to i)erform, or rather the same object — the
delivery of the bait — to perform in a different manner.
Being intended for natural bait-fishing, it requires an easy-
running and freely-rendering action in order to deliver the
bait as far as possible at a single cast. As there is no
click to control the running off of the line, the thumb
must be used for this purpose, by effecting a gentle and
uniform pressure upon the spool, and for this reason the
multiplier is made much wider than the click-reel, or of
the barrel or drum shape.

In its construction, a small cog or spur wheel is placed
at one extremity of the axis or shaft, into which a larger
cog-wheel is fitted, and to the latter is attached the handle
or crank. One revolution of the handle produces two or
more revolutions of the central shaft. The reel most gen-
erally known and used is the " New York Multiplier,"
which is manufactured for the trade in large quantities,
with the retailer's name stamped on one end. It is called,
by some, the " balance reel," from the fact, I presume, that
it has a balanced handle, which, by some, is thought to add
to the rapid working of the reel; but this fancied advan-
tage exists in the imagination only — a simple crank handle
is better.

As with the click-reel, there has been great improve-
ments made in the multiplying reel within a few years
past. Most of the manufacturers have given special
attention to reels of this character, more especially for
Black Bass fishing, and the result has been most grati-

FISHING-REELS. 245

fying to the anglinjij fraternity. It is now an easy matter
to procure a first-class reel at a moderate price, consider-
ing the admirable manner in which they are gotten up;
for, by comparison with the click-reel, the former is about
double in price, and this is necessarily so, on account of
the great diiference in construction of the two reels.

Among the many excellent multiplying reels now manu-
factured, the "Frankfort Reel" still takes the lead, and
is the reel par excellence for Black Bass angling. It is
known among expert anglers, in various portions of the
country, as the "Meek," "Meek & Milam," "Frankfort,"
and "Kentucky" reel. It is now made exclusively by
B. C. Milam, of Frankfort, Kentucky; and, as it is not
so universally known as its merits deserve, I will give a
brief history of it :

Some thirty years ago, there being a demand among the
anglers of Kentucky and Ohio for a better reel than was
furnished by the trade, Mr. Meek, a watchmaker, of
Frankfort, Kentucky — to whom Mr. Milam was then an
apprentice — determined to produce a reel which would
meet the requirements and solicitations of his fishing
friends; so, after considerable study and many experi-
ments, the " Frankfort Reel " was produced, as perfect
then as it is to-day. Mr. Milam was soon afterward taken
into partnership by Mr. Meek, and the firm of Meek &
Milam soon became famous throughout the West for their
excellent reel. The demand continued to increase, until
they found a ready sale for all they could manufacture.

The reel is made by hand, from the finest materials, and
as carefully and correctly in its fittings as the movement
of a watch. The bearings and pivots are of the finest
temper, and the -entire reel is as perfect in workmanship^

246

BOOK (JF THE ELACK BASS.

The Frankfort Reel.— No. 3.
(B. C. Milam, Frankfort, Ky.)

The

Imbrie" Black Bass Keel— No. 3.
(Alibey & Imbrie.)

FISHING-REELS. 247

and as finely adjusted, as is possible for skill to render it.
Contrary to a current opinion, this reel is not more com-
plicated than the ordinary multiplying reel, and contains
but the same number of wheels, viz: two; but, by a pe-
culiar construction of the two wheels, it multiplies four
times, while the ordinary reel multiplies but twice. It
runs so perfectly and smoothly that a smart stroke of the
finger upon the handle will cause it to make about fifty
revolutions, and this without a balance handle.

It is made with or without an alarm or click, and a drag
or rubber; and, where one or both of these adjuncts are
used, it does not at all complicate the working of the reel,
as they are operated by small sliding disks on the side of
the reel, and are not in the way in the least. The reel is,
in fact, so simple and perfect in its details, that it has not
been improved upon since it was first invented. They are
made of German silver or brass, in six sizes, No. 6 being
the largest. The best sizes for Black Bass fishing are
Nos. 2 and 3.

The cost of this reel is necessarily high — in comparison
with ordinary reels — from its mode of construction and
materials employed, but it will last a life-time with ordi-
nary care. There are reels that have been in use for thirty
years — among the first ones made — which are as good as
new to-day. I can not express my admiration for this
reel more strongly, or truly, than by affirming that its
invention has been as great a boon to the angler as the
split bamboo rod ; in fact, they are " boon " companiop^is.

It is as great an improvement on all other multiplying
reels, as they are on the old single-action English winch.
With it, an angler can cast a minnow from thirty to forty
yards w^ith the greatest ease, though it is necessary that he

248

BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

The " Conroy " Multiplying Keel.— No. 3>^.
(Conroy, Bisseil & Malloson.)

The "Conrov" Black Bass Reel— No. :!'^.

Combined Multiplying ami Click-Reel.

(Conroy, Bissett & Malleson.)

FISHING-REELS. 249

should be quite dextrous in the art of using a multiplier,
and au fait in the matter of controlling the rendering of
the line with the thumb, otherwise the extreme rapidity
of this reel's action will get him into trouble by its over-
running or back-lashing, and the consequent tangling of
the line upon the spool.

But, in justice to the reel, I will say to those who can
not cast without tangling or snarling the line, or who can
not reel the line evenly upon the spool, that they must
look for the fault in themselves, and not in the reel. 3Ie
judice, I consider it the best reel in the world. The
"alarm" is intended for an alarm only, and should not be
used as a click to retard the rapidity of the reel's action,
for this it can do to a very limited extent only, and that to
the eventual detriment of the reel.

As these reels are mostly made to order, I would advise
the angler who designs procuring one to order it made
with the spring of the alarm stiif enough to act as a
"click," in which case the reel will answer for either bait
or fly-fishing ; and, in my opinion, they should all be made
so, considering their high price. The " alarm " originated
in the days of heavy rods and lazy anglers, when, by stick-
ing the butt of the rod in the bank (there often being a
spike in it for this purpose), the angler could lie under the
shade of a tree until the singing of the alarm gave notice of
the biting of a Bass. It has outlived its usefulness, and
should either be dispensed with entirely, or changed to a
click. I would further advise the placing of the handle
of the reel next to the reel-plate, instead of opposite to
it (as Mr. Milam usually affixes it), for obvious reasons.

Abbey & Imbrie make a remarkably fine reel especially
for Black Bass angling, and which they style the " Imbrie"

250 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

reel. It is constructed with a hard rubber frame, German-
silver spool and fittings, steel pivot and cap, center action,
and with an adjustable click. It is very light and of a
graceful and practicable shape, and multiplies three times.
By using the click it answers well for fly-fishing.

It is a very easy-running and rapid-working reel, being
second, only, in this respect to the famous Frankfort reel,
though unlike the latter, is not so likely to overrun, and,
on this account, is to be preferred by many anglers, who
find it difficult to control, with the thumb, the very free
action of that reel. Besides it is furnished at about half
the price of the Frankfort reel, and is, withal, lighter.
Nos. 3 and 4 are the best sizes for the Black Bass angler.

No Reel.

Those who, from any cause, can not manage a muhiply-
ing reel, might adopt the "Thames" style of bait-easting,
which is much in vogue in England, in which the reel is
dispensed with. The line is made fast to the butt of the
rod, and carried through the guides or rings. AYhen ready
for a cast, the line is pulled back through the guides, and
laid in coils at the feet of the angler, leaving twelve or
fifteen feet of line hanging from the tip of the rod. Our
angler then grasps the line a few feet from the sinker and
bait, gives it a few rapid whirls around his head, and casts
it as far as he can, the rod in the meantime being held
firmly in the left hand, and pointing toward the water.
Long casts can be made in this manner, and the line re-
trieved more rapidly than by the aid of any reel, but to
the expert reel angler the game would not be worth the
candle.

fishing-reels. 251

Position of the Reel ox the Rod.

In order to allow the thumb to be used iu controlling
the cast, a multiplying reel should never be placed less
than six inches from the extreme butt of the rod, and
should be so placed as to be underneath when reeling up
the line. I am aware that some prefer it on top, but the
former mode is preferable for the following reasons : The
weight of the reel naturally takes it under the rod, enabling
the rod to be held steadier when reeling the line, or play-
ing the fish ; the strain of the line falls upon the guides,
causing a uniform working of the rod ; the line is more
easily reeled up, and it was intended to be used in this
manner.

The left hand should grasp the rod immediately over the
reel, the thumb and forefinger embracing the rod above
the reel and as close to it as possible, the ring and little
fingers clasping the under surface of the reel, while the
middle finger is left free to guide the line on the spool, and
prevent bunching. I have noticed that all anglers who
prefer to have the butt of the rod extending a foot or more
below the reel, always use the reel on top, and when reel-
ing in a fish, they invariably rest the butt against the
stomach.

CHAPTER XI.

FISHING-LINES.

" I will lose no time, but give you a little direction how to make and order
your lines, and to color the hair of whicli you make your lines, for that is
very needful to be known of an angler."— Izaak Walton.

No doubt but many of my readers have often wondered,
as I have done, where all the fine fishing-lines were made.
Inquiries of the dealers failed to elicit any definite in-
formation, only such answers being obtained, as "We make
them ourselves," or, " They are manufactured expressly for
us," or, "They are imported for our trade."

There has ever seemed to be some mystery connected
with it, though why, I can not imagine. The real manu-
facturers are certainly not generally known outside of
the trade, and their goods are seldom marked with their
own names. I do not remember ever to have seen an ad-
vertisement of a fish-line manufacturer. Perhaps it is not
necessary, as the angler is supplied through the dealer, and
the wholesale dealers are comparatively few.

Thinking that an account of one of the best manufiic-
tories of fishing-lines in this country, if not in the world,
would not prove uninteresting, I reproduce the following
description of the factory of Henry Hall & Sons, at High-
land Mills, Orange County, New York, from the New
York Times of June 6, 1880 :—
(252)

FISHING-LINES. 253

How Fish-Lines are Made.

American fish-lines are tlie best in tlie world, because we use the
most perfect machinery and mateiials in their manufacture. There
are in this country five or six large establishments devoted exclu-
sively to this production. They represent a capital of about $250,000,
and produce about $100,000 worth of lines per year. The fish-line
is an object of contempt to a certain class of closet philosophers, but
its production at least employs money and brains with the same
earnestness that marks our manufacture of more weighty objects.
The largest fish-line factory in the world is the Highland Mills,
Orange County, in this State, and if our anglers were only capable of
boasting alittle they mightbragof our beating the world in the quality
as well as in the quantity of our lines. In visiting this establishment
I learned many interesting facts about the materials and the processes
of making fish-lines. We all feel a certain awe and curiosity about
the slender, tapered line that flies through the air so gracefully, yet
has the amazing strength to hold a Salmon, a Trout, or a Bass in his
most frantic efforts to escape. And the feeling is well justified, for
not only is a fine line a proper object for respect and interest, but
many of the processes of its creation are secrets veiled from the eye
of even the elect. Lines are made of three substances, either cotton,
linen, or silk, and they are either twisted or braided. Tlie twisted
lines may be made by hand, but braided lines are always made by
machines devised especially for the purpose. For fine lines, only the
finest, strongest, and longest fibers can be used. The selection of the
material is, therefore, made with great care. It is spun to order in
sizes to suit different kinds of lines. The bleaching of the yarn has
to be very carefully done to prevent any loss of strength by chemical
action on the fiber, and only vegetable dyes are used in coloring.

In the storeroom are piles of flax in skeins, which has been spun
to order in Ireland, France, Belgium, and Germany. A variety of
flax is needed, because that of one country is most desirable for its
durability and that of another for its strength, so that the union of
several kinds of thread in a line gives it greater general excellence.
The exact size must be maintained throughout the thread. And the
exact amount of twist, varying from two to nine turns to the inch,
must be given ; for if the threads be either too loosely or too tightly

254 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

twisted the strength of the line is impaired. The cotton is spun ex-
pressly from selected stock in this country, and the silk, also, is spun
here. The best silk isTsatlee machine twist; the genuineness of the
stock can not be doubted, if judged by the foreign chai-acter of its
tickets :

"Hung yu Silk Hong. Yueliee chop. By selecting No. 1, Fine re-reeled
Tsatlee silk. When obliged to Merchants best owing their regards, please to
nolice carefully of our sign, are without mistaken. This chop is myself reeled
true Tsatlee Thown Silks."

More can not be asked. This silk is spun at silk factories and de-
livered on bobbins. The fineness of some of it may be judged by the
fact that 3,200 yards of a thread weighs only one ounce, and yet the
threads run sometimes 2,000 yards without a break. The grass lines,
sold under the names of Japanese grass, sea grass, and catty grass,
are all male of raw silk. The yarns of flax are wound on bob-
bins, and those of cotton are " beamed " or wound on a cylinder in
such a way that they can be run off it without tangling.

The twisted lines are made in a "walk," a narrow shed about 400
feet long. At the head of the walk are two machines, driven by steam.
Tliey consist of pulleys, with long ropes for belts running off to the foot
of the shed ; also of a lot of spindles, turning very rapidly, and lines
riwining overhead along the walk enable men at any point to move
levers or stop and start the machinery at will. Two cars run on tracks
down the walk ; they carry the beams or cylinders of thread or the bob-
bins. The operator places the bobbins on pins on the cars, so that the
threads may unwind; the car is brought up to the machine; he
gathers up the threads in groups of three, and ties each group to a
sphidle in the machine. When all the 24 spindles are furnished
with threads, he starts the machine, the spindles turn and twist each
group of three threads into a strand ; at the same time the car moves
slowly along to unwind the threads from the bobbins as fast as the
twist takes them up. The operator walks behind or beside the car
to watch the yarns, remove lumps, and impurities from them, or to
break off defective portions of a thread. The car at intervals passes
under a frame hanging over the track ; this frame is provided with
wire hoops or fingers that descend automatically and hook under the
Btrands after the car has passed, to sustain them, so that the weight
of the long strings may not interfere with their twisting evenly in

FTSTIING-LTNES. 255

all parts. Bj' the time the car has reached the foot of the walk each
of the 24 strands has received the proper twist, so many turns to
the inch. The strands are then gathered up in groups of three and
tied to spindles on a tender or second car at the foot of the walk.
This tender is operated by rope-belts from the machine at the head
of the walk. When the strands are secured to the eight spindles of
the tender the car starts back to the head of the walk, leaving the
tender to twist the strands into cords. It follows them up, very
slowly, to allow the cords to contract in length as they are twisted.

If this twisting of the cord as a whole were all the twist given, the
cord would only be a string, the strands would be simply collected
in a round form, and would have but little power to resist an un-
twisting tendency when wet or cut into pieces. But after a strand
is formed, if some additional twist be given it, the fibers are bent and
stretched until they acquire a strong reactionary force. They seek
continually to straighten and contract themselves, and if the ends of
the strand be kej^t from untwisting Avhile it is given some slack,
the strand will double up on itself, and then twist in the opposite di-
rection from tliat of the first twist. In the cords thus formed the
strands have lost as much of their twist as was required to form the
cord ; hence, they have lost the most of their reactionary, spiral
tendency. But if the strands be given some additional twist to com-
pensate for this loss, while the whole line is given its twist, the re-
actionary force of each strand will make it intertwine closely with
the others, and hold them together in a compact, permanent twist.

A fish-line diflfers from a string in having just this additional twist
of the strands. For this object, the machine at the head of the walk
continues to twist the strands, while the tender twists the line. The
line is given a little superfluous twist merely for the sake of forcing
the strands to assume a smooth, compact service ; some of this super-
fluous twist comes out when the line is wet, but the line can not be
opened or untwisted without removing and untwisting each strand.
It is readily seen that the amount of twist has a great effect on the
strength of a line, for too little twist fails to bind the fibers together,
and too much subjects them to uneven and destructive strain.
Hence, machinery, by securing the utmost accuracy, makes the most
perfect lines in this respect. And it also makes them rapidly and
cheaply. If the threads were perfectly even and clean the lines

256 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

would be perfect. But impurities and irregularities are unavoidable
in even the best yarns, and the operator can not always see tliese nor
take the time to remove all he perceives. Formerly, lines of 600
feet were twisted all in one piece, but in so long a line the amount of
twist was necessarily uneven in diffijrent parts. Hence, it is now
considered a bettfer method to make long lines by joining 300-feet
lengths by what is known among sailors as the " long splice."

Hand-made lines are still more perfect than those twisted by any
machine. The machine, of course, secures the utmost accuracy in
tiie twist ; but the hand, through the delicate sense of the touch, de-
tects imperfections in the thread that are invisible to the operator
of the machine. The man who makes the Cuttyhunk and other
hand-made lines carries nine bobbins of silk or linen ou a frame
hanging in front of him. Having fastened the threads in thi'ces to
spindles at the head of the walk, he walks slowly backward while the
threads pass between his fingers and are twisted into a strand. He
feels every thread as it goes, and detects with surjjrising certainty
every buncli, knot, or weak place ; he picks or bites off the bunches,
or stops the spindles by pulling a cord at his side, and takes out any
defective part of the thread, and joins the ends again by twisting, not
by tying them. When the three strands are sufficiently twisted, he
ties them together to a little swivel on a string drawing a drag-weight,
to allow for the contraction of the line. He passes the three strands
thi'ough grooves on opposite sides of a cone called the " top," and
as he walks back to the head of the walk and moves the top along
the strands, the grooves allow the continued twisting of the strands
to pass by the " top " and unite them at its apex, wliile the swivel
allows the line to be twisted up by the strands. Thus, although the
twist of hand-made lines is not quite so uniform as that of machine-
made lines, yet the former are the better in having more perfect
threads.

The braided line is the most perfect of all. No inferior threads are
used in its manufacture, and the machines secure a very uniform
tension of the strands. The cotton, linen, or silk threads are wound
on bobbins that are mounted on a small table. The table is fur-
nished with serpentine slots, through which the bobbins travel, and
cross one another's course in such a way as to pass now outside, now
inside, of one another, and thus weave or braid the strands in a reg-

FISHING-LINES. 257

ular manner. If a strand break, the bobbins all stop, and delicate
weights, sustained by the strands as they are braided, give them a
uniform tension. From eight to sixteen strands are put in a line,
each strand being composed of three threads. As the line is formed
it is reeled up, so that the braiding is not done in a long walk, but
in a room filled with compact machines clicking like looms. One
girl tends several lines, picking off with nippers any lint or bunch,
and removing poor strands. It is real satisfaction to an angler to
see such beautiful silks going into a line. It looks like braiding
cobwebs; but these fine threads, evenly and compactly braided,
make a fine line of amazing strength. The tapered lines are all
braided, because if one part of a twisted line be smaller than the rest,
that part yields to the twisting force and gets too much twist. The
tapering is done by simply dropping out a strand at regular intervals;
but the machine has to be readjusted each time to secure a regular
braid. Fine braided lines hitherto have often been weak, from de-
fective manufacture ; but recent improvements in the Highland
Mills in the methods of working up the fiber have produced a line
of wonderful strength for its size. Thus, I found that although one
of the threads of a line would lift but 14 ounces, yet the line of 8
threads, braided to a diameter of 1-40 of an inch, would lift 9^ to 10
pounds. The union of the threads in a twist or braid seems to aug-
ment their strength about 30 per cent. This fine line, 100 yards
long, weighs but 150 grains ; it requires 934 yards of prepared twist
to make it, and as each thread or twist contains three strands, the
lines contains 2,802 yards of strands.

The celebrated Cuttyhunk line is made of four different kinds of
flax, Irish, French, Belgian, and German, spun to order for this pur-
pose. Line No. 9, having 12 threads in a diameter of about 1-30 of
an inch, lifts 25 pounds. They are all hand-made twisted lines, so
are the various grass lines and the relaid grass lines.

The finishing of lines is generally done by some secret process that
each house wishes to monopolize. The fine lines are soaked in vari-
ous compounds of oils and gums to fill them with a preservative
water-proof substance. The well-known enamel finish gives the line a
glossy surface that excludes the water and keeps the line of a uniform
weight and stiffness in casting, and also makes it run very smoothly
through the rings or guides of a rod. Of course, there are many
22 ,

258 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

inferior lines made up by second-rate factories ; but it is difficult to
imagine that cotton, linen, or silk can be better put together than
they are now by our first-class establishments. Perhaps some better
fiber will be discovered. The inner bark of the alloa tree was made
into lines many years ago ; and they were found to be almost imper-
ishable even under the most unreasonable neglect. But the material
is too costly for general use.

The Fored and Stream has this to say concerning this
manufactory :

This establishment, since its introduction of machinery, and its
transfer to more commodious quarters at "Highland Mills," possi-
bly turns out more goods than all others of a like business in the
State combined, and of such superior excellence as to defy com-
petition.

The Henry Hall goods are made the standard by the trade.
Every sort, kind and description of fish-line is made at this now
world-wide renowned factory, as the Hall goods swept the deck
at the Centennial Show, and wherever they have come in compe-
tition with foreign goods of decided reputation, the Henry Hall
goods — cotton, linen and silk — have at all times asserted their dis-
tinct superiority.

Reel Lines for Bait-fishing.

The perfect line for Bkick Bass bait-fishing is yet in the
future. The best manufactured at present is the smallest
size — letter G, or No. 5 — hard-braided raw silk line ; and
if it were made, say, of just one-half the caliber, and as
tightly and closely braided, and as firm and hard as the
twisted, or laid Japanese grass line, it would be all that
could de desired for a bait line. I have great hopes that
a line of this description will soon be made, as I have in-
vited the attention of Henry Hall & Sons to this subject.

A bait line for casting a minnow should, in the first

FISHING-LINES. 259

place, be composed of the very best material, which, in
this case, is raw silk. It should be of very small caliber,
the smallest that can be made consistent with strength, and
raw silk fulfills this condition better than any other mate-
rial. It should be very hard, compact, and closely braided.
These conditions secure a line that renders freely and easily,
is quite elastic, and at the same time absorbs but little water,
and will not kink or snarl in casting. The line should,
moreover, be tinted some suitable color, to render it as
nearly invisible as possible, for it must be remembered that
we can not use a gut leader in casting the minnow.

The braided or plaited raw-silk line, as now made, ful-
fills all of the above conditions, except in caliber, and the
manufacturers above referred to assured me that it could
be made one-half less in size, were there a demand for
such a line. There has been no inquiry for such a line,
because it is known that there is none to be had ; but the
Black Bass anglers, who fish the streams of the South and
West, almost universally use the relaid Japanese grass-
line (which is made of raw silk), nothwithstanding its
kinking propensities, for in every other particular it is a
good line. For lake-fishing, where the Bass are larger, the
braided silk and linen lines are used almost exclusively.

The best line, then, we w-ill say, is the braided, or plaited
raw-silk line — letter G, or No. 5 — for ordinary fishing; but
w^here the Bass average fully three pounds, the next largest
.size — letter F, or No. 4 — may be used, though I would
advise the smaller line even here to be employed in prefer-
ence. Raw silk lines require the greatest care to preserve
their usefulness. They should be carefully dried after
use, as soon thereafter as possible, for without this caution
they soon become weak and rotten. And, moreover, a

260

BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

SIZES OF LINES.

n ^

12 3 4

Taper "Waterproof Braided Silk Lines.

BS'The smaller illustration of each Cut represents the "Taper" point; the

larger, the body of tlie Line.

5 4 3 2 1

Braided Linen and Hard Braided Linen and Braided Cotton.

G

F

E

D

C

B

Oiled Silk, Braided Silk.
fiSTThe above cuts are the exact sizes of the lines they represent. They ap-
pear, on paper, somewhat larger, as the cuts are " flat," while the Lines, from
being "round," appear smaller to the eye.

(Conroy, Bissett & Malleson.)

FISHING-LINES. 261

reel-line, for bait-fishing, should never be waterproofed
■with any preparation, or by any means whatever, for this
can only be done with great detriment to the line, as re-
gards casting, besides increasing its caliber.

Next best to the raw silk-line is the braided boiled silk-
line, or, as sometimes called, the dressed silk-line. This is
a good line when plaited hard and closely, but most of
them are too loosely braided; in which case they absorb
Avater quite freely, which develops an annoying propensity
of clinging to the rod in casting, and interferes somewhat
with the free rendering of the line. They are made of
good stock, however, and are quite strong, and nicely
tinted. Sizes F and G, or Nos. 4 and 5, are the only
ones to he used; and, for ordinary Bass-fishing, the lat-
ter, or smallest — letter G, or No. 5 — is the proper size.
The boiled silk-line should be as well cared for, and as
carefully dried, after use, as the raw silk-line, and for the
same reasons.

The braided linen-line is a very good one, in one re-
spect better than the silk, being quite hard and closely
plaited, but the caliber is too large. The smallest size
now made is too great for a reel-line for Black Bass bait-
fishing. Where the Bass run very large, however, as in
lake-fishing, or in the extreme South, the smallest size
may be employed with satisfaction. It will last longer
than the silk-line, and will bear rougher and more careless
usage. It is much heavier, however, and is not so elastic;
and, therefore, not so desirable a line, in these respects, as
the silk-line. The only size to use is G, or 5.

The above are the only lines that I can recommend for
bait-fishing for Black Bass, where much casting is prac-
ticed, for braided lines are the only lines that will not

262

BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

Braided Linen Keel-Line.
(A. B. Shipley & Son.)

Twisted Silk-Line.
(A. B. Shipley & Son.)

FISHING-LINES. 263

kink and curl. No twisted or cable-laid line can be profit-
ably employed for this purpose, on account of this kink-
ing propensity, which, to the angler, is a source of great
trouble, vexation and perplexity; and there is no method
by which the kink can be entirely removed or eradicated
from twisted lines. Some anglers maintain that this kink-
ing quality can be taken out of a line by trailing it in the
water behind a boat, without sinker or hook; but this is a
delusion and a snare, for after casting a line a few times
in succession that has been treated in this manner for
hours, it will kink and snarl as badly as ever, and this is
to be naturally expected, from the mode of manufacturing
such lines. It is unreasonable, moreover, to expect a
twisted line to perform the functions of a braided line, for
this it can not do.

Use small-sized lines; they are strong enough with a
pliant rod. A line that will hold up two pounds, dead
w^eight, will land the largest Black Bass that swims, when
used with a proper rod. Indeed, I have often used a line^
which, toward the end of the season, when tested, would
scarcely hold a pound dead weight, but which would safely
land the largest Bass, or even Pickerel of fifteen pounds
or more.

Rod-Lines.

The twisted line has its proper place in fishing, and
sometimes answers a good purpose, as I will now explain.
There are many anglers who, from choice or necessity,
dispense with the reel in Black Bass fishing. Oftentimes
the character of the stream is such that a reel can not be
used to advantage ; for instance, on streams that are nar-
row, and much choked with snags, roots, and other obstruc-

264 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

tions, that preclude the playing of a fish, a reel is not nec-
essary, for the fish must be killed within a few feet of where
hooked, and must, of a necessity, be landed as soon as
possible.

In this case, a long, light, and j^liable — but not too
limber — rod must be used, say a natural c-ane-})<)le, twelve
or even fifteen feet long, with the finest and smallest line
that can be procured, which, in this case, is the twisted
silk-line. This line is made of very small caliber, nicely
tinted, of a suitable color, and is quite strong. It is manu-
factured by Henry Hall & Sons, in connected lengths of
fifteen feet, which is about the right length of line for this
kind of angling. The sizes run from No. 1, the smallest,
up to No. 5, the largest. The smallest, or No. 1, is the
size to use, always, when fishing on streams ; but for pond
or lake fishing, where Pickerel abound, No. 2 or 3 may
be substituted.

Next to the silk-line, in order of merit, comes the twisted
or relaid sea-grass line, domestic or Japanese, the latter
being the best. They are numbered in the same way
as the silk-line. No. 1 being the smallest size, and the pref-
erable size to use. Many anglers, notably in the border
and Southern States, use the sea-grass line for a reel-line,
in preference to all others, because it is strong, of small
caliber, quite hard and elastic; and, as they do not cast
very frequently, it answers pretty well, but, as stated be-
fore, will kink when much casting is practiced. The sea-
grass line is both twisted and relaid, the latter being the
best, as it does not kink quite so badly as the twisted line.
In relaid lines, the strands are three in number, each strand
being twisted from left to right, and the strands twisted
together in the opposite direction, or from right to left.

FISHING-LINES. 265

On the score of economy, twisted flax and cotton lines
are sometimes used for rod-lines; but they are beneath the
notice of the Black Bass angler, as the sizes are too large
to be used for this purpose.

Reel-Lines for Fly-fishing.

The reel-line for fly-fishing must necessarily be heavier
than the line used in bait-fishing, the greater weight of
the former being required to cast objects so light and deli-
cate as artificial flies ; while in the case of the small and
light bait-line, the minnow, swivel and sinker give the
required weight for casting. Increased weight is ob-
tained by increase of the caliber of the line, so a fly-lino
is consequently of a larger size than a bait-line.

Formerly the twisted or plaited hair, and hair and silk-
lines were employed altogether by the best anglers for fly-
lines, but they have been almost entirely superseded by
the really elegant tapered and enameled waterproof braided
silk-line. The latter is the line jjo/- excellence for all kinds
of fly-fishing, being smooth, round, polished and perfectly
waterproof, and is just stiff" and heavy enough to favor a
perfectly straight cast, without looping or kinking, quali-
ties that are peculiarly essential to this mode of angling.
Those who have used the old-fashioned fly-lines, are pre-
pared to speak feelingly and appreciatively concerning the
great superiority and excellence of this line.

They are made in several sizes for Salmon, Black Bass
and Trout fishing ; are very strong and serviceable, and,
for Black Bass angling, can be purchased in lengths of
from twenty-five to thirty yards. They are usually fash-
ioned with a regular and gradual taper for several yards to
23

266 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

the fly-end, the fly-end being only about one-half the cali-
ber of the reel-end. Hall & Son's lines, which is the best
way, taper both ways from the middle. They are usually
stained of a greenish-olive hue, which harmonizes well
with the tints of the water, sky and foliage. From
twenty-five to thirty yards is the right length, and the
size should be either E or F, which corresponds with Nos.
3 and 4, some dealers designating the sizes by letters,
others by numerals.

The silk and hair-line is still used to some extent, but
it is open to many objections. At best, it is a weak line,
and soon rots and becomes worthless by use, even with
good care. The ends of the hairs become frayed, and
separate after a time, and are a constant source of annoy-
ance, by sticking out at various places on the line, pre-
venting it from working smoothly and freely through the
rings of the rod. When used for Black Bass angling, the
size suitable for Trout fishing will answer, and the length
should be about thirty yards.

Next best to the tapered enameled silk-line is the oiled
braided silk-line ; though this is not tapered, it is a good,
strong and useful line, and is used by many anglers in
preference to all others. It is tinted of a similar shade to
the enameled line, and altogether is a very satisfactory fly-
line, being heavy enough, and, withal, cheaper than the
tapered line. Letters E and F, or Nos. 3 and 4, are suit-
able sizes.

Next in order is the braided linen-line, either water-
proof or plain. Where economy in price is the necessary
object, this is the best line to select, though the angler
should bear in mind that the best is the cheapest, for he
knows full well that to no other class of goods does this

FISHING-LINES. 267

maxim apply with more force than to fishing-tackle. This
line is strong, firm and round, and is capable of long and
hard service, if proper care is taken to dry it thoroughly
always after using. It is well adapted for making a nice,
straight cast, and will not curl or kink. It is usually
stained a light shade of slate, or a grayish drab. Letter
F, or No. 4, is about the right size.

Some fly-fishers use the ordinary braided raw or boiled
silk-lines, which, while being the very best lines for bait-
fishing, are not so well adapted for fly-lines, on account of
their light weight; the medium sizes, however, answer
tolerably well. Letter E, or No. 3, is the correct size,
when used for Black Bass fly-fishing.

All fishing-lines that are not absolutely waterproof
should be carefully dried after use; and even waterproof
lines would be much benefited by an airing previous to
putting away. Even the best lines become weak and
worthless through want of proper and judicious treat-
ment. It is impossible to make a line that is indestruc-
tible, or proof against mildew or rot, though many anglers
seem to think to the contrary, judging from the shiftless
and reprehensible manner in which they use them ; then,
when the line fails, they blame the manufacturer.

Hand-Lines for Trolling.

There are many persons who can not, or will not, use a
fishing-rod, but who greatly enjoy trolling with the hand-
line and spoon-bait for Black Bass. For the benefit of
these unfortunates, I will describe the proper line to be
employed for this mode of fishing.

The only line. that is suitable for the purpose is a braided

268

BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

Braided Linen Trolling-Line.

(A. B. Shipley & Sou.)

FISHING-LINES. 269

or plaited linen or cotton line, size C or D (1 or 2). Such
lines are large enough to preclude cutting the hands, and
they will not kink or twist, qualities that are peculiarly,
essential for this kind of fishing. A twisted line, of any
material, is inadmissible here, for the revolving of the
spoon, if a swivel is not used, will cause even a braided
line to twist on itself and kink ; therefore, one, or even
tw^o, swivels should always be attached to, and near the
^spinning-bait. A trolling hand-line should be from
seventy-five to a hundred yards long.

CHAPTER XII.

SILK-WOKM GUT.

"But if you can attain to angle with one hair, — you shall have more rises,
and catch more fish." — Izaak Waltox.

The material of which leaders and snells are composed
is a mystery to many anglers. It is eminently fitted for
the purposes mentioned, being as nearly invisible as any
substance can well be, and at the same time is quite
strong and impermeable to water.

It is really the "fluid silk" of the silk-worm, drawn out
into a continuous length. This fluid silk, which in its
natural state resembles colorless varnish, is contained in
long cylindrical sacks, many times the length of the worm,
and which are capable of being unfolded by immersion in
water, and the fluid silk can be drawn out into threads,
longer or shorter, coarse or fine, as may be desired.

Mr. Wm. Gray, of Davenport, Iowa, in an article in
the Forest and Stream, gives some very interesting in-
formation concerning the process of drawing out the
threads, which, to many anglers, will be new. He says: —

In all my reading I have never seen a sentence in reference to
that most essential article to the sportsman angler, viz.: silk-worm
gut; what it was and how jjrepared. I know that many skillftil
fishers know nothing ahout where it comes from. Others think that
because it is called silk-worm gut, therefore it is the intestines of
the silk-worm, just as catgut (violin strings) are made from the
(270)

SILK-WORM (JUT. 271

intestines of a cat (?) or a sheep, after the mucous membrane has
been removed from it. But such is not the case. It is true that it
comes from the inside of the silk-worm, but it is not what we would
call the gut.

More than forty years ago I was curious to know what this article
was, but not until within four years ago did I ascertain. Inside of
the silk-worm there are two lobes or sacs lying together, somewhat
like the two lobes of eggs in a fish. When these lobes are fully
developed they consist of a viscid fluid, and if the worm were
allowed to live this would all be spun out of its mouth as a cocoon
of silk. But if silk-worm gut is wanted, the worms are taken when
the lobes are mature (or ripe, as they term it,) and thrown into
strong vinegar for about two hours. The effect of this immersion
in vinegar kills the worms, makes the external part of their bodies
very tender, and thickens the fluid in the lobes into a soft, tough
pulp.

The next process is to remove it from the vinegar and remove the
outer part carefully, and one at a time, the.se lobes are caught by
the thumb and finger by the ends, with each hand, and stretched
apart to the length required, and given two or three twists around
a small pin placed in each end of a frame, where they remain till
dry enough to be bunched up ready for market. That this is the
way that gut is finished we have some evidence by examining a
thread of it in the bunch as commonly sold. At each end you will
see where it has been twisted around the pin, and beyond that,
where the piece held in the fingers has been stripped out, which is
usually flat.

That there are other insects than the common silk-worm (how
many I do not know) who have this lobe of fluid matter that is
utilized into fishing gut I am satisfied. More than forty years ago
I got a quantity of gut (how or from whom I do not remember),
but it was different from any I had ever seen before or since. It
was heavy and long. Some of the threads were nearly three feet,
perfect in smoothness and equal in thickness, and as thick as good
salmon gut. The color, however, differed from the ordinary gut,
being brown-colored, as if soaked in tea, but I am satisfied it was
the natural coloi\ I still have a few threads of it in my tackle-
book, which have been there about forty-five years. I have just

272 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

looked at them, and find that the longest yet remaining is twenty-
tliree and a half inches; a good, clear thread; one of the lightest
of the lot.

About as long ago as I can remember there was an article sold
called sea-weed, which was used by fly-fishers. It was from three
to four feet in length, round, smooth, and tapered from the root
to the point, but was not reliable as to its strength. I have not
seen any of it for nearly fifty years past.

The long and heavy gut to which Mr. Gray alhides, is,
possibly, the product of one of our native silk-worms, as
Dr. T. Gurlick, of Bedford, Ohio, one of the fathers of
pisciculture in the United States, states that he has drawn
silk gut from four to six feet long, sufficiently strong for
Salmon fishing, from the larva of the Attacus cecropia, the
largest of our native silk-worms.

Dr. Garlick describes the process, in the Forest and Stream,
as follows :

I have drawn silk gut not only froni the Attacus cecropia and A.
poli/phemus, but also from the Italian silk-worm. I have never killed
the worm, nor put it in vinegar for this purpose, which may be the
best method. Soon after the larva ceases to feed he begins to spin
his cocoon, which is the right time to draw the silk gut. I pin the
worm to a board, putting one pin in his caudal extremity, and
another pin about one-third of his length back from his head. I
then, with a sharp knife, cut off the forepart of the worm far
enough back to cut off a very little of the sac containing the silk,
which is a fluid of about the consistency of the white of an egg. I
then take a large pin, and dipping it into the fluid silk, which
adheres to the pin, I draw out the silk slowly (the more slowly the
larger will be the gut), until I have drawn out all, or nearly all, of
the silk contained in the sacs. I then take another pin, and attach
it to the other extremity of the gut, at the point where I divided
the worm. The two pins are then stuck into a board, drawing the
gut taut, which soon becomes hard and fit for use. The fluid silk

STLK-WORJI GUT. 273

N

hardens to some extent immediately on coming in contact with the
air.

Leaders, or Casting Lines.

The silk-worm gut imported into the LTnited States,
and used for leaders and sneils, is usually in short lengths
of from twelve to fifteen inches. In forming leaders,
these are knotted together to the desired length. There
are many grades of gut, and the angler will do well to
remember that the best is the cheapest.

Black Bass leaders should be from six to nine feet long,
and composed of the best single Spanish silk-worm gut,
heavy and strong, hard and round. The gut lengths
should be perfectly clear and sound, quite smooth, and
without inequalities or rough places. The rod-end of the
leader should be composed of a large-sized gut, the next
length a trifle smaller, and so diminish by a gradual taper
to the fly-end. The several lengths should be neatly and
firmly knotted together by what is technically known as
the double water-knot. The ends should be cut off
closely; or, if the single water-knot is used, the ends
should be first wrapped with silk, waxed and varnished,
and then cut oif neatly and closely.

It should be remembered that it is necessary to soak
and soften the ends of the gut-lengths previous to tving.
The water-knot, if correctly tied, can be easily sli])ped
apart and the snell of a fly inserted, when it is to be se-
curely drawn together again, the snell having a knot tied
on the end to prevent its ])ulling out; but more of this
anon.

Some leaders are now made with loops for attaching the

274

BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

SILK-WORM GUT. 275

flies, wli it'll is a very convenient and expeditious way, but
the old method is still much in vogue, and both plans
have their advocates.

Too much care can not be exercised in selecting the
leader, for upon its soundness and excellence depend much
of the pleasure and success of fly-fishing. It should be
carefully examined in every inch of its length, and the
knots closely inspected. The leader should always be
stained some suitable neutral tint ; either a slightly green-
ish, grayish, or smoky hue will answer. Strong green
tea, diluted black ink, or a weak solution of indigo, make
good stains. The leader should have a loop at each end,
for attaching the reel-line and stretcher-fly.

I will not enter into the details of ^making leaders, as
they can now be purchased so cheaply, and of such superior
excellence, that the amateur can hardly hope to equal them,
even were it necessary. The leaders known as "mist-
colored" are all that can be desired, and the angler can
have them sent by mail from any first-class dealer, who
will select them " upon honor." I will only add, beware
of double or twisted-leaders; they are an abomination to
the Black Bass fly-fisher.

Snells, or Snoods.

For utility and convenience, hooks are tied on short
pieces of gut, gimp, or sea-grass, called snells, or snoods.
The best material for snells is silk-worm gut, as it is light,
strong, and nearly invisible. It should be stained of a
similar color, and in the same manner as the leader.

The length of snells lor Black Bass angling should be
from six to eight inches ; and they should be composed of

276

BOCHC OF THE BLACK BASS.

Leader, or Casting Line.
(A. B. Shipley & Son.)

Shipley's Self-hooking Elastic Snood.

(A. H. Shipley & Son.)

Snell and Hook.
(.V. B. Shipley & Son.)

SILK-WORM GUT. 277

single, heavy gut, though thov may be made double if the
gut is very liglit or fine.

The hooks shoukl bo neatly, earefully, and securely tied
on with waxed silk, and varnished; and a strong and firm
loop must be formed on the other end of the snell, for at-
taching to the reel line. The ends, of the gut should be
softened by soaking in warm water before tying on the
hook and f)rming the loop.

Gut snells, or loops, are always used for artificial flies ;
when snells are used, they should be from three to six
inches in length, and sliould always be formed of single
gut, with, or without loops in the ends, according to the
style of leader used, whether with loops for the attachment
of the fly-snells, or not.

Messrs. A. B. Shipley & Son, of Phihulelphia, manufiic-
ture a patent, self-hooking, elastic snell, formed by tying
a short piece of silk rubber cord across a bight of the gut-
snell, giving it a spring or play of two inches or more.
Messrs. Shipley say that it has proved very successful, and
describe its modus operandi as follows : —

"The fish, on biting and attempting to let go the bait,
is at once caught ; as when the tension of its biting or
pulling at the bait ceases, the snood flies, or springs imme-
diately, and fastens the hook, itself, thus saving the setting
of the wrist, or loosing the fish by inattention,"

In fishing for Black Bass in waters where Pickerel or
Pike-Perch abound, it becomes necessary to substitute
gimp, for the gut of the snell, as the sharp, long, and nu-
merous teeth of these species would make short work of
the delicate gut, by fraying it or cutting it in two, and
thus subject the angler to the great annoyance and aggra-
vation of often losini>r both hook and fish.

278

BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

silk-worm gut. 279

Knots.

In angling, as in sailing, there is no accomplishment so
necessary, or that proclaims the finished angler or sailor
so well, as his ability to tie a good knot. The beginner
should study the plate of "knots" thoroughly, and by
practice learn to tie each and all of them readily and prop-
erly. I have seen otherwise good anglers who could not
tie a correct or graceful knot, and the knife was always
brought into requisition to "untie" their clumsy efforts;
in this way their lines become shorter daily, and " beauti-
fully less."

There is always a right way and a wrong way to do
every thing; and though a knot may seem an unimportant
thing, it is really often a most vital one, many times caus-
ing the angler to lose a good fish, and might result in the
loss of his life to the sailor. The new hand will please
remember that whatever is worth doing at all, is worth
doing well.

Fig. 1 is the " common " knot for forming a loop at the
end of a line, or snell. It has its uses.

Fig. 2 is the best knot for tying such a loop ; it looks a
little intricate, but can be learned by practice, and once
learned, will be a " well-spring of pleasure."

Fig. 3 is a good and simple method of attaching the
reel-line to the loop of the leader, or snell. It is the
"tiller-hitch," or "helm-knot," so-called because it can be
instantly cast off by a jerk on the end; being thus the
safest hitch for the main-sheet in sailing.

Fig. 4 is a more secure knot for attaching the end of
the line to loop of leader, or snell ; it makes a small and
neat knot, and is easily untied. It is the " becket-hitch,"

280 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

"with a small round knot in the end of the line to prevent
its working loose.

Fig. 5 is another method of fastening reel-line to loop
of leader, or snell ; it is a very safe and secure knot, and
is a modification of the "reef-knot/' (fig. 10).

Fig. 6 is similar to fig. 5, with the end of line fastened
on itself by a half-hitch ; it is very secure, but a little
more difficult to untie than fig. 5. Figs. 3, 4, 5, and 6 are
all good knots for bending the line to loop of leader, or
snell; they draw up close and snug, will not slip, and are
easily loosened. The angler can take his choice, but he
should never tie his line and leader together by the com-
mon knot (similar to fig. 1), or the square knot (fig. 10).
The leader should always be provided with a loop in each
end, neatly seized with good sewing silk, and varnished.
In bait-fishing, a loop may be formed on the end of the
reel-line, by which it may be fastened to one ring of the
swivel, when it is desired to pass the loop of the snell
through the opposite ring.

Fig. 7 is the " single water-knot," for tying lengths of
gut together to form the leader; it consists in half-hitches
at the ends of the gut-lengths, which are formed around
the opposing gut- lengths, as shown in the figure; this forms
a sliding knot for securing the end of the snell of a drop-

fly.

Fig. 8 is the " double water-knot " for the same purpose
as* fig. 7 ; it is more secure, but not so neat, as double
hitches are used in its construction, as plainly shown in
the figure.

Fig. 9, shows the method of fastening the snell of a
dropper by tlie single or double water-knots. After the
two parts of the water-knot are drawn tight, as shown in

SILK-WOR^r GUT. 281

the figure, a round knot is made in the end of the snell
of the fly, and is pnt through the open loop between the
two halves of the water-knot, whieh latter are then drawn
together close and snug, holding the snell tightly and se-
curely. By using this mode of attaching droppers to tiie
leader, they stand at right angles to it, and may be changed
as often as desired, and with but little trouble, by simply
sliding the water-knots apart, taking out the snell of one
fly and inserting another. The flies can not pull out, as
might be supposed, for the strain and struggles of a fish
only serve to make the knot draw more closely together.

Fig. 10 is the " reef-knot," or common square knot, and
is a very safe and strong knot for many purposes ; it never
slips or jams, when properly tied, and is easily loosened;
but in tying this knot,»if the second turn or hitch is not
made exactly right, it forms a "granny-knot," than which
there is no worse or more uncertain knot made, and yet
nine persons out often tie a "granny-knot." The novice
will do well to study this common knot, and learn to tie
it correctlv. It is sometimes used for tvine; the lengths of
a leader, in which case, as also with the single water-knot,
the ends should be cut off closely, and neatly whipped with
fine sewing silk and varnished.

Fig. 11 is the form of knot generally used by manufac-
turers of leaders, or casting lines, for tying together the gut-
lengths ; it is a very simple knot to tie, though it looks
somewhat difficult in the figure, and in the way that I
have seen some attempt it, is a difficult knot. I have
drawn the two lengths of different colors, one white, the
other dark, so that the construction of the knot can be
more easily seen. The ends of two gut-lengths are passed

by one another, or in other words lap^sed, sufficiently to
24

282 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

allow of their heing tied by a single hitch and drawn
tightly, just like tying a single knot in a double string
(as in fig. 1). Usually the knot is made double by pass-
ing the ends of the gut through twice, instead of but once,
in tying ; that is by simply tying what is known as a
"surgeon's knot" (for ligating arteries) with a double
thread. The short ends are then trimmed off closely. If
a leader is made with loops for attaching drop-flies, this is
the best knot to use in making the leader itself, being,
like fig. 10, secure and unyielding.

Where knots like figs. 10 and 11 are used in construct-
ing the leader, and no loops are provided for attaching
droppers, the latter must be secured by a half-hitch, just
above a knot in the leader, as shown in figs. 10 and 11,
which is a very good plan. It must be borne in mind,
that in tying lengths of gut together, or in tying loops or
knots in gut-snells, the ends must first be soaked in water
until quite soft and pliable ; this must also be observed in
bending or tying a hook on a gut-snell.

CHAPTER XIII.

HOOKS.

" For in the Prophet Amos, mention is made of fish-hooks ; and in the book
of Job, wliicli was long before tiie days of Amos, for that liooli is said to have
been written by Moses, mention is made also of tish-hooks, wliich must imply
anglers in those times."— Izaak Walton.

The best fish-hooks are made in Enghxnd, that country
supplying the world with hooks of all sizes and styles, for
all kinds of fishing. The town of Redditch has been
famous for its fish-hooks for at least two centuries. There,
are located the celebrated makers, Harrison, Hemming,
Alcock, and others, whose familiar names are almost sy-
nonymous with hooks and needles, both articles being
usually made by the manufacturers mentioned.

The following brief account of the process of making
fish-hooks will doubtless prove interesting to most of my
readers. It is an extract from a letter in the Forest and
Stream, written by Miss Sara J. McBride, of Oswego, New
York, the well-known, skillful tyer of artificial flies ; and
whose writings are as charming and attractive as her
artistic imitations of the insect world. The letter is one
descriptive of a recent visit to the celebrated factory of
Alcock, at Redditch, England: —

And this is Alcock's ! How familiar the name ! What a host of
reminiscences rise as we enter the doors — "Rotmd Bend Kendall,"
" Kirby," " Sneck Bend," "Alcock's Best; " all spring up like phan-
tom forms. Throtigh the kindly courtesy of Mr. Alcock we were

(283)

284 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

shown through the different apartments and saw the various manip-
uUitions the wire taken froiu the coil undergoes, until the delicately
pointed, japanned hook is ready for the market. In one corner of a
room there was a large pair of upright scissors; with a quick snap
two hundred or more pieces of the required length were cut from a
bundle of wire; six to ten of these pieces are taken, held firmly
against an iron bar, and an incision made with a sharp knife, for the
barb. Next the filer takes each one separately with a pair of pliers,
holds it in a vise, and with a few deft movements of a file, the
embryo hook is pointed. Now they are bent on diflFerent forms.
This is the christening period. They come forth, Sproat, Limerick,
O'Shaughnessy, Kirby, Kendall, Sneck Bend, Hollow Points, and
Round Points. The hardening process is the next in order. As we enter
this department our nostrils are assailed by a fearful stench of burn-
ing fish-oil. We would like to retreat — an instant's consideration —
we decide to ignore the olfactory nerves and keep on. Here we are
shown rows of ovens, all filled with pans of burning, blazing hooks.
They are kept in this fiery furnace from fifteen to twenty-five minutes,
then taken and thrown into the bath of oil. We were informed they
formerly used water for cooling, but now they considered oil the best.
True to Yankee instinct, I queried why. The workman did not
enter into a learned discussion on the molecular construction, or
atomic properties of steel, and the consequent differentiation of the
particles in cooling, as a Boston girl might have done, but witli a
wise nod and a firm pressure of the lips said, "The oil is the best."
I thought the oil was used to keep visitors from intruding. The
hooks taken from the oil are quite brittle. To remedy this they are
reheated. During this process, which lasts but a few minutes, they
are stirred briskly in sand.

We next visited the scouring room. Here were eight small barrels,
all filled with hooks and fine sand, revolving and turning round and
round with a deafening clash and clang. In this room the workmen
escaped quizzing. The noise was too much for me. Now for the
finishing touches — the japanning. The japan is a black, tarry liquid
made in Birmingham, the composition of which seems to be a trade
secret, as I failed to learn it. Two coats of japan are applied; they
are heated moderately in an oven and thoroughly mixed after each
heating.

HOOKS. 285

In the wareroom we are shown immense quantities of hooks, ,'ill
sizes, done up in packages of thousands and tens of thousands, ready
to be shipped to all parts of the world. Here is the small delicate
hook for France, so diminuti\e that tlie rude scale of inches has to
be laid aside and only the French milimeter can do it justice ; hooks
for Canada, United States, Australia, and New Zealand ; triple hooks,
double hooks, hooks flattened, hooks ringed, hooks headed, and hooka
eyed. x\.ll kinds of hooks for all kinds of fish.

The most approved hooks for Black Bass, are the Sproat,
O'Shauo'hnessy, Dublin Limerick, Cork Shape Limerick,
Round Bend Carlisle, or Aberdeen, and Hollow Point
Limerick ; they are best in the order named, and those
made by Harrison & Son, and T. Hemming & Son, excel
all others.

There are fish-hooks and fish-hooks, and to the uniniti-
ated one hook is as good as another; all they can see in a
hook, is the fact that it has a shank, a bend, and a bearded
point. But to the angler this contracted view is not suffi-
cient. There are many styles of shank, numerous forms
of bend, and various ways of fashioning the barb and point,
all of which are of the highest practical importance. Some
hooks are made for general service, while others are formed
exclusively for particular kinds of fish, or for special
methods of angling. The fish-hook of to-day is not es-
sentially different from that used by the ancient Greeks
and Romans, to the casual observer ; but to the practiced
eye, the hooks now produced, for form, temper, and
strength have never been equaled in the history of the
world.

The form, quality, and general excellence of hooks, as
now made, is the result of the competitive skill and great
experience of the manufacturers of Redditch, England,

286 BOOK OF THE BI.A(^K BASS.

whose energies and resources have been directed in this
peculiar channel for nearly two hundred years; and, as
might be inferred, as between the hooks of the first-class
makers, there is but little choice, so far as quality and
workmanship are concerned.

There is no implement of the craft that is so universally
kept in stock at the small stores and shops throughout the
country as the fish-hook ; and these hooks, as a rule, are
of very inferior quality, as might be inferred when we take
into consideration their cheapness, notwithstanding the
fact that they must net the dealer at least fifty per cent,
profit, or he would not sell them.

While the average angler is inclined to use heavier rods,
and stronger lines, than are actually necessary, he does not
seem to be so much impressed with the importance of
strength in a fish-hook, but accepts those of the small
dealers mentioned, with a blind faith that a hook is a
hook, and that one is as strong as another, if of the same
sized wire ; and, morover, he recognizes but two forms of
hooks, the Kirby, or side-bend, and the straight, or more
or less rounding-bend.

Now there are no fallacies so great as these, for the hook
is of the most vital importance to the angler, and he should
obtain the very best to be had, both in form and quality.
Fish-hooks, in themselves, being of so comparatively small
a price, it is the most insane idea of economy to purchase
any hut those of the very best quality. The most approved
form of bend and l)arb, should also be taken into serious
consideration.

The highest grades of English hooks, like English gun-
barrels, are thoroughly tested by causing them to sustain a
strain, twice or thrice as great as they are usually put to

HOOKS. 287

in actual service, and the extra care and manipulation, and
the superior stock used in the construction of such hooks,
make their cost somewhat higher; but this extra amount
is money well expended, for the angler can rely upon them
with the utmost confidence, provided they are the product
of the best makers; there is but one thing left to decide
his choice among such hooks, viz., the peculiar bend or
form given to the hook, of which there are several that
are good enough. I might add, that all first-class hooks
are japanned, or black, and that a blued hook is always of
an inferior quality.

As regards the shape and bend of a hook, my first
choice for Black Bass angling is the " Sproat Bend," and
the next best form, in my opinion, is the "O'Shaughnessy."
In general form and bend the two hooks are identical, but
their difference consists in the form of barb, and direction
of the point. In the latter peculiarities, the Sproat is
fashioned after true scientific principles, being a central-
draught hook ; that is, the short, squarish, or somewhat
angular barb, terminates in an abrupt point, which, if con-
tinued upward, would intersect a line drawn from the ex-
tremity of the shank and continuous with it. In other
words, the direction of the point of the hook is towards
the end of the shank.

When the Sproat hook is tied on a snell, and the point
of the hook is held against the ball of the thnml), and
traction made on the snell, the direction of the point of
the hook is on the same plane, or in the same direction or
axis as the line of the snell, thus constituting what is
termed a central-draught fish-hook. The wire of the
Sproat is a trifle smaller than the O'Shaughnessy, which

288

BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

SPROATBEND*

2 il 1 l\ 1'/2

1/

0:«HAUGHNESSY.

ABERDEEN.

b

3 , \ 2 l\ 1 i\ 1'2 i\ %

2L

%

% iV 3^

HOOKS. 289

is another advantage. The latter hook has a long and
somewhat hollow point, which is curved outward.

The Sproat Bend I regard as the very best hook manu-
factured. I first commenced its use ten or twelve years
ago, and have since used no other. Its appearance is
somewhat against it, but it is like "a singed cat." By
the side of a delicate, blued, gracefully-shaped Aberdeen,
it looks black, and rather clumsy, with its short barb and
peculiar bend, but it means " business." Its temper is
just right, and when you strike a fish it goes right
through any part of the mouth, never springing out, and
never disappointing you. I have had the Aberdeen so
soft as to completely straighten and pull out, and so brittle
as to i)reak like a pipe stem, but the Sproat Bend has yet
to fail me. For staying qualities it is perfection itself.

The "Dublin Bend," or Dublin Limerick, as it is some-
times called, and the " Dublin Limerick Forged," are ex-
cellent hooks, and are identical in form and bend with
the O'Shaughnessy hook, the only difference consisting in
the caliber of the wire, which, in the latter, is a trifl©
heavier. The Forged Dublin Limerick has the wire
flattened by hammering or forging; it is a remarkably
strong hook.

The " Cork-Shape Limerick," has an almost round bend,
with a straight shank, and a long straight point, which is
parallel with the shank in its direction, and a very good
hook, being of rather smaller wire than the Sproat,

The " Carlisle " hooks are made of very small wire, and

are very delicate and attractive to the eye, but for Black

Bass fishing I do not admire them, though, until I came

across the Sproat hook, I used the round bend Carlisle

(Aberdeen) altogether. Still, manv anglers prefer them
25

290

BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS,

V3VJ

vjvjvjy

KJ

KJ

b

1. Triple hook.
4. Dublin Bend
7. Limerick.

10. Aberdeen.

13. Kinsey.

2. Lin hook.

5. O'Shaughnessy.

8. Cork Shape.
11. Kirby Carlisle.
14. Sneck Bend.

3. Double fly-hook
6. Chestertown.
9. Sproat.
12. Gravitation.

HOOKS. 291

on account of the small wire, which is not so apt to injure
the minnow, but I might say here, that if a minnow is put
on with care, it need not be injured to a greater extent,
even with the Forged Dublin Bend hook, than with the
Carlisle. The round-bend Carlisle, or Aberdeen hook, has
a perfectly round bend, and a long straight shank ; the
barb is long, with the point curving outward.

The "Hollow Point Limerick" is the last hook that I
will mention, favorably ; it is a very old form of hook,
and is still a great favorite wdth many, notably the veter-
ans of the angle, whose experience with this hook dates
back to the heyday of youth. The form of the Limerick
is well known; it has a straight shank, and a very abrupt
bend, with a long, straight, and hollow point.

The Kirby Carlisle, the Kirby Limerick, and, in fact,
any hook with the " Kirby " or side-bend I can not rec-
ommend for any kind of angling. It is the worst possible
crook that can be given to a fish-hook, being both unsci-
entific and impracticable.

The needle-pointed, or hook without a beard or barb,
has been recommended for fly-fishing, but it will not an-
swer for the Black Bass. So long as the fish remains in
the water, and a proper tension of line is maintained by the
angler, it holds as well as any other hook, l)ut when the
fish leaps from the water in its struggles to free itself, like
the Black Bass, there is a great liability of its shaking out
8uch a hook.

Artificial flies, tied on extremely small barbless and
needle-pointed hooks with a circular bend, have been used
in Japan for centuries, and while such hooks may do for
the Brook Trout, and fishes closely allied to it in habits,
they are totally unsuitable for the Black Bass, or any fish

292

BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

Kirby, or Side-bend Hooks.
(Wm. Mills & Son.)

Edgar Patent Barbless Hooks.
(Wm. Mills & Sou.)

HOOKS. 293

that makes such desperate efforts to get away, when
hooked.

The Edgar patent barbless hook, manufactured by Will-
iam Mills & Son, is made upon a very different principle,
and is all that the inventor claims for it. This hook,
while having no barb, has a " keeper" which securely
holds the fish after it is hooked, rendering it impossible
for it to escape, even with a slack line. It is the only
" patent " fish-hook that has any real merit, though it seems
to me like taking too much advantage of a fish, and is
likely to foster and encourage a careless and shiftless style
of angling. Still it will no doubt become quite a favorite
hook with many. To my mind the great charm of angling
consists in using a proper judgment (born of a thorough
knowledge of the fish and its habits) in presenting the
bait, and the exercise of skill and science in hooking,
playing, and landing it.

The Edgar hook is hand-made, composed of good and
reliable wire, and for fresh water fishing is made in several
sizes, and numbered from 1 to 10, No. 1 being the small-
est. For Black Bass, the proper sizes are Nos, 4, 5, and 6
for bait-fishing, and Nos. 2 and 3, for fly-fishing.

CHAPTER XIV.

ARTIFICIAL FLIES.

" To frame the little animal, provide
All the gay hues that wait on female pride ;
Let nature guide thee. Sometimes golden wire
The shining bellies of the fly require ;
The peacock's plumes thy tackle must not fail,
Nor the dear purchase of the sable's tail.
Each gaudy bird some slender tribute brings,
And lends the growing insect proper wings:
Silks of all colors must their aid impart,
And every fur promote the fisher's art."— Gay.

Fly-Fishing and the art of making artificial flies
dates back at least to the ancient Greeks and Romans.
During the palmy days of the Roman Empire, the rod,
line, hook, and artificial fly were well known. Noel de la
Moriniere tells us that the lines were generally made of
horsehair, single, double, and plaited; and according to
..Elianus the hair was colored in different ways. The
fishing-rod was chosen with reference to the supposed weight
of the fish to be caught, and the resistance it could offer.
The hooks were of copper or iron, and coated with tin.
The art of making flies of feathers and other materials has,
perhaps, never been carried further in our own time, even
in England itself. It is possible that the national love
for fly-fishing was introduced into Britain by the Romans.

It is with some degree of trepidation that I approach the
subject of artificial flies, for I am afraid that I hold some
(294)

ARTIFICIAL FLIES. 295

very heretical notions on the subject. But of one fact I
am positively convinced, and that is, that there is a good
deal of humbug in this matter, as evidenced in the manv
fine-spun theories and hair-splitting arguments that are
advocated and advanced (pertaining to the construction
and use of artificial flies) by some anglers, but which the-
ories do not hold good in practice.

In England, more especially, do anglers proceed to ex-
tremes as theorists in the matter of artificial flies for Trout
fishing. They seem to be divided, principally, into " col-
orists," or those who think color of paramount importance
to form, and " formalists," or "entomologists," who main-
tain that form is every thing, and profess to imitate the
natural fly, in its proper season, in every particular of
form and tinting. But there is no evidence that one class
is more successful than the other, as anglers. On the other
hand are the followers of Mr. Pennell's system, or plan,
who confine themselves to, and advocate the employment
of, but three " typical " flies — green, brown, and yellow
palmers, or " hackles " — and claim that they are sufficient
for all practical purposes, and can be made available for
different waters and seasons, by increasing or diminishing
the size of the flies, as circumstances seem to demand.
While the adherents to this latter theory are fully as suc-
cessful, from all accounts, as those who have a list of nearly
a thousand named flies to choose from, and enjoy the sat-
isfaction of having reduced the perplexing matter to a de-
lightful simplicity, and of obviating the troubles of a re-
peated changing of the cast of flies as practiced by others
— they must sometimes feel a regret deep in their hearts '
for casting down and sweeping away their idols and cher-
ished traditions, and to a certain extent the poetry of fly-

296 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

fishing, by their iconoclastic thongh sensible opinions and
practices.

Where fish are plentiful and in a " biting mood," almost
any fly, be it never so rudely tied, and of the least possible
resemblance to any thing in the insect creation, will be
successful, even if clumsily cast ; on the contrary, there are
times when the best made flies, cast by the most skillful
artists, are necessary to induce a rise. Between these ex-
tremes must we look for rules for our general guidance,
and without occupying further space with arguments, pro
and con, it will be sufficient to say that there are certain
general rules which apply to the character of the fly to be
used at certain times, and which rules are the result of, and
founded upon, the experience and observations of fly-fish-
ers for many generations past.

These rules, so far as they apj^ly to Black Bass fly-fish-
ing, are few and simple : —

1. Flies should be small, rather than large, the average
Trout-fly being usually large enough.

2. On bright days, and with clear, low, or fine water,
flies should be quite small, and of subdued, dark, or neu-
tral tints.

3. For cloudy days, and high, turbid, or rough water,
larger and brighter flies should be used.

4. For very dark days, or from sunset until dark, or on
moonlight evenings, gray or whitish flies, of good size,
should be employed.

I shall not go into an entomological description of flies
and their counterfeits, for it is neither requisite nor advis-
able, so far as Bass flies are concerned. For those who
feel an interest in this subject, hovrever, I can recommend,
cheerfully, the several fine works published in England on

ARTIFICIAL FLIES, 297

the construction of Trout and Salmon flies ; among the best
of which are Ronald's " Fly-Fisher's Entoinology," and
Pennell's " Modern Practical Anj^ler."

I will merely state that tlie majority of artificial flies
are of two kinds, and are intended to represent the j)erfect
winged insects of certain orders, and the larvae of others;
thus, most Trout-flies are the pretended imitations of some
of the species of the orders Diptcra and Neuroptera, the
former comprising the two-winged insects, as the gnats,
mosquitoes, midges, etc., and the latter the four-winged
insects, as the May-flies, dragon-flies, etc. The larval
form of fly is supposed to represent a caterpillar, and is
called a " hackle," or, more correctly a "■ palmer." It must
be borne in mind in this connection that an artificial fly,
when wet, presents a much different appearance from the
same fly when dry, and our flies should be tied with refer-
ence to this contingency.

The term "hackle" is likely to cause some confusion in
the mind of the new hand, if not explained; for it is sus-
ceptible of several meanings, as used by anglers and fly-
tyers. The proper meaning of the word is a "feather"
from the neck or saddle of the cock, and known as a
"neck-hackle," or a "saddle-hackle," as the case may be.
These hackle-feathers are used to imitate the legs or feet
of an artificial fly; and as one variety of fly consists only
of a body with a hackle wound spirally around this body,
from one end to the other, this form of fly has come to be
known, in this country, at least, as "a hackle," though, as
stated before, the proper name is " palmer," and it is de-
signed to imitate a caterpillar, for it is only a body bristling
with "legs."

Then there is the "hackle-fly," which is a fly with body,

298 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

wings, and, perhaps, a tail, and, in addition, a hackle-
feather tied on at the shoulder, to represent the legs ; and
most flies are made in this way, though a few, notably,
some salmon-flies, have, in addition to wings, tail and
feelers — the entire body wound with a hackle, like a pal-
mer. This is known as a "combination-fly," and, like
all salmon-flies, does not pretend to imitate any thing in
nature.

It is not my intention to give any instruction in the art
of fly-tying, nor do I deem it at all expedient, for it is an
art that can not be taught by written directions, without
the aid of explanatory cuts and diagrams, and even then
in but a moderate degree. The best way for one to ob-
tain an insight into the mysteries of the art, is to care-
fully dissect and take apart the flies of the best makers,
for in the taking apart one can acquire more or less of the
modus operandi of the putting together.

The most approved hooks for bass-flies are the Sproat,
O'Shaughnessy, Dublin Limerick, Cork Shape Limerick,
and Hollow Point Limerick. I consider them best in the
order named, though the O'Shaughnessy is thought by
many to be the best. It is the same in all respects as the
Dublin Limerick, except that it is a little heavier in wire,
and it differs from the Sproat only in the barb, the latter
having a shorter barb, with the point straight, or pointing
toward the extreme end of the shank, forming a true
center-draught hook. The barb of the O'Shaughnessy is a
little longer, and the point is turned slightly outward.
But any of these hooks will give good satisfaction. They
are made in the best manner, and of the best material, by
K. Harrison Bartleet & Co., successors to Richard Harrison
& Co., and T. Hemming & Son, of Redditch, England.

ARTIFICIAL FLIES. 299

The most suitable sizes, for bass-flies, are Nos. 2, 3, 4 and
5, the last being the smallest that should be used under
ordinary circumstances, though, for the smallest flies, Nos.
6 and 7 may be employed. These numbers apply to all
of the hooks named above.

Flies may be tied on a silk-worm gut-snell scyeral
inches in length, or may have simply a small, short gut-
loop. Those with loops can be used as "stretchers" or
tail-flies; but when used as "droppers" or bob-flies, they
must be attached to the leader by a half length of gut, say
four inches long.

Many "trout-flies" are used, and with good eflPect in
Black Bass fishing, for really the form and color of the
fly does not seem to make much difference with the Bass;
he does not seem so "fastidious," as it is termed, in his
choice of flies. Most of the " general " trout-flies are
taken as patterns for bass-flies, as the Coachman, Pro-
fessor, Soldier, Grizzly King, Queen of the Water, King
of the Water, Ibis, Kingdom, Quaker, etc., and all of the
palmers or " hackles."

As every angler will become partial, sooner or later,
to certain flies, and adopt them as favorites to the exclu-
sion of others, I deem it unnecessary to allude to but few,
except in a general way ; and those that I shall particular-
ize are such as I have used many times with most gratify-
ing results.

I have had more uniform success, day in and day out,
with the black, brown, red, yellow, and gray hackles
(palmers), than with the winged-flies; though some of
the latter I have employed with excellent success for high
or rough waters, and those with light-colored or white

300

BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

No. 1. Polka. No. 2. Coachman. Wo 3. Hackle.

No. 4. Bumble Bee. Wo. 5. Abbey. No. 6. Grizzly King.

ARTIFICIAL FLIES. 301

wings can not be surpassed for twilight-fishing, or for very
gloomy days.

The following flies, tied for me by C. F. Orvis, of Man-
chester, Vermont, expressly for Florida waters, I found
very taking at suitable times :

McLcod. — Body, emerald green, with gold twist; tag,
yellow and red floss; wings, dark mottled brown; tail,
green drake, with red ibis and mottled yellow; hackle,
yellow ; antenna; or feelers, scarlet.

Imperial. — Body, red, Avith silver twist; tag, silver;
tail (whisk), red and white; hackle, black and white;
wings, large, grayish white, bordered with black ; feelers,
scarlet.

Green and Gold. — Body, emerald green, gold twist;
tag, scarlet ; tail, white and red ; hackle, yellow ; wings,
olive green.

La Belle. — Body, pearly blue, silver twist; tag, red
and gold; hackle, blue; wings, pure white; tail, red and
white.

White and Ibis. — Body, 2)carl, gold tinsel; tag, peacock
herl ; tail, red and white; wings, white and scarlet; tag,
red ; hackle, white and scarlet.

Royal Coachman. — Body, scarlet, and peacock herl ; tail,
pin-tail duck ; hackle, brown ; wings, white.

Mr. Orvis also tied the next two flies, from patterns
furnished by myself, and which have for years been
favorite flies with me, Avhen winged flies are at all ad-
missible. As I am the originator of them, I have named
them Oriole and Polka. Tiiey are totally unlike any
thing in nature or art, but the Bass seem fond of them,
nevertheless. The Polka has some general resemblance to
the Abbey.

302

BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

Ijarge and Small Bass Flies.
(A. B. Shipley & Son.)

Bass Flies on Edgar's Barbless Hooks.
(Wm. Mills & Son.)

ARTIFICIAL FIJES. 303

Oriole. — Body, black, with gold tinsel; hackle, large,
and black ; wings, bright yellow ; tail, mixed black, and
white.

Polkn. — Body, scarlet, gold twist; hackle, red; wings,
black with white spots (guinea hen or woodpecker) ; tail,
brown and white, mixed.

The flies wdiich follow are part of an assortment tied
by Abbey & Imbrie, and have been remarkably and un-
usually successful with me, whenever winged flies were
called for:

Professor. — Body, yellow; hackle (legs), golden brow^n ;
tail, scarlet ibis ; wdngs, yellow, mottled.

Queen of the Water. — Body, dark yellow, gold tinsel ;
hackle, red ; wings, mallard, mottled.

Gr'izdy King. — Body, green ; hackle, gray ; tail, red ;
wings, pin-tail duck or mallard.

Soldier. — Body, scarlet ; hackle, red ; wings, gray.

Montreal. — Body, red ; hackle, scarlet ; wings, wild
turkey.

Governor Alvord. — Body, peacock herl ; hackle, red ; tail,
red ibis ; under wings, brown, upper wings, drab.

Seth Green. — Body, green, with yellow stripe ; hackle,
red; wings, brown (woodcock).

Abbey. — Body, scarlet, gold twist ; hackle, red ; tail,
golden pheasant ; wings, pin-tail duck.

Ferguson. — Body, yellow, gold twist ; hackle, green ;
tail, peacock, yellow and scarlet ; wdngs, yellow and
scarlet, and wild turkey.

Kingdom. — Body, white, striped with green ; hackle,
red; wings, woodcock (brown).

Gold Spinner. — Body, orange, gold tinsel ; hackle, light
red ; wings, graj.

304 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

Captain. — Body, gray, and peacock lierl ; hackle, red ;
tail, scarlet, green and wood-duck ; wings, gray.

Ibis. — Body, scarlet mohair, silver twist; tail, hackle,
and wings of the red ibis.

The following flies are also good ones, some being great
favorites with certain anglers :

Reuben Wood. — Body, white, with red head; hackle,
brown; wings and tail, rayed feathers of mallard.

Dr. Fowler. — Body, white; tail, scarlet; hackle, scarlet
and white ; wings, red ibis and white.

Green Drake. — Body, white, ribbed with black; hackle,
ginger; tail, dark; wings, mottled green and yellow.

Gray Drake. — Body, dark gray ; hackle, gray ; tail,
dark; wings, gray (mallard).

Broicn Drake. — Body, golden brown ; hackle, brown ;
tail, dark brown ; wings, golden brown.

Holberton. — Body, orange, gold tinsel ; hackle, peacock
herl and scarlet ; tail, wood-duck and scarlet ; under
wings, red ibis and yellow ; upper wings, peacock and
wood-duck.

Shoemaker. — Body, alternate rings of salmon and
gray ; hackle, light red ; tail, wood-duck ; wings, mallard

fei'ay)-

Superior. — Body, dark claret ; hackle, brown ; tail, blue

macaw; wings, wild turkey.

General Hooker. — Body, alternate yellow and green
rings; hackle, red; tail, wood-duck; wings, tail feathers
of ruffed grouse.

Quaker. — Body, gray ; hackle, yellow ; wings, horned
owl's wing.

King of tJie Water. — Body, scarlet, gold tinsel ; hackle,
red ; wings, bright mottled, mallard.

ARTIFICIAL FLIES. 305

Green Mantle. — Body and hackle, bright green; wings
and tail, mottk'd, mallard.

HenaJinll. — Body, peacock herl ; hackle, -white hairs from
deer's tail; tail, two or three long fibers of peacock-tail
feathers; wings, light drab (dove).

Oconomowoc. — Body, creamy yellow ; hackle, white and
dun (deer's tail); tail, ginger; wings, cinnamon (wood-
cock).

The White 3Ioths, or 3IiUers, are excellent flies for moon-
light evenings, or at dusk. They may be pure white, or
all white with yellow body, or all white with gray wings.
The bodies should be made full and fluffy.

The hack/es, or jKilinerfi, are made with various-hued
bodies, as black, green, red, or yellow, or peacock herl,
with either black, red, brown, yellow or gray legs. A
pure white hackle is very killing about dark. A most
excellent iiackle is made from the hairs of a deer's tail,
somewhat in the fashion of the "bob," so extensively used
in Florida and Texas.

The three "typical" hackles of Mr. H. Cholmondely-
Pennell, and which he uses to the exclusion of all other
flies, are described as follows:

Green. — Dark-green body ; very dark-green hackle for
both legs and whisk.

•Brown. — Body, dark orange; fiery or cinnamon-brown
hackle for legs and whisk.

Yellow. — Body, golden yellow; darkish golden-olive
hackle for legs and whisk.

These flies arc admirable^ for Black Bass, however they
may be for Trout, and the angler who carries but a lim-
ited assortment in his fly-hook should include these "hack-
les," in various sizes; they will not disappoint him.
26

306 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

As I have described quite enough for the beginner, and,
perhaps, too many, I will only allude to some by name,
which will often be found equal to the above, and, for
some waters, superior :

Bumble Bee, Jungle Cock, Hoskins, California, Moose-
head, Widow, Academy, Blue Jay, Page, Yellow Sally,
Blue and Drab, Pheasant, Raven, Claret, Tippulium,
Davis, Tanner, White and Green, Motley, Premier, Black
and Tan, Black and Gold, Purple Bass, Fire Fly, Little
Egg, Gray Coflin, Brown Coflin, Sand Fly, Stone Fly,
Hawthorn, Dark Mackerel, etc., etc.

It will be seen that the angler has quite an extensive
list to choose from, for most of the flies named are kept in
stock by our best dealers. As a rule, the smallest bass-
flies should be selected for general fishing; and those of
subdued tints will be found the most successful, saving on
the exceptional occasions already referred to. As has
been already mentioned, most of the flies named are pat-
terned after trout-flies of the same names; and, while
some of the latter are large enough, quite a number are
too small, and must be enlarged somewhat for bass-flies.

But there are flies, and enough, to suit those of every

taste, even should the angler be so fastidious and dainty us

"Ye Sunberry Fisher," as described by Punch:

"Ye Sunberrye fysher has flies of all feathers,
For all sorts of seasons, in all sorts of weathers.
Flics when ye Springtide is blustrie and showerie,
Flies when ye Summer is grassie and bowerie,
Flies when ye Autumn is golden and grainie.
For hot weather, cold weather, mistie, or rainie.
Eed-spinner, palmer, black peacock and gray,
Yellow dun, golden dun, ]March brown, and May,
Sand-fly and stone-fly, and alder and gnat,
Black midge and marlow bug — all round his hat."

CHAPTER XV.

AETIFICIAL BAITS.

"And therefore I have, which I will show to you, an artificial minnow that
will catch Trout as well as an artifleial fly ; and it was made by a handsome
woman that had a fine hand, and a live minnow lying by her."— Izaak
Walton.

Trollixg-Baits — Spoon-Baits.

The most commonly-used trolling-bait for Black Bass
is the spoon-bait or trolling-spoon. It is now made of
all shapes, and many sizes; but all are made upon the
same general principle, and are merely variations of the
original trolling-spoon, -which was fashioned like the
bowl of a spoon, a single hook being soldered to one end,
and a hole drilled in the other end for attaching the line.

By trailing or trolling such a spoon at the end of a
line from a moving boat, it revolves gracefully beneath the
surface of the water, the burnished surfaces flashing at each
revolution, and proves quite an effective lure.

Manufacturers vie w^ith each other in producing novel
shapes and so-called improvements, but there is nothing
better than the original spoon-bowl with a single hook.
The double and triple hooks, usually attached to the mod-
ern spoons, are liable to be crushed and broken by the
jaws of a large fish, if hooked in a position favorable to
this contingency.

Trolling-spoons are all made with a concave and a con-
vex surface; the' latter surface being brightly polished or

(307)

308

BOOK OF THE BT.ACK BASS.

ARTIFICIAL BAITS. 309

burnished, wliile the former is generally painted, and usu-
allv of a red color. They are made of tin or brass, and
often plated with nickel, silver or gold ; but so long as
spoon-baits are brightly burnished, it matters not what
the material is, for the Black Bass is not a judge of
metals, but will grab at any thing bright and in mo-
tion.

The depending hook or hooks may be plain, or dressed
with a tuft of feathers or braid, called, by courtesy, a
"fly;" but these fanciful additions, while pleasing to the
angler's eye, do not enhance the "taking" qualities of
the lure, for it is the flashing and glancing of the revolv-
ing spoon that attracts the fish, and it can not be made
more effective by these ornamental appendages, or, as I
have sometimes seen, by the addition of a live minnow,
or a strip of fat pork !

One or two brass swivels should always be attached to
the spoon-bait or line, to prevent twisting or kinking.
Particular attention should be paid to the hooks of troll-
ing-spoons, for many of them are of inferior quality,
though the American si)oons are, as a rule, furnished
with better hooks than the English baits of the same
grades.

As a rule, most persons use too large spoons for Black
Bass, using generally Pickerel baits. For the Black Bass,
the spoon should be no larger than the bowl of an ordinary
sized tea-spoon, for trolling with the hand-line; and when
trolling with the rod, they should be still smaller.

Abbey & Imbrie's new Fluted Spoon-Bait is a very
finely finished and attractive bait ; it is of the same shape
as the original spoon, but with a fluted section, wdiich adds
very much to its attractiveness when spinning; the hooks

310

BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

siswusL" V

1. Oval.

Trolling-Spoons for Hand-line.
(J. H. Mann.)

2. Perfect Revolving. 3. Kidney.

ARTIFICIAL BAITS.

311

1 and 2. Egg.

Spoons for Rod Trolling.
(J. H, Mann.)

3 and 4. Kidney.

312 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

are of good quality and reliable. It is made in a number
of sizes for different species of fish ; Nos. 2, 3, and 4 are
the best sizes for Black Bass. This firm also manufactures
a spoon of shell or mother-of-pearl, which is a beautiful
and effective bait, almost too pretty to use for such a pur-
pose. The proper sizes to employ are those whicli corre-
spond with the sizes above given, of their fluted spoon,
viz: Nos. 2, 3, and 4. They also make Skittering Spoons
of both pearl and metal.

J. H. Mann, of Syracuse, New York, manufactures a
line of superior trolling baits ; the best grades are carefully
finished and thoroughly reliable, with good hooks attached.
For hand trolling, his Perfect Revolving Spoon, No. 20,
with controlling link; Oval, No. 16; Kidney Shape, No.
6 J ; and Egg, No. 3J, are all good baits. For rod trolling,
his Trout Spoons, Egg, No. 1 ; Kidney, Nos. 2 and 3, are
all that can be desired.

The Improved Trolling Spoons of L. S. Hill & Co.,
Grand Rapids, Michigan, are articles of real merit. They
are made in the semblance of a minnow, the spoon being
supported by a spiral spring, held in position by a " U "
shaped guide, and readily yields to pressure. It finds its
proper circle according to the speed given it, and revolv-
ing either way prevents the line from twisting so much as
with some other spoons. Nos. 1 and 1^^ are the proper
sizes for Black Bass.

Other trolling-spoons or baits are made in fanciful shapes,
and variously styled minnows, propellers, spinners, etc.,
but are no better, and many of them not so good as those
above mentioned ; for the nearer a spinning spoon-bait
approaches the original spoon, already referred to, the
more practical and useful it becomes.

AHTIFICIAL, BAITS.

3i;

Pearl Minnow.
(A. B. Shipley & Son.)

Hill's Improved Trolling Baits.
(L. S. Hill & Co.)

27

314

BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

Flexible Protean Minnow.
(A. B. Shipley & Sou.)

Artificial Flexible Minnow.
(Conroy, Bissett & Malleson.)

N5|.

Caledonian Minnow.
(Chas. F. Orvis.)

Jointed Metal Minnow.
(Abbey & Imbrie.)

artificial, baits. 315

Artificial Minnows.

Artificial minnows for trolling, spinning, or casting, are
made of metal, glass, and rubber, large and small, and
gilded, silvered, or painted in attractive ways. Some of
them are quite successful as baits, while others are com-
paratively Avorthless, They are made both in our own
country and in England, and as their numbers, and styles,
and forms are constantly increasing, I do not deem it ad-
visable to particularize or give special descriptions.
While I have experimented with many of them, I do not
employ them in angling for the Black Bass.

For trolling or spinning, none of them are so effective
as the spoon-baits; while for casting, they are not to be
compared with the natural minnow, alive or dead. I will
merely name some of those that are best known, and more
generally used : Caledonian, Phantom, Flexible, Jointed,
Devon, Protean, Shadow, Pectoral, Unique, Professor,
Metal, Glass, Pearl, Silver, and Gilt minnows, and the
Dace, Gudgeon, Trout, and Kill Devil.

Artificial Insects, etc.

Artificial insects, as bees, grasshoppers, crickets, beetles,
May-flies, dragon-flies, and likewise artificial frogs, craw-
fish, hegramites, shrimps, worms, etc., are now made which
resemble the original creatures very closely. They are to
be used in surface fishing, in the same way as artificial flies,
and must be kept in constant motion, otherwise the Bass
soon discover the deception ; but if skillfully used, they
are often quite successful baits. They certainly have the
recommendation of cleanliness and general convenience as
compared with their original prototypes.

316

BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

Artificial Helgramite.
(Conroy, Bissett & Malleson.)

Artificial Insects.
(A. B. Shipley & Son.

Artificial Crawfish.
(Conroy, Bissett & Malleson.)

artificial baits. 317

The Bob.

Of all baits or lures used in Black Bass angling, one of
the rudest in structure, the most nondescript in appearance,
yet one of the most effective and killing in actual practice,
is the " bob " of the extreme Southern States.

It has been in use in Florida for more than a century,
and was first described by that quaint old naturalist. Bar-
tram, in 17(54. His description and method of using it, are
identical with the "bob" and its use at the present day in
Florida, Louisiana, and Texas.

The "bob" is composed of a triple hook, or three hooks
tied back to back, and invested with a portion of a deer's
tail, in the manner of a large, bushy, hackle ; often inter-
mixed with red and white feathers, or strips of scarlet
cloth. It forms a tassel or tuft, somewhat similar to the
so-called triple hook "fly" attached to most trolling spoons.

CHAPTER XYI.

NATURAL BAITS.

"And, good master, tell me wliat baits more you remember."— Izaak
Walton.

Minnows.

Among anglers, the term minnow is used to express any
small fish lised for bait, whether adult fish of certain fami-
lies, or the young of others. But the term properly be-
longs to the family Cyprinid^, which comprises numer-
ous genera, and some of the genera are composed of many
species.

The most generally diffused species are Lu.rills comutus,
the common shiner; Semofilus corporalls, the common
chub; and Ccratichthys bir/iiffatis, the horned chub. The
shiner is, by all odds, the best bait for the Black Bass, be-
ing quite silvery, as its name implies, and shows well in
the water. It is not so hardy, or long-lived, on the hook,
as the chub ; but on account of its white and silvery ap-
pearance it is especially desirable for turbid or rough water,
and on cloudy or dark days, though it is, for that matter,
a good bait at all times.

The chubs are good bait on bright days with clear and
still water ; they have rather tough mouths, endure the
hook well, and are rather more lively than shiners, and on
these accounts are preferred by many anglers. ^

The young of some of the species of Gatostomidce (suck-

(318)

NATURAL I? A ITS. 319

ers), are also very good baits on sunny clays, with clear and
low water; their tough, leathery, and projecting lips are
well adapted for the hook. They are quite hardy and
lively.

The young of Perca amcricana (yellow perch), are ex-
cellent baits on ponds and lakes, early or late in the
season ; especially if the spinous dorsal fin be clipped off
with a sharp knife, or a pair of scissors. They sho\Y well
in the water, and often prove an attractive lure during
the seasons mentioned.

As a rule, good-sized minnows should be employed, say
from three to five inches long. The large minnows are
livelier, more hardy, and live much longer on the hook
than the small ones. A half-pound Bass will take the
largest minnow as easily and as readily as the smallest
one, so there is no fear of using minnows too large. It is
true, that at times, the largest Bass seem to take to the
smallest minnows, but on these exceptional occasions, they
are off" their feed, to a certain extent; for, usually, the
largest Bass takes the lai-gest minnows.

In baiting with the minnow, the hook should be entered
through the lower lip and out through the nostril; if this
is carefully done, the minnow will live a comparatively
long time. Sometimes, with small minnows, the hook is
passed out through the socket of the eye, care being taken
not to injure the eye-ball. Another excellent way, espe-
cially with large minnows, is to pass the hook through both
lips, the lower one first, and out through the upper one.
When minnows are hooked in either of these ways, a dead
one is often as good as a live one, for the moving of the
line causes them to move in a natural manner. Where
the water is without a current, as on ponds or lakes, and

320 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

where the minnows are quite small, they may be, for still
fishing, but under no other circumstances, hooked just
back of the dorsal fin, and just above the backbone. But
in hooking a minnow in this way, the angler should bear
in mind the injunction of Father Izaak, in reference to
hooking the live frog: use him as though you loved him.
Chubs and suckers should always be hooked through the
lips, which are comparatively tough.

An excellent method for affixing the minnow to the
hook, in still-fishing — for it will not answer at all for
casting — and one that will well pay the angler for the extra
time and trouble involved, is as follows:

"Take a piece of cotton thread about a foot long, tie the
middle of it tight under the barb of the hook ; now take
the minnow in the left hand, lay the hook on its side, the
barb up by the shoulder of the bait, with the shaft along
the belly; now pass the thread over the shoulder and
around undei" the fish, and tie the shaft of the hook, then
pass the tliread along the shaft until under and behind the
back fin, then tie tightly around the shaft of the hook, then
pass the thread on each side of the fish up to the back, just
behind the back fin, and tie with a bow knot. This fiistens
the bait securely without hurting it, and you will have as
lively a bait as ever used for still-fishing."

The angler can not be too careful of his minnows. The
water in the bucket should be frequently changed, without
waiting for them to appear at the surface to breathe — the
usually accepted indication to change the water — for their
vitality and strength are already impaired Avhen this takes
place, and many of them can not be revived afterwards.
When available, esj)ecially in very hot weather, a piece of
ice should be placed on the top of the minnow pail, and

NATURAL BAITS. 321

covered with a woolen cloth. A little salt, added to the
w^ater in the pail, is very beneficial and adds to the preser-
vation of minnows.

It is a good plan, w'hen practicable, to use two minnow-
buckets, one of which, containing most of the minnows as
a reserve, should be sunk in the water, and a few minnows
taken out, as needed, for the bucket in use. In this way
the entire stock can be utilized in good condition.

In carrying minnows to any distance, they should not be
too much crowded in the pail ; fifty minnows is enough for
a five-gallon bucket. When more than this number is re-
quired, additional pails should be provided. A handful
of water-weeds in the pail will prevent the minnows from
being so much injured, as they otherwise would be, when
conveyed over rough roads.

When it is not practicable to allow of a frequent chang-
ing of the water, the latter may be oxygenized or aerated
by inserting a rubber, or other tube, well toward the bot-
tom of the pail, and pumping air through it by means of
a rubber bulb, such as is attached to a pump-syringe. It
is w-orse than useless to blow through such a tube with the
mouth ; for the breath, being deprived of its oxygen in
the lungs, carbonic acid gas takes it place, which is poi-
sonous to the minnows; yet I have frequently seen this
done by individuals, who erroneously supposed that they
were freshening the water, because of the numerous bub-
bles produced.

The Helgeamite.

The larva of the horned corydalis {Corydalis cornuta),
an insect belonging to the order Neuroptera, is variously

322 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

called " helgramite," " dobson," " grampus," " dobsell,"
'* hellion," "kill-devil," "crawler," and other euphonious
names. The male of the perfect, winged-insect has long
antennae, or horns, from which its specific and common
names are derived.

It exists for several years in the larval state, when it
is generally known as the " helgramite," being a curious,
flattened, and, to most persons, a repulsive-looking worm,
growing to a length of two or three inches, and about a
half inch in width. It has a head and pincers resembling,
somewhat, those of a beetle; has six legs along the thorax;
while the body is composed of a number of rings, to which
are attached fringes bearing some likeness to small legs;
the body terminates in two short appendages, or tails, on
each of which are two small hooks. The color is a dark,
dirty, brown.

The helgramite, by means of its hooks and pincers,
clings readily and tenaciously to different objects, and
hides securely under rocks, bowlders, driftwood, logs, etc.,
even in swift-running streams. They may be found cling-
ing to the decaying timbers of old dams and bridges, and
in the crevices of submerged stone-work at these places.
They are found on the "riffles" of streams, under the
bowlders and flat stones, and may be taken in these situa-
tions with the minnow-net, by stretching the latter across
the foot of the riffle ; when the stones above the net are
turned over, the helgramite, being thus disturbed, curls
himself into a ball and drifts into the net.

They can be found, in fact, hiding under almost any
submerged object in the shallow portions of streams.
They feed upon decaying wood and vegetation, and other
substances. They can be kept alive for almost any length

NATURAL BAITS. 323

of time, in a vessel half filled with wet pieces of rotten
wood, and damp aquatic vegetation. In this way the anglei
can always have a ready supply of bait on hand.

The helgramite is hooked by inserting the point of th&
hook under the cap or shell that covers the neck, from
behind forward, and bringing it through next to the head.
It is a capital bait for the Black Bass, especially when the
Bass are found on the riffles or rapids, and in shallow
water.

The Craavfish.

The crawfish (Cambarus), sometimes called crayfish and
crab, is, in some localities, and at certain seasons, a good
bait, especially when casting its shell, when it is called a
" peeler," or a " shedder." The crawfish exists wherever
the Black Bass is found, in greater or less quantities. In
waters where it is very abundant it forms an excellent and
killing bait.

"Distinct species live in the mountain streams and in the
springs at their sources. Some frequent the marshes of
the lowlands (both the fresh and salt marshes), either near
the streams, or adjacent to the bays, sounds, or ocean.
Some occur beneath stones in rivers, creeks, or branches;
in the muddy basis; beneath stones in the rapids; among
grass and weeds in more quiet places, and in coves; under
shelving grassy banks ; in holes at the bottom of ponds,
lakes, dams, and mill-races. Others bore holes in the
meadows, or even in the hill-tops near water ; and in
bringing up the mud and clay from their tube-like holes,
pile it as a chimney at the entrance. These species at
particular times place a plug of clay in the orifice of the

324 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

chimney and seal themselves in for a certain length of
time. Still others reside in the drains and mud of the
rice-fields and plantations of the South, and sometimes
burrow through the embankments, allowing the water to
flood the region."

The crawfish is used as a bait for the Black Bass only
in still-fishing, when it serves a good purpose. In its
usual state it should be hooked through the tail, but
" peelers " may be hooked through the head or body.
They may be kept alive a long time in damp aquatic grass,
moss, or weeds.

Grasshoppers and Crickets.

Grasshoppers and crickets are at times very taking baits.
They should be used as surface baits entirely, and should
be employed only when a brisk breeze is blowing, and on
the windward side of the water ; for it is at such times
that they are blown into the water, and the Bass are then
on the look out for them. The water, also, being broken
into ripples by the breeze, enhances the angler's chances
of success. These insects should be hooked through the
upper part of the thorax ( r body, small hooks being used.

Frogs.

On marshy streams and ponds, young frogs are some-
times used for baits, with good success, in still-fishing.
They may be hooked through the lips, or through the skin
of the back. They should be of small size, and kept in
pretty constant motion, as they are inclined to bury them-
nelves in the mud, or hide under stones, on the bottom,

NATURAL BAITS. 325

or crawl out upon objects on the surface, if left too long
to their own devices.

Salt water shrimps, when they can be })rocured, are
good baits for Black Bass, alive or pickled, that is, pre-
served in salt or strong brine.

I have seen Black Bass caught with cut bait, and even
the humble " wum ;" but the angler who is reduced to
such severe straits, is more to be pitied than envied. It
would be in better taste to offer pork to a Mussulman, or
pate de foie gras to a tramp.

32G

BOOK OF THE ELACK BASS.

Holberton Fly-Book.

(Conroy, Bissett & Malleson.)

CHAPTER XVII.

MISCELLANEOUS LMPLEMENTS.

'My rod and my line, my float and my lead,

My hook and my plummet, my whetstone and knife,
My basket, my baits, both living and dead.

My net and my meat, for that is the chief:
Then I must have thread, and hairs green and small,
With mine angling-purse, and so you have all."

— IzAAK Walton.

The Fly-Book.

Among the necessary adjuncts to the fly-fisher's outfit
is the fly-book, whose pages, well-filled, are more interest-
ing to the angler than the best written pages of classic
lore, poetry, or fiction. Fly-books are now made of many
patterns and sizes, and of various grades of quality and
material. They are constructed of calf-skin, pig-skin,
Morocco, or Russia-leather, with parchment leaves for
holding the flies. Those with the " Hyde," or metal-clip,
for keeping the flies separate and at full length, are the
best and most satisfactory, for obvious reasons. They are
made in various lengths, from five to seven inches ; and
of a capacity for holding from three dozen to a gross
of flies.

There is nothing neater, better, or more substantial in
this line than Abbey & Imbrie's "Southside" fly-book.
It is made of Russia-leather, with strap and patent clasp ;
has double parchment leaves, well-stitched, and is provided

( 327 )

328

BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

-i^^^rrrs^^^' -

Creel, or Fish-Basket.
(A. B. Shipley & Sou.)

Minnow-Seine.
(A. B. Shipley & Son.)

MISCET.LANEOUS IMPLEMENTS. 329

with the metal-clip, and two leaves of heavy porous cloth
for drying wet flies. It is also furnished with large pockets,
and compartments for leaders, and snelled hooks. It has
a capacity for one hundred flies, and is made of a uniform
quality, which is of the highest grade.

The "Holberton" fly-book, of Conroy, Bissett & Mal-
leson, is one similar in style and construction, and is a
first rate article. The price of this book depends on the
material used in its construction, its capacity for a greater
or less number of flies, and the length of the book. One
holding four dozen flies is large enough for all practical
purposes in Black Bass angling.

Creel, or Fish-Basket.

For fly-fishing, or bait-fishing, when wading a stream
or fishing from the bank, a creel is very useful and con-
venient for holding the angler's catch. Fish are preserved
in much better shape, condition and appearance by its use,
and it is altogether more satisfactory than the shiftless
way of " stringing " the Bass, and allowing them to be-
come water-soaked and flabby, by immersing the "string"
in the warm and shallow water near the shore, or even
by "towing" them after the angler, if wading.

For Black Bass, the largest Trout-creels will answer
every purpose ; say Nos. 3 or 4, having a capacity of
twenty or twenty-five pounds. The shoulder-strap should
be leather or webbing, with a shoulder-pad, to prevent
cutting or bruising the shoulder.

Fish-baskets or creels should always be well washed,
and carefully dried after use, to keep them clean and

sweet. When w'ashing them, a little carbonate of soda or

28

330

BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

Folding Canvas Creel.
(Abbey & Imbrie.)

Canvas Creel, Folded.

MISCELLANEOUS IMPLEMENTS. 331

carbolic acid should be added to the water to destroy the
" ancient and fish-like smell."

A new and very desirable article in this way is the
" Patent Folding Canvas Creel," devised and made by
Abbey <fe Imbrie. It is constructed of water-proof canvas,
and is capable of being folded into a small and compact
package. When in use it has flexible ribs for keeping it
in shape, which are rendered practicable by the light
metal stretcher, which also serves to fasten down the top.
Around the lower edge is a row of holes, with brass eye-
lets, for the purpose of ventilation and drainage. It
answers the purposes of its construction admirably. Size
C is best adapted for Black Bass fishing, it being esti-
mated to hold twenty pounds.

The Laxding-Net.

For boat fishing, the landing-net should have a long
handle, which is best when made in two pieces, with a
strong brass ferrule joint. It should be as light as possible,
and on this account bamboo cane is the very best material
for the handle. The rim or ring should be ten or twelve
inches in diameter, of brass, solid or folding; the latter
are the most portable and convenient, and are made with
two or more hinge joints. The net should be deep, and
of a tolerably coarse mesh ; linen is the most durable
material, though cotton will answer.

For fishing from the bank, or for \vading the stream, a
short-handled Trout-net is to be preferred, as it is more
easily carried and answers every purpose better than the
long-handled net. Those with oval, wooden rims are the
lightest, and are as good as any. The long-handled net

332

BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

Short-Handled Landing-Net.
(A. B. Shipley & Son.)

Long-Handled Landing-Net.
(Conroy, Bissett & Malleson.)

MISCELLANEOUS IMPLEMENTS. 333

will answer here by using but one joint of the handle.
There should be a blunt hook, or ring, at the end of the
handle for attaching to the creel-strap, so as to leave both
hands free for casting, and playing the fish.

Minnow-Seines and Nets.

For catching minnows for bait-fishing, the most expe-
ditious way is to use a linen or cotton minnow-seine, from
three to five feet wide, and from five to fifteen feet long.
These seines can be purchased mounted or unmounted.
The mountings consist of cork and lead-lines, with their
floats and sinkers, and two handles or brails. The mesh
should be quite fine.

A very simple and convenient contrivance for the same
purpose — and much similar to one used by myself — is thus
described by a gentleman of Baltimore, Maryland, in
" Forest and Stream : "

As I hear so many fishermen complaining that they can not get
a net suitable to catch minnows, that is easily carried, I thought it
might be of service to the fishing fraternity in general if I were to
describe a net of my own invention that is easily carried in the
pocket, can be adjusted in a minute, and has never failed to jjro-
vide me with plenty of minnows. I take a bung or round block of
wood of two and one-half to three inches in diameter, and bore four
holes opposite to each other in the edge of it. I then insert a piece
of umbrella-rib, about twelve to fourteen inches long, in each hole.
The holes must be made deep and small enough for the wire to fit
tight. The paragon wire is the best. I leave the end of the rib
that has the little eye in it outside. I then lay the bung and wires
on a square piece of mosquito-netting, and stretch it and sew it
firmly at the four corners to the eyes in the ribs. In the center of
the bung I put a screw-eye, and in the center of the mosquito-net
sew a piece of string, leaving ends about eight inches long. Any

334

BOOK OP^ THE BLACK BASS.

Patent Adjustable Float.
(Bradford & Anthony.)

Brass Box Swivels.

2 .3 -^5

Patent Adjustable Sinkers.
(Uradford & Anthony.)

MISCKLI.ANKOUS IMPLKM KNTS 335

straight, still" stick jiickcd up on the sliorc serves as a liandle, being
made fast to the net by a stront;; piece of twine tlirough the screw-
eye, and witii a piece of bread tied in the net with the string, and
perhaps a small, flat stone to make it sink, it is ready to catch min-
nows. They will come over the net for the bread, and when it is
raised up quickly the resistance of the water causes it to belly, and
the minnows will not get out. When bait enough has been taken,
I pull the wires out of the holes, droj) the bung into the net, and roll
it up on the wires.

Another very simple and effective device for tlic same
purpose is thus described by a well-known angler, of
Nashville, Tennessee, in the "Chicago Field:"

This simple contrivance astonishes all who see it, because they
naturally ask the question, how it was that no one ever thought
of it before? A globe of wire netting split in two, fastened at the
bottom by hinges, and attached to a stick by strings from th6 top —
this is the whole affair, save a small place in the center for bait.
The two hemispheres arc so arranged as to open partially from their,
own weight, if allowed to touch bottom; or they can be separated
by pulling one of the strings above mentioned. As minnows are
generally found in shallow, clear water, it is easy to see when
enough have entered the trap, to close and draw it out. This
invention does away entirely with seining, and the disagreeable
necessity of wading in the water. The pole or stick upon which
the trap is hung may be made of any desired length, and jointed,
thus permitting the entire apparatus to be packed in a small space.
Those of our Nashville anglers who have seen it are of the opinion
that nothing else will be used for catching minnows, once they be-
come known.

Floats, or Corks.

The float should never be used when it can be dispensed
with, as it is detrimental to good casting, and is always in
the way. It becomes necessary, however, in shallow
streams, where the -bottom is covered with snags, roots,

336 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

weeds and other obstacles, and may be used in still-fishing,
where crawfish, frogs or helgramites are used as bait ; but,
when used, it should be as small as possible, consistent
with the weight of the sinker required, and should be em-
ployed for the sole purpose of keeping the hook away from
the bottom, and not as an object of intense and constant
observation to indicate a bite.

An egg-shaped, oval, long or barrel-shaped cork-float
may be used : or, still better, perhaps, a swan-quill or por-
cupine-quill float may be employed with advantage, in sit-
uations referred to above.

The best of all, lu^wever, and the only real improvement
ever made in fishing-floats, is the "Patent Adjustable En-
ameled Float." This handy article, instead of the usual
ring and quill slide, has spiral rings of wire at each end
of the float, for ready attachment or detachment to or from
the line without removing the bait or hook. The attach-
ment is made in a moment to any portion of the line; and,
when attached, can be moved up or down the line at will,
and will remain stationary wherever placed. These floats
are hollow, quite light, and well finished. To those an-
glers who are partial to the use of a float, it is an inven-
tion of great merit and advantage.

The Swivel.

A brass box-swivel should always be employed in bait-
fishing for Black Bass. It prevents, in a great measure,
the twisting, kinking and snarling of the line, so annoying
to the angler. In rod-fishing, the smallest sizes — Nos. 5
or 6 — are large enough ; and, usually, no additional weight
or sinker will be required. The line should be made fast

MISCELT.ANEOUS IMPLEMENTS. 337

to one ring, and the snell of the hook attached to the
other. In trolling, two swivels can be used with advan-
tage— one attached to the snell of the hook or spinner,
and the other attached to the line some two or three feet
above. In trolling with the hand-line, larger swivels may-
be used — as Nos. 2 or 3. Brass swivels should always be
used, as they do not rust, a strong objection to steel swivels.
When sinkers are used in addition, they should be attached
about a foot above the swivel.

Sinkers.

Generally, in Black Bass angling, no sinker, in addition
to the swivel, is necessary, the latter being heavy enough
to keep the live bait beneath the surface. But there are
cases and times when the sinker is brought in requisition;
for example, when the minnows used for bait are large and
strong and keep on the surface, or where the stream is quite
rapid or current swift.

When the ordinary ringed-sinker is used without a
swivel, the line should be tied in one ring, and the snell
of the hook looped in the other. The smallest-sized
sinker is usually heavy enough, though sometimes a larger
size is necessary. Buckshot or small bullets should not be
used when the oval sinker can be had, as they offer too
much resistance to the water, and often cause the line to
twist or kink.

The "Patent Adjustable Sinker," with spiral rings like
the adjustable float, is the best form of sinker to use, and
should take the place of the old-fashioned ringed leads.
The simplicity and effectiveness of the device by wliich

they can be put on and taken off the line, without dis-

29.

338

BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

MS

MISCELLANEOUS IMPLEMENTS. 339

turbing hook or bait, should receive the approval of all an-
glers, and render their adoption universal. They insure
neatness and dispatch, qualities not to be despised in angling.

Clearing-Ring.

The hook, in angling, often becomes fast or foul in
snags, roots, rooks or grass, and frequently is thereby lost
or broken, to the disgust of the angler. By the employ-
ment of a clearing-ring the hook can almost invariably be
easily detached from these obstructions without damage.
These are rings made expressly for the purpose, composed
of brass or iron, with a hinge to admit of their being
readily adjusted to the line. The method of using them
is as follows :

The ring is opened at the hinge and the line encircled,
when the ring is again closed, and allowed to run down
the line to the point of obstruction; the weight of the ring
detaches the hook, 'when it is drawn up, a hand-line being
attached to the ring for this purpose. If the hook is very
firmly fastened to the root or snag, the ring is raised a few
feet by its cord and allowed to drop suddenly, when its
weight will usually clear the hook. A very good substi-
tute for the clearing-ring, and one easily obtained, is the
ordinary bar of lead, used for making bullets. A hole is
bored in the flat bar, through which the hand-cord is fast-
ened. When used, the bar is bent around the fishing-line,
forming a ring, and is very easily attached or detached.

DiSGORGERS.

Very often a Bass is hooked in the gullet, and some^
times in the stomach, though the angler should never

340 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

allow him to gorge the bait to this extent. It is best to
strike quickly, so as to hook him in the mouth. In the
event of the Bass swallowing the hook, is is necessary to
cut out or tear out the hook, and often at the cost of
scratching or lacerating the angler's fingers ; and espe-
cially is this apt to be the case when a Pickerel or Pike-
perch is thus hooked, their long and sharp teeth being as
sharp as needles.

To avoid this unpleasant feature, a disgorger is very
handy and efficacious. It consists of a stout piece of
wire, six or eight inches in length, with one end flat-
tened ; in this flat end a notch is filed, with cutting or
sharp edges, when, by pushing this sharp notch along the
hook, the latter is easily detached or cut out.

A very convenient tool is made by Abbey & Imbrie,
No. 48 Maiden Lane, New York City, and designed
especially for this purpose, a cut of which is here ])re-
sented, which explains itself. In addition to the dis-
gorger, it has a strong, sharp blade, which can be made
available for many purposes, not the least of which is to
kill the fish as soon as caught, by severing the spinal cord
at the junction of the head and body. This should
always be done by the humane angler, for two good and
sufficient reasons: It immediately puts an end to the suf-
fering of the fish, and keeps the flesh firm and in good
condition.

Minnow-Pails.

To the bait-fisher for Black Bass, the proper form of
bait-can is quite an important item. There are two gen-
eral styles, one for boat-fishing, and one for stream-fishing.

The best plan for a minnow-bucket for boat-fishing, and

MISCELLANEOUS IMPLEMENTS. 341

where a large pail can be utilized, is to have two pails, one
fitting within the other. This form of pail is generally
and conveniently made as follows:

The outer bucket is of heavy tin, and made round, with
a capacity of I'rom two to five gallons ; a stout wire bail or
handle is attached, with a wooden or tin hand-piece. The
inner bucket is also made of tin, to fit somewhat loosely
in the outer one; but the top of this bucket should be an
inch below the top of the outer pail. It has an opening,
fitted with a lid on top, through which the hand can be
readily inserted ; and has a tin-hasp and loop for fastening
securely. In addition, there is a flat tin-handle, in the
form of an arch, on the top of the lid, by which the inner
pail can be easily lifted out.

The inner pail is freely perforated on the top, bottom
and sides, so that, upon raising it, the water leaves it
rapidly, and a minnow can thus be readily selected.
Whenever necessary, the inner pail can be taken out, the
top securely fastened by the hasp and loop, and the pail
sunk in the Avater to revive the minnows, while the angler
is taking his lunch or siesta. Both pails should be well
painted, inside and out. Sometimes the lower half of the
inner pail is formed of copper or galvanized iron Avire-
gauze.

For fishing in a stream, where the angler is a-foot, a much
smaller and lighter bucket must be used, on the score of por-
tability and general convenience. In this case, the bucket
is made single, usually, and of an oblong or oval shape,
to admit of its being more readily carried. It is fitted
with a handle or bail, and the top is soldered in, an inch
or two below the rim of the bucket; and this top only is
perforated. There is also a lid in the top, which is usually

342

BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

MISCELLANEOUS IMPLEMENTS. 343

secured by a bolt of stout wire. A double pail, the iuucr
one being made principally of copper or galvanized iron
wire-cloth, would be vastly more convenient, without add-
ing much to the weii>:ht.

The English style of bait-kettle is made single, with
perforated top, and is formed round but tapering, being
broad at the bottom, and narrow at the top. Sometimes
they are made square, with the top formed of woven wire-
cloth.

Mr. J. C. Hitchcock, of Oconomowoc, Wisconsin, has
patented and manufactures a very convenient minnow-
bucket for boat-fishing. The outside bucket is of heavy
tin, oval in shape, and is divided into two compartments
by a central partition. One of these compartments is a
double-walled refrigerator for holding ice and the angler's
luncheon, while the other contains an inner minnow-
bucket composed principally of heavy copper wire gauze;
there is an attachment for aerating the watei", which, with
the coldness imparted to it by the ice chamber, keeps the
minnows lively and strong.

Wading Pants and Stockings.

Wading pants or stqckings, rubber boots or leggins, are
indispensable to the angler's comfort and well-being in
stream-fishing, either for fly-fishing or bait-fishing. Rub-
ber hip-boots have been much used for this purpose, but
they do not wear well, and are heavy and clumsy. Mack-
intosh and luster wading-pants and leggins are now fur-
nished at a moderate price, and are much to be • preferred,
being light and very serviceable. They are made with
stocking feet, in which case a pair of brogans, or old shoes,
must be worn, and this is much the best plan for wading.

344

BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

O
o

a

Leather Hod and Reel Cases.

(Thos. H. Chubb.)

MISCELLANEOUS IMPLEMENTS. 345

They are also furnished with boots attached, with cork or
rubber soles, and are very durable.

No stream-fisher's outfit is complete without these con-
veniences, which are now made by the Goodyear Rubber
Manufacturing Company, perfectly reliable, waterproof,
and fully equal to the best English goods. The Mackin-
tosh goods of this Company are formed with a layer of solid
rubber between two outer layers of stockinet, or other
light and porous cloth, rendering them light, pliable, pioof
against cracking or breaking, and thoroughly waterproof.

Rod and Reel Cases.

Leather cases for the rod and reel are very convenient
and desirable articles, especially for the angling tourist.
A good and highly-prized rod or reel should have the best
care ; and a rod, especially, is liable to serious injury when
protected only by a common canvas cover.

Thomas H. Chubb, of Post Mills Village, Vermont, the
well known manufacturer of angler's goods, makes a spe-
cialty of leather rod and reel cases. They are made of
heavy bridle leather, with handle, and if required, a pad-
lock. The rod cases are made to hold one or niore rods.
To the angler who delights in completeness of outfit, I can
cheerfully recommend these useful articles. They will be
duly appreciated by any angler who has ever made an ex-
tended trip to the woods, lakes, or streams by the usual
modes of conveyance.

PART THIRD.

ANGLING AND FLY-FISHING.

CHAPTER XYIII.

THE PHILOSOPHY OF ANGLING.

"You are assured, though there be ignorant men of another belief, that an-
gling is an art, anil j'ou know tliat art better tlian others ; and that this triitli
is demonstrated by the fruits of that pleasant labor which you enjoy,— when
you purpose to give rest to your mind, and divest yourself of your more seri-
ous business, and (which is often) dedicate a day or two to this recreation."—
IZAAK Walton.

In the days of good old Father Izaak Walton, angling
was, as stated by him in the title of his famous book, the
"contemplative man's recreation." While this is no less
true in our own day, the art of angling has extended its
sphere of usefulness by becoming, not only the recreation
of the contemplative man, but of the active, stirring, over-
worked business and professional man, as well. While in
the comparatively slow-coach days of the quaint Walton
it was rather a recreation of choice, it has, in this age of
steam become, in a measure, one of necessity.

The American idea of rest and recreation seems to have
been based upon the Mosaic law of resting on the seventh,
or last day of the week. A man must first gain a com-
petency, and rest afterwards, even if it took seven times
seven years to gain the first condition — wealth — for then,
only, would he be entitled, or in a proper condition to
enjoy his otium cum dignitate.

In the rapid race for wealth and distinction, men labor,
night and day, with mind and muscle, especially during

(349)

350 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

the seasons of business activity. But too often, alas, they
kibor in vain, and find that the " bubble reputation," or
the " wealth that sinews bought," has in a moment been
swept away, after years of toil and anxiety. Or, if they
make their footing sure, they find, too often, that the re-
sult has only been attained at the expense of a permanent
impairment of health, for which the dearly bought treasure
is but a sorry recompense; and the oft-imagined and fondly
looked for goal, of a life of peace and quiet and the en-
joyment of the hard-earned competency, has been realized
to be one of short continuance, or of long bodily suffering.

To keep pace with the rapid strides of trade and traffic,
as much labor is now^ performed in one day, as was
formerly done in a week. Consequently, between the
busy seasons, or " heats," in this race for wealth and place,
men find it absolutely necessary — not so much from choice,
as necessity — to rest and recuperate, and build up the ex-
hausted energies, the tired brain and rekixed muscles, and
to gird up the loins for renewed efforts.

The necessity being acknowledged, the question then
arises: in what way can this rest and recreation of the
muscular and nervous tissues of the body be best attained?
When men think of rest and relaxation, their thoughts
turn naturally to the woods, to the fields, to running streams
and quiet lakes, or the sea-shore. If it is simply a Sunday
stroll, their steps naturally and irresistibly lead them to
green fields, or the river side ; or a drive along the
country road with its hedges, and birds, and crossing
brooks. If it is a day's holiday, it must be a picnic in
the grand old woods, and near a lake, or stream, or at
least a babbling rill. The verv idea of perfect rest is as-
sociated with mossy banks and cool sparkling waters. It

THE PHILOSOPHY OF ANGLING. 351

is doubtful if there is a sweeter Hue iu huuiau language, or
one more expressive of perfect bliss, of lasting peace, of
complete rest, of true happiness, of quiet contentment, than
that of the Psalmist: "He maketh me to lie down in
green pastures : he leadeth me beside the still waters."

But the question : where can rest be found ? has already
been answered in the crowds of tired pilgrims — they are
called pleasure-seekers, but they are looking for rest — who
are seen each summer-time wending their ways by rail and
steamer, to the mountains, to the sea-shore, to the Adiron-
dacks, to the Great Lake region, to the wilds of Maine
and Canada, to the charming streams and lakelets of Wis-
consin, Michigan, and Minnesota, or simply to "the
country" — any place, in fact, is their Mecca, where may be
found rest and quiet, green fields, green hills, green trees,
and clear, cool water.

Then, the season for angling, coming as it does during
the midsummer vacation, in the pleasantest weather and
during the lull in active business matters, presents at once
the means and the opportunity for enjoyment and rest, for
recreation and peace. Horace Greeley once said to the
writer, that he had been for years eagerly looking forward
to the time when he could lay down his pen, for a few
days, and "go a fishing;" but that time never came dur-
ing his busy life. His dreams of a brief season of what he
considered the very essence of rest and contentment, were
never realized — he died a martyr to an overworked brain.

Rest and recreation to the active mind does not mean
mere idleness, or as it is more poetically expressed : dolee
far niente; this, to many, would be more irksome than the
hardest work. Many men have a horror of going into
the woods, to the wilderness, to the lakes, or the sea-shore,

c52 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

because there is nothing to do, nothing to occupy their
minds, nothing to save them from ennui after the novelty-
wears off. The busy, active man can secure rest only by
diverting the muscular and nervous energies in new and
unaccustomed channels. This may be accomplished, in a
measure, by curds, chess, music, reading, etc., as purely
intellectual recreations; while riding, driving, boating,
yacthing, archery, shooting, etc., furnish ample means for
muscular skill and exercise ; but anfiling brings into play
both the mental and physical capacities. To be a good
angler requires good judgment, much patience, rare skill,
a full share of endurance, and a lively imagination ; the
latter quality is not absolutely essential, but it helps
mightily Avhen "luck" is bad, and on it depends the ses-
thetic and poetical features of the art.

But the persons who are disposed to " take time " to
indulo^e in these or similar recreations, in our countrv, are
quite limited. In England, it is considered part of a gen-
tleman's education to know how to ride, to row, to shoot,
to sail, and to cast a fly, and he is the better for it, mor-
ally, physically, and intellectually. In our own country it
is too often considered "a waste of time" to acquire or
l)ractice these manly and healthful accomplishments. Our
girls may learn music, and dancing, and painting, as means
and acquirements necessary to the securing of a husband,
but any attempt on the part of our boys to learn any of
the manly sports, in a regular and systematic way, must be
frowned down as opposed to all our ideas of thrift and
economy, and a gross misuse of "time." What we need
is more muscular Christianity ; we would then have sounder
minds in sounder bodies.

A few weeks taken from the fifty-two composing the

THE PHILOSOPHY OF ANGLING. 353

venr, and devoted to angling, shooting, boating, or "camp-
ins: ont," would not be missed in the lono; run from the
business man's calender, but, on the contrary, would return
an interest, which, though it could not be computed by
any rate of per centage, would l)e sensibly felt and realized
in a clearer brain, a stronger body, and a better aptitude
for business. The clergyman would acquire broader views
of humanity, and preach better sermons. The physician
would better appreciate, and oftener prescribe, Nature's
great remedies, air, sunshine, exercise, and temperance.
The lawyer's conscience would be enlarged, and his fees
possibly contracted. The poet's imagination would be
more vivid ; the artist's skill more pronounced. Nerve
would keep pace with muscle, and brawn with brain.

I iiave purposely avoided any allusion to the Gipsy
blood inherent in our veins, or the savage traits yet man-
ifest in our flesh, and their liability to crop out, as evi-
denced in our love for Nature and Nature's arts. I do
not look at it in that light. I claim that the more en-
lightened and civilized a nation becomes, the more it is
interested in the works of Nature and her laws; that the
more progress we make in the arts and sciences, and all the
achievements of a high state of civilization, and the more
artificial and advanced we become in our ideas of living —
the more readily we turn for rest and enjoyment, for rec-
reation and real pleasure, to the simplicity of Nature's

resources,

" Knowing that Nature never did betray
The heart that loved her."

Angling is an art, and it is not beneath the dignity of
any one to engage in it, as a recreation. It is hallowed
by " Meek Walton's heavenly memory," and has been

354 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

practiced and commended by some of the best and truest
and wisest men that ever lived; for, as Father Izaak says:
" It is an art, and an art worthy the knowledge and prac-
tice of a wise man." Did the art of angling require an
apologist, I could here produce evidence, in precept and
example, of good and wise men of all ages, from the days
of the Fishers of Galilee down to the present time, up-
holding and commending the moral tendencies and the
healthful influences of the art of angling, and its virtue
of making men better physically, intellectually, and spirit-
ually.

" O, sir, doubt not but that angling is an art," says
Piscator to Venator, " is it not an art to deceive a Trout
with an artificial fly? A Trout that is more sharp-sighted
than any hawk you have named, and more watchful and
timorous than your high-raettled merlin is bold?"

Is it not an art to glide stealthily and softly along the
bank of a stream to just where the wary Bass or timid
Trout is watching and waiting, ever on the alert for the
slightest movement, and keenly alive to each passing
shadow; to approach him unawares; to cast the feathery
imitation of an insect lightly and naturally upon the sur-
face of the water, without a suspicious splash, and without
disclosing to his observant eyes the shadow of the rod or
line; to strike the hook inlo his jaws the instant he un-
suspectingly takes the clever ruse into his mouth ; to play
him, and subdue him, and land him successfully and artis-
tically with a willowy rod and silken line that would not
sustain half his weight out of the water? Is not this an
art? Let the doubter try it.

" Doubt not, therefore, sir, but that angling is an art,"
says Walton, " and an art worth your learning. The

THE PHILOSOPHY OF ANOLING. 355

question is, rather, whether you be capable of learninj^
it?''

Exactly so, Father Izaak ; tlie question is, not merely
"to be or not to be," but whether one is "capable" of
learning it ; for though any one may become a bait-fisher,
it is not every one that can learn the fly -fisher's art ; for,
continues AValton, "he that hopes to be a good angler,
must not only bring an inquiring, searching, observing
wit, but he must bring a large measure of hope and
patience, and a love and propensity to the art itself; but
having once got and practiced it, then doubt not but
angling will prove to be so pleasant, that it will prove to
be, like virtue, a reward to itself."

CHAPTER XIX.

CONDITIONS WHICH GOVEEN THE BITING OF FISH.

"So I have observed, that if it be a cloudy day, and not extreme cold, let
the wind sit in what quarter it will, and do its worst, I heed it not." — Izaak
Walton.

To seek to know all the conditions, positive and hypo-
thetical, qualifying and exceptional, which govern the
"biting" of fish, is about as vain and discouraging a
pursuit as the search for the philosopher's stone.

To know, positively, before leaving one's office, counting-
house, or workshop for a day's outing, that it is the day
of all others of the season, and that the phase of the moon,
the conditions of sky and atmosphere, the direction and
force of the wind, and the temperature and condition of
the water are just right to insure success, and to know just
what bait or fly to use, and in what j)ortion of the stream
to fish, under these conditions, implies a state of knowl-
edge that can never be attained by ordinary mortals ; and
though we are created, " little lower than the angels," it
invcJves a pursuit of knowledge under such extreme diffi-
culties, that even prescience and omniscience are but
ciphers in the total sum, for it leaves out the most im-
portant factor in the calculation — the fish itself.

Yet it is in just this hope of reducing the matter to
the certainty of a mathematical proposition, that some
anglers are continually puzzling their own brains, and
taxing the patience of their angling friends.
(356)

CONDITIONS WHICH GOVERN THE BITING OF FISH. 857

They imat2;ine that fish, somehow, form an e'xception to
the rest of the animal creation, and are governed in their
feeding, or " biting/' by certain laws, as unchanging as
those of the Medes and Persians; and that these immutable
laws have an outward expression in certain states and
conditions of weather and water; and that it is only nec-
essary to ascertain the peculiar combination of wind,
weather and water, under which fish feed, nolens volens,
to be able to eifect their capture easily.

The glorious uncertainty attending the "biting" of fish,
even at apparently fiivorable times, has been observed for
ages, and has invested the gentle art with a glamour, and
an air of mystery, in which the element of chance, or
luck, is a prominent feature. The angler wending his way
homeward is accosted at every turn with the interrogatory
of, "What luck?" while "fisherman's luck" has become
an universal synonym of failure.

Many anglers, in lieu of more cogent reasons, have
conveniently relegated this whole question to " luck,"
and have ceased to trouble themselves much about it,
taking the good with the bad, in a spirit of calm phi-
losophy or in meek submission to the inevitable.

Even while engaged in solitary angling, so conducive
to quiet meditation, the habits and idiosyncrasies of fish
do not often occupy our thoughts, but other and wholly
irrelevant themes. And even with all the information
that can be obtained, by close and careful observation of
the habits of fishes, and the nature of their surroundings,
there is still left much to be explained, and some things
that seem to be beyond our comprehension, which we
might safely leave to chance or luck, until we understand
them better.

358 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

And perhaps it is best so, for there has ever been a
delightful uncertainty attending the angler's art, and
therein lies one of its chiefest charms ; for while it stim-
ulates the angler to renewed effort, it consoles him in
defeat. The pleasures of anticipation have ever exceeded
those of fruition, and ever will while " hope s})rings et'ernal
in the human breast."

The angler spends the evening before his " day's fish-
ing" in overhauling his tackle; polishing the ferrules of
his trusty rod ; oiling his reel ; looking for Aveak places in
his line; arranging, lovingly, his leader, hooks and Hies;
and finds enthusiastic enjoyment in the examination of
his treasures, and in pleasant retrospective and prospective
reveries in connection therewith.

He retires with contented mind, and an innate conscious-
ness of unbounded success on the morrow, and dreams of
arching rod and leaping fish, of mossy banks and mur-
muring streams, of cool shadows and spicy breeze^; and
when morn hath "with rosy hand unbarr'd.the gates of
light," he sallies forth with buoyant footsteps, his breast
swelling with fond anticipation, and in that happy and ex-
pectant state of mind known only to lovers of the angle.

Perhaps he returns at close of day, weary and footsore,
and with an almost empty creel; what matter? All
through the lovely day his spirits have never flagged ; his
last cast was made with even more hope and confidence
than the first. And even though his creel be empty,
his heart is filled with the music of the birds, the purl-
ing of the stream, the fragrance of the flowers, and, above
all, with love for his Creator; and it has set him thinking
of that eternal stream of time clothed with everlasting
groves of never-changing green.

CONDITIONS WHICH GOVERN THE BITING OF FISH. 359

And, then, tlic day has simply been an " unhicky " one
for fishing ; yesterday was no doubt a " good day," and
to-morrow will be better. He finds consolation in ac-
counting for his " ill-luck," and can easily see a reason
fiar it in some peculiar phase of the water, the wind, or
the weather.

Now, while it is not wholly a matter of luck, on one
hand; and while, on the other, it is useless to expect to
obtain an invariable law in respect to the "biting" of
fish, there are many things that we can learn by intelli-
gent observation.

It involves no great comprehension of the sciences of
ichthyology, meteorology, hydrography, entomology and
botany, as professed by some, nor of the mysteries and
hocus-pocus of the art as practiced by others; for there
is often as little reason in the repeated change of a cast
of flies by the scientific fly-fisher, as in spitting on the
bait by his humbler brother; yet both have unbounded
faith in their respective methods, and probably faith has
as much to do with successful angling as any one attribute.

But why do fish eagerly take the bait one day, and
utterly refuse it the next, when, apparently, all other con-
ditions are equal? This is a poser, and has baffled ob-
servant anglers for ages, and will, in all probability, never
be solved satisfactorily. As a short cut to its solution, it
might be said, that they were hungry one day, but not so
the next. Certainly a very reasonable conclusion if it
were sustained by fact, which it is not, if we judge hun-
ger by its usual manifestations ; for fish seem to bite best
on a full stomach, and often refuse the proffered bait on
an empty one; this fact is patent to all observant anglers,
and I have proved it in many instances.

360 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

But let us begin at the beginning.

The great problem of life with fishes seems to be to eaf
and avoid being eaten. Very well. Now, which is the
controlling influence in a fish's mind — if he has any, per-
haps, in deference to authority, we had better call it in-
stinct— his desire to eat, or his desire of self-preservation?
Now, right here, may be involved the fundamental prin-
ciple governing this whole question of a fish's " l)iting."

Let us see. That fish can abstain from solid food for
an indefinite period, procuring some nourishment from the
water they breathe, as in confinement, during hibernation,
and during the breeding season, is well known, and needs
no corroborative evidence here.

That, when they do feed, and the supply of food is
abundant, they completely gorge themselves — some even
ejecting the contents of their stomachs to enjoy the grati-
fication of refilling them — is also an authenticated fact.

When their stomachs are thus filled and gorged with
food, it is reasonable to suppose that, like other preda-
cious animals, they remain listlessly about their haunts,
or retire to some secluded retreat, to digest it at their
leisure; and, during the process of digestion, refuse to
notice their usual food ; for I have frequently observed
Black Bass remain motionless for hours, except a slight
movement of the fins, utterly regardless of the schools
of minnows that were swarming about them, and this at a
season when they usually "bite" the best.

Now, this alternate feasting and fasting may be a nec-
essary habit, to enable fish to meet the exigencies of
spawning, hibernation (in some), and the vicissitudes of
the element in which they live, and the abundance or lack
of food at certain times.

CONDITIONS WHU'lI GOV'ERN THE BITING OF FISH. '.\C}\

Streams are often rendered turbid by heavy rains, and
lakes and ponds by what is tornied "working" or " l)los-
soniing." At such times fish can not see well enough to
find their food or discern their enemies, and consequently
lie secure in their hiding-places. When the water be-
comes clear, they again venture forth to eat and be eaten.

Then, heavy and continued rains, violent winds, and the
change of season, affect the food-supply of fishes, and, con-
sequently, the fishes themselves. These various causes make
fish seem capricious in their time and manner of feeding.

Then, again, while all the conditions may be favorable
for their feeding, they may be deterred from seeking their
food by a fear of enemies; and only venture forth when
the cause of such fear has disappeared, or their qualms of
stomach overcome their prudence.

But little can be learned in this respect from fishes that
are confined in aquaria, or from those that are artificially
cultivated, for these unnatural conditions presuppose a
change in their habits.

We know that fish, in their native waters, are quite
timid, and ever on the alert for danger — a footstep on
the bank, or a shadow cast suddenly on the water, will
cause them to hastily skurry away.

No food, however tempting, can entice them so long as
there is an appearance of danger, and their caution is
then set down as eccentricity.

Now^, all this may, or may not, be ; but it is as reasona-
ble as any other theory ; and this habit of alternate feast-
ing and fasting, for a longer or a shorter time, wnll ex-
plain, in some measure, many of the features in regard to
the uncertainty of " biting" in fishes of inland waters.

As before stated, there is much that can be learned by
31

362 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

closely observing the habits of fish, the character of theii*
haunts, and the nature and variety of their food ; so as to
enable the angler to know, so far as can be known, when
and where to find the fish at certain seasons, or at differ-
ent stages of the water; when they are most inclined to
"bite;" and to know, approximately, what bait to use.

This information can be acquired in no other way but
by patient and continued observation ; and, without it, all
is guess-work. It is just as essential to the angler to
know where to fish, as to know how. If he has a fair
knowledge of the habits of game-fish, he can at once
seek out the most likely places, on lake or stream, by
seeming intuition.

Black Bass are found at different localities in the same
waters, at different seasons, and frequently shift their
quarters many times during the same season, depending
on the nature and locality of their food ; the influences of
wind and weather, condition of the water, etc.

Thus, early in the season, they will be found on streams
in shallow water, just below the rapids, or "riffles," where
the water is warmest, feeding on helgramites and other
larvae, Crustacea, minnows, etc. As the water gets warmer,
they resort to stiller water, under overhanging trees, and
feed upon the surface when the insects and flies appear.
Still later, they seek greater depths, adjacent to shelving
banks, gravelly shoals and rocky ledges, seeking min-
nows, Crustacea, etc.

They may be found one day in water, say ten feet
deep, and the very next day be seen in the shallowest
water near shore. I will mention a striking instance of
this kind:

On one occasion, I went in company with a party of

CONDITIONS WHICH (iOVKIt.N 'rilK lUTING OF FISH. -363

expert anglers to Upper Nemahbin Lake, near Delafield,
Wisconsin. My companion was Captain B., ('hief of Po-
lice of Milwankee City ; and he exhibited considerable
impatience and concern because of the other boats start-
ing ahead of ns over the favorite fishing-ground ; but I
saw that the three other boats were proceeding over this
ground — where, on the preceding day, I had taken a fine
lot of Bass — without getting so much as "a bite."

We followed in their wake, casting right and left along
the edge of the bulrushes, but in vain ; until, finally,
we reached the end of the line of rushes, at the inlet of
the lake. Mr. B was discouraged, but I, on the contrary,
was elated — for I had observed the dorsal fins of numer-
ous Bass in the shallow water between the rushes and the
shore ; and I had observed, further, that the Bass were
feeding on insects and flies which were being blown into
the water by a brisk wind.

I proposed fishing back over the same ground to the
evident disgust of the Captain. But I l^egan casting be-
tween the bulrushes and the shore, in the shallow water
under the lee of the bank, and fastened to a large Bass at
almost the first cast. The Captain followed my lead ; and,
on arriving at our original starting-point, a few hundred
yards distant, we had taken fifteen fine Bass. The three
boats had made the entire circuit of the lake, and the six
anglers in them, fishing on the usual grounds, had not,
altogether, taken half as many fish, when they joined us
for luncheon.

In lacustrine w^aters. Black Bass first appear in the
shallowest portions, where the water is warm, and feed
upon Crustacea, mollusks, etc., retiring to deeper water as
the season advances. When the patches of rushes and

364 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

other aquatic plants are well grown, they will be found
near them, feeding on the minnows and small fry which
congregate there. When the ephemeral flies of early
summer appear, the Bass will then be found where these
are most numerous; and they, at this time, feed at the
surface.

I was once fly-fishing for Bass in the Neenah Channel,
at the outlet of Lake Winnebago, Wisconsin. The stream
was quite swift, with a rocky bottom, and the surface was
covered with jMay-flics, upon which the Bass were feed-
ing. I was enjoying royal sport, using a cast of two
brown hackles, and frequently fastened a fish to each fly.

A boat-load of rustic anglers, with tamarack-poles and
short lines, seeing my success, dropped down abreast of
me, and anchored within fifty feet of my boat. They
were using small minnows for bait, witii heaxy sinkers on
their lines, which, of course, carried the bait to the bot-
tom, where were feeding schools of White Bass (Eoccus
chri/sops). As I took only Black Bass from the surface,
they caught nothing but White Bass at the bottom. They
could not understand it, and I did not enlighten them,
for I had no desire to see my. pet fish "yanked out" by
tamarack-poles and tow-strings. I left them, shortly, in
the glory of "snaking out" — as they called it — the un-
fortunate White Bass, wondering, meanwhile, why they
could not catch Black Bass like " that other fellow."

But do we really know any of the conditions favorable
or unfavorable for angling? We are told tliat fish will
not bite when the water is rendered high and turbid by
freshets; during a thunder-storm, with heavy rain; on
dark, cold days, with a blustering East wind ; and on
bright, still and hot days, when the water lies unruffled,

CONDITIONS WHICH GOVERN THE BITING OF FISH. 365

like a burnished mirror. If tlii.s be so, it is extremely
fortunate, and we can apply tbe rule of exclusion he-re,
and at once dismiss all such occasions from further con-
sideration ; for I take it for granted that the reader has
no desire to ''go a-fishing" at such times.

Fortunately, again, the season for angling is during
pleasant weather, in Spring, Summer and Autumn ; and I
have always observed that the pleasantest days for the an-
gler's comfort, were usually the most propitious and suc-
cessful days for angling.

It matters little, I'or bait-fishing, whether the day be
bright or cloudy, or whether the wind is in the East, West,
North, or South, so long as it is a pleasant wind, and is
not too raw and chilly. I have had "good luck " with
the wind in either (juarter, and from a gentle breeze to
half a gale; on days that were hot, bright, and cloudless,
as well as on those that were cloudy and rather cool.

To be sure, it makes some difference as to the character
of the waters ; the pleasantest days are best for small
streams and shallow waters, while the more unlikely days
would better suit lakes and deep waters ; though in either
case, the pleasantest days, in all respects, are the best.

The fish in deep waters are not so easily affected by the
vicissitudes of weather, as those in waters of shallow depth.
As exceptional cases I might add that I have had as good
success with a reefing east wind, or a half-gale from the
north-west, on lakes of good depth, as at, seemingly, the
most favorable times.

Once, on La Belle Lake, at Oconoraow^oc, Wisconsin, I
went fishing when the wind was blowing quite fresh from
the West. I proceeded to the lower end of the lake, some
three 'miles, when the wind suddenly hauled around to the

366 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

north-west, blowing great guns, and causing the " white-
caps " to roll furiously. It was impossible to make head-
way against it, so I was compelled to anchor, which I did
in a bight of bulrushes, in water from ten to twelve feet
deep, but near a gravelly bar. Here I took, in a little
more than two hours, twenty-five Black Bass, which after-
wards turned the scales at seventy-five pounds. I have
always considered this catch as being one of the best I
ever made. On my return, owing to the high wind and
heavy sea, it was all I could do to keep my boat from
swamping.

On another occasion, on Oconomowoc Lake, I fished at a
rocky bar, which divided the lake into two portions. The
wind was blowing a half-gale from the East, and quite
cool ; the shallow water on the bar was churned and tossed
into billows of seething foam by the higii wind, enabling
me to fish in M'ater but a foot or two in depth ; and in a
short time I took nine Bass, the smallest of which weighed
four pounds. I was then forced to relinquish my sport, as
I had " run out " of minnow\s.

Again, on Genesee Lake, in the same locality, I once
made a good catch under peculiar circumstances. On this
occasion I was "frogging," as this lake, at that time,
was famous for the quantity and quality of its bull-frogs.
After spearing a " good mess" of greenbacks, I was stand-
ing on a sand-bar, which divides the lake into two parts
during low water, and was idly watching the Avaves rolling
up on the bar, which were being driven with great fury
by a strong south-west wind. I chanced to see several
Black Bass, evidently feeding in the surf; and I then be-
gan devising ways and means for their capture.

Near by, was a water-logged boat, in which I saw a

CONDITIONS WHICH (JOVERN THE BITING OF FISH. 367

tamarack polo, and, upon investigation, I fonnd that there
was a short line and hook attached. My })lans were soon
formed. I went to a small hole of water, that I had pre-
viously observed, which was left after the drying up of the
outlet of a marsh at the lower end of the lake, and in
which I had seen a great many small minnows, an inch or
two long. Dipping up a lot in my handkerchief, I took
it by the corners and proceeded along the shore, dipping
up water occasionaWy to keej) the bait alive. On the bar
I scooped a hole in the sand for the bait, filled it with
water and went to fishing. The novelty of the situation,
and my curiosity as to the result of the experiment, quieted
my conscience and justified the employment of such prim-
itive measures. Baiting the hook, I waded into the surf
as far as I could with ordinary boots — for, being early in
the season, the water was quite cold — I was soon pulling
out the Bass, and took in this manner, with a short pole
and six feet of line, fifteen splendid Bass.

In angling, it may be safely accepted as a truism, that
any wind is better than no wind ; a gale being better than
a perfectly still day, especially when the water is clear.
The reason for this is, that the surface of the water being
agitated and ruffled by the breeze, the fish are not so apt
to see the angler.

An east wind is popularly regarded as an unfavorable
wind for fishing, but it is not necessarily so. The opinion
is of English origin, for in the humid climate of Great
Britain an east wind is exceedingly raw, chilly, and disa-
greeable, and is held to be productive of all manner of
evils, being particularly dreaded by sufferers from rheuma-
tism, neuralgia, or gout. The anglers of England, of
course, share in this common detestation of an east wind,

368 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS,

and this prejudice is clearly shown by British writers on
angling, from whom most of our ideas on fishing were
formerly derived.

But it is only after such a wind lias prevailed for several
days, so as to lower the temperature of inland waters, that
it, in any way, affects the " biting " of fish. This, no
doubt, is often the case in Great Britain, and has led to the
erroneous supposition that an east wind, under any and all
circumstances, is most unfavorable fin* the angler; and this
idea has, to a great extent, been tacitly accepted to apply
to our own country as well.

But unless the fish have an inherited traditionary re-
membrance of that "remarkable east wind" which divided
the waters of the Red Sea and enabled Moses and his fol-
lowers to pass over dry-shod, which causes them to be-
come suspicious of every east wind that blows, I can not
conceive how it affects their feeding, except, as stated be-
fore, when it has been of sufficiently long continuance to
cool the water.

Alone: the Atlantic coast of the United States an east
wind is generally held to be unpropitious for fishing ;
but in this case 'post hoc is mistaken for propter hoc; in
other words, the effect is mistaken for the cause. After an
unusually long series of east winds, or easterly gales, the
tides are much affected thereby, and rise much higher, and
spread over more extensive surfaces. The fish, as a matter of
course, take advantage of this state of affairs, and, accord-
ingly, extend their range in quest of food, being rewarded
by great quantities of Crustacea, mollusks, etc., which be-
fore were inaccessible on account of the shallow water.
At such times, the fish arc not found on their usuaK feed-
ing grounds in the tideways, and hence has arisen the er-
roneous idea that they do not feed during an east wind.

CONDITIONS WHICH GOVERN THE BITING OP FISH. 369

Many bait-fishers have an abiding faith in the signs of
the Zodiac in influencing the biting of fish; believing that
when the " sign" is in the feet (Pisces), and also just before
and after, encroaching on the domains of the legs (Aquarius),
and head (Aries), that fish feed better than at other times.
Tliey, of course, always remember the successful occasions
at these periods, but soon forget, or imagine some satis-
factory reason for, the failures; and thus their superstitious
belief seldom weakens.

The moon, likewise, is supposed by many to influence
the feeding offish. In Florida, the opinion is very preva-
lent among hunters and fishermen, that deer, fish, and
other animals feed principally when the moon is above the
horizon, night or day, particularly at moon-rise, moon-
south, and moon-set. This belief also obtains in other
sections of our country, and the adherents to the theory
are, withal, so, consistent, that their faith can not be shaken
by repeated failures, and they seldom hunt or fish except
when the " moon is right."

While I am not a believer in the theory of the moon's
influence over terrestrial objects, I am not prepared to say
that there is nothing whatever in the moon affecting the
feeding of fish ; for while fish certainly feed much at
night, they seem to feed more especially on moonlight
nights. Still, I do not attribute this fact to any influence
possessed by the moon, beyond the light it affords, to enable
the fish to find their prey. I have often observed that
during the season of full-moon, fish were more apt to be
sluggish and off their feed during the day time ; and this
I have always attributed to the fact, that they did their
feeding mostly at nights, at such times. Many anglers
only fish from the last quarter until the new moon.

370 BOOK OP THE BLACK BASS.

A perfect day for fishing, might be described as a warm,
pleasant day, with a balmy, invigorating breeze; a mellow
sunlight, not too bright, produced by a somewhat hazy at-
mosphere, or by drifting clouds ; when the season has
been neither too wet nor too dry ; such a day as makes it
a pleasure for one to breathe, and inhale with delight the
odors and fragrance of forest, field, and stream.

Not a day that produces a feeling of exquisite languor,
and disposes to delicious, dreamy reveries, like the stimu-
lant eifect of an opiate ; but a day when the atmosphere
seems filled with some indescribable aerial stimulant, that
acts upon the brain, nerves, and circulation like sparkling
wine ; that rouses the energies and spurs the nerves, pulses,
and muscles to action ; such a day as makes one desire to
laugh, to sing, to leap, to caper, to race through the mead-
ows, to indulge in sudden impulses, in short, to make one
feel a boy again.

Such a day, when the water is semi-transparent or trans-
lucent, and of such a temperature when it is most pleasant
to bathe in — such a day, I say, is sure to be a satisfactory
one to the angler, and the fish will be pretty sure to bite.

On a day such as I have just described, I once made my
largest catch of Black Bass, though I have always been
opposed to " big catches," on principle ; for 1 hold that
when the sole object in angling is to catch fish as long as
they will " bite," the proceeding leaves the province of
sport, and degenerates into pot-fishing, or, what is worse,
useless and unjustifiable slaughter; much in the same way
that, when an unprincipled merchant, during the war, took
unfair advantage of certain circumstances, and sold goods
at an advance of five hundred per cent., and who, when
afterwards boasting of the fine per centage of profit real-

CONDITIONS WHICH GOVERN THE BITING OF FISH. 371

izcd, was told by a plain-spoken old gentleman that the
transaction passed the limits of per eentage, and entered
the bounds of petit larceny.

But as an honest confession is good for the soul, I will
relate the incident referred to : I was fishing in Okauchec
Tjake, AVisconsin, in company with two friends from Cin-
cinnati, on a really perfect day in July. We had, unfor^
tunately, a bountiful supply of fine minnows for bait, and
after we had taken more than enough fish, I proposed to
stop ; but my friends, to whom the experience was new,
could not be induced to relinquish the exciting sport, so I
continued fishing, under protest, and we took during the
day one hundred and fifty-three Bass, and, with shame do
I confess it, more than one-half — I am afraid to say just
how many more — fell to my rod.

In justice, however, but not as a redeeming feature, I
will state that the fish were not wasted, but a hundred fine
Bass were packed in ice and expressed to friends in Cin-
cinnati, and the balance were distributed among the hotels
of Oconomowoc.

I always look back upon this circumstance with regret,
though I have done penance for the transaction, many a
time and oft, since, by stopping at a dozen Bass, when I
might have taken twice the number.

Some anglers tell us that fish will not bite before a rain ;
others say they will not take a bait during a rain ; and still
others affirm that it is useless to fish after a rain. Now,
while there is a grain of truth in each of these opinions,
yet if we blindly accept all of them and endeavor to follow
them, we shall have no further use for our fishing-tackle.

I do not think that rain, per se, has any influence what-
ever upon the feeding offish. It is, of course, impossible

372 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

for US to judge in this matter by a comparison with terres-
trial creatures ; but, fishes being inhabitants of the watery-
element, it is not reasonable to suppose that a rain makes
any difference with them at all— at the time — thougli they
profit or not, by the subsequent rising and roiling of the
water, more or less, according to circumstances.

The multitudes of insects W'hich are said to be beaten
down from the overhanging trees and from the air, into
the water, during a shower of rain, must be taken cidii
grano sails; for insects, like most other mundane creatures,
know enough to " come in out of the wet." We really
find no mure insects floating on the water during a rain,
than at other times, though it is true that many are col-
lected and swept by rains from the surface of the ground,
and washed into the streiims by swollen brook.s and
branches; but with the insects, go, also, the washings,
debris, and particles of soil to discolor and thicken the
streams, so that the fish may really fast in the midst of
plenty, not being able to see the sudden influx of i'ood by
reason of the turbidity of the water: and, again, it is doubt-
ful if fish feed much on dead insects.

The fish, however, on the other hand, are enabled to ex-
tend their range in foraging for food, during seasons of
hipfh water, when the water has cleared suflficientlv to
allow them to discover it.

I have noticed that fish usually bite better just before a
shower; especially if the weather be murky and warm, and
I think this can be accounted for in this way : It is gen-
erally quite calm, for a longer or shorter time previous to
a summer shower, and the water being still, the fish do
not bite, as they see the angler too distinctly — and this is
why some have said that it is not a good time to fish before

CONDITIONS WHICH GOVERN THE BITING OF FISH. 373

a rain — but iinnicdiatoly preceding the shower, a brisk breeze
usually springs up, rippling the water, and it is at this
time that tish seem to become possessed with a sudden im-
pulse to feed, not on account of the impending rain, how-
ever, as many suppose, but because the angler is hid from
view by the ruffling of the water. Sometimes this breeze
accompanies the rain, and at other times follows the rain,
and in either case the fish Avill bite best while the breeze
continues. When a shower is followed by a calm, fish, of
course, will not bite, in clear water, and as this often hap-
pens, it follows that some anglers hold to the opinion that
they never bite after a rain.

I have tried to impress the reader, all through this
chapter, with the importance of keeping out of sight of the
fish as much as possible, for herein lies the greatest secret
of success in angling; and fish will be found to bite better,
always, when conditions are such as to favor the screening
of the angler from their ever-watchful eyes, and, when, at
the same time, the water is sufficiently clear to enable
them to discern the bait on or beneath the surface.

In fly-fishing, especially, must this caution be exercised
to its fullest extent, for the casts being necessarily much
shorter than in bait-fishing, the angler is more liable to be
seen ; and herein lies the foundation of the opinion, enter-
tained by many, that Black Bass are more uncertain to
rise to the fly than the Brook Trout. I hold that Black
Bass, during the proper season, will rise as readily to the
fly, under the same conditions, as the Trout.

But the fact is, that while the Bass is as wary as the
Trout, he is not so timid. The Trout darts away at the first
glimpse of the angler, while the Bass will hold his ground,
though ready to depart unceremoniously when occasion

374 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

calls, eyeing the angler meanwhile, and entirely ignoring
his best skill, though he cast his feathery lures never so
lightly and naturally. The Bass is too knowing to be
taken in by any such deception so long as he sees the an-
gler at the other end of the rod ; hence, more caution is
really necessary in fly-fishing for Black Bass than for the
Brook Trout.

In regard to the best time of day for angling, there is
not much choice, and it is governed a good deal by the
season of the year, the temperature of the water, and by
the character of the day itself, though, as a rule, fish are
sluggish and off their feed during the middle of the day,
with a bright and warm sun, say from noon until three
o'clock, except early and late in the season, when the water
is still cold, when the middle of the day is often the liest
time.

For bait-fishing, on small streams, the early morning
hours, about sunrise, are often the best; though on large
streams and lakes there is nothing gained by early fishing,
as the fish do not bite w^ell until the sun is several hours
hiffh.

The latter part of the afternoon, until sundown, is often
the best part of the day for the angler. On cloudy days,
however, the middle of the day is often the most favorable,
especially if the weather is rather cool.

For fly-fishing, the early morning hours succeeding sun-
rise, and from an hour or two before sunset until dark, or
with a nenrly full moon, even later, will be found the best
hours for filling the creel.

Of course, all of these times must be governed by con-
ditions of the wind, weather, and water, wiiethcr favorable
or not; for no matter what the hour of the day, it will be

CONDITIONS WHICH GOVERN THE BITING OF FISH. 375

the most successful, when other conditions are most favor-
able, and approach more nearly to the " typical " day for
angling, as described in this chapter, the most prominent
features of which arc pleasant weather, translucent water,
and a fresh breeze.

Thunder, and electrical conditions of the atmosphere, I
leave out of the account altogether, as we have no means
of judging of the influence of so subtile an agent as elec-
tricity on the finny tribe ; nor have I ever observed any
peculiar effect on fishes from these causes, though great
stress is often laid by some anglers on the influence of an
atmosphere surcharged with electricity, whatever that may
mean ; but it is no more reasonable to suppose that fishes
would be disturbed by electrical conditions of the air, than
terrestrial animals would be inconvenienced or otherwise by
electric conditions of water.

But, notwithstanding all of our patient and careful ob-
servations of the habits of fish, their food and their sur-
roundings, and our study of the various, conditions of
wind, weather, and water, there will be days and days in
the experience of every angler, when the fish will utterly
refuse to bite ; and this on such days as the most finished,
practiced, and observant angler would pronounce exceed-
ingly favorable in every particular. At such times one is
forcibly reminded of the analogy existing between the will
of woman and the "biting" of fish, as related in the
familiar lines : —

"For if she will, she will, you may depend on't;
And if she won't, she won't; so there's an end on't."

Every Black Bass angler has seen — where the Avater was
clear enough for observation — the Bass seize his minnow

376 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

through seemingly mere caprice, and, instead of attempting
to gorge it, would take it gingerly by the tail, toy with it,
and finally eject it, or spit it out, as it were; and this would
be repeated several times in succession, or until the an-
gler's patience became exhansted, when, while unjointing
his rod, he would muse upon the waywardness of fish in
general, and would be convinced that Solomon never Ment
a-fishing, or he would have added another item to the
four things too wonderful for his ken, or at least hp.ve sub-
stituted " the way of a fish with a bait," for the less puz-
zling proposition of " the way of a man with a maid."

CHAPTER XX.

THE BLACK BASS AS A GAME FISH.

" He is a flsh that lurks close all winter ; but is very pleasant and jolly after
mid-April, and iu May, and in the hot mouths."— Izaak Walton.

Those who have tasted the lotus of Salmon, or Trout
fishing, in that Utopian clime of far away — while reveling
in its aesthetic atmosphere, and surrounded by a misty halo
of spray from the waterfall, or enveloped by the filmy
gauze and iridescent haze of the cascade — have inscribed
tomes, sang idyls, chanted pseans, and poured out libations
in honor and praise of the silver-spangled Salmon, or the
ruby-studded Trout, while it is left to the vulgar horde of
Black Bass anglers to stand upon the mountain of their
own., doubt and presum])t.ion, and, with uplifted hands,
in admiration and awe, gaze with dazed eyes from afar
upon that forbidden land — that terra incognita — and then,
having lived in vain, die and leave no sign.

It is, then, with a spirit of rank heresy in my heart ;
with smoked glass spectacles on my nose, to dim the glare
and glamour of the transcendent shore ; with the scales of
justice across my shoulder — M. salinoidcs in one scoop and
M. dolomieu in the other — I pass the barriers and confines
of the enchanted land, and toss them into a stream that
has been depopulated of even fingerlings, by the dilettanti
32 (377)

3^8 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS,

of Salmon and Trout fishers; for I would not, even here,
put Black Bass in a stream inhabited by Salmon or Brook
Trout.

While watching the plebeian interlopers sporting in an
eddy, their bristling spines and emerald sides gleaming in
the sunshine, I hear an awful voice from the adjacent
rocks exclaiming: "Fools rush in where angels fear to
tread ! " Shade of Izaak Walton defend us ! While ap-
pealing to Father Izaak for protection, I quote his words :
'" Of which, if thou be a severe, sour complexioned man,
then I here disallow thee to be a competent judge."

Seriously, most of our notions of game fish and fishing
are derived from British Avriters; and as the Salmon and
the Trout are the only fishes in Great Britain worthy of
being called game, they, of course, form the themes of
British writers on game fish. Americans, following the
lead of our British cousins in this, as we were wont to do
in all sporting matters, have eulogized the Salmon and
Brook Trout as the game fish jiar excellence of America,
ignoring other fish equally worthy.

While some claim fi)r the Striped Bass a high place in
the list of game fish, I feel free to assert, that, were the
Black Bass a native of Great Britain, he would rank fully
as high, in the estimation of British anglers, as either the
Trout or the Salmon. I am borne out in this by the
opinions of British sportsmen, whose statements have been
received without question.

W. H. Herbert (Frank Forester) writing of the Black
Bass, says: "This is one of the finest of the American
fresh water fishes ; it is surpassed by none in boldness
of biting, in fierce and violent resistance when hooked, and
by a very few only in excellence upon the board,"

THE BLACK BASS AS A GAME FISH 379

Parker Gilmore ("Ubique") says: "I fear it will be
almost deemed heresy to place this fish (Black Bass) on
a par with the Trout; at least, some such idea I had
when I first heard the two compared; but I am bold, and
will go further. 1 consider he is the superior of the two,
for he is equally good as an article of food, and much
stronger and untiring in his efforts to escape when
hooked."

In a recent issue of the London "Fishing Gazette"
(England), Mr. Silk advertises: "Black Bass {Gri/stcs
nigricans), the gamest of American fish. 300 for sale
(just arrived), length from 3 to 5 inches; 6 months old.
Price, 10s. (12.25) each."

Now, while Salmon fishing is, unquestionably, the highest
branch of pisca' >rial sport; and while Trout fishing in
Canada, Maine, and the Lake Superior region justifies all
the extravagant praise bestowed upon it, I am inclined to
doubt the judgment and good taste of those anglers who
snap their fingers in contempt of Black Bass fishing, while
they wdil wade a stream strewn with brush and logs, catch
a few Trout weighing six or eight to the pound, and call
it the only artistic angling in the w'orld ! While they are
certainly welcome to their opinion, I think their zeal is
worthy of a better cause.

The Black Bass is eminently an American fish, and has
been said to be representative in his characteristics. He
has the faculty of asserting himself and making himself
completely at home wherever placed. He is plucky, game,
brave and unyielding to the last when hooked. He has
the arrowy rush and vigor of the Trout, the untiring
strength and bold leap of the Salmon, while he has a sys-
tem of fighting tactics peculiarly his own.

380 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

He will rise to the artificial fly as readily as the Salmon
or the Brook Trout, under the same conditions; and will
take the live minnow, or other live bait, under any and
all circumstances favorable to the taking of any other fish.
I consider him, iiicJi for inch and pound for 'pound, the
gamest fish that swims. The royal Salmon and the
lordly Trout must yield the palm to a Black Bass of equal
iceigld.

That he will eventually become the leading game fish
of America is my oft-exprcsscd opinion and firm belief.
This result, I think, is inevitable ; if for no other reasons,
from a force of circumstances occasioned by climatic con-
ditions and the operation of immutable natural laws, such
as the gradual drying up, and dwindling away of the small
Trout streams, and the consequent decrease of Brook Trout,
both ill quality and quantity; and by the introduction of
predatory fish in waters where the Trout still exists.

Another prominent cause of the decline and fidl of the
Brook Trout, is the erection of dams, saw-mills and fac-
tories upon Trout streams, which, though to be de])lored,
can not be prevented; the march of empire and the
progress of civilization can not be stayed by the honest,
though powerless, protests of anglers.

But, while the ultimate fate of the Brook Trout is sealed
beyond peradventure, we have the satisfaction of knowing,
that, in the Black Bass we have a fish equally worthy,
both as to game and edible qualities, and which, at the
same time, is able to withstand, and defy, many of the
causes that will, in the end, elfect the annihilation and ex-
tinction of the Brook Trout.

Mr. Charles Hallock, the well-known author, angler,
and journalist, says: —

THE BI^ACK BASS AS A GAME FISH. 381

No doubt the Bass is the appointed successor of the Trout: not
througli heritage, nor selection, nor by interloping, but by fore-
ordination. Truly, it is sad to contemplate, in the not distant
future, the extinction of a beautiful race of creatures, whose at-
tributes have been sung by all tlie poets; but we regard the
inevitable with the same calm philosophy with which the astronomer
watches the burning out of a world, knowing that it will be suc-
ceeded by a new creation.

As we mark the soft vari-tinted flush of the Trout disappear in
the eventide, behold the sparkle of the coming Bass as he leaps into
the morning of his glory! We hardly know which to admire the
most — the velvet livery and the charming graces of the departing
courtier, or the flash of the armor-plates on the advancing warrior.
No doubt the Bass will prove himself a worthy substitute for his
predecessor, and a candidate for a full legacy of honors.

No doubt, when every one of the older States shall become as
densely settled as Great Britain itself, and all the rural aspects of
the crowded domain resemble the suburban surroundings of our
Boston ; when every feature of the pastoral landscape shall wear the
finished appearance of European lands; and every verdant field
be closely cropped by lawn-mowers and guarded by hedges ; and
every purling stream which meanders through it has its water-
bailiff, we shall still have speckled Trout from which the radiant
spots have faded, and tasteless fish, to catch at a dollar per pound
(as we already have on Long Island), and all the appurtenances
and appointments of a genuine English Trouting privilege and a
genuine English "outing."

In those future days, not long hence to come, some venerable
piscator, in whose memory still lingers the joy of fishing, the brawl-
ing stream which tumbled over the rocks in the tangled wildwood,
and moiste'ned the arbutus and the bunchberries which garnished
its banks, will totter forth to the velvety edge of some peacefully-
flowing stream, and having seated himself on a convenient point in
a revolving easy chair, placed there by his careful attendant, cast
right and left for the semblance of sport long dead.

Hosts of liver-fed fish will rush to the signal for their early morn-
ing meal, and from the center of the boil which follows the fall of
the handsful thrown in, my piscator of the ancient days will hook a

382 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

two-pound Trout, and play him hither and yon, from surface to
bottom, without disturbing the pampered gormands which are
gorging themselves upon the disgusting viands ; and when he has
leisurely brought him to hand at last, and the gillie has scooped
him witli his landing-net, he will feel in his capacious pocket for
his last trade dollar, and giving his friend the tij), shuffle back to
his house, and lay aside his rod forever.

I
Rev. Myron H. Reed, an enthusiastic angler, who fol-
lows the example, in a double sense, of those disciples,
who, being fishermen of the waters, became also fishers
of men, ventures this prediction : —

This is probably the last generation of Trout fishers. The chil-
dren will not be able to find any. Already there are well-trodden
paths by every stream in INIaine, in New York and in Michigan. I
know of but one river in North America by the side of which you
will find no paper collar or other evidences of civilization ; it is the
Nameless Eiver.

Not that Trout will cease to be. They will be liatchcd by
machinery, and raised in ponds, and fattened on chopped liver, and
grow flabby and lose their spots. The Trout of the restaurant will
not cease to be. lie is no more like the Trout of the wild river
than the fat and sohgless reed-bird is like the bobolink. Gross
feeding and easy pond-life enervate and deprave him.

The Trout that the children will know only by legend is the gold-
sprinkled, living arrow of the Whitewater — able to zig-zag up the
cataract, able to loiter in the rapids — whose dainty meat is the
glancing butterfly.

But is the Black Bass worthy to succeed and supersede
the speckled beauty of the cool mountain streams, as the
game-fish of American waters ? Let us see —

Reader, go witli me
This perfect morning in the leafy June,
To yon pool at the gurgling rapid's foot —
Approach witli caution; lot your tread he soft;

THE BLACK BA8.S AS A GAME FISH. 383

Bewaro tlie l)ending 1)iis1r's on the brink;
Touch no branch, nor twi^, nor leaf disturb,
For the tinny tribe is wary.

Rest we here, awhile.
Behold the scene ! Above the ripple,
Sparkling and dancing in the morning sun.
At your feet — the blue-eyed violet, shedding
Sweet perfume, and nodding in the breeze.
The red-bird, ablaze, and with swelling throat
Chants loud his song, in yonder thick -set thorn.
The dreamy, droning hum of insects' wings,
Mingles with the rustling of the quivering leaves.
On the gravelly shoal, in the stream, below —
Sleek, well-fed cattle contented stand,
Beneath the spreading beech.

Across the narrow stream,
Leans a giant sycamore, old and gray.
With scarr'd arms stretching o'er the silent pool;
And gnarl'd and twisted roots bared by the wash
And ripple, for, lo these hundred years.
The bubbles of the rapid play hide and seek
Among their arching nooks.

Beneath those bare roots,
With watchful eye, proud monarch of the pool,
A cunning Bass doth lie, on balanced tin,
In waiting for his prey.

Now, with supple,
Yielding rod, and taper'd line of silk ;
With mist-like leadei", and two small flies —
Dark, bushy hackles both — I make a cast.
With lengthen'd line I quickly cast again,
And just beneath the tree the twin-like lures
As light as snow-flakes fall, and gently linger, —
Half-submerged, — like things of life, obedient still
To slightest tension of line and rod.

Look ! Saw you that gleam
Beneath the flood ? A flash — a shadow — ■

384 EUUK OF THE ELxVCK BASS.

Then a swirl upon the surface of the pool ?
My hand responsive to the sudden thrill,
Strikes in the steel ; the wary Bass is hook'd.
Witli light'ning speed he darts away toward his
Ark of refuge — his lair beneath the roots.

The singing reel,
And hissing line, proclaim him almost there,
When I " give the butt." The faithful rod,
In horse-shoe curve, now checks his headlong flight.
Egad ! he tugs and pulls right lustily ;
But still the barb is there. The rod now bending
Like a reed, resists the tight'ning strain, and
Turns him in his course.

In curving reaches.
Back and forth, he darts in conscious strength ;
Describing arcs and segments in the shadows
Of the ruffled pool. Ha ! nobly done I
With a mighty rush he cleaves the crystal flood,
And at one bound, full half a fathom in
The realm above, he takes an an-ial flight;
His fins, extended with bristling points;
His armor, brightly flashing in the sun ;
Shaking, in his rage, liis wide-extended jaws,
To rid him of the hook.

Gracefully, now, I lower
The pliant rod, in courtesy to the brave;
The line, relieved of steady strain, bafiles
The wily Bass ; the hook holds fast and firm.
Back he falls with angry splash, to the depths,
For friendly aid of snag, or stone, or root
Of tree — for thus, my friend, he oft escapes,
By fouling line, or hook. But, he never sulks !
Not he ; while life remains, or strength holds good,
His efforts are unceasing.

Now up the stream —
Now down again — I have him well in hand;
Reeling in, or giving line ; fast and slow, —

THE BLACK BASS AS A GAME FISH. 385

High and low, — the steady strain maintaining;
The good rod swaying like a rush, as he
Surges through the flood.

Another leap !
Ye gods, how brave ! Like a lion shaking
His shaggy mane, he dives below again.
Did you mark, my friend, his shrewd intent,
As he fell across the line ? If he then
Had found it stretched and tense, his escape
Was surely made. But the tip was lowered;
And with yielding line, the hook still held him fast.

Now, truly, friend, he
Makes a gallant fight ! In air, or water,
All the same, his spiny crest erect,
He struggles to the last. No sulking here ;
But like a mettl'd steed, he champs the bit.
And speeds the best with firm-held, tighten'd, rein.
Now down the stream, he's off again, like shaft
From long-bow swiftly sped — his last bold spurt —
The effort cost him very dear ; his strength
Is ebbing fast.

In decreasing circles
Now he swims, and labors with the tide.
As I reel the line, he slowly yields.
And now turns up his breast-plate, snowy white —
A vanquish'd, conquer'd knight.

Now, my friend.
The landing-net ; 'neath the surface hold it.
With firm and cautious hand. There, lift him
Gently out ; and as gently lay him down.
His bright sides rival the velvet sward, in
Kich and glossy green.

See the great rent
The hook hath made ! How easily 'tis withdrawn I
You marvel how I held him, safe? By the
Equal and continued strain of willowy rod,
And ever faithful reel.
33

386 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

Valiant, noble Bass !
Fit denizen of the brawling stream ! Thy
Last fight is ended — thy last race is run !
Thy once lov'd pool 'neath the sycamore's shade,
Thy fancied sti'onghold 'neath its tangled roots,
Shall know thee no more.

Place him in thy creel;
Lay him tenderly on a bed of ferns,
Crisp, green and cool with sparkling, morning dew-
A warrior in repose!

[In the preface I have stated that the reader need not
look for rhetorical efforts nor poetic descriptions in this
book, for I make no pretense to a possession of the " di-
vine afflatus ; " it is hardly necessary, therefore, to say
that the foregoing description of the " Capture of the
Bass" forms no exception to that statement, for I am
fully aware that it is faulty both in rhythm and measure.

The description was originally written as' plain prose,
but it read so much like an affectation, or an attempt to
be poeticai, that I considered it the least evil to put it in
its present form ; which I did by the changing of less
than a dozen words. The charitable reader will there-
fore please regard it, and read it, as plain prose, while
the hypercritic will please consider the (poetical) feet de-
veloped rather (as in the case of the Bass) as fins, which
will place it beyond the pale of critique.]

CHAPTER XXI.

FLY-FISHING.

" And now, scholar, my direction for fly-fishing is ended with this shower,
for it has done raining."— Izaak Walton.

Artificial fly-pishing is the most legitimate, scien-
tific and gentlemanly mode of angling, and is to be greatly
preferred to all other ways and means of capturing the
finny tribe. It requires more address, more skill, and a
better knowledge of the habits of the fish and his sur-
roundings than any other method.

Fly-fishing holds the same relation to bait-fishing that
poetry does to prose ; and, while each method will ever
have its enthusiastic admirers, only he who can skillfully
handle the comely fly -rod, and deftly cast the delicate fly,
can truly and fully enjoy the aesthetics of the gentle art.
As the lover naturally "drops into poetry" to express the
ardent feelings of his soul, "with a woful ballad made
to his mistress' eyebrow," so the real lover of nature and
the finny tribe as naturally takes to fly-fishing, and finds
liquid poems in gurgling streams, and pastoral idyls in
leafy woods.

A friend in Texas, to whom I sent a bass-fly (an Abbey),
and who had never seen a " fly " before, enthusiastically
declared it to be " a fish-hook poetized," and thought that
a " Black Bass should take it through a love of the beauti-
ful, if nothing else." Not only the fly, but every imple-
ment of the fly-fisher's outfit is a materialized poem.

(387)

388 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

Fly-fishers are usually brain-workers in society. From
time immemorial the fraternity has embraced many of the
most honored, intellectual and cultured members of the
liberal professions and arts. Along the banks of purling
streams, beneath the shadows of umbrageous trees, or in
the secluded nooks of charming lakes, they have ever
been found, drinking deep of the invigorating forces of
nature — giving rest and tone to overtaxed brains and
wearied nerves — while gracefully wielding the supple rod,
the invisible leader, and the fairy-like fly.

Oh ! how the sluggish pulses bound, the deadened nerves
thrill, and the relaxed muscles quicken, responsive to the
inspiration of the electric rise of the gamey denizens of the
stream ; and oh, how the buried forces of life are resur-
rected, renewed and strengthened l)y the hopes, and fears,
and struo'crlfts, of the contest which follows! And when
at last the brave beauty has been lovingly deposited in
the creel, the restored angler feels that he has won a
double victory ; for, in the death of the fish, he sees re-
newed life for himself.

But the true fly-fisher, who practices his art con (tmore,
does not delight in big catches, nor revel in undue and
cruel slaughter. He is ever satisfied with a moderate creel,
and is content with the scientific and skillful capture of a
few good fish. The beauties of nature, as revealed in his
surronndings — the sparkling water, the shadow and sun-
shine, the rustling leaves, the song of birds and hum of
insects, the health-giving breeze — make up to him a meas-
ure of true enjoyment, and peace, and thankfulness, that is
totally unknown to the slaughterer of the innocents, whose
sole ambition is to fill his creel and record his ca})tures by
scores; and who realizes naught in his surroundings but

FLY-FISHING. 389

the liot sun, slippery roeks, baffling winds, and the annoy-
ance of overhanging trees and bushes. The time is com-
ing when sucl> an angler will receive, as well as merit, the
scorn and contempt of all good and true disciples of the
gentle art.

Rigging the Cast.

By a reference to the chapters devoted to the imple-
ments of angling, the reader will obtain a full description
of those used in fly-fishing, which are the fly-rod, the click-
reel, the tapered fly-line, the leader, the fly, the fly-book,
the creel, the landing-net, and the useful adjuncts, for
stream-fishing, of wading-pants or stockings; and, by
referring to the pages on knots, the following directions
for rigging the cast will be rendered more intelligible :

A few snelled Sproat or O'Shaughnessy hooks should be
carried in the fly-book, to use with such natural baits as
grasshoppers, beetles or dragon-flies, in case the artificial
fly does not prove successful. They are to be used in the
same manner as artificial flies.

The beginner being now provided with all the tools, it
is in order to put his rod together, attach reel, reel-line,
ajid cast of flies, and proceed to business. In rigging the
cast, if the leader is provided with loops at each end, and
also loops for drop-flies, proceed as follows : To the small
end of the leader attach the stretcher or tail-fly by passing
the loop of the leader through the loop of the snell and
over the fly, then draw together. Three or four feet from
the tail-fly attach the dropper, or bob-fly, in the same man-
ner; that is, put the loop of the snell over the loop of the
leader, and push the fly through the latter loop and draw
tight ; or, if the leader is not furnished with loops for this

390 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

purpose, slip a knot of the leader (about three or four feet
from the tail-fly) apart, and, after making a round knot in
the end of the snell of the fly, put it through the opened
knot of the leader and draw together; this will hold firm,
and the dropper-fly will stand at right angles from the
leader.

If, however, the gut-lengths of the leader are tied by
hard, close knots, instead of the slip-knot or doul)le
water-knot, then the snell of the dropper must be attached
close to and above a knot of the leader, by a single knot
or half-hitch, a round knot having previously been made
in the end of the snell, to prevent the half-hitch from
working loose ; this is probably as good and safe a way as
any.

The cast is now ready, for I do not advise the use of
more than two flies. If, however, the angler wishes to
employ three, the third fly, or second dropper, must be
attached three feet above the first dropper, and, in this
case, the leader should be nine feet long. But the begin-
ner will have all he can attend to with a six-feet leader
and two flies. The leader having been previously straight-
ened by soaking in water, or rubbing with India-rubber
(the former method is to be preferred), and attached to the
reel-line, the angler is now armed and equipped as the law
directs, and ready for

Casting the Fly.

Casting the artificial fly is performed by two principal
motions, a backward and a forward one. The former is
to throw the flies behind the angler, and the latter is to
project them forward and beyond. That is all there is

FLY-FISHING. 391

in it. These are the main principles involved, and the
first or backward motion is merely preparatory to the
second or forward one, the latter being the most im-
portant.

But the style and manner of making these two motions
are all-important; for upon the correct, skillful, and, I
might say, scientific performance of them, depends the
success of the angler. The main objects of the two mo-
tions are, first, to get the line and cast behind the angler
in a straight line, without lapping or kinking ; and, sec-
ond, to project the line forward without snapping off the
tail-fly, casting it perfectly straight, without confusion, and
causing the flies to alight before the line, without a splash,
and as lightly as the natural insect dropping into the water.
This can only be done by the novice, with a short line,
about the length of his rod, and he should not attempt a
longer cast until he is perfect in this. When he can lay
out his short line perfectly straight before him, w^ithout a
splash, every time, he can then venture further.

But we are getting along too fast; we must go back to
first principles — the two motions.

The backward and forward movements are each made
in about the same length of time, but while the former is
a single movement, the latter is a double one ; that is, it is
divided into two motions, or parts ; though these two for-
ward motions are made in the same length of time as the
backward movement.

I will now try to explain these movements more ex-
plicitly, with the aid of the annexed cuts and diagrams.

The prospective fly-fisher having his rod, reel and cast
in readiness, stands near the bank of the stream, with a
clear space of fifteen or twenty feet behind him. Having

392

BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

FJA--FI.S1IIN(;. rf93

the line about the length of his rod, to begin witli, he
takes the hook of the tail-fiy between his left thumb and
forefinger and stretches the line taut; then, by waving
the rod slightly backward over the left shoulder, and at
the same time releasing his hold of the tail-fly, the line
straightens out behind him, the right elbow meantime
being held close to the body, as the backward movement
is made with the wrist and forearm entirely. The position
of the right hand during this portion of the cast is with
said hand grasping the rod just above the reel (the reel
being at the extreme butt, and on the under side of the
rod), and with the reel and palm of the hand toward the
angler, the thumb looking toward his right shoulder (see
figure 1).

When the line and leader are on a straight line behind
him, which the beginner must learn to judge and time ex-
actly, without looking behind him, he brings the rod for-
ward with a gradually increasing rate of speed, until the
rod is slightly in advance of him, say at an angle of fifteen
degrees off the perpendicular; then, for the first time, the
right elbow leaves the body, and, at the same time, the
rod is turned in the hand in the opposite direction (see
figure 2) ; that is, with the back of the hand toward the
angler, so that, at the end of the cast, the reel is below the
rod, while the back of the hand is upward, and, without
stopping the motion of the rod, the right arm is projected
forward to its full extent, and on a line with the shoulder
(see figure 3). This is the second part or motion of the
forward movement, and consists in merely following the
direction of the flies with the tip of the rod, so as to ease
their rapid flight, and allow them to descend without con-
fusion, and to settle upon the water noiselessly, and with-

394 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

out a splash. Thus we see that the backward movement
is in one time and one motion, and the forward movement
in one time and two motions, as the military have it, or
according to the following formula of time:

1. J = 2. («) J (6) J.

No. 1 represents the backward throw, in one motion, in
the time of a half note. No. 2 represents the forward
cast, in one time and two motions, a and 6, in the time
of two quarter notes. This is 'not to be understood as
fisliing by note, but the relative time of making the dif-
ferent motions in casting the fly approaches very nearly
that of the formula given. This is better explained by a
reference to the foregoing cuts; where figure 1 repre-
sents the backward throw, and figure 2 represents the
first part or motion («), and figure 3 the second part or mo-
tion (6), of the forward cast.

Sometimes these movements are made straight back-
ward and forward over either shoulder, or over the head;
but the best way is to make the backward movement over
the left shoulder, and the forward over the right shoulder,
the line thus describing an oval or parabola. By this
method the flies are not so apt to be whipped off", and it is,
withal, more graceful, more en regie.

The following diagram represents the arcs described by
the tip of the rod and the flies :

FLY-FISHING. 395

0 is supposed to be the anj!:ler, and, as -sve arc looking
down upon him from above, it represents his hat. Tlie
dark line, a 6 c, is the curve described by the tip of the
rod in the backward and forward movements of the cast —
back over the left shoulder, and forward over the right;
while the dotted curved line, d e f, is the approximate arc
described by the tail-fly, leaving the water at d, and alight-
ing, by a lengthened cast, at /.

By studying these diagrams in connection with the in-
structions given, the theory and mechanical principles will
soon be mastered by the novice. He should then, by as-
siduous and patient endeavor, make a practical application
of these principles, and become tolerably proficient in cast-
ing the fly, before he attempts to venture near the haunts
of the Bass.

But various ways of casting come into play at certain
times, and under peculiar circumstances; and the rod will
be held more or less to one side or the other, or more ver-
tically, as particular circumstances or emergencies demand.
For the novice must remember that there are trees and
bushes, and rocks and winds, to contend with in fly-fish-
ing; and, moreover, as he becomes proficient, he will
choose his own style of casting, for no two anglers cast
the fly exactly alike.

However, all methods of overhead casting are but varia-
tions or modifications of the mode just described; and
the particular circumstances calling for them wall natu-
rally suggest their necessity, use, or advantages to the
angler as he becomes more expert, and gains in knowl-
edge by practical experience. It is hardly necessary,
therefore, or even advisable, to allude more particularly
to other ways of overhead casting, as it would, in my

396 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

opinion, tend more to confuse than to enlighten the be^
ginner.

Then there is the sidewise cast, where the line is not
thrown behind the angler at all, but to one side or the
other. This style of casting is practiced with a short
line, on very narrow waters, or where the banks of the
stream are thickly clothed with tall grass or bushes, and
where there is not sufficient clear space for throwing the
line behind the angler.

In this mode of casting, the angler, instead of facing
the stream, turns one side or the other toward the water,
and casts by throwing the line landward, over the grass or
bushes, to the right or left, as the case niay be ; and, when
the line has unfolded in a straight line, to cast toward the
water by an opposite sidewise cast. In all other respects,
the management of the cast must approach, as nearly as
])0ssil)le, the regular overhead cast.

Another method of casting that occasionally comes into
play is " switching." This mode is very useful where
high banks, trees or bushes render the overhead and side-
wise cast impracticable; though it admits of but a very
short line being used, shorter than in the sidewise cast.

Switching is performed by raising the arm and rod to
their fullest extent, vertically, thus drawing the flies close
to, and in front of, the angler; then, by a quick, smart,
circling motion of the rod, the flies are projected forward,
or laterally, as the angler may wish. The forward motion
is much like striking with a whip or switch, and is more
easily imagined than described.

We \\'\\\ now presume that the tyro has perfected him-
self in casting a short line, and can throw his tail-fly into
his hat nearly every time at a distance of fifteen feet ; and

FLY-FISHING. SO"/

right here let me say, beware of the angling brag who
declares that he can cast his tail-fly into a glass of water
at fifty feet every time! It can't be clone. Also fight
shy of the long-range fisher who insists that he can cast
a hundred feet with ease ! It can't be done. The long-
est cast, with a single-handed rod. I ever saw, without
"loaded" flies, was eighty-one feet, and I believe the
longest on record is Seth Green's eighty-six feet; while
at the last (1880) tournament held by the New York State
Sportsman's Association, seventy feet won the first prize.
When the beginner can cast his fly into his hat, eight
times out of ten, at forty feet, he is a fly-fisher; and, so
far as casting is concerned, a good one.

But let us go back to our tyro, who has now become
proficient with the short line, for it is time to lengthen
his cast, which is done in this way: After casting and rov-
ing his flies on the surfiice by zigzag, jerky motions, to the
left or right, and without provoking a rise, he pulls off
from the reel with the left hand three or four feet of line ;
and, lifting his rod, slowly at first, by a gradually increas-
ing motion, lifts the leader and flies, and throws them
backward over the left shoulder, as before described. The
resistance of the leader and flies, before they leave the
water, takes the extra length of line from the rod, and it
is unfolded behind the angler into a straight line, when he
casts it forward over the right shoulder.

In this way the line is lengthened at every cast, if nec-
essary, until the maximum or desired distance is reached.
But the angler should never let his flies touch the ground
behind him ; but must so time the movement as to pro])el
the line forward at exactly the right moment to prevent
this.

398 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.'

Another caution : The angler should never attempt to
cast his flies by main strength, for this will accomplish
nothing: but confusion ; it takes but little force to retrieve
or cast the flies with a well-made, springy and pliant rod.
The rod, moreover, must never be carried back over the
shoulder to a distance exceeding an angle of fifteen degrees
off the perpendicular, for the backward tiirow is really ac-
complished by the time the rod is in a vertical position,
and this might be said, also, to a certain extent, in regard
to the forw^ard movement or cast proper; for by the time
the rod is fifteen degrees off" the perpendicular in the other
direction (in front), the main part of the cast is made, and
the second part of the forward movement is only to follow
the flies with the point of the rod, to ease their flight, as
before mentioned ; this latter part of the forward cast can
no more aid or extend the flight of the flies than "push-
ing" on the reins can increase the speed of your horse.

I have now, in the fewest words possible, and in the
simplest manner, endeavored to explain the " mystery " of
casting the fly, and I trust the beginner will be able to
understand it. It is almost impossible to describe the art
clearly and satisfactorily by mere words. One hour with
a good fly-fisher will teach the novice more than a hun-
dred written pages. I have purposely omitted many little
details of nicety and precision, which would only tend to
magnify the supposed difficulties of casting, and create
doubt, confusion, and a lack of confidence, in the mind of
the beginner in the noble art of fly-fishing.

General Instructions.

It is useless to cast for Black Bass from high elevations
near the water, as a bold bank, a projecting rock, a dam.

FLY-FISHING. 399

etc., under ordinary circumstances ; for the angler must
remember that the most commanding situation for seeing
the fish also furnishes the best facilities for being seen in
return, and vice versa. In fishing from a boat, it must be
kept in deep water, while long casts are made in-shore,
toward the feeding grounds. We should never fish with
the sun at our back, or in such a position as to throw the
shadow of our rod or })erson upon the water.

From what has been said in the chapter on the "condi-
tions governing the biting oTfish," it will be apparent that
it is absolutely necessary that there be a breeze sufficient
to ruffle the surface of the water. It is jjerfect folly for the
angler to cast his flies upon a smooth surface, if the water
is clear enough for fishing. A gale is better than no wind
at all, and it does not matter from what direction the wind
blows, if the condition and temperature of water are right.
A good breeze is the angler's best ally, for by rippling the
water it breaks the line of sight, to a great extent, between
him and the fish.

The ano;ler should endeavor to cast his flies as lightlv
as possible, causing them to settle as quietly as thistle-
down, and without a splash. After casting, the flies should
be skipped or trailed along the surfiice in slightly curving
lines, or by zigzag and tremulous movements, occasionally
allowing them to become submerged for several inches
near likely-looking spots. If the current is swift, allow
the flies to float naturally with it, at times, when they can
be skittered back again, or withdrawn for a new cast.
Two or three times are enough to cast over any one spot,
when a rise is not induced.

When Bass are biting eagerly and quickly, whip])ing the
stream is to be practiced, that is, the casts are to be often

400

BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

Fly-fishing— Landing the Bass.

FLY-FISHING. 401

and rapidly repeated, first to one side, then the other, al-
lowing: the flies to settle but a moment. In castinij and
manipulating the flies, the line must be ever taut ; for
often a Bass will thus hook himself, which he never does
with a slack line.

Steiking and Playing.

The angler should strike by sight, or by touch ; that is,
he should strike the moment he sees the rise ; for the Bass
has either got the fly in his mouth, has missed it, or has al-
ready ejected it, when the rise is seen ; it very seldom
happens that the rise is seen before the fly is reached by the
fish. The angler must also strike at the moment he feels
the slightest touch or tug from the fish, for often the Bass
takes the fly without any break at the surface, especially
if the flies are beneath the surface.

Striking is simply a twist of the wrist, or half-turn of
the rod, either upward or downward (upward with stiffish
rods, and downward with very willowy ones), which is suf-
ficient to set the hook if the rod and line maintain a proper
state of tension ; but when the careless angler has a slack
line, and, consequently, a lifeless rod, he must necessarily
strike by a long upward or side sweep of the rod, called
"yanking;" and should he succeed in hooking the fish,
the chances are that it will shake the hook out a^rain before
the slack can be reeled up.

The tip of the rod must always be held upward, so that

the rod constantly maintains a curve Avith the line ; and

never, under any circumstances must the rod point in the

direction of the flies after they reach the water, for this

allows the direct strain of the fish to come upon the line
34

402 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

or leader. When a Bass is hooked, he must be killed on
the rod; the rod must stand the brunt of the contest; the
more pliable and springy the rod, the less likelihood of its
breaking, for a stiff rod is more easily fractured than a
flexible one. Give the Bass more line only when he takes
it ; make him fight for every inch, and take it back when
you can; hold him by the spring of the rod, and do not
hesitate to turn the butt toward him to keej) him away from
weeds, rocks, snags, or other dangerous places; this will
bring him up with a round turn, and is called " giving
the butt."

Do n't be in a hurry to land him ; the longer he resists,
the better for your sport; take your time and only land
him when he is completely exhausted ; for if he is well
hooked, and the proper tension of rod and line maintained,
he can not get away ; on the other hand, if he is tenderly
hooked, the more gingerly he is handled the better.
Therefore, never be in a hurry, and never attempt to force
matters ; always keep a bent rod and taut line ; if the Bass
breaks water, the best plan is to lower the tip, so as to
slack the line, and immediately raise the rod and tighten
the line when he strikes the water again, for if he falls on
the tightened. line he is most sure to escape; this is one
of his most wily tricks.

Remarks, Hints, and Advice.

It has been doubted by some that the Black Bass will
rise to the fly, or at best that they arc uncertain in their
modes and times of doing so, as compared with the Brook
Trout. These doubts are mostly raised by those who an-
gle for the Black Bass in precisely the same way as for the

FLY-FISHING. 403

Brook Trout, upon the supposition that the two fish are
identical in habits and instincts. But while their habits
of feedino^ are verv simihir — both feeding on the bottom,
in midwater, or on the surface, on Crustacea, larvie, min-
nows, insects, etc. — they differ greatly in other habitual feat-
ures and idiosyncrasies.

The Black Bass will rise to the fly as readily, under any
and all conditions, as the Brook Trout, when fished for
understandingly, and under proper precautions. There are
times, seemingly favorable, when neither Bass nor Trout
will rise to the fly.

One reason why the Bass is thought to be uncertain in
rising to the fly is this : While he is fully as wary as the
Trout he is not so timid. A Trout darts incontinently
away at the first glimpse of the angler, and is seen no
more ; but the Bass will retire but a short distance, and
as often will stand his ground, and on balanced fins will
watch the angler vainly casting his "brown hackle" or
^' coachman " over him, perhaps laughing in his sleeve
(shoulder girdle) at his discomfiture. The truth of the
matter is, the Bass is not uncertain, but he is too knowing
to be deceived by his flies, so long as the angler is in
sight.

Fish are more suspicious regarding objects on the sur-
face of the water than of those beneath. I have often
demonstrated this, causing them to skurry away, hy hold-
ing a long stick immediately over them, above the surface;
while I could introduce the same stick underneath the
water and even prod a fish with it, without alarming it
much. This is why more caution is necessary in fly-fish-
ing than in bait-fishing ; the bait in one instance being on
the surface, and in the other, beneath. If a Black Bass, in

404 * BOOK OF THE HLACK BASS.

rusliing to the surface for tlie fly, sees the angler, he at
once stops in his course, and thenceforth the daintiest flies,
never so deftly thrown, will be cast in vain while the an-
gler remains in view.

In a recent issue of the London Field appeared an arti-
cle, written by the able editor of that valuable ])aper,
Francis Francis, Esq., on the frightening of Brook Trout
by the flashing and reflections of a varnished fly-rod,
when wildly waved by the angler in casting, and which, at
first sight, would seem to be plausible enough ; but upon
mature consideration, and with all due deference to so emi-
nent an authority as Mr. Francis, I am convinced that
there is not much in it, and that instead of proving the
matter he seems to be rather begging the question.

The tiieory of angling, like the theory of medicine, is
rather an uncertain subject, and opposite positions can be
taken and seemingly maintained upon almost any question
of either science, until the crucial test of practical experi-
ence proves their truth or falsity. The fact is, that fish
are not frightened by flashes of light or the reflections of
bright objects, but, on the contrary, are attracted by them;
any one who has ever fished by torchlight, or trolled with
a bright met;il spoon, can testify to this, and there is a
method of fishing practiced by the Chinese, by means of a
board painted white and attached to a boat at such an an-
gle as to reflect the light of the moon upon the water,
when the fish, attracted by this, jump upon the board as
the boat is moved along.

That fish are not much disturbed, if at all, by the flash-
ing of a polished fly-rod per se, can be easily proven by
any one who, being securely hid behind a clump of bushes,
can wave his rod as " wildly " as necessary without alarm-

FLY-FISHING. 405

ing thoni to an extent to frighten them away or pr(?vent
their biting; indeed, tlie nnnatural shaking or disturbanee
of a bush near the brink, by the careless angk'r, will
alarm the denizens of the stream more than the most highly-
varnished and brightly-mounted rod ever made, when
waved over the stream by an angler who keeps himself hid
from view ; and herein lies, to my mind, the key to this
whole matter.

It is the angler who scares the Trout, and not his rod;
and this probably applies with more force to the compara-
tively narrow and open streams of Great Britain than to
the more extensive waters of our own country ; this view
seems more probable in connection with the fact that Mr,
Francis advises casting sideways instead of overhead, which
method could only be practiced successfully on narrow
streams, for sideway casts are necessarily short ones, and
would not answer at all for most of our waters. There
are situations, however, when the sideway cast can be
used advantageously, and is used occasionally by all good
fly-fishers.

The main rules to be observed in fly-fishing I conceive
to be these : on narrow streams to keep entirely out of
sight, and on open waters to make long casts ; in either
case, the fish, not seeing the angler, will not be alarmed
at the flashing of the rod ; the finer the water the greater
the caution that must be used on the one hand, and the
longer must be the cast on the other.

Mr. Francis does not offer any remedy for the varnished
rod, but merely suggests that it might answer to paint it
sky-blue, or a dull, smoky tint, without polish ; but this,
I know, will not do. I have seen rods that had the var-
nish scraped off' and were painted a delicate pea-green, to

406 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

harmonize with the foliage of Trout streams, and I have
seen the bark left on alder, elm, and tamarack poles when
used in bait-fishing, but they were not more successful
than the varnished rod.

Split bamboo and other jointed rods must of necessity be
varnished to preserve their elasticity and beauty. Think
of a delicate split bamboo tip coated with sky-blue jiaint!
The very thought is heresy, and an offense against the
eternal fitness of things that would make even the spots
on a Brook Trout blush more deeply crimson. American
split bamboo rods are the finest made rods in the world,
and the numerous foreign orders received by the manufac-
turers fully attest this fact, and show, moreover, that tiiey
are duly appreciated abroad, as well as at home, highly
varnished and flashing though they be.

There is one feature of this subject that is peculiarly
gratifying to me, and I heartily thank Mr. Francis for tiie
article in question. It concedes the fact that fish, having
eyes, can see, and are not the near-sighted dupes that most
writers would have us believe ; this concession could not
be put in a stronger light than by the assertion that they
are frightened at the flashing of a varnished rod, and that
a rod, therefore, should be rendered as nearly invisible as
possible by painting it a sky-blue or cloud color. But if
this were done, what a quantity of brash wood and poor
workmanship, and what a multitude of sins of omission
and commission would this sky-blue mantle, like charity,
cover !

When fish are frightened at a fishing-rod at all, it is
when its shadow is suddenly cast upon the water — which
all prudent anglers are very careful to avoid doing, espe-
cially on small streams — and, viewed in this light, a sky-

FLY-FISHING. 407

blue rod has not oven a fancied advantage over the most
highly-polished one.

The most important rule, then, to be observed, first, last,
and all the time in fly-fishing, is: Keep out of sig/it of the
fish; this is the first and great injunction; "and the sec-
ond is like unto it:" Keep as quiet and motionless as pos-
sible. "On these two" laws depends all your success in
fly-fishing. Let your necessary movements be deliberate
and methodical, avoiding all quick, sudden, or energetic
motions. Fish see and hear much better than we give
them credit fi^r. To keep out of the fish's sight we must
be screened by such natural objects as bushes, trees, rocks,
etc., or by keeping well back from the brink and making
long casts. In wading the stream it is also necessary to
make long casts. The latter is the best plan of fishing a
stream, as the angler, being so near the water, is not so apt
to be seen.

It is best, always, to fish down stream, even with the
wind against one, for fish always lie with head up stream,
and will be more apt to see your flies. The current will,
moreover, take your flies down stream, and so keep your
line taut. It is also easier to wade down, than up stream.
Many other reasons might be given, but these will be suffi-
cient. Cast just below ripples and rapids, over eddies and
pools, along the edges of weed patches, under projecting
banks and shelving rocks, near submerged trees or drift-
wood, off gravelly shoals, isolated rocks and long points or
spurs of land ; it is useless to fish long, deep, still reaches
of water.

The most favorable time for fly-fishing for Black Bass
is during the last hours of the day, from sundown until
dark, and also on bright moonlight evenings. On streams,

408 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

an hour or two following sunrise, in warm weather, is
quite favorable. On dark, cloudy, and cold days the
middle hours are best. Bright sunny days, especially in
hot weather, are not favorable to fly-fishing, except in
quite cool, shady, and breezy situations. In short, the best
conditions are a mellow or dusky light, a good breeze, and
translucent water; while the most unfavorable are a bright
sun, a still atmosphere, and a smooth and glassy surface,
with the water either very fine or very turbid.

And now, in concluding this portion of my subject, let
me say a parting word to the beginner: Cast a straight
line; keep it taut; strike upon sight, or touch; kill
your fish on the rod ; take your time. It is better to cast
a short line well, than a long one bunglingly. Should
you cast your fly into a branch of a tree overhead, or into
a bush behind you, or miss your fish in striking, or lose
him when hooked, or crack oif your tail-fly, or slip into a
hole up to your armpits — keep your temper; above all
things don't swear, for he that swears will catch no fish.
Remember, yours is the gentle art, and a fly-fisher should
be a gentleman.

CHAPTER XXII.

CASTING THE MINNOW.

"And as to the rest tluit concerns this sort of angling, I shall wholly refer
you to Mr. Walton's direction, who is undoubtedly the best angler with a
minnow in England." — Charles Cotton.

Next to fly-fishing, casting the minnow is the most ar-
tistic mode of angling for the Bhick Bass. To obtain all
of the pleasnre and sport embodied in this style of fishing,
none but the best and most approved tackle should be em-
ployed, which should approach, in its general features of
elegance and lightness, the implements used in fly-fishing.

A faithful study of the conformation, habits, and idiosyn-
crasies of e:ame fish should be the first consideration of the
true angler; though the average angler usually contents
himself with a superficial knowledge of the ways and means
of capturing and killing the finny tribe, a big catch being
the height of his piscatorial ambition. While good tackle
is essential to success, a thorough knowledge of the habits
of the fish is a sine qua non, without which no one can be-
come an expert and successful angler.

Apropos of this might be mentioned the old and hack-
neyed story of the rustic youth wdth alder pole, twine string,
and worm bait, and the soi-disant angler with split bamboo
and well-filled fly-book, who indulged in a day's fishing
on the same stream, with the result of a " big string " for
35 (4093

410 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

tlie boy, and one poor fingerling for the disgusted sports-
man. The boy understood the "true inwardness" of the
Trout, in wliich matter the discomfited citizen was lament-
ably ignorant, and relied entirely upon his splendid rig for
success.

Where Black Bass are plentiful, as in the quiet ponds
and lakes of "Western New York, Northern Indiana, Mich-
igan, Wisconsin, and Minnesota, at the Thousand Islands
of the St. Lawrence, and in the extreme South, the merest
tyro, who can throw his bait twenty feet from the boat,
can, when the Bass are in a biting mood, show a big catch,
though he may necessarily have failed to land two out of
every three fish hooked. But on small rivers, where the
angler casts to the right and left and across the stream
from the banks, and while wading the shallows and bars,
and the Bass are shy, educated, and fully up in a knowl-
edge of the stream in its windings, eddies, pools, and rapids,
the highest skill and a thorough knowledge of the habits
of the fish are indispensable to a full creel; and this, at the
same time, constitutes the pleasure and perfection of Black
Bass aup-ling;.

But bear in mind, that sticking the butt of a long rod
in the bank, and then, while reclining under the shade of
some umbrageous tree, enjoying a pipe or the latest novel
while waiting an hour for a bite, is not angling, but
simply loafing, and attempting to obtain Bass under false
pretenses.

Casting the minnow is quite an art, as much so as casting
the fly ; indeed, I think there are more good fly casters
than good casters of the live minnow. Mediocrity in both
methods of angling is readily acquired, but great excellence
and perfect skill are rarely attained in either. The two

CASTING THE MTNNOAV. 411

methods are essentially and practically different, and re-
quire implements and tools commensurate with tliis dilFer-
cnce.

While the fly-rod is willowy and long, the minnow-rod
is short and comparatively stiff; the fly-line is rather heavy
and of large caliber as compared with the minnow-line,
which should be as fine and light as possible, consistent
with strength. The artificial fly is cast by the weight of
the fly-line and suppleness of the rod, while the weight of
the bait, and swivel or sinker, give the necessary momentum
for casting the minnow. The fly is usually cast overhead,
directly in front of the angler, while the minnow can only
be cast, for any great distance, to one side or the other, or
obliquely, by underhand casting.

MiNNOAv Tackle.

The Minnow Rod. — The rod for casting the live min-
now should be shorter and stiffer than the fly-rod, but of
about the same relative weight; for it, like the fly-rod, is
a single-handed rod. It should be from eight to nine feet
long. Eight and a quarter feet is the standard length
that I have advocated for many years, though the manu-
facturers, in order to suit all tastes, now make this style
of rod from eight to nine and a half feet long. It should
weigh from eight to ten ounces, no less and no more. It
should be well balanced, with a stiffish back, to insure good
casting, but pliable enough to respond to the slightest
movement of the fish. Most of the bend and play should
be in the upper two-thirds of the rod, which bend should
be a true arch, and not a horse-shoe curve, as is often seen
in a poorly-constructed and weak-backed rod. The best

412 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

material for a rod of this character is an ash butt and
lancewood second and third pieces, the latter being usually
known as the tip. The reel-seat should be from six to
eight inches from the extreme butt, and no more, for this
rod must be used with the hand alone, and should not ex-
tend under the elbow for support, like the old-fashioned
long and heavy rods. It should have light standing guides
instead of rings.

The Reel. — The multiplying reel is the only one
adapted to casting the minnow, and it should be the very
best one made. It should run as rapidly and smoothly as
possible, and multiply from two to four times. The best
is the "Frankfort" reel — sometimes variously styled
" Meek," " Milam," or " Kentucky " reel — though the
very best of other good makers will answer well.

The improved Black Bass reels of Abbey & Imbrie, and
Conroy, Bissett & Malleson, referred to in the chapter on
reels, are excellent implements.

The Reel Line. — First and foremost among the suit-
able lines is the smallest size, G, or No. 5, plaited raw silk
line. It should be braided hard and close, and tinted or
parti-colored. Where the Bass are exceptionally large,
size F, or No. 4, may be used, though the smaller or finer
the line the better, for a gut leader can not be used in
casting the minnow, and longer casts can be made with
the finest lines. The proper length for a reel-line is fifty
yards.

The boiled silk braided line is next best, but it is not so
closely plaited, usually, as the raw silk-line, and conse-
quently absorbs more water, which is detrimental to casting.
When it is as hard braided as the raw silk-line it is about
as good.

CASTING THE MINNOW. 413

Next in order is the braided linen line ; the smallest size,
G, or No, 5, is the only size to be nsed, and that is rather
large.

The last, though with some not the least, in point of
merit, is the relaid Japanese sea-grass (so-called) line,
which is made of raw silk, and in some respects is a better
line than any mentioned, being of smaller caliber, very
hard twisted, and absorbing less water when new. But
being a twisted line, it is apt to kink where much casting
is practiced; were it not for this detestable quality it would
rank all other lines for bait fishing, as the smallest size,
No. 1, is just the right caliber. I am trying to induce the
manufacturers to braid a line of this same size, especially
for Black Bass angling, and shall probably succeed.

Twisted silk, linen, or cotton lines should never be used
in this mode of angling, as their kinking propensities will
ruffle the temper of the mildest-mannered angler.

Hooks. — The hook beyond comparison, for Black Bass
fishing, is the Sproat. It is a true, central-draught hook,
and tempered just right. It has a short barb, with cutting
edges, which will go right through any part of a fish's
mouth. The next best, in the order named, are the
O'Shaughnessy, Dublin Bend, Cork Shape, and round
bend Carlisle (Aberdeen). These hooks are all numbered
about alike, and the most suitable sizes are Nos. 1, 1-0,
2-0, and 3-0. Hooks should be tied on gut-snells, single
or double, good single gut being best. Where pickerel
abound, the gimp-snell 'may be used.

Swivels. — A brass box swivel of the smallest size should
always be used, and often it will be heavy enough without
an additional sinker.

Sinkers. — Ringed sinkers, or Avhat is still better, the

414 BOOK OF THE ELACK BASS.

patent adjustable sinker, with spiral wire rings for readily
attaching and detaching to or from the line, are the only
kinds to use, when they are found necessary.

Floats. — The float should never be used in casting the
minnow if it can possibly be dispensed with. It is always
in the way, and long casts can not be made when it is em-
ployed. In still fishing it may be used, and with advan-
tage, especially where helgramites or crawfish are used as
bait. The patent adjustable float with spiral rings, is an
article of real merit, as it is well made and can be attached
or removed in a moment.

Rigging the Cast.

In rigging the cast for the minnow, the reel must be
placed underneath the rod, on a line with the guides.
Many anglers use the reel on top, but this is essentially
wrong. The weight of the reel naturally takes it under the
rod, where it balances better and enables the rod to be
held more steadily; the strain of the line also falls upon
the guides, which insures a more perfect working of the
rod. Both click and multiplying reels should always be
used underneath; they are intended to be so used, and it
will be found far the best way when one becomes accus-
tomed to this plan.

The reel then being underneath, the line is rove through
the guides and a box-swivel tied on the end; to the other
ring of the swivel is looped the snell of the hook. The
hook is then passed through the lower lip of a good-sized
minnow — from three to four iuches long — and out at the nos-
tril; or if the minnow is smaller, out at the socket of the
eye. If the minnow is carefully hooked, it will live a

CASTING THE MrNNOA\

415

comparatively long time. If a sinker be required in ad-
dition to the swivel, it should be placed a foot above it.

Making the Cast.

Now reel up the line until the sinker, or swivel, as the
case may be, is at the tip of the rod, and we are ready to
make a cast, which I will now endeavor to explain with
the aid of the annexed diagram and cuts :

In the diagram, A represents the angler ; we are sup-
posed to be looking down upon him from above, so that
only his hat and rod are visible. He is facing B. The
angler now wishes to make a cast to the left, X being the
objective point to which he desires to cast the minnow,
some twpnty yards distant. He grasps the rod immedi-
ately below the reel with the right hand, with the thumb
resting lightly but firmly upon the spool, to control the
rendering of the line; the right arm is extended down-
ward, slightly bent, with the elbow near the body, and
with the extreme butt of the rod nearly touching the right
hip; the thnml) and reel are upward, inclining slightly
toward the left; the tip of the rod, or rather the minnow,
just clears the ground or surface of the water; the position
of the rod is now in the direction of the line A C, inclin-

416

BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

bo

CASTING THE MINNOW. 417

ing toward tho ground or water, making an angle of about
30 dog. with the line of the shoulders, X Z (the inelination
of the rod is shown fully in figure 4) ; this is the situation
at the beginning of the east.

Now for the east: The angler turns his faee toward X,
the objective point, without turning his body; he now
inclines his body in the direction of C, advancing the right
foot and bending the right knee slightly, and makes a
sweeping cast from the right to the left, and from below
upward, across the body diagonally, until the rod-hand is
at the height of the left shoulder, and the arm and rod
extended in the direction of A D, with the tip of the rod
inclining u])ward, as shown in figure 5.

The movement of the right hand is almost in a straight
line from a point near the right hip to a point near the
left shoulder ; the motion in casting is steady, increasing
in swiftness toward the end of the cast, and ending with
the "pitching" of the bait — instead of a violent jerk —
somewhat similar to the straight underhand pitching of a
base-ball.

In making the cast, the right elbow should touch the
body, sweeping across it, and only leave it at the end of
the cast, making the forearm do the work. At the end o£
the cast, the reel and thumb are upward, and the rod forms
an angle of 30 deg. with the line of the shoulders X Z,
and the minnow, instead of following the direction of the
rod A D, as some might suppose, will, from the slight
curve described by the rod during the cast, diverge toward
the left, and drop at X, when the thumb should immedi-
ately stop the reel by an increased pressure.

Casting to the right is just the reverse of the above
proceeding. The angler being in the same position,

418

BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

bo

CASTING THE MINNOAV. 419

brings the right hand across, and touching the body, to a
point in front of the left hip, the thumb and reel upward,
but inclining toward the body, and the rod extending in
the direction of the line A D, with the tip downward, as
shown in figure G; he now turns his face in the direction
of the objective point Z, inclines his body and advances
his left foot in the direction of D ; and makes a cast from
left to right, from below upward, and ends the cast with
the right arm and rod fully extended in the direction of
the line A C, as shown in figure 7, while the minnow
takes its flight toward Z. This is a back-handed cast,
and is somewhat analogous to the pitching of a quoit.

In making either cast the body should sway slightly and
simultaneously with the rod arm, in the direction of the
cast, to add force and steadiness; but on no account must
the cast be made by " main strength," for it requires but
slight muscular exertion to cast forty yards; and on no
account must the rod be carried further toward the line
X Z than an angle of thirty degrees, otherwise the bait
will be thrown behind the angler. Particular care must
be taken to give the bait an upward impulse as it leaves
the rod.

The first cast that the beginner makes will be likely to
throw the bait behind him, for reasons just given. He
should, by all means, begin by making short casts, and
lengthen them as he perfects himself by experience in
manao'ino; the reel and controllino- the cast. While but a
few yards of line can be cast directly in front of the be-
ginner, he should practice casting at various angles with
the line X Z, to the left and right. He should avoid over-
head casting, for that is the pot-fisher's method of throw-
ing a bait, and is not only an awkward, but a very

420 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

inefficient style of casting the minnow, and must not be
practiced except where the reel is dispensed with, as in one
mode of still-fishing.

At the beginning of the cast the thumb presses firmly
upon the spool of the reel, until just before the tip of the
rod gains its greatest extent or elevation, when the press-
ure is to be slightly relieved, so as to permit the release
of the line, and allow the minnow to be projected in the
direction of the cast. The exact time to lessen the press-
ure of the thumb and start the minnow on its flight, is
almost a matter of intuition, which can hardly be ex-
plained ; however, the proper time is soon learned by
practice, in which event, the "wrinkle" comes to be per-
formed by the angler automatically, or, as it were, uncon-
sciously.

The entire cast must be made so steadily and so regu-
larlv, and the rod held so firmly at the end of the cast, as
to prevent entirely any undue swaying or bending of the
rod, in order that the line may follow the direction of the
minnow in its fliglit, smoothly and evenly, and untram-
meled and unretarded by any vibratory motions of the
rod. I trust I make myself understood here, for tliis is
the most essential, and, at the same time, the most difficult,
feature, or portion, of the cast to explain, or acquire.

The thumb must be thorouglily educated to control tho
rendering of the line during the cast, and this can only
be accomplished by continual and jxitient practice, in train-
ing the thumb to apply just the requisite amount of uni-
form pressure, to prevent the overrunning of the line, or
back-lashing of the spool.

The beginner should make up his mind, in the first place,
to keep his temper, and to exhibit no impatience at the

CASTING THE MINNOW. 421

frequent sli2)ping of his thumb, and the consequent snarl-
ing and tangling of his line. The more calmly and phi-
losophically he views these annoyances and perplexities,
the sooner will he overcome the difficulties and become
ail fait in the management of the reel. The best in-
struction I can give him is to make the pressure of the
thumb gentle, but firm and uniform, during the flight of
the minnow, and to stop the revolving spool the moment
the bait alights on the water, by a stronger pressure.

These directions are as brief, plain and explicit, as it is
possible to make them ; they embody the main principles
involved, and the novice, by a careful and practical appli-
cation of them, can, by perseverance, soon become a good
caster of the live minnow.

General Instructions.

If fishing from a boat, on a lake or large pond, the
angler proceeds in his boat on the outside, or deep water
side, of the fishing grounds, and casts in toward the feed-
ing grounds, the oarsman rowing along rapidly or slowly,
or holding the boat stationary, as circumstances demand.
The boat being in deep water the fish are not so apt to
see it, which is a great advantage. The angler can cast in
any direction and to any distance, greater or lesser, within
the length of his line, as he may desire. He can cast
astern and proceed as in trolling, or cast to either side, or
forward, and by reeling in the line keep the bait in mo-
tion. It can readily be imagined how expert casting has
so great an advantage over any other method of bait-
fishing, and that when once acquired it will never be
relinquished for any other mode.

422 BOOK OF THK BLACK BASS.

Bait-fishing— Playing the Bass.

CASTING THE MINNOW. 423

When a Bass is hooked the boatman bliould pull at
once for deep water, for the better management of the fish
and to prevent its taking refuge among weeds, rocks,
snags, etc. In deep water the lish has better play and
more room, and the angler, having fewer difficulties to en-
counter, enjoys more thoroughly the ensuing contest and
final capture and landing of his prey.

If fishing from the banks of a stream, the angler should
keep as near the level of the water as possible, or, still
better, he should wade the stream when practicable. He
should cast below the riffles, near gravelly bars, sub-
merged roots or snags, weed patches and projecting rocks
in the bed of the stream, and under shelving rocks on
the banks, etc. After striking a Bass, he should lead him
into deeper water if possible, or, at all events, away from
dangerous places.

After casting the minnow, and it alights at a favorable
spot, it should be left for a longer or a shorter time, depend-
ing on the nature of the water fished, and upon the
abundance, scarcity, and mood of the Bass. As the line
slackens, it should be slowly reeled until the entire line is
retrieved. Sometimes, when fish are plentiful and biting
eagerly, it is best to make frequent casts, reeling in rapidly
after each cast, especially in rather shallow water, so as to
give a rapid swimming motion to the bait.

When the Bass takes the bait, the angler should let him
have it from two to ten seconds, according to the mood of
the fish. If he bites eagerly and wickedly, the angler
may hook him at once ; but if he seems shy, off his feed,
and inclined to toy with the bait, let him have it a few
seconds, and give him line as he takes it, keeping the
thumb upon the spool as a drag, however, so as to feel

424

BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

Bait- fishing— Giving the Butt.

CASTING THE MINNOW. 425

every motion of the fish. At the proper time the angler
should check him by a stronger pressure of the thumb,
when, if the Bass pulls strongly and steadily, and seems
inclined to run away with the bait, he should be hooked at
once by a slight " twist of the wrist," but not by a violent
jerk, or by "yanking" the rod.

If, however, upon checking the Bass, he gives several
tugs or a succession of slight jerks, it is better to let him
run a few seconds longer, for he has the bait crosswise in
his mouth and does not feel the steel; finally, when he
pulls steadily, hook him as before described. The Bass
should never be given time to gorge, or swallow the bait.

From the time a Bass first "bites" until he is in the
landing-net, he should never be given an inch of slack
line, under any circumstances. The rod must be held by
the butt, with the thumb upon the reel, or, if the rod is
held in the left hand, the line must be held against the
rod, by the forefinger, which encircles it, and thus acts as
a drag. The Bass is, of course, hooked by the right, or
rod hand, and the rod is held in that hand so long so the
Bass is inclined to pull steadily, or take line; but as soon
as he shows a disposition to " let up," or turn toward the
angler, the rod must be taken in the other hand, so as to
leave the right hand free to use the reel. The Bass should
be made to feel, constantly, the spring of the rod, Avhich
should always maintain a curve, by the tip being held in an
elevated position. The Bass should fight for every inch
of lino, and the angler should take it again whenever pos-
sible* The fish must be killed on the rod.

Should the Bass break^ water, with a long line, merely

let the rod straighten as he falls back, so as to slacken the

line (but it should be recovered immediately when he
30

426 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

strikes the water), for if the Bass falls across a taut line
he is almost sure to tear the hook out. If he breaks
water with a short line, the rod may be elevated so as
to keep the line above him, following him back as he
falls into the water.

If there is danger of the Bass getting to the weeds,
or to the protection of snags, roots, rocks, etc., he must
be stopped at all hazards. If the rod is a good one, and
pliable, the angler must not hesitate to give him the butt ;
this will bring him up standing, with no danger to a first-
class rod; but if the rod is a stiff one, turning the butt to
him will be most sure to break it; in this case it is best
to keep the Bass away from dangerous places by. main
strength, and the natural bend of the rod. If fishing
from a boat, great caution must be used to prevent the
Bass from running under it, as he will be sure to do if he
has the opportunity ; and should he succeed, the rod must
be quickly passed around the stern or bow, and the thumb
at once released from the reel so as to allow the line to
run out as rapidly as possible, otherwise a broken rod is
the result.

AVhen the fish is thoroughly exhausted, he should be
landed, and not before. Most anglers attempt to land
their fish too soon, thus curtailing their sport and endan-
gering their tackle. The landing-net should be held
several inches beneath the surface of the water, and held
perfectlv still, when the angler should bring the fish over
it; then the net should be lifted quickly, and with one
motion. The angler must never, himself, nor allow his
assistant to, frighten the fish by lunging at it with the
net, in attempting to secure it. More fish are lost in
clumsy endeavors to land them, than in any other way.

CASTING THE MINNOW. 427

The angler should never be in too great a hurry to land
his fish; for if lie is well-hooked he can not gHit away,
while if he is hooked in a thin or weak part of the mouth,
there is a greater necessity that he should be gingerly
played and tenderly handled, until he is coniph'toly
"tuckered out," and turns up his belly to the sun. There
is never any thing gained by too great a hurry in Bass
fishing. On the contrary, "the more haste the less speed,"
is a maxim particularly applicable to this case.

In reeling in the line, whether playing a fish or re-
trieving the line, it should be guided on the spool of the
reel by the left middle finger, when the reel is underneath
the rod (as it always should be), or by the left thumb
when the reel is used on top ; it should be reeled on regu-
larly from left to right, and from right to left, like sewing-
cotton on a spool. This prevents that "bunching," or
piling, and the subsequent tangling and snarling of the
line, so common with beginners and careless anglers. It
is just as easy to reel the line correctly, and in regular
and uniform coils or turns, as to bunch it, if the novice
begins right; after the habit is once acquired, he does it
automatically or mechanically.

CHAPTER XXIII.

STILL-FJSHING.

"And if you rove for a Perch witli a minnow, then it is best to be alive,
you sticking your lioolc tlirough his back-fin; or a ininnow witli tlie hook
in his upper lip, and letting him swiin up and down, about mid-water
or a little lower, and you still keeping liim to about that depth by a
cork." — IZAAK Walton.

Still-fishing is the most universal mode of a no-ling;
for the Bhtck Bass. As the name implies, it consists in
throwing in the baited hook, and waiting patiently for "a
bite," the angler, meanwhile, keeping himself and rod as
still as possible. Fly-fishing is surface fishing; easting
the minnow is both surface and mid-water fishing; while
still-fishing combines mid-water and bottom fishing. In
fly-fishing and casting the minnow the bait is kept in
pretty constant motion, while in still-fishing the bait is
left to itself, or "still," for a longer or shorter time.
Still-fishing on streams is best practiced from the banks,
while on lakes or large ponds a boat is necessary.

Tackle.

Still-fishing is often ])racticed without a reel, and some-
times M'ithout a rod, a hand-line, merely, being used.
When no reel is employed, the rod should be quite long
and light ; the best being a cane ])ole, from twelve to fif-
teen feet in length. When the reel is used (as it always
(428)

STILL-FISHING. 429

oiifjht to be) the rod recommeiided for casting tlie minnow
is tlie best, though most still-fishers prefer a longer rod,
say from ten to twelve feet, as they are not })roticient in
casting.

The length of the line for still-fishing depends upon the
character of the rod. Where no reel is employed, it should
be of about the same length as the rod; when the angler
uses a reel, but is indilferent at casting, a line of twentv-
five yards is sufficient; but Avhcn the regular minnow-rod
is used by a good caster, fifty yards, as in casting the
minnow, should be used. The line in each instance beintr
the same as recommended for casting the minnow, except
where no reel is used, when the smallest size twisted silk
line, iNo. 1, is the best.

Still-fishers usually employ the float and sinker, and
they may be used or not, according to circumstances;
though one of the chiefest delights of the still-fisher is to
watch the maneuvers of his float, ^yhere the stream is
shallow and full of snags, or the bottom covered with moss
or grass, a float is necessary ; and where the current is
quite swift, or the water deej), a sinker must be used to
keep the bait beneath the surface.

Baits and Baiting.

While a minnow is the best bait for casting, other baits,
as the helgramite, crawfish, frog, cricket, grasshopper, etc.,
are as good, and sometimes better, for still-fishing. As a\
rule, the bait that is the most plentiful in the waters fished,
will be found the most successful. The helgramite is a
capital bait, cither early or late in the season, when the
Bass are on the ripples or in shallow water. It is a flat,

430 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

dark, repulsive-looking worm, some two or three inches
long, and a half-inch wide (the larva of the horned cory-
dalis), and is found under bowlders, flat stones, decaying
timbers, etc., in shallow streams. It is variously called
helgramite, dobson, hellion, kill-devil, grampus, crawler,
etc., and is best hooked by passing the hook under the
cap covering the neck, from behind forward, bringing the'
hook out next to the head.

The crawfish, especially when casting its shell — when it
is called "peeler" or "shedder" — is a good bait. In its
usual state, it is best hooked through the tail ; peelers can
be hooked through the head or body. Grasshoppers,
crickets, frogs, etc., are used ^vith varying success in still-
fishing, and sometimes the humble " wum."

General Instructions.

As the still-fisher never casts his bait very far, it is
highly important that he keep as still and motionless as
possible; and, if in a boat, must avoid striking the same
with his feet, his rod, or the oars, as such sounds are heard
very distinctly by the fish. He should fish toward tlie
sun, so as to keep his shado.w behind him. He should
keep his line as taut as possible, with his thumb always
upon the spool of the reel (if he uses one), and as the line
becomes slack, should reel it in.

In fishing a lake or pond, the still-fisher anchors his
boat in a favorable spot, which should be in rather deep
water, just off a shoal or bar, ledge of rocks, or point of
land, or near beds of rushes or lily-pads, so as to fish
between the boat and the feeding-grounds, that is, be-
tween deep and shalhjw water, and near enough to cast

STILL-FISHrN(}. 431

his bait quite up to the haunts of the Bass, above-
mentioned, whenever necessary.

If his minnows are lively and strong;, and carcfuHy
hooked, it is advisable not to make frequent easts, but
rather to suffer the bait to remain, so long as it keeps
in motion, for a lively minnow will attract a Bass any-
where within thirty feet, in tolerably clear water. If
helo-ramites or crawfish are used for bait, thev must be
kept gently moving, at times, by the rod.

The management of hooking, playing, and landing a
Bass is just the same as described in the preceding chap-
ter, except where a reel is not used, in which case the
Bass should be killed on the rod, all the same, though
the angler must use a great deal of judgment in man-
aging his rod, to thoroughly enjoy the sport, which is
considerable where the rod is long, slender, and light.

He should lead his fish, at once, into deep water, where
he must be held until tired out. He should be kept in
mid-water, not suffered to go to the bottom, nor encour-
aged to approach the surface. He should lead him to
and fro, to the left and right, whenever possible, for by
keeping the fish in constant motion it soon tires him out,
and subserves, to some extent, the purposes and uses of a
reel.

In still-fishing a stream, the angler should stand, or sit,
as near the level of the water as possible, never fishing
from a bold bank or other elevation, unless well screened
from the observation of the fish. He should keep quiet
and still, when he may possibly be mistaken for a stump
or other inanimate object. He should leave his bait in
the water as long as possible, only moving it occasionally,
by slow, cautious and gentle manipulations, and in every

432 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

other respect remember that he is "still-fisliing," and
govern himself accordingly; for too much caution can not
be exercised in this mode of angling.

The noisy "fishing party," which indulges in loud talk-
ing, shouting, and laughter, and has a "good time" gen-
erally, no doubt thoroughly enjoys itself in its own way,
but wall take but few fish; it is the " lone fisherman " who
is always successful, for obvious reasons.

CHAPTER XXIV.

TKOLLING.

"And then j-on are to know that your minnow must be so put on your
hook that it must turn round when 'tis drawn against the stream.— Izaak
Walton.

Trolling with the Rod.

Trolling with the rod, and with the artificial fly, the
live minnow, or the spoon for bait, is capital sport ; and is
a very popular style of angling in the lakes and lakelets
of the North-west. It is more en regie than still-fishing,
and is, besides, more exciting sport, possessing advantages
over the latter method in several respects.

The angler can fish with a long line, even though he be
indifferent at casting; for, as the boat moves along, the
line can be pulled off from the reel, yard by yard, with
the hand, while the resistance of the bait, or leader, in the
water, takes it from the rod. The bait, being in constant
motion, is more likely to be seen and taken by the fish
than in still-fishing ; while the great length of line takes
the bait so far from the boat as to remove or quiet any
suspicions or ap})rchensions of danger on the part of the
wily Bass.

Then the boat, not being anchored, as in still-fishing,

the boatman can favor the angler in many ways when

playing or landing his fish. Then, again, in moving over

so much and so great a variety of ground, the angler is

37 ' " (43.3)

434 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

more apt to find where the Bass are feeding, and tlius to
know just the character of the ground and depth of water
to try successfully on each particular occasion. And, lastly,
it secures a constant change of location, and adds enough of
the spice of variety to satisfy the most impatient angler.

The minnow casting-rod, previously described, is the
one best adapted to this or any other mode of bait-
fishing, though any light and pliable rod, not exceeding
ten or eleven feet in length, will answer, and even the fly-
rod can be utilized here. A stiff and unyielding rod
should not be used, for the sudden and violent " bite "
of the Bass, in this method of angling, with the rod ever
bent, and taut line, would be very likely to break it, un-
less the rod were of the hoop-pole pattern.

The only lines admissible here are the braided raw or
boiled silk-line, and the braided linen-line ; twisted lines
can not be used at all on account of their kinking. The
caliber should be a size larger than recommended for cast-
ing the minnow, which, in silk-lines, w'ould be sizes E, or
Ko. 3, and F, or No. 4: and, in linen lines, F, or No. 4,
and G, or No. 5. The length should be from fifty to
seventy-five yards.

It is best to use a leader from six to nine feet long, with
either flies, the minnow, or spoon. The float should not
be used. One or two swivels are necessary; but, usually,
no sinker is required.

If artificial flies are used for the troll, a gut-leader, nine
feet in length, and three flies, may be employed ; or, a
twelve-feet leader, and four flies, as preferred by some.
The flies should be placed about three feet apart on the
leader. An attractive combination of varieties in the flies
should be obseryed.

TROLLING. 435

A very good assortment would be a '•(jieneral Hooker"
for the tail-fly, a "Coachman" for the first dropper, a
"Grizzly King" next, and, lastly, if four are used, an
"Abbey." Another good troll would be a "Professor"
for tail-fly, a "Montreal" next, the third a "Brown
Hackle," and, last, a "Ferguson." But, of course, other
flies will be used by the angler, as found more attractive
and killing ; for different waters often require different
flies, in trolling, as well as in fly-fishing.

Three split shot. No. 1, should be placed at equal dis-
tances along the leader, so as to keep the flies submerged
from one to three feet below the surface. The boat should
be propelled quite slowly in trolling with flies, so as to
permit their sinking to the proper depth, and, likewise,
to enable them to be easily seen by the fish.

If the first Bass hooked takes an upper fly, by playing
him judiciously and cautiously, one, or even two, addi-
tional Bass may often be induced to take the lower flies,
though I do not advise this plan with a light rod; one at
a time will afford better sport, and last much longer.

If a spoon-bait is to be the lure, only the smallest
sizes, as fly-spoons, or trout-spoons, should be employed.
Usually no sinker will be needed ; but one or two swivels
should always be used — one next to the spoon, and the
other several feet above it. In trolling with the spoon,
the boat should move at a sufficient rate of speed to cause
the spoon to revolve rapidly a foot or two beneath the sur-
face of the water.

In trolling with the live minnow, but one iiook should
be used. Give a wide berth to the English abominations
known as spinning-tackle, gangs, traces, etc., consisting of
from three to a dozen hooks arranged in groups of three,

436 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

■with single hooks for impaling the minnow ; these contriv-
ances are intended for Pike-fishing, and should never be
used for the Black Bass. A single hook is sufficient for
all purposes. The minnow may be booked through the
lips; or, perhaps, the best way for trolling, is to pass the
hook through the mouth and out at the gill-opening, then
carry it back and insert it just behind the doi'sal fin — a
needle, armed with a strong thread, is then passed through
the lips of the minnow, and ^tightly tied to the snell, this
obviates the use of the lip-hook; a minnow will spin as
well hooked in this way, as with the most approved spin-
ning-tackle.

The angler, with his boatman, in trolling with the rod,
proceeds in a boat over the fishing-grounds, with from
thirty to fitly yards of line out. The rod must be held
with the tip elevated, so as to kee]) the rod constantly
curved, and -the thumb should be aj)]ilied to the spool of
the reel, so as to be ready at any moment for the violent
rush of the Bass, for he bites very wickedly at the moving
bait. The fish must l)e hooked at once, though he often
fastens himself. If the angler has a long line out, he
must reel in his fish as soon as possible, until he has him
within proper bounds, when he can kill him at his leisure.
The manipulation of the Bass after he is hooked is just
the same as described in the chapter on casting the min-
now, to which the reader is referred.

It is useless to troll in deep water, far from shore; it
should only be practiced in water from three to ten feet
deep, following the trend of the shore, as far as possible,
Avhere the proper conditions exist, which are given iu a
previous chapter.

trolling. 437

Trolling with the Hand-link,

TroUini^ with the hand-line is a very tume and simjile
mode ot" angling; in fact, is the most sim})le method prac-
ticed, there being no skill, wliatever, required in luring or
in manipulating the Bass after he is hooked. It is a very
qtjestionable style of sport, at best; and, considered in this
light, is exceedingly flat, and savors strongly of pot-fishing.
It is indulged in on lakes, ponds and broad rivers, mostly
by boys, and those unfortunates who can not, or will not,
learn to handle the rod.

With a good breeze and a fast-sailing boat, trolling for
Blue Fish, Sea Trout, Spanish Mackerel, and other marine
fishes, with hand-line and squid, is fine sport; but, on the
bosom of a quiet lake, trolling for Black Bass, with liand-
liue and spoon, is a cruel pastime, and a wanton destruc-
tion of a noble fish. It is only excusable when in camp-
ing out, without suitable tackle, and when, like the boy
digging at the tenantless woodchuck hole, one is "out of
meat," which, in Southern parlance, constitutes "'a ground-
hog case," in which event, perhaps, the end justifies the
means.

The necessary tackle for this mode of angling consists
of a strong hand-line of linen or cotton, from fifty to
seventy-five yards long; braided lines are to be preferred,
as they do not kink. The line should be large enough to
prevent cutting the hands, and, at the same time, to with-
stand the dead strain of a lively fish. Sizes C, or No. 2,
and D, or No. 3, are the best and most suitable.

Any of the numerous revolving spoon-baits, or spinners,
will answer with or without the so-called "fly," or tuft of
feathers, or braid; for the bright metal spoon is what lures

438 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

the Bass, and it can not be made more attractive for hand-
trolling by tiie addition of feathers, braid, etc.

Abbey & Imbrie's New Fluted Spoon, No. 4; J. H,
Mann's Perfect Revolving, No. 20, Oval, No. 16, Kidney,
No. G|, and Egg, No. 3^ ; and L. S. Hill's Improved
Spoon, Nos. IJ and 2, are all excellent trol ling-baits for
hand-lines.

The ordinary original tin or brass spoon, with single
hook soldered on, is about as good as any of the later
inventions. A single hook is certainly preferable to the
groups of two or three, usually attached to spoon-baits;
the latter often being crushed or broken by the jaws of a
large fish.

Small spoons are more successful than large ones, for
Black Bass. In the absence of a spoon-bait, the flooj' of
the mouth of the Pickerel, cut into the semblance of a fish,
is tough, white and glistening, and is a good substitute; a
similar strij), cut from the belly or side of a fish, also
answers a good purpose. One or two swivels should
always be used with trolling-bait ; a sinker is seldom nec-
essary.

With this simple outfit, early in the season, before the
aquatic weeds and grasses are fully grown, this mode of
fishing is quite successful. The method of procedure is
as follows:

The angler sits in the stern of the boat, and, while the
oarsman rows at a moderate rate of speed along and over
the feeding-ground, he runs oif forty to sixty yards
of line; the spoon, revolving gracefully beneath the sur-
face, proves an effective lure. A violent jerk on the line
announces the fact that an unfortunate Bass lias " hooked
himself;" often he will leap into the air, vainly endeavor-

TROLLING. 439

ing to shake the glittering deception from his jaws, but
his eiforts usually only serve to fix the several hooks more
firmly in his mouth, and, provided he does not crush them,
or tear them out and escape, he is "hauled in," hand over
hand, by muscle and main strength, without a single
chance for his life — dragged to an ignoble death by a
hand-line and spoon. This may do for the Pickerel ;
but, oh, gentle reader, an' you love me, spare the Bass
this indignity !

CHAPTER XXV.

SKITTERING AND BOBBING.

" Then, if you get a grasshopper, put it on your hook, with your line about
two yards long; standing beliind a bush or tree, where his hole is, and make
your bait stir up and down on the top of the water."— Izaak Walton.

Skittering.

"Skittering" is best practiced with a long and light
natural cane-rod, from twelve to fifteen feet long, and a
strong line of nearly the same length. No reel is used,
for, like " bobbing," this mode of fishing is only success-
ful in grassy and weedy situations, where the water is
comparatively shallow, notably, in the lagoons and bayous
of the extreme South, and where the fish must be landed
as soon as possible after being hooked. To the end of
the line is attached a small trout-spoon, or the skitter-
ing-spoon, which is still smaller, being the smallest re-
volving spoon made.

The modus opevdndi is as follows : The angler stands in
the bow of the boat, which is paddled or poled by the
boatman as noiselessly as possible, just outside of or along
the channels of clear water, among the patches of rushes,
lily-pads or bonnets. The angler, by means of the long
rod and short line, skitters or skips the spoon along the
surface of the water with a jerky or vibratory motion,
(440)

SKITTERING AND HOI'.IJING. 441

causing it to spin and glance close up to the edges of the
weeds, where it is viciously seized by the Bass, who has
been lying in wait among the water lettuce, or under the
broad pads of the water-lily, for just such an opportu-
nity.

The angler has now no time to loose, but must rapidly
draw the Bass along the surface of the water to th(! boat,
into which he must be lifted at once, for he is as good as
gone if he gets below the surface, among the weeds ; nor
must the Bass be allowed to leap into the air with so short
a line, but he must be dragged quickly along the surface,
with his head above the the water, until the line can be
taken hold of close to the hook, or the finger hooked in
the gill-opening, and the fish dextrously lifted over the
side of the boat.

In such situations, skittering is exciting sport, and is
not without its attractions. The bright glancing spoon,
the expert and skillful management of the rod, the mighty
rush and splash of the Bass as he snaps up the shining
bauble, and his subsequent lashing and floundering as he
is irresistibly drawn toward the boat, vainly endeavoring
to get either in or out of the water, and the final adroit
manner of landing him, go far toward making this a legiti-
mate sport, as it undoubtedly is, in the localities mentioned,
inasmuch as reel-fishing can not be practiced for reasons
before given.

Bobbing.

"Bobbing" is another style of angling peculiar to the
section of country just mentioned, and though it can not
be regarded as so artistic or legitimate, it is far more kill-

442 BOOK OF TPIE BLACK BASS.

ing than skittering. It is a mode of fishing especially
adapted to the waters of the Gulf States, where it is much
practiced. The implements for bobbing are few and sim-
ple, consisting merely of a strong rod from ten to twenty
feet in length, two or three feet of stout line, and the
" bob," heretofore described in Chapter XVII.

I can not describe this method of ano^lins^ better than
to quote from Bartram, who wrote of the " Trout " (Black-
Bass) of Florida and the way of taking them with the
bob, in 1764, as follows: —

"They are taken witli a hook and line, but without anv
bait. Two people are in a little canoe, one sitting in the
stern to steer, and the other near the bow, having a rod
ten or twelve feet in length, to one end of which is tied a
string line, about twenty inches in length, to which is
fastened three large hooks, back to back. These are fixed
very securely, and tied with the white hair of a deer's tail,
shreds of a red garter, and some parti-colored feathers, all
which form a tuft or tassel nearly as large as one's fist,
and entirely cover and conceal the hooks ; that is called a
*' bob." The steersman paddles softly, and proceeds slowly
along shore ; he now ingeniously swings the bob back-
wards and forwards, just above the surface and sometimes
tips the water with it, when the unfortunate cheated Trout
instantly springs from under the reeds and seizes the ex-
l)osed prey."

I have many times seen the bob used in Florida just as
described by Bartram more than a century ago, and it is
just as effective to-day as it was then. If there is any
thing in the notion of certain angling authorities, that fish
after a time become educated or accustomed to certain ar-
tificial baits, as flies, etc. — becoming first suspicious, and

SKITTERING AND BOBBING. 443

finally refusing them altogether, tlien the Black Bass of
Florida must be very dull of comprehension, must have
sadly neglected their educational privileges and opportuni-
ties, or else the said " theory," like many another from
" across the herring pond," originated in the fertile brain
of some unfortunate angler to account for an empty
creel.

CHAPTER XXVI.

CONCLUDING EEMARKS.

There is a right way, and, per contra, a wrong way, to
do every thing. I have endeavored in the preceding pages
to point out the right way of doing things pertaining to an-
gling, but I feel that my duty would be but half accom-
plished, did I not give some advice relative to the proper
use and care of fishing tackle, before taking leave of my
reader. I am the more impelled to do this from the fact
that I have seen so many fine and elegant rods, reels, and
lines improvidently ruined, through sheer carelessness, in
most instances, and through ignorance; in others.

Every angler should, himself, look after the welfare of
his tackle, and not trust it to the care of guides, boatmen,
or servants. Every true angler should do this, con amove,
as every true sportsman should, himself, clean his gun and
feed his dogs at the close of a day's shooting, or every true
sailor, himself, snug and stow his boat when the anchor is
dropped. As a good w^orkman is known by his jealous
care and skillful use of his tools, so is a good angler known
by the way he uses and handles his tackle, a good sports-
man by the way he uses and handles his gun and dogs,
and a good sailor by the way he uses and handles his boat.
It is, therefore, essential that the new hand should know
the right way, to avoid the wrong way ; not only on the
( 444 )

rONCLUDIXG REMARKS. 445

score of the fitness of thiiii^s, hut on the score of economy, for
more tackle is liopelessly mined hy a lack of proper care,
than by the most severe, though judicious, use.

Cake of the Rod.

The right way to "joint up," or put a rod together, is
to take the joints, or pieces, from the case,' remove the
plugs, or stoppers, and put them in the pocket; then attach
the reel to the butt, and see that it fits firmly and securely,
and will not be likely to work loose ; next wipe the male,
or inside ferrules of the joints, to insure their being dry,
clean, and bright; then the tip and second piece are to
be put together first, and the butt last. Be particular in
"jointing U])," to ])lace the standing guides, or rings, on a
straight line with the reel (there arc usually small marks
or punctures on the male and female ferrules as a guide),
and in fitting the joints, do so by inserting the smaller, or
male ferrule into the larger, or female ferrule, and push
home firmly, but gently, and be very careful to avoid a
twisting, or screwing motion, especially with split bamboo
rods, ibr this is not only liable to warp the ferrules, but
also to separate the strips of such a rod. After the rod is
properly jointed up, place the butt end carefully on the
ground, reeve the line through the guides, or rings, and
bring it down and tie it to one of the bars of the reel by a
single bow-knot, until ready to attach the cast of flies, or
the swivel and hook.

The icrovff way to joint up a rod, and I will describe
it as I have seen it done, many times, is to put the butt
and second })iece together first; then drop the butt end on
the ground and shove it to one side, or behind you, and

446 BOOK OF THE BT^ACK BASS.

then put the tip on — the rod swaying and bending, in the
meantime, rendering this somewhat difficult to do, but
which is finally accomplished by twisting or screwing it
on, the butt boring a hole in the ground, the while — and
in case no one has stej)ped on your rod (which I have
seen done more than once), hold the rod perpendicularly,
and settle tlie joints by tamping the butt-end on a stone, or
piece of wood. The reel is yet to be adjusted ; to do which
you may either rest the tip on the ground in front (using
it as a boring instrument in this instance), or hold the rod
horizontally with the butt against the pit of the stomach,
to the great danger of some one stumbling over your rod,
or of your striking it against a tree or rock while endeav-
oring to ship your reel ; and yet — " tell it not in Gath " —
I have seen this very scene played over and over again
by those who called themselves anglers ; and so they were,
in the aggregate, or on the whole, Ijut not in detail. To
hold the rod across the body, sitting or standing, or per-
pendicularly, while adjusting the reel, is just as awkward
and unsafe.

Remember, then, to remove the plugs and put them in
the pocket — you will have them then whenever you unjoint
your rod, for the separated joints should never be left a
moment without the plugs in the female ferrules ; in this
way you will preserve the proper shape of the ferrules, and
your rod will always go together and come apart easily,
])rovidecl you keej) them clean and smooth. Then, ship
the reel; then put the smaller joints together first, and the
butt piece last.

The right way to " unjoint," or take apart, the rod (I
will spare the reader the infliction of a description of the
wrong way) is first to remove the leader, or swivel and

("()NCT,UDI.\(; RKMARKS. 447

hook, reel the line on the sjxjol slowly — T say slowlv, for
1 have seen the tip of" a rod 8iiai)[)e(l oil' while the wet
line was being reeled rai)idly, or in a hurry, by its eateh-
ing in one ot" the rings, or elinging in a coil around the
tip. The reel may next be unshipped, and the rod wiped
[)erfeotly dry; all sand, dirt, or fish-scales must be care-
I'ully rubbed off, and especially must the ferrules be
rendered clean and bright, to prevent any foreign substance?
getting into them when the rod is being unjointed, ibr tlic
smallest particle of grit or sand may spoil the fitting of the
rod. The rod must now be taken apart in the reverse
order in which it was ])ut together; the butt first, and the
smaller joints last; in unjointing, pull the joints aj)art by
using gentle and steady Ibrce, in a straight line, with the
hands close to the ferrules, when they will separate read-
ily. Be particular about this, for I have seen an angler
with the joint against his breast, his hands widely separa-
ted, pulling on the two pieces in a curved line, as if he
would bend the rod around his body, which proceeding
had a greater tendency to strain and warp the ferrules than
to separate them.

Having separated the joints of the rod, the plugs are
next to be inserted, and the reel unshipped. Examine
each joint, or piece, and if bent, or warped, straighten it
carefully, and place them in the case, large end down; in
tying the case, tie it loosely, otherwise you may bend the
small joints. Never put your rod away in a damp case;
should it be wet, dry it thoroughly after reaching home.

When the rod is })nt together, never stand it in a corner,
or lean it with the tip resting against any thing ; better
lay it dow'n flat. In putting a rod away after the season,
it should be laid on a shelf, or in a flat box. It should

448 BOOK OF TIIK BLACK BASS.

be kept in a cool room, of uniform temperature, aud
never in a room heated by a i'urnaee or a stove. A drv
atmosphere will cause the joints to shrink, and the ferrules
to become loose, while a damp, or constantly changing at-
mosphere will cause them to twist and warp. The wrajipings
of the guides, rings, or hand-j)iece should be fre(pienllv
looked to,' when in use, antl the rod should be varnished
once or twice during the season. Coach varnish is good,
but the best, })erhai)s, is a saturated solution of shellac in al-
cohol ; it should be put on quite thin and evenly, and one or
two coats a[)plicd as may be needed, using a soft rag or
sponge; it soon dries and is perfectly wat('r|)roof. In
Izaak Walton's day rods were painted, and he gives minute
directions for preparing the sizing, the paint, and the nuui-
ner of applying them. Wood, to preserve its elasticity,
must be })rotectcd from the changes of the atmosphere.

Caiuo of the Reel.

A fine reel should receive as much care as a watch, so
far as this can be done, consistently, with its use. It should
never b<> laid on the sand or bare gi'ound, or cxposetl in
any way to favor the introduction of sand or grit into the
working jiarts. When uot in use it should be kept in a
box, or in a buckskin or chamois bag. At the beginning
and end of each season it should be carefully taken aj)art,
cleaned and oiled. After use, it should be always wiped
clean, and rubbed with an oiled rag or chamois skin.

A first-class reel will last an angler liis life-time, with
])roper care. Esj)ecially is a multiplying reel to be well
cared for, as it is more complicated, and has more gearing
than a click reel. The screw that holds the movable

CONCLUDING REMARKS, 449

handle to the crank .should be frequently noticed, to see
that it is firmly screwed in, otherwise it may come out in
casting, and both screw and handle be lost. On this ac-
count, this screw should never be oiled. The drag, alarm,
click — or by whatever name the "brake" of a multi])lying
reel may be known — should be used only when really nec-
essary, and as seldom as possible, for its frequent use wears
out the gearing of the reel.

See that the reel fits your rod perfectly and tightly, so
there will be no shaking, wabbling or coming loose during
a .severe .strain. If the reel-plate fits the rod too loosely,
place strips of parchment or card-board between the plate
of the reel and the groove of the rod, until the reel-
band will just .slip over the plate and hold it firmly.
If the reel-plate is too long, or too thick for the reel-.seat
of the rod, one or the other, or both, must be cut to fit ;
at all events, .see that your reel fits its seat firmly and
securely.

Always, if you can, u.se the reel " underneath," with the
handle to the right side, when reeling the line ; and always
turn the crank, in reeling, "away" from you, or in the
direction that the hands of a watch move. It may seem
unnecessary to mention this latter precaution, but I have
known it to be used the contrary way. When angling,
and the fly or bait is in the water, never, for a moment, lay
the rod down with a turn of the line around the crank of
the reel to .serve as a drag, for I have several times .seen
both rod and reel jerked overboard, and irretrieval)ly lost,
by just such inexcu.sable carelessness and stupidity, and
the .savage "bite" of a big fish.
38

450 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

Care of the Line.

The line should be thoroughly dried, always, after use.
This injunction is of the highest importance to the angler.
The entire line — not merely the portion that may have
been used — should be stretched between two trees, or
around pegs or nails driven up for the purpose, and ex-
posed to the sun and air; or, if at night, or if the day be
damp, it should be coiled around the back of a chair, and
placed near the fire. I can not impress the necessity of
this care too strongly on the beginner, for he will see so
many bad examples in those who ought to know better, but
who habitually put away the reel and wet line, to the ever-
lasting injury of both, because it is "too much trouble,"
or they are "too tired," to perform their bounden duty of
drying their lines; such men are "pot-fishers," and will
stand their rods, jointed, up in a corner all night. They
are on a par with the "pot-hunter" who, after a hard
day's tramp, permits his dogs to go supperless to bed, and
his gun to remain foul until morning.

Silk-lines are especially liable to mildew and rot if put
away damp or wet. Even waterproof lines should have a
good airing after use, or they will retain more or less damp-
ness, which, in the end, will work their destruction. After
drying a line, it should be rubbed, or reeled through a
woolen cloth, to remove any sand, grit or mildew. The
economy of this whole matter is one thing, and its ex-
pediency another; the value of a line may be a small
affair, but the breaking away of a good fish through a
defective line is a serious event. I once knew a good
fellow, but a poor angler, who, after a day's fishing, care-

CONCLUDING REMARKS. 451

fully dried a fifty-cent handkerchief for fear it would mil-
dew, while he left a three-dollar line, wet, on a twenty-
dollar reel and a thirty-dollar rod, standing in the corner
all night, because he was "going a-fishiiig again in the
morning."

The line should be thoroughly tested at the beginning
of the season, along its wliole length; and, if not found
fully up to the standard, should be discarded. It should
also be tested, occasionally, during the season ; in fact, the
better way is to test it always before using it. A line that
will sustain a dead weight of two pounds is strong enough,
if used with a pliant rod, and no other should be used
for Black Bass angling. By examining and testing the
line, always, before using it, it may save much morti-
fication, and many a fish. Though you can not loose a
fish by the breaking of the line — for, as Father Izaak
says, "no man can lose what he never had" — you can
lose your temper under such trying circumstances, which
is worse.

It would be useless to give any directions for water-
proofing lines, for it is a very difficult thing to do well;
and, moreover, prepared lines are now so cheaply and well
made, that it will pay the angler to buy them, if he wants
waterproof lines. If a line loses its color or tint, it can
be soaked in strong green tea, or a weak solution of indigo,
to be afterward well dried. To take the kink — so fir as it
can be done — out of laid or twisted lines, kt them out their
full length, and draw them loosely through tlie water, with-
out hook or sinker, from the stern of a boat as it is rowed
along; to be then stretched and dried. Never use a reel-
line with a knot in it; better, by far, make some boy happy
by giving it to him to catch Perch and "Sunnies."

452 book of the black bass.

Care of other Tackle.

Artificial flies should be closely looked after, summer
and winter, to preserve them from their worst enemy — the
moth. When put away for the winter, see that the fly-
book, or other receptacle, is perfectly clean; dust out the
leaves and pockets before putting the flies iu. See that
the flies are perfect in feather and snell ; reject all that
are much worn or seem moth-eaten, and those W'hich have
worn, frayed or otherwise imperfect snells. Place patch-
ouly, or gum camphor, wrapped in paper, in the pockets
and between the leaves, and inclose the whole, securely, in
cotton cloth.

Leaders should be carefully looked to, and only those
that are perfect retained. Imperfect ones may be utilized
for snells. Hooks should be kept sharpened, and free
from rust ; it is a good plan to wipe them, after use, with
an oiled rag; those that are rusted should be thrown
away. All tackle, in short, should be kept neat and
clean. It is a great pleasure to the angler to overhaul
his tools and tackle several times during the winter, to
see that every thing is all right. A little attention to
these details, and a following of the advice given in this
chapter, will more than pay the angler for the price of
this book, and may inculcate habits of order and econo-
my iu the novice, which will certainly })romote his pleas-
ure and happiness, and may save him many a dollar, if
applied to other walks in life.

Parting Words.
And now, in taking leave of the angler, or him who

CONCLUDING REMARKS. 453

has mentally resolved to beeomc an angler, and who has
followed me throngh the pages of this book — I do so with
regret; for it has been to me a labor of love to describe,
in my way, the methods and the delights of angling. It
has revived the memory of many happy hours, spread over
many years of checkered sunshine and shadow. The
bright pages in the book of memory stand out like the
flashing stream in the bright sunlight, while the sorrows
are hid in the deep shadows of its thickly-wooded glens.
"With thee conversing I forget all time." I live,
again, in scenes forever past, but never to be forgotten;
with rod and reel, again I wander along the upland streams,
among the cedars and chinkapins, and on the tide-waters
and salt-marshes of " My Maryland;" on Long Island's
sea-girt shore ; on the broad bosom of the St. Lawrence,
with its clusters of emerald isles, and on the charming
lakes of the Empire State; among the low green hills of
"the valley," the broom-sedge of the " Piedmont" section,
and on the broad bays of the "Old Dominion;" in the
coves and bights of the stormy Huron, the treacherous
Michigan, and the great inland sea, Superior, with its
crystal waters and great hills, crowned by the scarlet
banners of the mountain ash ; by the pine-clad rivers of
the " Old North State; " along the rocky streams of Ken-
tucky and Tennessee, flecked with the roseate tassels and
snowy disks of the redbud and dogwood ; among the
moss-covered rocks of the highland rapids, and under the
fragrant magnolia and feathery cypress of the silent estu-
aries of the "Palmetto State" and Georgia; on the clear,
sparkling lakelets of Wisconsin, glinting and dancing
amid fields of golden grain and broad green pastures, or
hiding in sheltered nooks, among the tamaracks and l)lack

454 BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS.

birches ; on the broad Susquehanna, the blue Juniata,
and among the hemlocks and maples of the Pennsylvania
hills; under the moss-draped live-oak and stately palm,
amid the orange-groves and myrtles, the mangrove and
sea-grape, on the sluggish streams, the broad lagoons, and
among the coral-reefs and sunny keys of Florida; under
the cool beeches and broad sycamore, the graceful ehns
and lofty cottonwood, of the quiet streams of Ohio, Indi-
ana, Illinois and Missouri; in the cold, crystal streams,
gliding among the everlasting hills, clothed with tangled
forests of balsam and pine, in Michigan. It has taken
me back even to the days of lang syne, when, with a bit
of cock's hackle, tied on a pin-hook, and a willow wand
for a rod, I first essayed the angler's art, and made sad
havoc among the minnows, chubs and "gudgeons."

I can only hope that the reader will experience as much
pleasure in perusing the foregoing pages, as I have done
in penning them ; and he will please remember, that,
though lie may differ with me on each and every page, I
will not quarrel with him; but, should we ever meet, as
brothers of the angle, in some sequestered spot on lake
or stream, we will, while smoking the pipe of peace, talk
the matter over cooly, calmly and dispassionately. But
he may rest assured, that, though all roads lead to Rome,
and though there are many ways of catching a Bass — I
have traveled some of the roads, and tried most of the
ways — if he faithfully follows in my footsteps, he will
never regret it, and never have cause to wish he had tried
the other way.

And now I leave you, with this injunction ; and, though
I have mentioned it before, I do so at parting, that it may
be the more impressive :

concluding remarks. 455

Always kill yotr fish as soon as taken from
the water; and ever be satisfied with a moder-
ate cue el.

By so doing, yuiir angling days will be happy, and your
sleep undisturbel ; and you, and I, and the Hsh we may
catch, can say, with the sweet singer of Israel :
"The lines are fallen to iiie in jleasant places."

THE END.

INDEX

SCIENTIFIC HISTORY OF THE BLACK BASS.

Agassiz, Prof. Louis, 15, 26, 34, 56.

Aplesion, 24, 35.

Aplites, 24, 35.

Baird & Girard, 15, 27, 34.

Black Bass, Scientific History of, 11.

Bodianus achigan, 13, 23, 33, 36, 45.

Bosc, M., 12, 22.

Call! urns, 24, 35, 42, 57.

Calliurus punctulatus, 13, 24, 25, 35.

Centrarchus fasciatus, 14, 15, 26,
27, 28.

Centrarchus ob-curus, 14. 26, 28, 33.

Chronological Catalogue of Species,
81.

Cichla, 25.

Ciehla fasciata, 13, 25, 33, 5G.

Cichla floridauM, 14, 25, 34.

Cichla minima, 14, 25, 33.

Cichla variabilis, 13, 44, 53, 57.

Cichla ohiensis, 14, 25, 33.

Contrasted Differential Characteris-
tics, 18.

Cope, Prof. E. D., 15, 28, 55.

Cuvier & Valenciennes, 14, 25, 34,
43, 50, 51.

DeKay, Dr. Jas. K, 14, 26, 33.

Dioplites, 24, 35.

Dioplites nuecensis, 15, 16, 29.

Dioplites salmoides, 16.

Dioplites treculii, 16, 34.
39

Dioplites variabilis, 16, 34.
Etheostoma, 24.
Etheostoma calliura, 24, 33.
Garlick, Dr. T., 15, 27, 34.
Generic characterizations, 68.

Aplesion Raf., 71.

Aplites Raf., 70.

Calliurus Raf., C8, 6fl.

lAoplites Girard, 72.

Dioplites Raf., 70.

Etheostoma Raf., 70.

Grysteini Bleeker, 75.

Grystes Agassiz, 72.

Grystes Cuvier & Valenciennes, 71.

Grystes Giintlier, 73.

Grystes Holbroolt, 72.

Grystes Swainson, 71.

Huro Bleeker, 75.

Huro Cuvier & Valenciennes, 71.

Huro Gun t her, 78.

Hu7-o Swainson, 71.

Lepomis Raf., 69.

Micropterus Bleeker, 75.

Micropterus Gill, 73.

Micropterus Jordan, 75.

Micropterus Lac, 68.

Micropterus V. & B., 76.

Nemocampsis Raf., 70.

Generic Description of Micropter-
us, 67.
Gill, Prof. Theo., 15, 18, 30, 34, 47, 48.
Girard, Dr. Chas., 15, 27.
Goode, Prof. G. Brown, 16, 30, 35.
Giinther, Dr. Albert, 28, 39.

(457)

458

INDEX TO SCIENTIFIC HISTORY.

Grystes, 14, 15, 22, 26, 27, 28, 35, 39.
Grystes fasciatns, 27, 28, 56.
Gry.stes megastoma, 15, 27, 28, 29, 34.
Grystes nigricans, 15, 27, 28, 56.
Grystes nobilis, 15, 27, 29, 34.
Grystes nuecensis, 15, 27, 28, 34.
Grystes salnioides, 14, 26, 28, 42, 49,

50, 53, 54, 56.
Grystes " salmoneus,'' 27, 57.
Holbrook, Dr. J. E., 45, 55.
Huro, 26, 35, 39.
Huro nigricans, 14, 25, 26, 28, 29,

30, 34, 49, 56.
Jordan, Prof. D. S., 16, 30, 31, 36,

39, 40, 50, 52, 54.
Kirtland, Dr., 15, 34.
Labre salmoide, 12, 62.
Labrus salmoides, 12, 22, 26, 29, 33,

36, 37, 43, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54.
Lacepede, Count, 11, 12, 22, 32, 51.
Le Labre salmoide, 62.
Lepomis, 24, 35.
Lepomis acbigan, 15.
Lepomis flexiiolaris, 13, 24, 33.
Lepomis pallida, 13, 24, 33, 45.
Lepomis notata, 13, 24, 33.
Lepomis salmonea, 13, 24, 33.
Lepomis trifasciata, 13, 24, 33.
Le Microptere dolomieu, 60.
Le Sueur, Chas. A., 13, 25, 33, 34.
INIicroptere dolomieu, 60.
Micropterus, 12, 16, 24, 29, 35, 38,

42, 46, 57, 65.
Micropterus, synonymy of, 65.
Micropterus acliigan, 15, 28.
Microj^terus dolomieu, 12, 16, 22,

33, 35, 38, 41, 45, 49, 50, 51, 52,

53, 54, 57, 84.
Micropterus dolomieu Lacepede,

synonymy of, 84.

Micropterus dolomieu Lac, Specific

descriptions of, 86.
Micropterus fasciatus, 28.
Micropterus floridanus, 16, 30, 35.
Micropterus nigricans, 15, 28, 30,

31, 34.
Micropterus nuecensis, 16, 38, 40.
Micropterus pallidus, 16, 30, 31, 35,

37, 40, 47.
Micropterus salmoides, 15, 16, 30,

31, 37, 38, 40, 47, 49, 57.
Micropterus salmoides, (Lac.) Hon-

shall, synonymy of, 110.
Micropterus salmoides var acbigan,

16, 36.
Micropterus salmoides lYij'salmoides,

16, 36.
Micropterus variabilis, 16, 38, 48.
Morphological, 28.
Morphology and Nomenclature, (io.
Nemocampsis, 24, 35.
Nomenclature, 29.
Nomenclature and morphology, 65.
Notes on Fishes from Florida, 39.
Notes on Typical Fishes in Paris

Museum, 41.
On Species Micropterus, Gill, 18.
Rafinesque, C. S., 13, 23, 33.
Scientific History of Black Bass, 11.
Scientific Names of Black Bass, 31.
Specific Descriptions of M. dolomieu

Lac, 8(5.
Bodianiis acliigan Raf., 87.
Calliurus punctulatus Raf., 87.
Centrarchus fasciatiut DeKay, 98.
Centrnrchus fasciatus Giinther, 105.
Cenlrarchus fasciatics Kirtland, 97.

. Cenlrarchus fasciatus Roosevelt, 105.
Cenlrarchus fasciatus Storer, 101.
Centrarchus fasciatics Thompson,

lo;?.

Centrarchus obscurus DeKay, 100.

INDEX TO scientifk; fiistouy.

459

Ceuirarclnis obxciiriifi Oiiiitlicr, 105.

CcntrarchiLs oh.scurus Storer, 101.

Cichlri/u.sciata Kirtlainl, 97.

Vichla fosciata Le Sueur, 90.

Ciclila Diiiiima Kirtlaud, 97.

Cicltlu minima Le Sueur, 93.

CicJila ohiensi.1 Kirtland, 97.

Cichla ohiensis Le Sueur, 92.

Etheoxloma calliiira Ual'., 90.

Grix/cs salmoiede.s Herbert, 104.

Grj/ste.i/d.scialus Agassiz, 101.

G rysles J'a.iciatiis Putnam, 106.

Gryxtcs vigricuns Garliv-k, 101.

Grystcs nigricans Norris, lOo.

Gryslcs salmoides Cuv. & Val., 93.

Gry.stes salmoidcs DeKay, 98.

Gryctes salmoides Storer, 101.

Grystcs salmoides Jardine, 9(3.

Grysirs salmonnides (iiinther, lOo.

L('po)nis achigan Gill, 103.

LcpomLs flcxuolaris Raf., 81S.

Lepomis notaia Raf., 89.

Lepomin salmonca Rat'., 89.

Lepomis tri/asciata Raf., 88.

Micropteriis dolomieu Lac, 86.

Microplcrus fanciatus Cope, 107.

Microptrrus salmoides Gill, 107.

Micropteriis salmoides Hallock, 109.

Microptertis salmoides Jordan, 109.

Micro]^terus salmoides llhlQi' & Lug-
ger, 108.
Synonyms of Micropterus, 65.
Synonyms of M. dolomieu Lac, 84.
Synonyms of M. salmoides (Lac.)
Henshall, 110.

Synopsis of Speeics of MicropterQ.s,
82.

Specific Descriptions of M. sal-
moides (Lac.) Henshall, ll;i.

Cic/da Jloridana Le Sneur, 113.
Dioplites nuccensis Girard, 12."), 126.
Grisles nigricans Herbert, 129.
Grysles megasloma Garliek, 12o.
Gry.slcs nigricans Agassiz, 121.
Grystcs nubilis Agassiz, 121.
Grystcs nuccensis Baird & (Jirard,

121.
G7-ystcs salmoides Holbrook, 122.
Grystcs salmoides Norris, 130.
Huro nigricans Cuv. &. Val., 114.
Hiiro nigricans DeKay, 119.
Huro nigricans Giintlier, 126.
Hiiro nigricans .lardino, llo.
Huro nigricans Uieliardsou, 116.
Huro nigricans Storer, 120.
Labrus salmoides Lac, 113.
Lepomis pallida Raf., 113.
Micropteriis nigricans Cope, 130.
Micropterus nigricans (iill, 130.
Micropterus paUidus Goode & Bean,

132.
3Iicropterits pallidiis Jordan, 132.

Vaillant, Dr. Leon, 38, 40, 48, 53.
Vaillant & Bocourt, 15, 16, 34,

37.
Varieties of small-mouthed Black

Bass, 16, 36.

INDEX TO LIFE HISTORY AND ANGLING.

Aerating water, 190.

Angling, as an art, 353.

Angling, best season for, 365.

Angling, effect of wind on, 366.

Angling, philosophy of, 349.

Angling, time of day for, 374.

Artificial baits, 307.

Artificial flies., 294.

Artificial flies, care of, 452.

Artificial insects, 315.

Artificial minnow.s, 315.

Asli, for rods, 197.

Baits and Baiting, 429.

Baits, artificial, 307.

Baits, natural, 318.

Bamboo, for rods, 200.

Bass, black, as a game fish, 377.

Basswood, for rods, 199.

Betliabara, for rods, 198.

Biting of fish. Conditions governing

the, 356.

Black Bass as a food fish, 185.

Black Bass as a game fish, 377.

Black Bass bait-rod.s, 207.

Black Bass fly-rod, 229.

Black Bass rods, difference in, 209.

Beat fishing, 421.

Bobbing, 441.

Bob, the, 317.

Breeding of Black Bass, 162.

Calcutta bamboo, 200.

Cane, 200.

Capture of the Bass, 382.

Care of lines, 450.
l4C0)

Care of reel, 448.

Care of I'od, 445.

Care of tackle, 452.

Cast, rigging the, 389, 414.

Casting-lines, 273.

Casting, overhead, 394.

Casting, sideways, 396.

Casting the fly, 390.

Casting the fly, general instructions,
398.

Casting the minnow, 409, 415.

Casting the minnow, general instruc-
tions, 421.

Causes of color in fishes, 147.

Cedar, for rods, 198.

Chubs, 318.

Clearing ring, .339.

Click reel, 238.

Coloration of the Black Bass, 145.

Coming Black Bass rod, 211.

Common names of Black Bass, 142.

Concluding remarks, 444.

Conditions governing the biting of
fish, 356.

Corks, 335.

Corydalis, horned, 321.

Crawfish, 323.

Creel, 329.

Crickets, 324.

Details of split bamboo rod, 228.

Depth of water for fishing, 362.

Differences in color, 136.

Differences in game qualities, 140.

Differences in fins, 138.

INDEX TO LIFE HISTORY.

461

Di (Terences in raoutli, 13S.

Differences in scales, 138.

Dimensions of the Ilensliall rod,
21.').

Disgorgers, 339.

Diversities in liabits, 139.

Dobson, 322.

Dublin bend book, 289.

E.vtinction of brook trout, 380.

Fisli basket, 329.

Fish hooks, 283.

Fishing lines, 252.

Fishing, perfect day for, 370.

Fishing reels, 237.

Fishing rods, 195.

Fishing, -still, 428.

Flies, artificial, 294.

Flies, rules for using, 296.

FloMts, 335, 414.

Fly-books, 327.

Fly, casting tlie, 390.

Fly, man:igeinent of, 399.

Fly-fishing, 387.

Fly-fishing, caution in, 403.

Fly-fishing, lines for, 205.

Fly-fisliing, main rules in, 405, 407.

Fly-fishing, remarks, hints and ad-
vice, 402.

Fly-fishing, rigging the cast, 389.

Fly-fishing, striking aud playing,
401.

Food and growth, 1G4.

Forest and Stream rod, 211.

Frogs, 324.

Game fish. Black Bass as a, 377.

General and Specific features, 135.

General instructions in casting the
fly, 398.

General instructions in casting the
ruinnow, 421.

Genernl instructions in still-fishing,

430.
Geographical distribution, 154.
Giving the butt, 402, 42G.
Grasslioppers, 324.
Greenheart, for rods, 198.
Growth of Bass 104, 107.
Gut, silkworm, 270.
Habitat of Black Bass, 135.
Habits of Black Bass, 162.
Hackle flies, 297.
Hand-lines for trolling, 267, 437.
Hatching, 162.
Hearing, sense of, 181.
Helgramite, 321.
Henshall rod, 212.
Hibernation, 170.
Hickory, for rods, 199.
Home-made rod, 221.
Hooks, 283.

Hooks for bait-fishing, 413.
Hooks, sproat. 287.
Hooks, various kinds of, 290.
Hooking minnows, 319.
liooking the bass, 423.
Hornbeam, for rods, 199.
How hooks are made, 283.
How lines are made 253.
How gut is made, 270.
Influence of age on color, 152.
Influence of breeding on color, 153.
Influence of food on color, 149.
Influence of light on color, 152.
Influence of water on color, 151.
Influence of season on color, 151.
Influences which govern the biting

of fish, 356.
Injunction, parting, 455.
Insects, artificial, 315.
Intelligence and special senses, 175.

462

INDEX TO LIFE HISTORY.

Introduction of Bass in new waters,

154.
Knots, 279.

Lancewood, for rods, 197.
Landing-nets, 331.
Landing the Bass, 402, 426.
Last injunction, 455.
Leaders, 273.

Lengthening the line in casting, 397.
Lines, care of, 450.
Lines, fishing, 252.
Lines, for bait-fishing, 258, 412.
Lines for fly-fisliing, 265.
Lines for hand-trolling, 267.
Lines, how made, 253.
Lines, rod, 263.
Mackintosh pants, 343.
Mahoe, for rods, 199.
Making the cast, 415.
Maple, for rods, 199.
Markings of Bass, 146.
Mateiials for rods, 196.
Minnows, 318.
Minnows, artificial, 315.
Minnows, care of, 320.
Minnow, casting the, 409.
Minnow nets, 333.
Minnow pails, 340.
Minnow rod, 212, 411.
Minnow seine, 333.
Minnow tackle, 411.
Multiplying reels, 243.
Natural baits 318.
Nests of Black Bass, 163.
Net, landing, 331.
Net, minnow, 333.
No reel, 250.

On stocking inland waters, 185.
Origin of split bamboo rod, 201.
Parting words, 452.

Perch, for bait, 319.
Philosophy of angling, 349.
Pigment cells, 148.
Playing, in bait-fishing, 425.
Playing, in fiy-fisiiing, 401.
Position of reel on rod, 251.
j Potomac, stocking the, 157.
Rapid growth of Bass, 165.
Reels, 237.
Reel, care of, 448.
Reel cases, 345.
Reel, click, 238.
Reel lines, bait fishing, 258.
Reel lines, fly-fishing, 265.
Reel, management of, 420.
Reel, multiplying, 243, 412.
Reel, position on rod, 251, 414, 449.
Reeling the line, 427.
Remarks, hints and advice in fly-

fishing, 402.
Rigging the cast in bait-fishing, 414.
Rigging the cast in fly-fishing, 389.
Rods, 195.
Rod, bait, 207.
Rod, care of, 445.
Rod, coming Ba«s, 211.
Rod, Cuvier Club, 224.
Rod, for casting tiie minnow, 411.
Rod, Forest and Stream, 211.
Rod, Henshall, 212.
Rod, home-made, 221.
Rod, how to joint, 445.
Rod lines, 263.
Rod, materials for, 196.
Rod, origin of split bamboo. 201.
Rod, split bamboo minnow, 225.
Rod, split bamboo, how to make,

226.
Rod, Welles, 223.
Rules for using flies. 296-

INDEX TO LIFE HlSTOliY,

4(33

Seine, minnow, 333.

Sense of Jiearing, ISl.

Sense of sight, 176.

Sliiners, 318.

Silkworm gut, 270.

Sinkers, 337, 413.

Skittering and bobbing, 440.

Snells, 275.

Snoods, 275.

Spawning, 162.

Split bamboo minnow rod, 225.

Split bamboo rod, origin of, 201.

Split bamboo rods, lengths and

weights of, 207.
Spoon-baits, 307, 435, 437.
Sproat hook, 287.
Still-fisiung, 428.
Still -fishing, baits for, 429.
Still-fishing, general instructions.

430.
Still-fishing, tackle, 428.
Stocking new waters, 187.
Stream fisliing, 423.
Striking, 401, 425.
Successful flies, 299.
Switching, 396.
Swivels 336, 413.

Tackle, care of, 452.

Tackle for still-fishing, 428.

Thuml)ing the reel, 420.

Transporting bass, 189.

Trolling, 433.

Trolling lines, 267.

Trolling Spoons, 307.

Trolling with flies, 434.

Trolling with hand-line, 437.

Trolling with fly -spoon, 439.

Trolling with minnow, 435.

Trolling with rod, 433.

Typical rod, 213.

Varnished rod, fish not frightened

by, 404.
Various causes aflfecting biting of

fish, 356.
Voracity of Black Bass.
Wading pants and stockings, 343.
Wasahba, for rods, 198.
Weight of Black Bass, 169.
Welles Rod, 223.
Whipping with the fly, 399.
Will the black bass rise to the fly,

403.
Words, parting, 452.

^^^^^

\\^V \ ^■%\'

%^\

xw^^^vtS

\,>.